MELDAS is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.

Other company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or
registered trademarks of the respective companies.
 Introduction

This manual is the alarm/parameter guide required to use the MITSUBISHI CNC700/70 Series.
This manual is prepared on the assumption that your machine is provided with all of the MITSUBISHI
CNC700/70 Series functions. Confirm the functions available for your NC before proceeding to operation
by referring to the specification issued by the machine tool builder.

Notes on Reading This Manual

(1) This manual explains general parameters as viewed from the NC.
For information about each machine tool, refer to manuals issued from the machine tool builder.
If the descriptions relating to "restrictions" and "allowable conditions" conflict between this manual
and the machine tool builder's instruction manual, the later has priority over the former.

(2) This manual is intended to contain as much descriptions as possible even about special operations.
The operations to which no reference is made in this manual should be considered impossible.

(3) The "special display unit" explained in this manual is the display unit incorporated by the machine
tool builder, and is not the MITSUBISHI standard display unit.

Caution

If the descriptions relating to the "restrictions" and "allowable conditions" conflict between this
manual and the machine tool builder’s instruction manual‚ the latter has priority over the former.

The operations to which no reference is made in this manual should be considered

"impossible".

This manual is complied on the assumption that your machine is provided with all optional
functions. Confirm the functions available for your machine before proceeding to operation by
referring to the specification issued by the machine tool builder.
In some NC system versions‚ there may be cases that different pictures appear on the screen‚
the machine operates in a different way or some function is not activated.
 Precautions for Safety
Always read the specifications issued by the machine tool builder, this manual, related manuals and attached
documents before installation, operation, programming, maintenance or inspection to ensure correct use.
Understand this numerical controller, safety items and cautions before using the unit.
This manual ranks the safety precautions into "DANGER", "WARNING" and "CAUTION".

When the user may be subject to imminent fatalities or major injuries if handling is
DANGER mistaken.

When the user may be subject to fatalities or major injuries if handling is mistaken.
WARNING

When the user may be subject to injuries or when physical damage may occur if
CAUTION handling is mistaken.

Note that even items ranked as " CAUTION", may lead to major results depending on the situation. In any
case, important information that must always be observed is described.

DANGER
Not applicable in this manual.

WARNING
Not applicable in this manual.

CAUTION
1. Items related to product and manual
If the descriptions relating to the "restrictions" and "allowable conditions" conflict between this
manual and the machine tool builder's instruction manual‚ the latter has priority over the former.
The operations to which no reference is made in this manual should be considered impossible.
This manual is complied on the assumption that your machine is provided with all optional
functions. Confirm the functions available for your machine before proceeding to operation by
referring to the specification issued by the machine tool builder.
In some NC system versions‚ there may be cases that different pictures appear on the screen‚
the machine operates in a different way on some function is not activated.

2. Items related to faults and abnormalities

If the battery low alarm is output, save the machining programs, tool data and parameters to an
input/output device, and then replace the battery. If the BATTERY alarm occurs, the machining
programs, tool data and parameters may be damaged. After replacing the battery, reload each
data item.
[Continued on next page]
 CAUTION [Continued]

3. Items related to maintenance

Do not replace the battery while the power is ON.
Do not short-circuit, charge, heat, incinerate or disassemble the battery.
Dispose of the spent battery according to local laws.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.
Do not pull the cables when connecting/disconnecting it.
Do not replace cooling fan while the power is ON.
Dispose of the replaced cooling fan according to the local laws.
Do not replace backlight while the power is ON.
Dispose of the spent backlights according to the local laws.
Do not touch backlight while the power is ON. Failure to observe this could result in electric shocks
due to high voltage.
Do not touch backlight while LCD panel is in use. Failure to observe this could result in burns.
LCD panel and backlight are made of glass, so do not apply impacts or pressure on them. Failure to
observe this could result in breakage.
Incorrect connections could cause the devices to damage. Connect the cable to the designated
connector.
Do not replace control units while the power is ON.
Do not replace display units while the power is ON.
Do not replace keyboard units while the power is ON.
Do not replace DX units while the power is ON.
Do not replace hard disk units while the power is ON.
Dispose of the replaced hard disk unit according to the local laws.
Hard disk unit is a precision device, so do not drop or apply strong impacts on it.

4. Items related to servo parameters and spindle parameters

Do not adjust or change the parameter settings greatly as operation could become unstable.
In the explanation on bits, set all bits not used, including blank bits, to "0".
 CONTENTS

I Procedures for Starting up

1. Procedures for Starting Up 700 Series ........................................................................................1
1.1 Outline of Hardware Configuration .........................................................................................1
1.2 Outline of Setup Procedures ..................................................................................................2
2. Procedures for Starting Up 70 Series ..........................................................................................3
2.1 Outline of Hardware Configuration .........................................................................................3
2.2 Outline of Setup Procedures ..................................................................................................4
3. Setup Details ...............................................................................................................................5
3.1 Connecting the Control Unit and Peripheral Devices .............................................................5
3.1.1 Setting the MDS-D/DH Series Rotary Switch and DIP Switch .........................................7
3.1.2 Setting the MDS-D-SVJ3/SPJ3 Series Rotary Switch......................................................9
3.2 Erasing the Backed up Data (SRAM) ...................................................................................10
3.3 Inputting the Parameters ......................................................................................................12
3.3.1 When There is No Parameter File..................................................................................12
3.3.2 When a Parameter File is Available ...............................................................................15
3.4 Formatting the File System...................................................................................................16
3.5 Inputting the Ladder Program...............................................................................................17
3.6 Credit System .......................................................................................................................19
3.7 Setting the Handy Terminal ..................................................................................................21
3.7.1 When Connecting with PC to Input ................................................................................21
3.7.2 When Connecting with NC to Input ................................................................................23
3.8 Adjustment of Dog-type Reference Position Return for Relative Position Detection............24
3.8.1 Dog-type Reference Position Return Operation.............................................................24
3.8.2 Dog-type Reference Position Return Adjustment Procedures .......................................25
3.9 Absolute Position Detection System.....................................................................................31
3.9.1 Dog-type Reference Position Return Operation.............................................................31
3.9.2 Starting up the Absolute Position Detection System ......................................................32
3.10 Auxiliary Axis Operation .....................................................................................................34
3.10.1 Preparations .................................................................................................................35
3.10.2 Absolute Position Initial Setting ....................................................................................36
3.10.3 Test Operation..............................................................................................................36
3.10.4 PLC device ...................................................................................................................37
3.10.5 Notes ............................................................................................................................40
3.11 Data Sampling ....................................................................................................................41
3.12 Data backup .......................................................................................................................41
3.13 M70 SETUP INSTALLER ...................................................................................................42
3.13.1 Compatible Data and CF Card Folder Configuration ...................................................42
3.13.2 Operation Method.........................................................................................................44
3.13.3 List of Error Messages .................................................................................................49
4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods.....................................................................................50
4.1 Durable Parts........................................................................................................................50
4.1.1 Control unit battery .........................................................................................................50
4.1.2 Cooling fan for control unit .............................................................................................52
4.1.3 Cooling fan for display unit (XP terminal) .......................................................................53
 4.1.4 Backlight .........................................................................................................................54
4.2 Unit .......................................................................................................................................57
4.2.1 Control Unit.....................................................................................................................57
4.2.2 Display Unit ....................................................................................................................59
4.2.3 Keyboard unit .................................................................................................................60
4.2.4 DX Unit ...........................................................................................................................62
4.2.5 Hard Disk Unit ................................................................................................................63
4.3 Compact Flash......................................................................................................................64
4.3.1 Control Unit Compact Flash ............................................................................................64
4.4 IC card ..................................................................................................................................65
4.4.1 Front IC Card ..................................................................................................................65
5. 70 Series H/W Replacement Methods .......................................................................................66
5.1 Durable Parts........................................................................................................................66
5.1.1 Control unit battery .........................................................................................................66
5.1.2 Backlight .........................................................................................................................68
5.2 Unit .......................................................................................................................................70
5.2.1 Control Unit.....................................................................................................................70
5.2.2 Display Unit ....................................................................................................................72
5.2.3 Keyboard unit .................................................................................................................73
5.2.4 DX Unit ...........................................................................................................................75
5.3 Compact Flash......................................................................................................................76
5.3.1 Front Compact Flash ......................................................................................................76
6. Cable ......................................................................................................................................77

II Explanation of Alarms
1. List of Alarms ...............................................................................................................................1
1.1 Operation Alarms....................................................................................................................1
1.2 Stop Codes .............................................................................................................................9
1.3 Servo/Spindle Alarms ...........................................................................................................13
1.4 MCP Alarm ...........................................................................................................................22
1.5 System Alarms......................................................................................................................32
1.6 Absolute Position Detection System Alarms.........................................................................38
1.7 Distance-coded Reference Scale Errors ..............................................................................41
1.8 Messages during Emergency Stop.......................................................................................42
1.9 Auxiliary Axis Alarms ............................................................................................................44
1.10 Computer Link Errors..........................................................................................................51
1.11 User PLC Alarms ................................................................................................................52
1.12 Network Service Errors.......................................................................................................54
2. Operation Messages..................................................................................................................55
2.1 Search-related Operation Messages ....................................................................................55
2.2 Graphic Display-related Operation Messages ......................................................................56
2.3 Variable (Common variables, local variables) - related Operation Messages ......................57
2.4 PLC Switch-related Operation Messages.............................................................................57
2.5 Compensation-related (Tool compensation, coordinate system offset)
Operation Messages.............................................................................................................57
 2.6 Data Input/Output-related Operation Messages...................................................................58
2.7 Parameter-related Operation Messages ..............................................................................61
2.8 Measurement-related (Workpiece, rotation) Operation Messages.......................................62
2.9 Tool (Tool registration, tool life) -related Operation Messages.............................................64
2.10 Editing-related Operation Messages ..................................................................................65
2.11 Diagnosis-related Operation Messages .............................................................................67
2.12 Maintenance-related Operation Messages.........................................................................68
2.13 Data Sampling-related Operation Messages......................................................................70
2.14 Absolute Position Detection-related Operation Messages .................................................71
2.15 System Setup-related Operation Messages.......................................................................71
2.16 Automatic Backup-related Operation Messages ................................................................72
2.17 Alarm History-related Operation Messages........................................................................72
2.18 Anshin-net-related Operation Messages ............................................................................73
2.19 Messages Related to Machine Tool Builder Network System............................................78
2.20 Other Operation Messages ................................................................................................80
3. Program Error ............................................................................................................................81
4. Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................100
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting ...........................................................................................100
4.1.1 Troubleshooting at Power ON ......................................................................................100
4.1.2 Troubleshooting for each alarm No. .............................................................................101
4.1.3 Troubleshooting for each warning No. .........................................................................126
4.1.4 Parameter numbers during initial parameter error .......................................................128
4.1.5 Troubleshooting the spindle system when there is no alarm or warning......................129

III Explanation of Parameters

1. Outline .........................................................................................................................................1
1.1 Screen Transition Chart..........................................................................................................1
1.2 Unit .........................................................................................................................................1
2. User Parameters..........................................................................................................................2
2.1 Process Parameters ...............................................................................................................2
2.2 Control Parameters ..............................................................................................................12
2.3 Axis Parameters ...................................................................................................................15
2.4 Operation Parameters ..........................................................................................................18
2.5 Barrier Data (For L system only) ..........................................................................................20
2.6 I/O Parameters .....................................................................................................................21
2.7 Ethernet Parameters ............................................................................................................24
2.8 Computer Link Parameters...................................................................................................26
2.9 Subprogram Storage Destination Parameters......................................................................28
2.10 Anshin-net Parameter 1......................................................................................................29
2.11 Machine Tool Builder Network System (MTB net) Parameter 1 .........................................29
3. Setting the Machine Parameters ...............................................................................................30
4. Base Specifications Parameters................................................................................................31
5. Axis Specifications Parameters .................................................................................................87
5.1 Axis Specifications Parameters ............................................................................................87
5.2 Zero Point Return Parameters..............................................................................................93
 5.3 Absolute Position Parameters ..............................................................................................96
5.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2 .........................................................................................98
6. Servo Parameters ....................................................................................................................107
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series...............................................................................................................107
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series ...........................................................................................................142
6.3 Supplement.........................................................................................................................172
6.3.1 D/A Output No. .............................................................................................................172
6.3.1.1 MDS-D/DH Series ..................................................................................................172
6.3.1.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series ..............................................................................................175
6.3.2 Electronic Gears ...........................................................................................................178
6.3.3 Lost Motion Compensation...........................................................................................179
7. Spindle Parameters .................................................................................................................180
7.1 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters............................................................................180
7.2 MDS-D/DH Series...............................................................................................................189
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series ...........................................................................................................215
7.4 Supplement.........................................................................................................................244
7.4.1 D/A Output Numbers ....................................................................................................244
7.4.1.1 MDS-D/DH Series ..................................................................................................244
7.4.1.2 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series ..............................................................................................248
8. Rotary Axis Configuration Parameters.....................................................................................252
9. Machine Error Compensation ..................................................................................................259
9.1 Function Outline..................................................................................................................259
9.2 Setting Compensation Data................................................................................................262
9.3 Example in Using a Linear Axis as the Base Axis ..............................................................264
9.4 Example in Using a Rotary Axis as the Base Axis..............................................................268
10. PLC Constants.......................................................................................................................269
10.1 PLC Timer.........................................................................................................................269
10.2 PLC Integrated Timer .......................................................................................................270
10.3 PLC Counter .....................................................................................................................270
10.4 PLC Constants..................................................................................................................271
10.5 Selecting the PLC Bit........................................................................................................271
11. Macro List ..............................................................................................................................274
12. Position Switch.......................................................................................................................276
12.1 Canceling the Position Switch ..........................................................................................278
13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter ........................................................................................................279
14. Open Parameter ....................................................................................................................298
15. CC-Link Parameter ................................................................................................................299
15.1 CC-Link Parameter 1 ........................................................................................................299
15.2 CC-Link Parameter 2 ........................................................................................................303
16. Anshin-net Parameter 2 / MTB-net Parameter 2....................................................................306
I Procedures for Starting Up
 1. Procedures for Starting Up 700 Series
1.1 Outline of Hardware Configuration

1. Procedures for Starting Up 700 Series

This section explains the normal work required to newly start up the MITSUBISHI CNC 700 Series.
Start up the system following these setup procedures.

1.1 Outline of Hardware Configuration

The names of the hardware used in this section's explanations are explained below.

Display unit Keyboard

Back Next IC card interface on front of Tab right INPUT

display unit

Control unit

LED1 LED2

SW1 CS1
F 0 1
E 2 Upper rotary switch
D 3
C 4
B 5
A 6
9 8 7
CS2
F 0 1 Lower rotary switch
E 2
D 3
C 4
B 5
A 6
9 8 7

I-1
 1. Procedures for Starting Up 700 Series
1.2 Outline of Setup Procedures

1.2 Outline of Setup Procedures

The procedures for setting up are explained with a flow chart.

Start

Connecting the control unit Refer to 3.1

and peripheral devices
Connect the control unit with the peripheral devices (servo/spindle drive,
auxiliary axis, remote I/O).
Erasing the backed up data (SRAM) Refer to 3.2

Erase the backed up data (SRAM).

Set CS1 to "0" and CS2 to "C" to erase the SRAM.
Turning the power ON again.

Inputting the parameters Refer to 3.3

If there is no parameter file, input the parameters with system setup or
by manual input operation.
If there is a parameter file, input the parameters with input/output screen.
Turning the power ON again.

Formatting the file system Refer to 3.4

Format the file system
Turning the power ON again.

Setting the data/time Refer to 700/70 Series Instruction Manual

Set the data and time in the integrated time display pop-up window.

Inputting the ladder program Refer to 3.5

Input the ladder program using "GX Developer" or "PLC Onboard".

Setting the credit system Refer to 3.6

This is necessary only if the credit system is valid.

Refer to 3.7
Setting the handy terminal
Input the customized data of handy terminal.
(Note) This is necessary only if the handy terminal is connected.
Inputting the machining program

End

Carry out the procedures below if necessary.

1 Adjustment of dog-type reference position return Refer to 3.8
2 Absolute position detection system Refer to 3.9
3 Auxiliary axis operation Refer to 3.10
4 Data sampling Refer to 3.11
5 Data backup Refer to 3.12

I-2
 2. Procedures for Starting Up 70 Series
2.1 Outline of Hardware Configuration

2. Procedures for Starting Up 70 Series

This section explains the normal work required to newly start up the MITSUBISHI CNC 70 Series.
Start up the system following these setup procedures.

2.1 Outline of Hardware Configuration

The names of the hardware used in this section's explanations are explained below.

Display unit Keyboard

Back Next CF card interface on front Tab right INPUT

of display unit

Control unit

Left rotary switch Right rotary switch

I-3
 2. Procedures for Starting Up 70 Series
2.2 Outline of Setup Procedures

2.2 Outline of Setup Procedures

The procedures for setting up are explained with a flow chart.

Start

Connecting the control unit Refer to 3.1

and peripheral devices
Connect the control unit with the peripheral devices (servo/spindle drive,
and remote I/O).
Refer to 3.2
Erasing the backed up data (SRAM)
Erase the backed up data (SRAM).
Set RSW1 to "0" and RSW2 to "C" to erase the SRAM.
Turning the power ON again.

Setting up with M70 SETUP INSTALLER Refer to 3.13

Install the language data, custom data and custom startup screen.
Turning the power ON again.

Inputting the parameters Refer to 3.3

If there is no parameter file, input the parameters with system setup or
by manual input operation.
If there is a parameter file, input the parameters with input/output screen.
Turning the power ON again.

Formatting the file system Refer to 3.4

Format the file system

Turning the power ON again.

Setting the data/time Refer to 700/70 Series Instruction Manual

Set the data and time in the integrated time display pop-up window.

Inputting the ladder program Refer to 3.5

Input the ladder program using "GX Developer".

Setting the credit system Refer to 3.6

This is necessary only if the credit system is valid.

Inputting the machining program

End

Carry out the procedures below if necessary.

1 Adjustment of dog-type reference position return Refer to 3.8
2 Absolute position detection system Refer to 3.9
3 Data sampling Refer to 3.11
4 Data backup Refer to 3.12

I-4
 3. Setup Details
3.1 Connecting the Control Unit and Peripheral Devices

3. Setup Details
3.1 Connecting the Control Unit and Peripheral Devices
Connect the control unit with the peripheral devices (servo/spindle drive, auxiliary axis, remote IO, handy
terminal).
Refer to "Mitsubishi CNC 700 Series Connection Manual" (IB-1500034), “Mitsubishi CNC 70 Series
Connection Manual” (IB-1500254), "MDS-D Specifications Manual" (IB-15000011), and "MDS-DH
Specifications Manual" (IB-1500003) for details.

(1) 700 Series

Operation panel I/O unit Control unit

Machine operation
panel Handy terminal
Serial connection (RS-232C)

Servo drive
Spindle drive

Handy terminal handle Auxiliary axis

I-5
 3. Setup Details
3.1 Connecting the Control Unit and Peripheral Devices

(2) 70 Series
Control unit

Servo drive
Spindle drive

Operation panel I/O unit

Serial communicaton
(RS-232C)

Handle

Machine operation
panel

I-6
 3. Setup Details
3.1 Connecting the Control Unit and Peripheral Devices

3.1.1 Setting the MDS-D/DH Series Rotary Switch and DIP Switch

(1) Rotary switch setting

Before turning on the power, the axis No. must be set with the rotary switch. The rotary switch
settings will be validated when the drive units are turned ON.

1st axis 2nd axis Spindle Power supply unit

Servo drive unit Servo drive unit Drive unit (MDS-D/DH-CV)
(MDS-D/DH-V1) (MDS-D/DH-V2) (MDS-D/DH-SP□)

L axis M axis 67 8 9A
67 8 9A 5 B
5 B 67 8 9A 67 8 9A 4 C
4 C 5 B 5 B 3 D
3 D 4 C 4 C 21 FE
21 FE 3 D 3 D 0
0 21 FE 21 FE 67 8 9A
0 0 5 B
4 C
3 D
21 FE
0

Details
Rotary switch setting MDS-D/DH-V1/V2/SP MDS-D/DH-CV
setting setting
0 1st axis Normal setting
1 2nd axis
2 3rd axis Setting prohibited
3 4th axis
External emergency stop valid
4 5th axis
(CN23 used)
5 6th axis
6 7th axis
7 8th axis
8 9th axis
9 10th axis
A 11th axis Setting prohibited
B 12th axis
C 13th axis
D 14th axis
E 15th axis
F 16th axis

I-7
3. Setup Details
3.1 Connecting the Control Unit and Peripheral Devices

(2) DIP switch setting

Setting the DIP switches is necessary prior to turning ON the power. Setting of the DIP switches at
the time of turning ON the power is validated. The DIP switches shall be as the standard setting (all
the switches OFF).

The switches are OFF when facing bottom as illustrated.

Turn this switch ON for the drive unit to which the terminator is connected.
Note that the switch must be turned OFF when the network configuration is valid.

M axis Setting unused axis Unused axis can be set by turning the switches ON.
When there is unused axis for the 2-axis drive unit,
L axis Setting unused axis set unused axis.

(Note) If the NC system is compatible with A1 or the prior version, set "1" to the base specifications
parameter "#1240 set12/bit4" and turn the last DIP switch ON.

I-8
 3. Setup Details
3.1 Connecting the Control Unit and Peripheral Devices

3.1.2 Setting the MDS-D-SVJ3/SPJ3 Series Rotary Switch

Before turning on the power, the axis No. must be set with the rotary switch. The rotary switch settings will
be validated when the drive units are turned ON.

Servo drive unit Spindle drive unit

(MDS-D-SVJ3) (MDS-D-SPJ3)

67 8 9A 67 8 9A
5 B 5 B
4 C 4 C
3 D 3 D
21 FE 21 FE
0 0

Setting the Details

rotary switch Setting the MDS-D-SVJ3/SPJ3
0 1st axis
1 2nd axis
2 3rd axis
3 4th axis
4 5th axis
5 6th axis
6 7th axis
7 8th axis
8 9th axis
9 10th axis
A 11th axis
B 12th axis
C 13th axis
D 14th axis
E 15th axis
F 16th axis

I-9
 3. Setup Details
3.2 Erasing the Backed up Data (SRAM)

3.2 Erasing the Backed up Data (SRAM)

Use the following procedure if the backed up data (SRAM) needs to be cleared after the control unit is
replaced, etc. (There is no influence on the option parameters even if the backup data is deleted.)

(1) 700 Series

(a) With the NC power OFF, set the upper rotary
LED1 LED2
switch (CS1) on the control unit to "0" and the
lower rotary switch (CS2) to "C". Then, turn the
power ON.

SW1 CS1
F 0 1
E 2
D 3
C 4
B 5
A 6
LED1 LED2 9 8 7
CS2
F 0 1
E 2
D 3
C 4
B 5
A 6
9 8 7

(b) The LED display will change from "08." → "00" → LED1 LED2
"01" ... "08". The process is completed when "0Y"
is displayed. (Required time: 8 seconds)
(c) Turn the NC power OFF.
(d) Set the lower rotary switch (CS2) to "0".
SW1 CS1
F0 1
E 2
D 3
C 4
B 5
A 6
9 8 7
CS2
F 0 1
E 2
D 3
C 4
B 5
A 6
9 8 7

(e) After turning the power OFF and ON, do nothing, and then turn the power OFF and ON again.

(Note) After the SRAM is cleared and the NC power is turned ON, the IP addresses are initialized to the
following values.

<Base common parameters>

#1934 Local IP address : 192.168.100. 1
#1935 Local Subnet mask : 255.255.255. 0

To communicate with the screen, the parameter value and the "C:\WINDOWS\melcfg.ini" setting value
must match. Confirm that "C:\WINDOWS\melcfg.ini" is set to the above value.

Last line of C:\WINDOWS\melcfg.ini

•••
[HOSTS]
TCP1=192.168.100.1,683

I - 10
 3. Setup Details
3.2 Erasing the Backed up Data (SRAM)

(2) 70 Series
(a) With the NC power OFF, set the left rotary switch
NCLD1 NCLD2
(RSW1) on the control unit to "0" and the right
rotary switch (RSW2) to "C". Then, turn the power
ON.

NCLD1 NCLD2 F 0 1 F 0 1
E 2 E 2
D 3 D 3
C 4 C 4
B 5 B 5
A 6 A 6
9 8 7 9 8 7

RSW1 RSW2

(b) The LED display will change from "08." → "00" →

NCLD1 NCLD2
"01" ... "08". The process is completed when "0Y"
is displayed. (Required time: 8 seconds)
(c) Turn the NC power OFF.
(d) Set the right rotary switch (RSW2) to "0".

F 0 1 F 0 1
E 2 E 2
D 3 D 3
C 4 C 4
B 5 B 5
A 6 A 6
9 8 7 9 8 7

RSW1 RSW2

(e) After turning the power OFF and ON, do nothing, and then turn the power OFF and ON again.

I - 11
 3. Setup Details
3.3 Inputting the Parameters

3.3 Inputting the Parameters

3.3.1 When There is No Parameter File
If there is no parameter file (ALL.PRM), input the parameters with system setup or by manual input operation.

(1) Parameter input with system setup

With the system setup function, various setups necessary for the NC to initially startup are available by
simply entering the minimum required items. File formatting can be done at the same time.

Items required for setting with system setup are as follows.

● Display language, number of spindle connections, number of auxiliary axis connections
(for 700 Series only)
● Number of axes and command type for each part system
● Servo I/F connection channel and rotary switch setting for each spindle.
Also, type of converter connected with each spindle drive.
● Servo I/F connection channel and rotary switch setting for each servo axis.
Also, type of converter connected with each servo drive.
For details, refer to the section "system setup screen" in the instruction manual.

(2) Parameter input by manual input operation

(a) Select "MAINTENANCE (Mainte)" → "Mainte" → "Psswd input", and input "MPARA". Then, press
INPUT.
(b) Select the "Retn" menu → "Param", and set the various parameters such as the base
specifications parameters and axis specification parameters according to the machine configuration.
The minimum required parameters are listed below. Refer to "III Explanation of Parameters" for
details on each parameter.

(b-1) Set the number of NC axes, number of spindles and number of auxiliary axes, and then turn the
power ON again.

Type # Item
Base system 1002 axisno Number of axes
parameter
Base common 1039 spinno Number of spindles
parameters 1044 auxno MR-J2-CT connections (for 700 Series only)

I - 12
3. Setup Details
3.3 Inputting the Parameters

(b-2) Set the minimum required parameters such as the axis name.

Type # Item
Base axis specification 1013 axname Axis name
parameters 1021 mcp_no Drive unit I/F channel No. (Servo)
1022 axname2 2nd axis name
Base common 1155 DOOR_m Signal input device 1 for door interlock II common for part
parameters systems
1156 DOOR_s Signal input device 2 for door interlock II common for part
systems
Axis specification 2001 rapid Rapid traverse rate
parameters 2002 clamp Cutting federate for clamp function
2003 smgst Acceleration/deceleration modes
2004 G0tL G0 time constant (linear)
2005 G0t1 G0 time constant (primary delay)
2007 G1tL G1 time constant (linear)
2008 G1t1 G1 time constant (primary delay)
2102 skip_tL Skip time constant linear
2103 skip_t1 Skip time constant primary delay acceleration/
deceleration by software 2nd stage
Zero point return 2029 grspc Grid interval
parameter
Servo parameters 2201 SV001 Servo parameters
: :
2456 SV256
Spindle specification 3001 slimt1 Limit rotation speed
parameters 3005 smax1 Maximum rotation speed
3024 sout Spindle connection
3025 enc_on Spindle encoder
3031 smcp_no Drive unit I/F channel No. (Spindle)
3105 sut Speed reach range
3107 ori_spd Orientation command speed
3109 zdetspd Z phase detection speed
Spindle parameters 13001 SP1001 Spindle parameters
: :
13240 SP1240

I - 13
 3. Setup Details
3.3 Inputting the Parameters

(Setting example) For 3 NC axes (X, Y, Z) and 1 spindle axis (S)

Power supply
NC
unit
X Y Z S P

Drive unit rotary switch

0 1 2 3
No.
#1021 mcp_no 1001 1002 1003
#3031 smcp_no 1004

3rd axis for 1st channel

I - 14
 3. Setup Details
3.3 Inputting the Parameters

3.3.2 When a Parameter File is Available

If a parameter file is available, input the parameters using the input/output function.

(Example) When files are available on a compact flash (CF) card

(1) Insert the CF card into the IC card interface on the front of the display unit.

Display unit Adapter CF card

(Note) 70 Series, which has the CF card interface,

does not need adapter.

(2) Select "MAINTENANCE (EDIT)" → "Input/Output".

(3) Confirm that device A is selected, and then select "Device select" → "Memory card".
(4) Select "File name" → "From list" → "ALL.PRM", and then press INPUT.
(5) Press "Area change", and select device B.
(6) Select "Device select" → "Memory".
(7) Select "Dir" → "Param".
* "ALL.PRM" is directly input as the file name.
(8) Press "Transfr A → B", and execute parameter input.

I - 15
 3. Setup Details
3.4 Formatting the File System

3.4 Formatting the File System

The base specification parameter "#1037 cmdtyp" must be set before the file system is formatted.

M System specifications : Set 1 or 2 according to the tool compensation type.

L System specifications : Select and set from 3 to 8 according to the G code list.

(1) Select "MAINTENANCE (Mainte)" → "NEXT" menu → "Format".

(2) The message "Format NC memory (Y/N)?" will appear. Press "Y".
(3) When the memory is correctly formatted, the message "Format complete" will appear.

(Note) When the parameter is set with system setup, the file system does not need to be formatted.

I - 16
 3. Setup Details
3.5 Inputting the Ladder Program

3.5 Inputting the Ladder Program

The ladder program can be created and input using the GX Developer installed in an external personal
computer or with the PLC onboard editing screen.
Refer to the "MITSUBISHI CNC 700 Series PLC Programming manual" (IB-1500036) for details.
The ladder program creation and input procedures are explained below with a flow chart.

(1) 700 Series

Start

Creation methods

Create with GX Developer Create with PLC onboard

Write to NC temporary
Writing method memory

Write with GX Developer Write with PLC onboard

Save ladder program on

Connection method IC card

Write to NC temporary Write to NC temporary Open ladder program in IC

memory with Ethernet memory with RS-232-C card with PLC onboard
communication

Write to NC temporary
memory

Write ladder program to NC ROM

End

I - 17
 3. Setup Details
3.5 Inputting the Ladder Program

(2) 70 Series

Start

Create with GX Developer

Write with GX Developer

Connection method

Write to NC temporary Write to NC temporary

memory with Ethernet memory with RS-232-C
communication

Write ladder program to NC ROM

End

I - 18
 3. Setup Details
3.6 Credit System

3.6 Credit System

Encryption key and decryption code need to be set in order to validate credit system.

(1) Enter code key in the input/output

screen.

(a) Set the device name, directory and

file name in [A:Dev].
(b) Set "Memory" in device section and Contens in directory section/file name
"/CRE" in directory section of section will be written over.
[B:Dev]. Directroy section "Encryption Key"
File name section "ENCKEY.DAT"

(c) Press the menu key [Trnsfr A→B].

(2) Enter cancel code in the input/output

screen.

(a) Set the device name, directory and

file name in [A:Dev].
(b) Set "Memory" in device section and Contens in directory section/file name
"/RLS" in directory section of [B:Dev]. section will be written over.
Directory section "Decryption Code"
File name section "PASSCODE.DAT"

(c) Press the menu key [Trnsfr A→B].

I - 19
3. Setup Details
3.6 Credit System

(3) Turn the power ON again. Confirm that the expiration date (time limit)
is indicated in [DIAGN]-[Self diag] screen.

I - 20
 3. Setup Details
3.7 Setting the Handy Terminal

3.7 Setting the Handy Terminal

It is necessary to customize the display part composition, the key input, and the communication condition
with NC, etc. to connect the handy terminal (HG1T-SB12UH-MK1346-L*).
Create the customized data by "NC Designer HT", and download to the handy terminal.

There are two inputting methods of the handy terminal's costomaized data.
(1) Connecting PC and the handy terminal, the data is input from "NC Designer HT".
(2) Connecting NC and the handy terminal, the data is input from CF (Compact Flash).

3.7.1 When Connecting with PC to Input

Project data (*.p1t) handled as customized data is created by customized data creation tool "NC Designer
HT" and download to the handy terminal.

(1) Start the customized data creating tool "NC Designer HT" and create the project data (*.p1t).

(2) Connect PC and the handy terminal with serial (RS-232C).

(3) Select [Online] - [Communication setting] from the menu of "NC Designer HT", confirm the
communication condition is as follows.
Port : Set the PC side port.
Transmission :19200 [bps]
Data : 8 [bit]
Stop bit :1
Parity : None

I - 21
 3. Setup Details
3.7 Setting the Handy Terminal

(4) Select [Online] - [Download] from the menu of "NC Designer HT".

(5) The following dialog box is displayed, so press the "Yes".

(6) If the passward is set to the downloaded costomazed data, the "Input password" dialog box is displayed.
So input the passward, press the "OK".

(7) The costomaized data is downloaded to the handy terminal.

(8) When the download has been completed, the following dialog box is displayed.

I - 22
 3. Setup Details
3.7 Setting the Handy Terminal

3.7.2 When Connecting with NC to Input

Download data (handy.cod) is created from project data (*.p1t) created by customized data creation tool "NC
Designer HT", and the customized data is downloaded to the handy terminal.

(1) Start the customized data creating tool "NC Designer HT" and create the project data (*.p1t).

(2) Select [File] - [Writing download data] from the menu of "NC Designer HT", and save the download data
named as "handy.cod" in the root directory of CF.

(3) Insert the CF created in the step (2) to the control unit.

(4) Set the passward which has been set to the handy terminal to "#11011 Handy TERM. PW."
(Note) When downloading the data for the first time, nothing is set to the parameter.

(5) NC power supply is turned OFF, and the handy terminal is connected with NC.

I - 23
 3. Setup Details
3.8 Adjustment of Dog-type Reference Position Return for Relative Position Detection

3.8 Adjustment of Dog-type Reference Position Return for Relative Position Detection
There are two types for the position detection system, the relative position detection and the absolute position
detection. The methods of returning to the reference position include the dog-type reference position return
and the dogless-type reference position return.
This section describes the method to adjust the dog-type reference position return for the relative position
detection. Refer to the section "3.9 Absolute Position Detection System" for the method of adjusting the
absolute position detection.

3.8.1 Dog-type Reference Position Return Operation

Progress state Operation of axis

(1) Executes dog-type reference position -> Starts moving in G28 rapid traverse rate.
return.
(2) Detects near-point dog while travelling. -> Decelerates to a stop, then resumes moving in G28
approach speed.
(3) Reaches the first grid point leaving -> Stops.
near-point dog.

This grid point where the axis stops with (3) is called the electrical zero point. Normally, this electrical
zero point position is regarded as the reference position.

(1) Reference position

G28 rapid traverse rate

Grid point (2) G28 approach speed

(3)
- +
Grid space
Near-point dog

Limit switch for Grid amount

near-point detection

Direction of reference position return Electrical zero point

The first reference position return after turning the power ON is carried out with the dog-type reference
position return. The second and following returns are carried out with either the dog-type reference
position return or the high-speed reference position return, depending on the parameter.
High-speed reference position return is a function that directly positions to the reference position saved
in the memory without decelerating at the near-point dog.

(Note) If reference position return has not been executed even once after turning the power ON, the program
error (P430) will occur when movement commands other than G28 are executed.

I - 24
 3. Setup Details
3.8 Adjustment of Dog-type Reference Position Return for Relative Position Detection

3.8.2 Dog-type Reference Position Return Adjustment Procedures

Adjust the dog-type reference position return with the following steps.
Refer to the next page and followings for details of parameters and the calculation method for grid mask
amount.

Procedures

(1) Set the following parameter to "0".

･Reference position shift amount (#2027 G28sft).
･Grid mask amount (#2028 grmask).
(2) Turn the power OFF and ON, and then execute reference position return.
(3) Confirm the grid space and grid amount values on DRIVE MONITOR screen.
(4) Calculate the grid mask amount with the calculation method for grid mask amount.
(5) Set the grid mask amount.
(6) Turn the power OFF and ON, and then execute reference position return.
(7) Confirm the grid space and grid amount values on DRIVE MONITOR screen.
If the grid amount value is approx. half of the grid space, the grid mask amount has been set
correctly.
If the value is not approx. half, repeat the procedure from step (1).
(8) Set the reference position shift amount (#2027 G28sft).
(9) Turn the power OFF and ON, and then execute reference position return.
(10) Set the machine coordinate system offset amount (#2037 G53ofs).

I - 25
 3. Setup Details
3.8 Adjustment of Dog-type Reference Position Return for Relative Position Detection

Reference position return operation and parameter related drawing

#2025 G28rap #2030 dir(-) (Reference position return direction)

(G28 rapid traverse rate)
Reference position
(Position returned to with the reference
position return command)
#2026 G28crp (G28 approach speed)
Basic machine coordinate
system zero point
Electrical zero point

- +
Grid
Near-point dog mask
Grid point
#2029 grspc
#2028 #2027
grmask G28sft
(Grid space)
(Grid mask Grid (Reference
amount) amount position shift
#2037 G53ofs amount)

(Machine zero point offset)

The grid located at the near-point dog or The first grid out of the grid
Grid amount is displayed on
the grid mask area is not the electrical mask is the electrical zero
the drive monitor screen.
zero point. point.

Reference point

The reference position is positioned when the dog-type reference position return is executed. Note that
the other method is available for the absolute position detection.
The reference position is positioned with the manual reference position return or G28 command in the
machining program.
Using parameters, the reference position can be shifted from the electrical zero point position.

Grid point

The position detector has a Z-phase that generates one pulse per rotation. The 0-point position of this
Z-phase is the grid point. Thus, there is a grid point per rotation of the position detector, and the machine
has many grid points at a regular pitch.
The grid point can be set at intervals of grid space by setting the grid space (#2029 grspc). Thus, multiple
grid points can be set per detector rotation.

Grid amount

The grid amount is the distance from where the near-point detection limit switch leaves the near-point
dog to the grid point (electrical zero point) while the dog-type reference position return.
The grid amount can be confirmed on DRIVE MONITOR screen.
After setting the grid mask, the grid amount shows the distance from the grid mask OFF to the grid point.

I - 26
 3. Setup Details
3.8 Adjustment of Dog-type Reference Position Return for Relative Position Detection

G28 rapid traverse rate (#2025 G28rap)

Set the feedrate for dog-type reference position return in manual operation and automatic operation.
The rapid traverse rate (#2001 rapid) is applied for the feedrate during high-speed reference position
return.

G28 approach speed (#2026 G28crp)

Set the approach speed (creep speed) to the reference position after decelerating to a stop by the
near-dog detection. Since the creep speed is accelerated and decelerated in steps
(no-acceleration/deceleration), the mechanical shock, etc., could occur if the speed is too large.
The creep speed should be set between 100 and 300 mm/min., or within 500 mm/min. at the fastest.

Reference position shift amount (#2027 G28sft)

Set the shift amount to shift the reference position from the electrical zero point.
The shift direction can be set only in the reference position return direction.
If the reference position shift amount is "0", the grid point (electrical zero point) will be the reference
position.

Grid mask amount (#2028 grmask)

The first grid point after the dog OFF is regarded as the electrical zero point.
If the grid point is at the position where the near-point dog is kicked OFF, the position of electrical zero
point may differ because of the delay of the limit switch operation, at the grid point where the dog is
kicked OFF or the next grid point. This causes a deviation of reference position by the amount of the grid
space.
The position that the dog is kicked OFF should be at the approximate center of the grid space.

Reference position

Dog

Electrical zero point shits

depending on the speed of
limit switch delay.

Adjustments can be made by changing the near-point dog or by setting the grid mask amount.
Setting the grid mask has the same effect as lengthening the near-point dog.
If the grid amount is approximate the grid space or 0, the grid point may be at the position of near-point
dog OFF, so set a grid mask.
Set the grid mask amount so that the grid amount is one-half of the grid space.
The grid mask amount can be set only in the reference position return direction.
The grid amount and grid space can be confirmed on the DRIVE MONITOR screen.
Refer to "calculation method for the grid mask amount" on the next page for the grid mask amount
values.

I - 27
3. Setup Details
3.8 Adjustment of Dog-type Reference Position Return for Relative Position Detection

Calculation method for grid mask amount

Grid space Grid space
When < Grid amount Grid mask amount = Grid amount −
2 2

Reference position (Position returned to with

the reference position return command)
Electrical zero point

- +

Near-point dog Grid mask

Grid space
Grid mask
amount 2
#2016

Grid amount

Grid space Grid space

When > Grid amount Grid mask amount = Grid amount +
2 2

This will not be the electrical

zero point due to the grid mask.
Reference position Reference position after
before grid mask is set. grid mask is set.

- +

Near-point dog Grid mask

Grid space
2
Grid amount
Grid mask amount
#2016
Grid amount after
grid mask is set.

I - 28
 3. Setup Details
3.8 Adjustment of Dog-type Reference Position Return for Relative Position Detection

Grid space (#2029 grspc)

Set the distance between grids.

The normal grid space is the ball screw pitch value (#2218 PIT) or the movement amount per motor
rotation set as a mm unit.
To make the grid space smaller, set a divisor of the grid space.

Calculation method for movement amount per motor rotation

(1) When linear feed mechanism is ball screw:

Movement amount per Motor side gear ratio

∗ Ball screw pitch
motor rotation = Machine side gear ratio

(2) When linear feed mechanism is rack & pinion:

Movement amount per Motor side gear ratio

∗ Number of pinion gear teeth ∗ Rack pitch
motor rotation = Machine side gear ratio

(3) For rotary axis:

Movement angle per Motor side gear ratio

∗ 360
motor rotation= Machine side gear ratio

N = Movement amount per motor rotation

PC1 PC1 = Motor side gear ratio
N= ∗ PIT PC2 = Machine side gear ratio
PC2
PIT = Ball screw pitch

I - 29
 3. Setup Details
3.8 Adjustment of Dog-type Reference Position Return for Relative Position Detection

Reference position return direction (#2030 dir (−))

Set the direction to move after the limit switch kicks the dog causing a deceleration stop during dog-type
reference position return. The direction is either positive "0" or negative "1".
Set "0" if the reference position is in the positive direction from the near-point dog.
Set "1" if the reference position is in the negative direction from the near-point dog.

(a) When reference position return direction is positive (+)

To move in To move in
+ direction - direction

(-) (+)

Dog
Reference position

(b) When reference position return direction is negative (−)

To move in To move in
+ direction - direction

(-) (+)

Dog
Reference position

Axis with no reference position (#2031 noref)

Set "0" for the axis to carry out dog-type reference position return and the axis for absolute position
detection.
Set "1" for the axis without carrying out reference position return during relative position detection.

Machine coordinate system offset (#2037 G53ofs)

Set the amount to shift the basic machine coordinate system zero point position from the reference
position.
When "0" is set, the reference position will be the position of the basic machine coordinate system zero
point.
In “G53ofs” parameter, set the position of the reference position looking from the basic machine
coordinate system zero point with the coordinates of basic machine coordinate system. By the reference
position return after the power is turned ON, the machine position will be set and the basic machine
coordinate system will be established.

Selection of grid display type (#1229 set01/bit6)

Select the grid display type on DRIVE MONITOR screen during dog-type reference position return.
0: Distance from dog OFF to electric zero point (including grid mask amount)
1: Distance from dog OFF to electric zero point (excluding grid mask amount)

I - 30
 3. Setup Details
3.9 Absolute Position Detection System

3.9 Absolute Position Detection System

The absolute position detection function detects the machine movement amount while the power is OFF. This
allows automatic operation to be started without carrying out reference position return after the power is
turned ON. This function is extremely reliable as it carries out a mutual check of the feedback amount from
the detector, and checks the absolute position unique to the machine, etc.
To carry out the absolute position detection, the machine zero point must be determined, and the absolute
position must be established. Following two methods are available depending on how the absolute position is
established.

(1) Dogless-type absolute position detection

The absolute position is established by setting an arbitrary coordinate at an arbitrary position without
using the dog.
The absolute position basic point can be determined with the following three methods.
･Machine end stopper method
･Marked point alignment method
･Marked point alignment method II
For the machine end stopper method, the manual initialization and automatic initialization methods can
be used.

(2) Dog-type absolute position detection

The absolute position is established by executing dog-type reference position return.

The validity and method of the absolute position detection system can be selected with parameters for each
axis. Note that the servo drive unit and detector must have the specifications compatible for the absolute
position detection.

3.9.1 Dog-type Reference Position Return Operation

Using the mechanical basic position (machine end or marked point) or the electrical basic position (grid
point immediately before the machine end or marked point) as the absolute position basic point, the
basic machine coordinate system zero point will be set at the position "ZERO" value far from the absolute
position basic point in the direction of reversed “ZERO” sign.
The reference position is set at the position "G53ofs" value far from the basic machine coordinate
system's zero point.

Absolute position
basic point
Basic machine "ZERO"
coordinate system

"G53ofs"

Reference position

Dogless absolute position coordinate system

ZERO : Coordinate position of absolute position basic point looking from basic machine
coordinate system zero point. (ABS. POSITION PARAMETER screen "#2 ZERO")
G53ofs : Coordinate position of reference position looking from basic machine coordinate
system zero point. (axis specifications parameter "#2037 G53ofs")
(Note) Select with the parameter "#2059 zerbas" whether to use the mechanical basic position or electrical
basic position as the absolute position basic point for the machine end stopper method.

I - 31
 3. Setup Details
3.9 Absolute Position Detection System

3.9.2 Starting up the Absolute Position Detection System

The zero point initialization should be carried out before the absolute position detection system is started
up. The coordinate system is established and operation is enabled by zero point initialization.
In this section, only the outline is introduced. (Refer to the Instruction Manual for details.)
Refer to the chapter "III Parameters" for the parameter details.

Operation when absolute position is not established

If the zero point has not been initialized even once or if the absolute position is lost, the following alarm
and non-initialized axis will be output. The coordinate system is unstable in this point, so the limitations
given in following table will be applied to each mode. Initialize the zero point and establish the coordinate
system. Refer to the Instruction Manual for details.

Alarm: Z70 (Absolute position data error)

Z71 (Absolute position encoder failure)

Operation in each mode

Operation Absolute position detection method
mode Dogless-type Dog-type
Memory/MDI Movement command invalid Movement command invalid
(Note 1) (Including G28) (Note 1) (G28 is valid)
JOG feed Valid Valid
Rapid traverse Valid Valid
Handle Valid Valid
Step Valid Valid
Zero point return Starting not possible (Note 2) Starting possible

(Note 1) The program error (P430) will occur.

(Note 2) If the axis before the absolute position establish is started, the error "M01 OPERATION ERROR
0024" will occur.
(This mode is valid for an axis for which the absolute position has been established.)

Selecting the zero point initialization method

Select the zero point initialization method with the following parameter.
#2049 type 1: Dogless type Machine end stopper method
2: Dogless type Marked point alignment method
3: Dog type
4: Dogless type Marked point alignment method II

I - 32
 3. Setup Details
3.9 Absolute Position Detection System

Dogless-type zero point initialization

The zero point is initialized using the ABS POSITION SET screen and JOG or handle.
The operation methods differ according to the zero point initialization method. Refer to the Instruction
Manual for details.

(1) Machine end stopper method

The machine end stopper method includes the manual initialization and automatic initialization
methods.

(a) Manual initialization

With this method, the axis is pushed against the machine end stopper using handle or JOG.
(b) Automatic initialization
With this method, the axis is pushed against the machine end stopper, and can be used when the
"INIT-SET" mode is selected. This method has the following features compared to the manual
initialization method.
･The axis is pushed with the same conditions (feedrate, distance) each time, so inconsistencies in
the zero point position can be reduced.
･Part of the operations is automated to simplify the zero point initialization.

(2) Marked point alignment method

With this method, the axis is aligned to the machine's basic point (marked point) using handle or
JOG. The first grid point where the axis reaches upon retraction in the opposite direction after
alignment to the marked point is regarded as the basic point.

(3) Marked point alignment method II

With this method, the axis is aligned to the machine's basic point (marked point) using handle or
JOG. The machine’s basic position (marked point) is regarded as the basic point.

Dog-type zero point initialization

By executing dog-type reference position return with the manual reference position return mode or
automatic reference position return command (G28), the zero point will be initialized.

I - 33
 3. Setup Details
3.10 Auxiliary Axis Operation

3.10 Auxiliary Axis Operation

Auxiliary axis absolute position initial setting and test run are carried out on the auxiliary axis test screen.
In this section, only the outline is introduced. Refer to the Instruction Manual and "MR-J2-CT Specifications
and Instruction Manual (BNP-B3944)" for details.
Also, refer to "13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter" in "III Parameter" for details on the auxiliary axis parameters.

I - 34
 3. Setup Details
3.10 Auxiliary Axis Operation

3.10.1 Preparations
Before the screen is switched to auxiliary axis test screen, prepare the following things.

(1) Parameter settings

Set the following parameters.
No. Name Setting details
50102 Cont2 Control bit7 = 1 (Absolute position detection)
parameter 2 Turn the NC power ON again after this parameter is set.
(Note) The alarm "Z70 Abs data error" occurs after the power
ON again.
50120 ABS Absolute bit1/bit2 : Select the absolute position detection method.
Type position Method bit2 bit1 Details
detection Dog-type method (Note) 1 This decides the reference
position by the near point dog.
parameter
Mechanical end 0 0 This decides the basic point by
stopper method pushing an axis to machine end
etc. when the torque (current)
limit is set.
Marked point 1 0 This decides the basic point by
alignment method aligning an axis to machine origin
point.
(Note) When bit1 is "1", dog-type method is selected regardless of
bit2 setting.

bit3 : Select the electrical basic position direction at marked point

alignment method.
Direction bit3
Electrical basic position direction + 0
Electrical basic position direction - 1

(2) Release servo OFF/interlock for auxiliary axis.

(3) Turn J2CT operation adjustment mode valid signal (R9998/bit0) ON.

I - 35
 3. Setup Details
3.10 Auxiliary Axis Operation

3.10.2 Absolute Position Initial Setting

The coordinate system is established and operation is enabled when the absolute position is initially set.
Carry this out when absolute position is not established.
Refer to the Instruction Manual for detailed operations.

3.10.3 Test Operation

Disconnect the auxiliary axis control from PLC and startup in a forward/reverse run by menu operation to
carry out a test operation.
Refer to the Instruction Manual for detailed operations.

I - 36
 3. Setup Details
3.10 Auxiliary Axis Operation

3.10.4 PLC device

Devices that are used for auxiliary axis operation adjustment and control are as follows.
Refer to "MR-J2-CT Specifications and Instruction Manual (BNP-B3944)" for details.

(1) Operation adjustment mode

Device No.
Abbrev. Signal name
bit
R9998 bit0 J2CT Operation adjustment mode valid (Common for all axes)
R9948 bit0 J2CT 1st axis in operation adjustment mode
bit1 J2CT 2nd axis in operation adjustment mode
bit2 J2CT 3rd axis in operation adjustment mode
bit3 J2CT 4th axis in operation adjustment mode

(2) Auxiliary axis control command

Signal name J2CT J2CT J2CT J2CT J2CT J2CT
Control Control Control Control Control Control
command 4 command 3 command 2 command 1 command L command H
Abbrev. CTCM4 CTCM3 CTCM2 CTCM1 CTCML CTCMH
J2CT R9950 R9951 R9952 R9953 R9954 R9955
1st axis
J2CT R9956 R9957 R9958 R9959 R9960 R9961
2nd axis
J2CT R9962 R9963 R9964 R9965 R9966 R9967
3rd axis
J2CT R9968 R9969 R9970 R9971 R9972 R9973
4th axis

(a) CTCM1 (J2CT Control command 1) (b) CTCM2 (J2CT Control command 2)
bit Details bit Details
0 *SVF Servo OFF 0 ST Operation start
1 QEMG PLC emergency stop 1 DIR Rotation direction
2 *PRT1 Data protect 2 STS Arbitrary point feed command valid
3 MRST MC reset 3 PUS Stopper positioning command valid
4 *IT+ Interlock + 4 MP1 Incremental feed magnification 1
5 *IT- Interlock - 5 MP2 Incremental feed magnification 2
6 RDF Ready OFF 6 PR1 Operation parameter selection1
7 H Handle mode 7 PR2 Operation parameter selection 2
8 AUT Automatic operation mode 8
9 MAN Manual operation mode 9
A J Jog mode A
B ZRN Reference position mode B
C C
D AZS Zero point initialization mode D
E ZST Basic position set E
F S Incremental mode F

I - 37
3. Setup Details
3.10 Auxiliary Axis Operation

(c) CTCM3 (J2CT Control command 3) (b) CTCM4 (J2CT Control command 4)
bit Details bit Details
0 ST1 Station selection 1 0 OVR1 Speed override 1
1 ST2 Station selection 2 1 OVR2 Speed override 2
2 ST4 Station selection 4 2 OVR4 Speed override 4
3 ST8 Station selection 8 3 OVR8 Speed override 8
4 ST16 Station selection 16 4 OVR16 Speed override 16
5 ST32 Station selection 32 5 OVR32 Speed override 32
6 ST64 Station selection 64 6 OVR64 Speed override 64
7 ST128 Station selection 128 7 OVR Speed override valid
8 ST256 Station selection 256 8
9 9
A A
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F

(e) CTCML, CTCMH (J2CT Control command L, control command H)

CTCML Command position during arbitrary point feed command valid (32bit)
CTCMH

I - 38
3. Setup Details
3.10 Auxiliary Axis Operation

(3) Auxiliary axis status

Signal name J2CT J2CT J2CT J2CT Machine position
Status 4 Status 3 Status 2 Status 1
Abbrev. CTST4 CTST3 CTST2 CTST1
J2CT R9900 R9901 R9902 R9903 R9904,
1st axis R9905
J2CT R9906 R9907 R9908 R9909 R9910,
2nd axis R9911
J2CT R9912 R9913 R9914 R9915 R9916,
3rd axis R9917
J2CT R9918 R9919 R9920 R9921 R9922,
4th axis R9923

(a) CTST1 (J2CT Status 1) (b) CTST2 (J2CT Status 2)

bit Details bit Details
0 RDY Servo ready 0 AUTO In automatic operation mode
1 INP In-position 1 MANO In manual operation mode
2 SMZ Smoothing zero 2 JO In jog mode
3 AX1 Axis selection output 3 ARNN In reference position return
4 MVP In axis movement + 4 ZRNO In reference position return mode
5 MVN In axis movement - 5 DOG Near-point dog
6 TLQ In torque limit 6 AZSO In zero point initialization mode
7 ADJ Adjusting machine 7 SO In incremental mode
8 ZP Reference position reached 8 AL1 Alarm 1
9 RST In reset 9 AL2 Alarm 2
A HO In handle mode A AL4 Alarm 4
B MA Controller preparation complete B BAT Battery voltage drop
C SA Servo preparation complete Absolute position power shutoff
C ABS
D JSTA Automatic set position reached movement over
E JST Set position reached D ZSN Absolute position loss
F NEAR Near set position E ZSF Initial setting completed
F ZSE Initial setting error completed

I - 39
 3. Setup Details
3.10 Auxiliary Axis Operation

(c) CTST3 (Status 3) (d) CTST4 (J2CT Status 4)

bit Details bit Details
0 STO1 Station position 1 0 PSW1 Position switch 1
1 STO2 Station position 2 1 PSW2 Position switch 2
2 STO4 Station position 4 2 PSW3 Position switch 3
3 STO8 Station position 8 3 PSW4 Position switch 4
4 STO16 Station position 16 4 PSW5 Position switch 5
5 STO32 Station position 32 5 PSW6 Position switch 6
6 STO64 Station position 64 6 PSW7 Position switch 7
7 STO128 Station position 128 7 PSW8 Position switch 8
8 STO256 Station position 256 8 PMV In positioning operation
9 9 PFN Positioning complete
A A PSI In stopper
B B
C C
D D
E E
F F

3.10.5 Notes
(1) Do not turn "Auto operation "start" command signal (ST) " ON during Ope. test mode.
(2) NC does not retain auxiliary axis parameters. Parameters are retained at the auxiliary axis side.
(3) Auxiliary axis emergency stop has to be commanded by PLC interface.
(4) NC axis handle movement is invalid during auxiliary axis handle mode.
(5) If the screen shifts other screen, the auxiliary axis mode (Ope. test mode, Absolute posn set) is held.
Thus, the axis does not stop even if the axis is rotating.

I - 40
 3. Setup Details
3.11 Data Sampling

3.11 Data Sampling

NC data sampling function allows a sampling of NC internal data (speed output from NC to drive unit,
feedback data from drive unit, etc.) so that the data is output as text data.
Item Specifications
Sampling cycle 700 Series
1.7ms x setting value
70 Series (type A)
1.7ms x setting value
70 Series (type B)
3.5ms x setting value
Number of sampled axes 700 Series
Servo axis : 1 to 16 axes
Spindle : 1 to 4 axes
70 Series
Servo axis : 1 to 7 axes
Spindle : 1 to 3 axes
Number of sampled 1 to 8 points
channels
Sampling data size 700 Series
Maximum 1,310,720 points
70 Series
Maximum 655,360 points
(Note 1) This is the entire data size. The data size per channel will
decrease when the number of sampled channels
increases.
(Note 2) If the open DRAM memory is insufficient, the maximum
data size will decrease.
● Parameter output is not executed for the data set with this function.
● The state returns to "Sampling stop" when the power is turned ON.

Refer to the "diagnosis data collection setting screen" section in the Instruction Manual for detailed
operations.

3.12 Data backup

With this function, system data (program, parameter, R register, etc.), ladder (user PLC program), APLC data
can be backed up/restored.
Refer to the "all backup screen" section in the Instruction Manual for detailed operations.

I - 41
 3. Setup Details
3.13 M70 SETUP INSTALLER

3.13 M70 SETUP INSTALLER

Install the following data with M70 SETUP INSTALLER.

(1) Language data

(2) Custom data
• Custom screen
• PLC alarm guidance
(3) Custom startup screen

Use CF card to carry out the installation.

3.13.1 Compatible Data and CF Card Folder Configuration

(1) Compatible data with M70 SETUP INSTALLER

Type Data Details Remarks
Language data lang0_xxx.bin Language data (for FROM) Language
identification string
lang1_xxx.bin Language data is shown instead of
(for expansion FROM) xxx.
(ex. jpn: Japanese,
fra: french)
Custom data Custom screen Interpreter data and
module object data
config.ini A setting file to register custom
screen.
customdef.ini A setting file to register custom
screen for the menus and
function buttons on the default
screen.
customload.txt A setting file to register name
and load order of the object
data.
PLC alarm HTML files and JPEG files to
guidance data be displayed in the PLC alarm
guidance.
Custom startup startupscreen.bmp A bitmap file to be displayed on Color: 256 Colors
screen the initial screen when power is (8 bit)
turned ON. Size: 640 * 440

I - 42
 3. Setup Details
3.13 M70 SETUP INSTALLER

(2) CF card folder configuration

Compatible data with M70 SETUP INSTALLER is stored in CF card with the folder configuration as
follows.

CF Card Lang (language data folder)

A0 (folder labeled by version)

lang0_jpn.bin (Japanese language data for FROM)

lang1_jpn.bin (Japanese language data for expansion FROM)

:
:
A1 (folder labeled by version)

custom (custom data folder)

PLCAlarm (PLC alarm guidance folder)

PLCAlarm_0001_jpn.htm (PLC alarm guidance data)

:
:
Custom screen modules

Setting files

startupscreen.bmp (bitmap data for custom startup screen)

Installer (installer folder)

installer.o (installer)

I - 43
 3. Setup Details
3.13 M70 SETUP INSTALLER

3.13.2 Operation Method

Starting up M70 SETUP INSTALLER

(1) Insert the CF card for M70 SETUP

INSTALLER into the front panel CF.

(2) Turn the power ON while pressing the Startup screen appears. A bleep sounds
menu . after a while, and then the mode selection
screen for M70 SETUP INSTALLER
appears.

(Note) Keep pressing the menu until a bleep sounds.

I - 44
 3. Setup Details
3.13 M70 SETUP INSTALLER

Installing language data

(1) Press the menu key [Lang Pack] on the Language data installation screen appears.
mode selection screen. The language selection menu is displayed.

The language currently installed is shown in

the “Installed Language” field.
• The next language selection menu is displayed by pressing menu (Next menu >>).
(2) Select the language to install with the The language selected is shown in the “Now
menu key. Selected Language” field.

• To change the language already selected, press the menu key [Clear] and select again.
• The 2nd language can be selected when the expansion FROM is provided. (Cursor moves to
the “2nd” field after the 1st language has been selected.)
(3) Press the menu key [Install]. A confirmation message appears.

(4) Press the menu key [Yes]. A message appears after the installation has
completed.

• Pressing the menu key [No] returns to the language selection menu.
• Do not turn the power OFF during the installation of language data.
(Note) Pressing the menu (<< Cancel) returns to the mode selection screen.

I - 45
 3. Setup Details
3.13 M70 SETUP INSTALLER

Installing custom data

(1) Press the menu key [Custom Data] on Custom data installation screen appears.
the mode selection screen.

(2) Press the menu key [Install]. A confirmation message appears.

(3) Press the menu key [Yes]. A message appears after the installation has
completed.

• Pressing the menu key [No] returns to the first menu.

• Do not turn the power OFF during the installation of custom data.

Uninstalling custom data

(1) Press the menu key [Uninst] on the A confirmation message appears.
custom data installation screen.

(2) Press the menu key [Yes]. A message appears after the installation has
completed.

• Pressing the menu key [No] returns to the first menu.

• Do not turn the power OFF during the uninstallation of custom data.
(Note) Pressing the menu (<< Cancel) returns to the mode selection screen.

I - 46
 3. Setup Details
3.13 M70 SETUP INSTALLER

Installing custom startup screen

(1) Press the menu key [Custom Startup] on Custom Startup Screen Install screen
the initial screen of M70 SETUP appears.
INSTALLER.

(2) Press the menu key [Install]. A confirmation message appears.

(3) Press the menu key [Yes]. A message appears after the installation has
completed.

• Pressing the menu key [No] returns to the first menu.

• Do not turn the power OFF during the installation of custom startup screen.

I - 47
 3. Setup Details
3.13 M70 SETUP INSTALLER

Uninstalling custom startup screen

(1) Press the menu key [Uninst] on the A confirmation message appears.
Custom Startup Screen Install screen.

(2) Press the menu key [Yes]. A message appears after the installation has
completed.

• Pressing the menu key [No] returns to the first menu.

• Do not turn the power OFF during the uninstallation of custom startup screen.
(Note) Pressing the menu (<< Cancel) returns to the mode selection screen.

I - 48
 3. Setup Details
3.13 M70 SETUP INSTALLER

3.13.3 List of Error Messages

Message Details
The 1st language is not selected. The first language has not been selected at the
installation of language pack.
Specify the first language again.
The same language is selected. The same language has been selected as both first and
second language at the installation of language pack.
Specify the language again.

The selected language does not exist.(1st) The language data, selected as the 1st language at the
installation of language pack, does not exist .
Ensure that the language data has been stored in the
CF card, and that the version of the data is appropriate.

The selected language does not exist.(2nd) The language data, selected as the 2nd language at the
installation of language pack, does not exist.
Ensure that the language data has been stored in the
CF card, and that the version of the data is appropriate.

The custom data does not exist. The “custom” folder does not exist in the CF card.
Check the stored data in the CF card.
The file startupscreen.bmp" does not exist." The "startupscreen.bmp" file does not exist in the CF
card.
Check the stored data in the CF card.

I - 49
 4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.1 Durable Parts

4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods

4.1 Durable Parts
4.1.1 Control unit battery
All data, such as the parameters and machining programs that need to be backed up when the power is
turned OFF, are saved by a lithium battery installed in the control unit's battery holder.

Battery Q6BAT BKO-C10811H03 (SANYO CR17335SE-R with

Mitsubishi specifications)
Battery cumulative data holding time 45,000 hours (At room temperature. The life will be shorter if
the temperature is high.))
Battery life Approx. 5 years (from date of battery manufacture)
(Note) Replace the battery when the alarm "Z52 Battery drop 0001" appears on the NC screen.
The internal data could be damaged if the alarm "Z52 Battery drop 0003" appears.

[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the battery with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.
Complete the replacement within 30 minutes after turning the power OFF. (If the battery is not connected
within 30 minutes, the data being backed up might be destroyed.)

(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Open the electric cabinet door, and confirm that the control unit LED, 7-segment display, etc., are all
OFF.
(3) Open the front cover of the control unit. Pull the right side of the front cover toward front.
(4) Pull the connector connected to the battery out from the BAT connector.
(5) Remove the battery from the battery holder.
(6) Fit the new battery into the battery holder.
(7) Insert the connector connected to the new battery into the BAT connector. Pay attention to the
connector orientation, being careful not to insert backwards.
(8) Close the front cover of the control unit. At this time, confirm that the cover is closed by listening for the
"click" sound when the latch catches.
(9) Close the door of the electric cabinet.

Front cover

BAT connector
Battery holder
Connector connected
to the battery
Battery

I - 50
 4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.1 Durable Parts

[Precautions for handling battery]

(1) Always replace the battery with the same type.
(2) Do not disassemble the battery.
(3) Do not place the battery in flames or water.
(4) Do not pressurize and deform the battery.
(5) This is a primary battery so do not charge it.
(6) Dispose of the spent battery as industrial waste.

! CAUTION
If the battery low warning is issued, save the machining programs, tool data and parameters in an
input/output device, and then replace the battery. When the battery alarm is issued, the machining
programs, tool data and parameters may be destroyed. Reload the data after replacing the battery.
Do not short circuit, charge, overheat, incinerate or disassemble the battery.
Dispose the spent battery according to the local laws.

I - 51
 4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.1 Durable Parts

4.1.2 Cooling fan for control unit

Type : 109P0412H731
Life : 60,000 hours (When the rotary speed decreased 30% less than the initial values)
Cooling fan (for control unit) life is estimated on the assumption that it is used under 60°C
environment. Keep in mind that the value above is not a guaranteed value.

[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the cooling fan with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.

(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Open the electric cabinet door.
(3) Remove the fan cover on the top center of the control unit. (Remove the fan cover by pushing up the
front tab.)
(4) Pull out the cooling fan from the control unit cooling fan housing.
(5) Pull the connector connected to the cooling fan out from the control unit PCB.
(6) Replace the cooling fan with the new one. Insert the connector connected to the new cooling fan into
the control unit PCB.
(7) Put the cooling fan into the control section cooling fan housing. (Be sure the label side is on the top.)
(8) Arrange the cooling fan wiring neatly in the control unit cooling fan housing.
(9) Install the fan cover. (First install the back tabs in the control unit. Then install the front tabs in the
control unit.)
(10) Confirm that all the cables are correctly connected and close the electric cabinet door.

Front tab

Fan cover Cooling fan

Back
tab Control unit

! CAUTION
Do not replace the control unit while the power is ON.
Collect and dispose of the spent cooling fan according to the local laws.

I - 52
 4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.1 Durable Parts

4.1.3 Cooling fan for display unit (XP terminal)

Type : MMF-06D24DS-RP3
Life : 50,000 hours (When the rotary speed decreased 20% less than the initial values)
Cooling fan (for display unit) life is estimated on the assumption that it is used under 60°C
environment. Keep in mind that the value above is not a guaranteed value.

[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the cooling fan for display unit with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.

(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Open the electric cabinet door.
(3) Remove the fan cover of cooling fan housing (2 parts) that is installed to PCB on back of display unit.
(Remove the fan cover by pushing up the front tab.)
(4) Pull out the cooling fan from the control unit cooling fan housing.
(5) Pull the connector connected to the cooling fan out from the control unit PCB.
(6) Replace the cooling fan with the new one. Insert the connector connected to the new cooling fan into
the control unit PCB.
(7) Put the cooling fan into the control section cooling fan housing. (Be sure the label side is on the top.)
(8) Arrange the cooling fan wiring neatly in the control unit cooling fan housing.
(9) Install the fan cover.
(10) Confirm that all the cables are correctly connected and close the electric cabinet door.

Tab

Fan cover

Cooling fan

Cooling fan
housing

! CAUTION
Do not replace the control unit while the power is ON.
Collect and dispose of the spent cooling fan according to the local laws.

I - 53
 4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.1 Durable Parts

4.1.4 Backlight

● 8.4-type
LCD panel NL6448BC26-01 (NEC)
Inverter 65PWB31 (NEC)
Backlight for replacement 84LHS01 (NEC)
Backlight life 30,000 hours (Duration of time until luminance drops to 50% of the initial
value.)

● 10.4-type
LCD panel NL6448BC33-53, NL6448BC33-54 (NEC)
Inverter 104PW161 (NEC)
Backlight for replacement 104LHS35 (NEC)
Backlight life 50,000 hours (ambient temperature 25°C) (Duration of time until
luminance drops to 50% of the initial value.)

Backlight life is estimated on the assumption that it is used under 25°C environment. Keep in mind that the
value above is not a guaranteed value.

[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the backlight for LCD panel with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.

(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Open the electric cabinet door.
(3) Pull the connector connected to the backlight out from the backlight power supply PCB. (For 8.4 inch,
one each for top and bottom; for 10.4 inch, one for top.)
(4) Disconnect the menu key connector.
(5) Remove the escutcheon fixing screws (at 4 places) and take the escutcheon off.
(6) Pull out the backlight installed on the left side of the LCD panel. (The backlights have locking claws on
the front. Hold these claws down while pulling the backlight out.)
(7) Insert the new backlight into the upper and lower sections at the left end of the LCD panel. (Press in
until the locking claws click.)
(8) Mount the escutcheon with 2 fixing screws (1 each for the upper and lower sections of the left end).
(9) Connect the backlight connection connector to the backlight power supply PCB.
(10) Confirm that all the cables are correctly connected and close the electric cabinet door.
(11) Connect the menu key connector.

[Precautions for using LCD panel]

(1) Depending on the ambient temperature, response time, brightness and color may differ.
(2) Depending on the display contents, nonuniformity of brightness, flickers and streaks may be observed
on LCD display.
(3) Because cold cathod-tube is used for LCD display, optical characteristics (nonuniformity of brightness
and display) change according to the operation time. (Especially in low temperature.)
(4) Screen display color may be differed depending on the angle to view it.

I - 54
 4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.1 Durable Parts

! CAUTION
Do not replace the backlight while the power is ON.
Dispose the replaced backlight according to the local laws.
Do not touch the backlight while the power is ON. Failure to observe this could result in electric
shocks due to high voltage.
Do not touch the backlight while the LCD panel is in use. Failure to observe this could result in burns.
Do not apply impact or pressure on the LCD panel or backlight. Failure to observe this could result in
breakage as they are made of glass.

[8.4-type display unit]

Escutcheon

Menu key connector LCD panel

Backlight

Escutcheon

Menu key connector

I - 55
 4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.1 Durable Parts

[10.4-type display unit]

Control unit fittings

Escutcheon

Backlight
Menu key connector

LCD panel

Escutcheon

Menu key connector

I - 56
 4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.2 Unit

4.2 Unit
4.2.1 Control Unit

[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the control unit with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.

(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Open the electric cabinet door.
(3) Disconnect all the cables connected to the control unit.
(4) Remove the screws fixing the control unit, and remove the control unit from the control unit installation
fitting. (Loosen the two lower fixing screws first, and then remove one upper fixing screw while
supporting the control unit with a hand. Then lift the control unit upward and take it off. The two lower
fixing screws do not need to be removed.)
(5) Replace with a new control unit, and fix the control unit onto control unit installation fitting with the fixing
screws.
(6) Connect all the cables back to the control unit. (Connect the cables to the designated connectors.)
(7) Confirm that all the cables are correctly connected and close the electric cabinet door.

Fixing screws (3)

! CAUTION
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors.
Do not replace the control unit while the power is ON.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.

I - 57
 4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.2 Unit

(Note) Wire the control unit optical cable as shown below.

Control unit

Optical communication cable

(section without reinforced sheath):
Bending radius: 25mm or more

Optical communication cable

(section with reinforced sheath):
Bending radius: 50mm or more

Recommended clamp material

CKN-13SP
KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES

I - 58
 4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.2 Unit

4.2.2 Display Unit

[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the display unit with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.

(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Open the electric cabinet door.
(3) Disconnect all the cables connected to the display unit.
(4) Remove the screws fixing the display unit (at 4 places) and take the display unit off.
(5) Replace with a new display unit, and fix the display unit with the fixing screws.
(6) Connect all the cables connected to the display unit. (Connect the cables to the designated
connectors.)
(7) Confirm that all the cables are correctly connected and close the electric cabinet door.

Fixing screws (4)

! CAUTION
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors.
Do not replace the display unit while the power is ON.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.

I - 59
 4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.2 Unit

4.2.3 Keyboard unit

[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the keyboard unit with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.

(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Open the electric cabinet door.
(3) Disconnect all the cables connected to the keyboard unit.
(4) Remove the screws fixing the keyboard unit and take the keyboard unit off.
(5) Replace with a new keyboard unit, and fix the keyboard unit with the fixing screws.
(6) Connect all the cables connected to the keyboard unit. (Connect the cables to the designated
connectors.)
(7) Confirm that all the cables are correctly connected and close the electric cabinet door.

! CAUTION
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors.
Do not replace the keyboard unit while the power is ON.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.

I - 60
 4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.2 Unit

[8.4-type Keyboard unit]

Fixing screws (4)

[10.4-type Keyboard unit]

Fixing screws (4)

I - 61
 4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.2 Unit

4.2.4 DX Unit

[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the DX unit with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.

(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Open the electric cabinet door.
(3) Disconnect all the cables connected to the DX unit.
(4) Remove the screws fixing the DX unit and take the DX unit off.
(5) Replace with a new DX unit, and fix the DX unit onto the control unit with the fixing screws.
(Fix so that the DX unit connector slot is placed at the lower part.)
(6) Connect all the cables connected to the DX unit. (Connect the cables to the designated connectors.)
(7) Confirm that all the cables are correctly connected and close the electric cabinet door.

Fixing screws (4)

Connector slot

! CAUTION
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors.
Do not replace the DX unit while the power is ON.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.

I - 62
 4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.2 Unit

4.2.5 Hard Disk Unit

Hard disk unit life: 5 years or 20,000 hours of power ON, whichever comes first.

[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the hard disk unit with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.

(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Open the electric cabinet door.
(3) Disconnect all F140 cables connected to the hard disk in the hard disk unit.
(Always disconnect F140 cables holding the front and back of the hard disk securely with fingers.)
(4) Remove the screws fixing the hard disk unit (2 at upper part, 1 at lower part) and take the hard disk unit
off.
(5) Replace with a new hard disk unit, and fix the hard disk unit with the fixing screws.
(6) Connect F140 cables to the hard disk in the hard disk unit.
(Always connect F140 cables in the correct connector direction fixing the bottom of the hard disk with
fingers.)
(7) Confirm that all the cables are correctly connected and close the electric cabinet door.

Fixing screws (2)

(Note) When mounting the hard disk unit, face the cable lead-out side directly straight up, and mount within
±15°.

15° 15°

! CAUTION
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors.
Do not replace the hard disk unit while the power is ON.
Dispose of the replaced hard disk unit according to the local laws.
Hard disk unit is a precision device, so do not drop or apply strong impacts on it.

I - 63
 4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.3 Compact Flash

4.3 Compact Flash

4.3.1 Control Unit Compact Flash

[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the compact flash with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.

(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Open the electric cabinet door, and confirm that the control unit LED, 7-segment display, etc., are all
OFF.
(3) Open the front cover of the control unit.
(4) Press the eject lever twice to eject the compact flash.
(5) Insert the new compact flash. (The surface is faced on the observers' right.)
(6) Close the front cover of the control unit. At this time, confirm that the cover is closed by listening for the
"click" sound when the latch catches.
(7) Close the electric cabinet door.

Front
cover

Eject lever

Compact flash slot

Compact flash

(Note 1) There may be a compatibility problem with commercially available compact flash memory,
resulting in mulfunction.

I - 64
 4. 700 Series H/W Replacement Methods
4.4 IC Card

4.4 IC card
4.4.1 Front IC Card

[Card insertion procedures]

(1) Open the card slot door located on the display unit right end.
(2) Insert the IC card. (The surface is faced on the observers' right.)

[Card ejecting procedures]

(1) Open the card slot door located on the display unit right end.
(2) Press the eject lever twice to eject the IC card.

Eject lever

IC card

(Note 1) Do not eject an IC card during the data reading/writing.

(Note 2) There may be a compatibility problem between devices a commercially available IC card, so
illegal operations may occur.

I - 65
 5. 70 Series H/W Replacement Methods
5.1 Durable Parts

5. 70 Series H/W Replacement Methods

5.1 Durable Parts
5.1.1 Control unit battery
All data, such as the parameters and machining programs that need to be backed up when the power is
turned OFF, are saved by a lithium battery installed in the control unit's battery holder.

Battery Q6BAT BKO-C10811H03 (SANYO CR17335SE-R with

Mitsubishi specifications)
Battery cumulative data holding time 45,000 hours (At room temperature. The life will be shorter if
the temperature is high.))
Battery life Approx. 5 years (from date of battery manufacture)
(Note) Replace the battery when the alarm "Z52 Battery drop 0001" appears on the NC screen.
The internal data could be damaged if the alarm "Z52 Battery drop 0003" appears.

[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the battery with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.
Complete the replacement within 30 minutes after turning the power OFF. (If the battery is not connected
within 30 minutes, the data being backed up might be destroyed.)

(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Confirm that the control unit LED, 7-segment display, etc., are all OFF.
(3) Open the battery cover of the control unit. Pull the right side of the battery cover toward front.
(4) Pull the connector connected to the battery out from the BAT connector.
(5) Remove the battery from the battery holder.
(6) Fit the new battery into the battery holder.
(7) Insert the connector connected to the new battery into the BAT connector. Pay attention to the
connector orientation, being careful not to insert backwards.
(8) Close the front cover of the control unit. At this time, confirm that the cover is closed by listening for the
"click" sound when the latch catches.

Battery cover
Battery

Battery holder

BAT connector

I - 66
 5. 70 Series H/W Replacement Methods
5.1 Durable Parts

[Precautions for handling battery]

(1) Always replace the battery with the same type.
(2) Do not disassemble the battery.
(3) Do not place the battery in flames or water.
(4) Do not pressurize and deform the battery.
(5) This is a primary battery so do not charge it.
(6) Dispose of the spent battery as industrial waste.

! CAUTION
If the battery low warning is issued, save the machining programs, tool data and parameters in an
input/output device, and then replace the battery. When the battery alarm is issued, the machining
programs, tool data and parameters may be destroyed. Reload the data after replacing the battery.
Do not short circuit, charge, overheat, incinerate or disassemble the battery.
Dispose the spent battery according to the local laws.

I - 67
 5. 70 Series H/W Replacement Methods
5.1 Durable Parts

5.1.2 Backlight

● 8.4-type
Inverter 65PWB31
Backlight for replacement 84LHS01
Backlight life 50,000 hours (Duration of time until luminance drops to 50% of the initial
value.)

● 10.4-type
Inverter 104PW161
Backlight for replacement 104LHS35
Backlight life 50,000 hours (ambient temperature 25°C) (Duration of time until
luminance drops to 50% of the initial value.)

Backlight life is estimated on the assumption that it is used under 25°C environment. Keep in mind that the
value above is not a guaranteed value.

[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the backlight for LCD panel with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.

(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Pull the connector connected to the backlight out from the backlight inverter (one for top).
(3) Disconnect the MENU connector.
(4) Remove the escutcheon fixing screws (at 4 places) and take the escutcheon off.
(5) Pull out the backlight installed on the left side of the LCD panel. (The backlights have locking claws on
the front. Hold these claws down while pulling the backlight out.)
(6) Insert the new backlight into the upper and lower sections at the left end of the LCD panel. (Press in
until the locking claws click.)
(7) Mount the escutcheon with 4 fixing screws (1 each for 4 sections).
(8) Connect the backlight connection connector to the backlight inverter.
(9) Confirm that all the cables are correctly connected and close the electric cabinet door.
(10) Connect the MENU connector.

[Precautions for using LCD panel]

(1) Depending on the ambient temperature, response time, brightness and color may differ.
(2) Depending on the display contents, nonuniformity of brightness, flickers and streaks may be observed
on LCD display.
(3) Because cold cathod-tube is used for LCD display, optical characteristics (nonuniformity of brightness
and display) change according to the operation time. (Especially in low temperature.)
(4) Screen display color may be differed depending on the angle to view it.

I - 68
 5. 70 Series H/W Replacement Methods
5.1 Durable Parts

! CAUTION
Do not replace the backlight while the power is ON.
Dispose the replaced backlight according to the local laws.
Do not touch the backlight while the power is ON. Failure to observe this could result in electric
shocks due to high voltage.
Do not touch the backlight while the LCD panel is in use. Failure to observe this could result in burns.
Do not apply impact or pressure on the LCD panel or backlight. Failure to observe this could result in
breakage as they are made of glass.

[8.4-type/10.4-type display unit]

Backlight connector

MENU connector

Backlight inverter

Backlight

I - 69
 5. 70 Series H/W Replacement Methods
5.2 Unit

5.2 Unit
5.2.1 Control Unit

[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the control unit with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.

(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Disconnect all the external cables connected to the control unit.
(3) Remove all the internal cables connected to the control unit. (MENU/INV/LCD connector)
(Note) Open the battery cover to remove LCD connector.
(4) Remove the screws fixing the control unit, and remove the control unit from the control unit installation
fitting. (Loosen the two lower fixing screws first, and then remove one upper fixing screw while
supporting the control unit with a hand. Then lift the control unit upward and take it off. The two lower
fixing screws do not need to be removed.)
(5) Replace with a new control unit, and fix the control unit onto control unit installation fitting with the fixing
screws.
(6) Connect all the cables back to the control unit. (Connect the cables to the designated connectors.)
(7) Confirm that all the cables are correctly connected and close the electric cabinet door.

INV connector
LCD connector

Battery cover

MENU connector

! CAUTION
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors.
Do not replace the control unit while the power is ON.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.

I - 70
 5. 70 Series H/W Replacement Methods
5.2 Unit

(Note) Wire the control unit optical cable as shown below.

Control unit

Recommended clamp material

CKN-13SP
KITAGAWA INDUSTRIES

Optical communication cable

(section without reinforced sheath):
Bending radius: 30mm or more

I - 71
 5. 70 Series H/W Replacement Methods
5.2 Unit

5.2.2 Display Unit

[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the display unit with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.

(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Open the electric cabinet door.
(3) Disconnect all the cables connected to the display unit.
(4) Remove the screws fixing the display unit (at 4 places) and take the display unit off.
(5) Replace with a new display unit, and fix the display unit with the fixing screws.
(6) Connect all the cables connected to the display unit. (Connect the cables to the designated
connectors.)
(7) Confirm that all the cables are correctly connected and close the electric cabinet door.

Fixing screws (4)

! CAUTION
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors.
Do not replace the display unit while the power is ON.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.

I - 72
 5. 70 Series H/W Replacement Methods
5.2 Unit

5.2.3 Keyboard unit

[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the keyboard unit with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.

(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Open the electric cabinet door.
(3) Disconnect all the cables connected to the keyboard unit.
(4) Remove the screws fixing the keyboard unit and take the keyboard unit off.
(5) Replace with a new keyboard unit, and fix the keyboard unit with the fixing screws.
(6) Connect all the cables connected to the keyboard unit. (Connect the cables to the designated
connectors.)
(7) Confirm that all the cables are correctly connected and close the electric cabinet door.

! CAUTION
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors.
Do not replace the keyboard unit while the power is ON.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.

I - 73
 5. 70 Series H/W Replacement Methods
5.2 Unit

[8.4-type Keyboard unit]

Fixing screws (4)

[10.4-type Keyboard unit]

Fixing screws (4)

I - 74
 5. 70 Series H/W Replacement Methods
5.2 Unit

5.2.4 DX Unit

[Replacement procedures]
Always replace the DX unit with the control unit (machine) power turned OFF.

(1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
(2) Open the electric cabinet door.
(3) Disconnect all the cables connected to the DX unit.
(4) Remove the screws fixing the DX unit and take the DX unit off.
(5) Replace with a new DX unit, and fix the DX unit onto the control unit with the fixing screws.
(Fix so that the NCKB connector slot is placed at the lower part.)
(6) Connect all the cables connected to the DX unit. (Connect the cables to the designated connectors.)
NCKB cable can be easily inserted by fitting the Δ1st pin position with the connector.
(7) Confirm that all the cables are correctly connected and close the electric cabinet door.

Fixing screws (4)

NCKB connector

! CAUTION
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors.
Do not replace the DX unit while the power is ON.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.

I - 75
 5. 70 Series H/W Replacement Methods
5.3 Compact Flash

5.3 Compact Flash

5.3.1 Front Compact Flash

[Card insertion procedures]

(1) Open the card slot door located on the display unit right end.
(2) Insert the compact flash. (The surface is faced on the observers' right.)

[Card ejecting procedures]

(1) Open the card slot door located on the display unit right end.
(2) Press the eject lever twice to eject the compact flash.

Compact flash
Eject lever

(Note 1) Do not eject a compact flash during the data reading/writing.

(Note 2) There may be a compatibility problem with non-recommended compact flashes, which may lead
illegal operations.

I - 76
 6. Cable

6. Cable
If the cable is replaced without turning the power OFF, the normal unit or peripheral devices could be
damaged, and risks could be imposed.
Disconnect each cable with the following procedures.

(a) For the following type of connector, press the tabs with a thumb and forefinger in the direction of the
arrow, and pull the connector off.

(1) Press
(1) Press
Y

(2) Pull (2) Pull

(1) Press

View from above

(1) Press

(2) Pull

(2) Pull

! CAUTION
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.
Do not pull the cables when connecting/disconnecting it.

I - 77
6. Cable

(b) For a flat cable type connector with latches, open the latches in the directions of the arrows, and pull
the connector off.
(1) Open

(2) Pull

(c) For a flat cable type connector without latches, hold the connector with a thumb and forefinger, and pull
the connector off.

(1) Hold with thumb and forefinger.

(2) Pull

(d) For the screw fixed type connector, loosen the two fixing screws, and pull the connector off.
(1) Loosen

(1) Loosen

(2) Pull (2) Pull

! CAUTION
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.
Do not pull the cables when connecting/disconnecting it.

I - 78
6. Cable

(e) For the optical cable connector, pull off while holding down the lock button.

(1) Press

(2) Pull

(f) For the Ethernet connector, pull off while holding down the locked latch.

(1) Press

(2) Pull

! CAUTION
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.
Do not pull the cables when connecting/disconnecting it.

I - 79
II Explanation of Alarms
 1. List of Alarms
1.1 Operation Alarms

1. List of Alarms
1.1 Operation Alarms

(The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)

MUU Message {{{{
Error No.
Message
Class

(1) Class: M01 Operation error

Alarms occurring due to incorrect operation by the operator during NC operation and those by machine
trouble are displayed.

Error No. Details Remedy

0001 Dog overrun • Increase the length of the near-point dog.
When returning to the reference position‚ the • Reduce the reference position return speed.
near-point detection limit switch did not stop
over the dog‚ but overran the dog.
0002 Some ax does not pass Z phase • Move the detector one rotation or more in the
One of the axes did not pass the Z-phase opposite direction of the reference position‚ and
during the initial reference position return after repeat reference position return.
the power was turned ON.
0003 R-pnt direction illegal • The selection of the AXIS SELECTION key's
When manually returning to the reference +/- direction is incorrect. The error is canceled
position‚ the return direction differs from the by feeding the axis in the correct direction.
axis movement direction selected with the AXIS
SELECTION key.
0004 External interlock axis exists • As the interlock function has activated‚ release
The external interlock function has activated it before resuming operation.
(the input signal is "OFF") and one of the axes • Check the sequence on the machine side.
has entered the interlock state. • Check for broken wires in the interlock signal
line.
0005 Internal interlock axis exists • The servo OFF function is valid‚ so release it
The internal interlock state has been entered. first.
The absolute position detector axis has been • An axis that can be removed has been issued‚
removed. so perform the correct operations.
A command for the manual/automatic • The command is issued in the same direction
simultaneous valid axis was issued from the as the direction where manual skip turned ON‚
automatic mode. so perform the correct operations.
• During the manual/automatic simultaneous
mode‚ the axis commanded in the automatic
mode became the manual operation axis. Turn
OFF the manual/automatic valid signal for the
commanded axis.
• Turn ON the power again‚ and perform
absolute position initialization.
0006 H/W stroke end axis exists • Move the machine manually.
The stroke end function has activated (the input • Check for broken wires in the stroke end signal
signal is "OFF") and one of the axes is in the wire.
stroke end status. • Check for trouble in the limit switch.

II - 1
 1. List of Alarms
1.1 Operation Alarms

Error No. Details Remedy

0007 S/W stroke end axis exists • Move it manually.
The stored stroke limit I‚ II‚ IIB or IB function • If the stored stroke limit in the parameter is
has activated. incorrectly set‚ correct it.
0008 Chuck/tailstock stroke end ax • Reset the alarm with reset‚ and move the
The chuck/tail-stock barrier function turned ON‚ machine in the reverse direction.
and an axis entered the stroke end state.
0009 Ref point return No. invalid • Execute No. 1 reference position return.
Return to the No. 2 reference position was
performed before return to the No. 1 reference
position was completed.
0019 Sensor signal illegal ON • Turn the tool measurement mode signal input
The sensor signal was already ON when the OFF, and move the axis in a safe direction.
tool measurement mode (TLM) signal was • The operation alarm will turn OFF even when
validated. the sensor signal is turned OFF.
The sensor signal turned ON when there was (Note) When the tool measurement mode signal
no axis movement after the tool measurement input is turned OFF, the axis can be
mode (TLM) signal was validated.
moved in either direction. Pay attention to
The sensor signal turned ON at a position the movement direction.
within 100μm from the final entry start position.
0020 Ref point retract invalid • Execute reference position return
Return to the reference position was performed
before the coordinates had not been
established.
0021 Tool ofs invld after R-pnt • The error is cleared if the operation mode is
Reference position return was performed changed to other than reference position return
during tool retract return, and therefore the tool before the axis performs reference position
compensation amount became invalid after return.
reference position return was completed. • The error is cleared when reference position
return is completed.
• The error is cleared if reset 1 is input or the
emergency stop button is pushed.
0024 R-pnt ret invld at abs pos alm • Reset the absolute position detection alarm‚
A zero point return signal was input during an and then perform zero point return.
absolute position detection alarm.
0025 R-pnt ret invld at zero pt ini • Complete zero point initialization‚ and then
A zero point return signal was input during zero perform zero point return.
point initialization of the absolute position
detection system.
0030 Now skip on • Increase the skip return amount.
The skip signal remains input when the skip
return operation changed to the measurement
operation.
0031 No skip • Check whether the measurement target has
Even though 1st skip was to the correct moved.
position, the 2nd skip could not be found.
0050 Chopping axis R-pnt incomplete • Reset or turn the chopping signal OFF, and
The chopping axis has not completed zero then carry out zero point return.
point return before entering the chopping
mode.
All axes interlock will be applied.

II - 2
 1. List of Alarms
1.1 Operation Alarms

Error No. Details Remedy

0051 Synchronous error excessive • Select the correction mode and move one of
The synchronization error of the master and the axes in the direction in which the errors are
slave axes exceeded the allowable value under reduced.
synchronous control. • Increase the allowable value or reset it to 0
A deviation exceeding the synchronization error (check disabled).
limit value was found with the synchronization • When using simple C-axis synchronous
deviation detection. control, set the contents of the R435 register to
0.
• Check the parameter (#2024 synerr).
0053 No spindle select signal • Turn ON the spindle select signal (SWS)
Synchronous tapping command was issued responding to the tapping spindle before
when the spindle select signals (SWS) for all performing the synchronous tapping command.
spindles were OFF in the multiple-spindle
control II.
0054 No spindle serial connection • Make sure the spindle select signal (SWS) for
Synchronous tapping command was issued the responding spindle is ON.
when the spindle that the spindle select signal • When issuing a command, consider the
(SWS) was ON was not serially connected in machine construction.
the multiple-spindle control II.
0055 Spindle fwd/rvs run para err • Change the value of the parameter #3028
Asynchronous tapping command was issued sprcmm.
when M code of the spindle frd/rvs run
command set by the parameter "#3028
sprcmm" was one of the followings in the
multiple-spindle control II.
• One of M0, M1, M2, M30, M98, M99, M198
• M code No. that commands macro interrupt
signal valid/invalid
0056 Tap pitch/thread number error • Check the pitch/thread number and rotation
The command of the pitch/thread number is not speed of the tapping spindle.
correct in the synchronous tapping command of
the multiple-spindle control II.
The pitch is too small for the spindle rotation
speed.
Thread number is too large for the spindle
rotation speed.
0060 Handle ratio too large • Set a smaller ratio.
Handle ratio is too large for the rapid traverse
rate (or external deceleration speed when
external deceleration is valid).
0065 R-pos offset value illegal • Set the reference position offset value (#2034
At the start of reference position initial setting, rfpofs) to 0, then turn the power ON again to
setting of reference position offset value (#2034 perform reference position initial setting.
rfpofs) is other than 0.
0066 R-pos scan distance exceeded • Check the scale to see if it has dirt or damage.
Reference position could not be established • Check if the servo drive unit supports this
within the maximum scan distance. function.

II - 3
 1. List of Alarms
1.1 Operation Alarms

Error No. Details Remedy

0101 No operation mode • Check for a broken wire in the input mode
signal wire.
• Check for trouble in the mode selector switch.
• Check the sequence program.
0102 Cutting override zero • Set the "cutting feed override" switch to a value
The "cutting feed override" switch on the other than zero to clear the error.
machine operation panel is set to zero. • When the "cutting feed override" switch is set to
The override was set to "0" during a single a value other than zero‚ check for a short circuit
block stop. in the signal wire.
• Check the sequence program.
0103 External feed rate zero • Set "the manual feed speed" switch to a value
"The manual feed speed" switch on the other than zero to release the error.
machine operation panel is set to zero when • If "the manual feed speed" switch is set to a
the machine is in the jog mode or automatic dry value other than zero‚ check for a short circuit
run mode. in the signal wire.
The "Manual feedrate B speed" is set to zero • Check the sequence program.
during the jog mode when manual feedrate B is
valid.
The "each axis manual feedrate B speed" is set
to zero during the jog mode when each axis
manual feedrate B is valid.
0104 F 1-digit feed rate zero • Set the F1-digit feedrate on the setup
The F1-digit feedrate is set to zero when the parameter screen.
F1-digit feed command is being executed.
0105 Spindle stop • Rotate the spindle.
The spindle stopped during the synchronous • If the workpiece is not being cut‚ start dry run.
feed command. • Check for a broken wire in the spindle encoder
cable.
• Check the connections for the spindle encoder
connectors.
• Check the spindle encoder pulse.
• Reconsider the program. (Command, address)
0106 Handle feed ax No. illegal • Check for broken wires in the handle feed axis
An axis not found in the specifications was selection signal wire.
designated for handle feed or the handle feed • Check the sequence program.
axis was not selected. • Check the No. of axes listed in the
specifications.
0107 Spindle rotation speed over • Lower the commanded spindle rotation speed.
The spindle rotation speed exceeded the axis
clamp speed during the thread cutting
command.
0108 Fixed pnt mode feed ax illegal • Check for broken wires in the fixed mode feed
An axis not found in the specifications was axis selection signal wire and fixed point mode
designated for the fixed point mode feed or the feedrate wire.
fixed point mode feedrate is illegal. • Check the fixed point mode feed specifications.
0109 Block start interlock • Check the sequence program.
An interlock signal that locks the start of the
block has been input.
0110 Cutting block start interlock • Check the sequence program.
An interlock signal that locks the start of the
cutting block has been input.

II - 4
 1. List of Alarms
1.1 Operation Alarms

Error No. Details Remedy

0111 Restart switch ON • Search the block to be restarted.
The restart switch was turned ON before the • Turn OFF the restart switch.
restart search was completed, and the manual
mode was selected.
0112 Program check mode • Press the reset button to cancel the program
The automatic start button was pressed during check mode.
program check or in program check mode.
0113 Auto start in buffer correct • Press the automatic start button after buffer
The automatic start button was pressed during correction is completed.
buffer correction.
0115 In reset process • When rewinding the tape‚ wait for the winding
The automatic start button was pressed during to end‚ or press the reset button to stop the
resetting or tape rewinding. winding‚ and then press the automatic start
button.
• During resetting‚ wait for resetting to end‚ and
then press the automatic start button.
0117 Playback not possible • During editing‚ cancel the function by pressing
The playback switch was turned ON during the input or previous screen key‚ and then turn
editing. ON the playback switch.
0118 Turn stop in normal line cntrl • Check the program.
The turning angle at the block joint exceeded • Set the normal line control axis turning speed.
the limit during normal line control. (Parameter "#1523 C_feed")
• Set the C axis turning diameter smaller than the
Normal line control type I arc radius, or check the setting value of the C
The normal line control axis turning speed axis turning diameter.
(#1523 C_feed) has not been set. (Parameter "#8041 C rot. R")
Normal line control type II
When turning in the inside of the arc, the
parameter "#8041 C-rot. R" setting value is
larger than the arc radius.
0120 In synchronous correction mode • Select the handle or manual feed mode.
The synchronous correction mode switch was • Turn OFF the correction mode switch.
pressed in a non-handle mode.
0121 No synchronous control option • Set 0 in register R2589.
The synchronous control system (register
R2589) was set with no synchronous control
option.
0123 Computer link B not possible • Perform the cycle start after resetting is
The cycle start was attempted before resetting completed.
was completed. • Set 0 in "#8109 HOST LINK", and then set 1
An attempt was made to perform computer link again before performing the cycle start.
B operation at the second part system and • The computer link B operation cannot be
following in a multi-part system. performed at the second part system and
following in a multi-part system.
0124 X/Z axes simultaneous prohibit • Turn the inclined axis and basic axis start OFF
The basic axis corresponding to the inclined for both axes. (This also applied for
axis was started simultaneously in the manual manual/automatic simultaneous start.)
mode while the inclined axis control was valid. • Invalidate the basic axis compensation, or
command one axis at a time.

II - 5
 1. List of Alarms
1.1 Operation Alarms

Error No. Details Remedy

0125 Rapid override zero • Set the "rapid traverse override" switch to a
The "rapid traverse override" switch on the value other than zero to clear the error.
machine operation panel is set to zero. • When the "rapid traverse override" switch is set
to a value other than zero, check for a short
circuit in the signal wire.
• Check the sequence program.
0126 Program restart machine lock • Release the machine lock before resuming
Machine lock was applied on the return axis operations.
while manually returning to the restart position.
0127 Rot axis parameter error • Review the rotational axis configuration
The orthogonal coordinate axis name does not parameters.
exist.
The rotary axis name does not exist.
The orthogonal coordinate axis name is
duplicated.
The number of axes that were selected to
change tool length compensation along the tool
axis amount exceeds the maximum number of
axes.
The orthogonal coordinate axis name is that of
the rotary axis name.
0150 Chopping override zero • Check the chopping override (R2530).
The override became "0" while performing the • Check the rapid traverse override (R2502).
chopping operation.
0151 Command axis chopping axis • Reset, or turn OFF the chopping signal. When
A chopping axis movement command was the chopping signal is turned OFF, the axis will
issued from the program during the chopping return to the reference position, and then the
mode. (This alarm will not occur when the program movement command will be executed.
movement amount is commanded as 0.)
(All axes interlock state will be applied.)
0153 Bottom dead center pos. zero • Correctly set the bottom dead center position.
The bottom dead center position is set to the
same position as the upper dead center
position.
0154 Chopping disable for handle ax • Select an axis other than the chopping axis as
Chopping was started when the chopping axis the handle axis, or start chopping after
was selected as the handle axis. changing the mode to another mode.
0160 No speed set out of soft limit • Set the maximum speed for the outside of the
Returned from the outside of the soft limit range soft limit range. (Parameter "#2021 out_f")
for the axis with no maximum speed set for the • Change the soft limit range.
outside of the soft limit range. (Parameter "#2013 OT-" "#2014 OT+")
0170 Ill. op during T tip control • Change to the previous operation mode and
An attempt was made to perform an incorrect reboot.
operation during tool tip center control.
1005 G114.n command illegal • Cancel with G113.
An attempt was made to execute G114.n • Issue the spindle synchronous cancel signal
during execution of G114.n. (Y18B8: SPSYC).
G51.2 was commanded when the G51.2 • Cancel with G50.2.
spindle-spindle polygon machining mode was • Cancel with the spindle-spindle polygon cancel
already entered with a separate part system. signal (YCD1).
1007 Spindle in-use by synchro tap • Cancel synchronized tapping.
The spindle is being used in synchronized
tapping.

II - 6
 1. List of Alarms
1.1 Operation Alarms

Error No. Details Remedy

1026 SP-C ax ctrl runs independntly • Cancel the C axis command.
C axis mode command was issued for polygon • Cancel the polygon machining command.
machining spindle. • Cancel the C axis with servo OFF.
C axis mode command was issued for
synchronized tapping spindle.
Polygon command was issued for
synchronized tapping spindle.
Spindle is being used as spindle/C axis.
1030 Synchronization mismatch • Correct the program so that the M codes
Different M codes were commanded in the two match.
part systems as the synchronization M codes. • Correct the program so that the same
Synchronization with the "!" code was synchronization codes are commanded.
commanded in another part system during M
code synchronization.
Synchronization with the M code was
commanded in another part system during
synchronization with the "!" code.
1031 Multiple C axes select invalid • Check and correct the parameters and
The C axis selection signal was changed when program.
multiple C axes could not be selected.
An axis that cannot be controlled as the
multiple C axes selection was selected.
1032 Tap retract Sp select illegal • Select the spindle for which tap cycle was
Tap return was executed when a different halted before the tap return signal was turned
spindle was selected. Cutting feed will wait until ON.
synchronization is completed.
1033 Sp-Sp polygon cut interlock • Wait for synchronization to end.
Cutting feed will wait until synchronization is
completed.
1034 Mixed sync ctrl prmtr illegal • Check the parameter settings for mixed
Mixed synchronization control exceeding the synchronization control.
number of control axes was attempted.
Mixed synchronization control with duplicated
axis addresses was attempted.
1035 Mixed sync ctrl disable modal • Check the program.
Mixed synchronization was commanded for a
part system in which mixed synchronization
control is disabled as shown below.
• During nose R compensation mode
• During pole coordinate interpolation mode
• During cylindrical interpolation mode
• During balance cut mode
• During fixed cycle machining mode
• During facing turret mirror image

II - 7
 1. List of Alarms
1.1 Operation Alarms

Error No. Details Remedy

1036 Synchro ctrl setting disable • Set the R2589 register to 0.
The synchronous control operation method
selection (R2589 register) was set when the
mode was not the C axis mode.
The synchronous control operation method
selection (R2589 register) was set in the zero
point not set state.
Mirror image disable state • Check the program and parameters.
The external mirror image or parameter mirror
image was commanded during facing turret
mirror image.
1037 Synchro start/cancel disable • Check the program and parameters.
Synchronous control was started or canceled
when synchronous control could not be started
or canceled.
1038 Move cmnd invld to synchro ax • Check the program.
A movement command was issued to a
synchronous axis in synchronous control.
1106 Sp synchro phase calc illegal • Check the program.
The spindle synchronization phase alignment • Check the sequence program.
command was issued while the spindle
synchronization phase calculation request
signal was ON.

(2) Class: M90 Message: Parameter set mode

M90 Messages output when the setup parameter lock function is enabled are displayed.

Error No. Details Remedy

- Setup parameter lock released Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool
The setup parameter lock is released. builder.
Automatic start is disabled when setup
parameters can be set.

II - 8
 1. List of Alarms
1.2 Stop Codes

1.2 Stop Codes

These codes indicate a status that caused the controller to stop for some reason.

(The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)

TUU Message {{{{
Error No.
Message
Class

(1) Class: T01 Cycle start prohibit

This indicates the state where automatic operation cannot be started when attempting to start it from the
stop state.

Error No. Details Remedy

0101 Axis in motion • Try automatic start again after all axes have
Automatic start is not possible as one of the stopped.
axes is moving.
0102 NC not ready • Another alarm has occurred. Check the details
Automatic start is not possible as the NC is not and remedy.
ready.
0103 Reset signal ON • Turn OFF the reset input signal.
Automatic start is not possible as the reset • Check that the reset switch is not ON
signal has been input. constantly due to trouble.
• Check the sequence program.
0104 Auto operation pause signal ON • Check the FEED HOLD switch.
The FEED HOLD switch on the machine • The feed hold switch is the B contact.
operation panel is ON (valid). • Check for broken wires in the feed hold signal
wire.
• Check the sequence program.
0105 H/W stroke end axis exists • If one of the axis' ends is at the stroke end‚
Automatic start is not possible as one of the move the axis manually.
axes is at the stroke end. • Check for broken wire in the stroke end signal
wire.
• Check for trouble in the stroke end limit switch.
0106 S/W stroke end axis exists • Move the axis manually.
Automatic start is not possible as one of the • If an axis is not at the end‚ check the parameter
axes is at the stored stroke limit. details.
0107 No operation mode • Select the automatic operation mode.
The operation mode has not been selected. • Check for broken wires in the automatic
operation mode (memory‚ tape‚ MDl) signal
wire.
0108 Operation mode duplicated • Check for a short circuit in the mode selection
Two or more automatic operation modes are signal wire (memory‚ tape‚ MDl).
selected. • Check for trouble in the switch.
• Check the sequence program.
0109 Operation mode changed • Return to the original automatic operation
The automatic operation mode changed to mode‚ and start automatic start.
another automatic operation mode.

II - 9
 1. List of Alarms
1.2 Stop Codes

Error No. Details Remedy

0110 Tape search execution • Begin automatic start after the tape search is
Automatic start is not possible as tape search is completed.
being executed.
0112 Restart pos. return incomplete • Manually return to the restart position.
Automatic start is not possible as the axis has • Turn the automatic restart valid parameter ON,
not been returned to the restart position. and then execute automatic start.
0113 CNC overheat • The NC controller temperature has exceeded
Automatic start is not possible because a the specified temperature.
thermal alarm (Z53 CNC overheat) has • Take appropriate measures to cool the unit.
occurred.
0115 Cycle st. prohibit(Host comm.) • Execute automatic start after the
Automatic start cannot be executed as the NC communication with the host computer is
is communicating with the host computer. completed.
0116 Cycle st prohibit(Battery alm) • Replace the battery of the NC control unit.
Automatic start cannot be executed because • Contact the service center.
the voltage of the battery inserted in the NC
control unit has dropped.
0117 R-pnt offset value not set • Perform the initial reference position setting,
As the reference position offset value has not then set the reference position offset value
been set, automatic operation cannot be used. (#2034 rfpofs).
0138 In absolute position alarm • Reset the absolute position detection alarm‚
A start signal was input during an absolute and then input the start signal.
position detection alarm.
0139 In abs posn initial setting • Complete zero point initialization before
A start signal was input while initializing the inputting the start signal.
absolute position detector's zero point.
0180 Cycle start prohibit • Set "0" to "#1164 ATS" when the servo auto
Automatic start is disabled in servo auto turning turning is not executed.
valid.
0190 Cycle start prohibit • Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool
Automatic start is disabled because setup builder.
parameters can be set.
0191 Cycle start prohibit • Cause automatic start after file deletion or
Automatic start was caused during file deletion writing is completed.
or writing.
0193 Cycle st. prohibit (Term exp'd) • Enter the decryption code and turn the power
Automatic start is disabled because the valid ON again.
term has been expired.

II - 10
 1. List of Alarms
1.2 Stop Codes

(2) Class: T02 Feed hold

The feed hold state been entered due to a condition in the automatic operation.

Error No. Details Remedy

0201 H/W stroke end axis exists • Manually move the axis away from the stroke
An axis is at the stroke end. end limit switch.
• The machining program must be corrected.
0202 S/W stroke end axis exists • Manually move the axis.
An axis is at the stored stroke limit. • The machining program must be corrected.
0203 Reset signal ON • The program execution position has returned to
The reset signal has been input. the start of the program. Execute automatic
operation from the start of the machining
program.
0204 Auto operation pause signal ON • Resume automatic operation by pressing the
The FEED HOLD switch is ON. "CYCLE START" switch.
0205 Operation mode changed • Return to the original automatic operation
The operation mode changed to another mode mode‚ and resume automatic operation by
during automatic operation. pressing the "CYCLE START" switch.
0206 Acc/dec time cnst too large • Increase the set value of the parameter "#1206
The acceleration and deceleration time G1bF".
constants are too large. (This problem occurs • Decrease the set value of the parameter
at the same time as system alarm Z59.) "#1207 G1btL".
• Lower the cutting speed.
0215 Abs posn detect alarm occurred • Reset the absolute position detection alarm.
An absolute position detection alarm occurred.

(3) Class: T03 Block stop

This indicates that automatic operation stopped after executing one block of the program.

Error No. Details Remedy

0301 Single block stop signal ON • Automatic operation can be resumed by turning
The SINGLE BLOCK switch on the machine the CYCLE START switch ON.
operation panel is ON.
The single block or machine lock switch
changed.
0302 Block stop cmnd in user macro • Automatic operation can be resumed by turning
The block stop command was issued in the the CYCLE START switch ON.
user macro program.
0303 Operation mode changed • Return to the original automatic operation
The automatic mode changed to another mode‚ and resume automatic operation by
automatic mode. turning the CYCLE START switch ON.
0304 MDI completed • Set MDI again‚ and turn the CYCLE START
The last block of MDI was completed. switch ON to resume MDl operation.
0305 Block start interlock • Check the sequence program.
The interlock signal that locks the block start is
entered.
0306 Cutting blck start interlock • Check the sequence program.
The interlock signal that locks the block cutting
start is entered.
0310 Inclined Z offset change • Automatic operation can be restarted by turning
Whether to validate the offset of the inclined ON the CYCLE START switch.
Z-axis switched during program operation.

II - 11
 1. List of Alarms
1.2 Stop Codes

(4) Class: T04 Collation stop

This indicates that collation stop was applied during automatic operation.

Error No. Details Remedy

0401 Collation stop • Automatic operation can be restarted with
Collation stop occurred. automatic start.

(5) Class: T10 Fin wait

This indicates the operation state when an alarm did not occur during automatic operation‚ and nothing
seems to have happened.

Error No. Details

0††† The error number is displayed while each of the completion wait modes listed in the table below is
ON. It disappears when the mode is canceled.

Alarm Unclamp In dwell Alarm Door Waiting Alarm Waiting Waiting Waiting Waiting
No. signal execu- No. open for No. for for for rapid for MSTB
wait tion spindle spindle cutting traverse comp-
position orienta- speed decelera- letion
to be tion to decelera- tion
(Note 2) (Note 1) looped complete tion

0 0 0
1 × 1 × 1 ×
8 × 8 × 2 ×
9 × × 9 × × 3 × ×
4 ×
5 × ×
6 × ×
7 × × ×
8 ×
9 × ×
A × ×
B × × ×
C × ×
D × × ×
E × × ×
F × × × ×

(Note 1) This mode is enabled by the door interlock function.

(Note 2) The system is waiting for the index table indexing unclamp signal to turn ON or OFF

II - 12
 1. List of Alarms
1.3 Servo/Spindle Alarms

1.3 Servo/Spindle Alarms

This section describes alarms occurred by the errors in the servo system such as the drive unit‚ motor and
encoder, etc. The alarm message‚ alarm No. and axis name will display on the alarm message screen. The
axis where the alarm occurred and the alarm No. will also display on the servo monitor screen and the spindle
monitor screen respectively. If several alarms have occurred‚ up to two errors per axis will display on the
servo monitor screen and the spindle monitor screen respectively.
(Note 1) The alarm class and alarm reset class combinations are preset.
Alarm class Alarm reset class Resetting methods
S01 PR After removing the cause of the alarm, reset the
alarm by turning the NC power ON again.
S02 PR After correcting the parameter, reset the alarm by
turning ON the NC power again.
S03 NR After removing the cause of the alarm, reset the
alarm by inputting the NC RESET key.
S04 AR After removing the cause of the alarm, reset the
alarm by turning the drive unit power ON again.
S51 - This is cleared if a correct value is set.
S52 - -

(Note 2) The resetting method may change according to the alarm class.
For example, even if "S03 SERVO ALARM: NR" is displayed, it may be necessary to turn the NC
power ON again.

(The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)

S{{ Message : xx ΔΔΔΔ †
Servo : Axis name
Axis name
Spindle : "S", "T", "M", "N"
Alarm No. (Parameter No.)
Alarm reset class
Message
Alarm class

(1) Class: S01/S03/S04 Servo alarm

Alarm No. Message Meaning
0010 Insufficient voltage Insufficient PN bus voltage was detected in main circuit.
0011 Axis selection error Setting of the axis No. selection switch is incorrect.
0012 Memory error 1 A CPU error or an internal memory error was detected during the
power ON self-check.
0013 Software processing Software processing has not finished within the specified time.
error 1
0014 Software processing Software processing has not finished within the specified time.
error 2
0015 Memory error 2 A CPU error or an internal memory error was detected during the
power ON self-check.
0016 Magnet pole pos An error was detected in the magnetic pole detection for controlling
detect error the motor.
0017 A/D converter error An error was detected in the A/D converter for detecting current FB.
0018 Motor side dtc: Init Initial communication with the motor end detector failed.
commu err

II - 13
1. List of Alarms
1.3 Servo/Spindle Alarms

Alarm No. Message Meaning

0019 Detector commu err Initial communication with the motor end detector on master axis
in syn cont failed when setting closed-loop current synchronous control. Or the
communication was interrupted.
001A Machine side dtc: Initial communication with the linear scale or the ball screw end
Init comu er detector failed.
001B Machine side dtc: The machine side detector detected an error.
Error 1 As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the separate table
001C Machine side dtc: (1).
Error 2
001D Machine side dtc:
Error 3
001E Machine side dtc:
Error 4
001F Machine side dtc: An error was detected in communication data with the linear scale or
Commu error the ball screw end detector. Or the communication was interrupted.
0020 Motor side dtc: No When an excessive error alarm occurred, no signal from the motor
signal side detector was detected.
0021 Machine side dtc: When an excessive error alarm occurred, no signal from the
No signal machine side detector was detected.
0023 Excessive speed A difference between the speed command and speed feedback was
error continuously exceeding 50 r/min for longer than the setting time.
0024 Grounding The motor power cable is in contact with FG (Frame Ground).
0025 Absolute position The absolute position was lost, as the backup battery voltage
data lost dropped in the absolute position detector.
0026 Unused axis error A power module error occurred in the axis whose axis No. selection
switch was set to "F"(free axis).
0027 Machine side dtc: The machine side detector detected an error.
Error 5 As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the separate table
(1).
0028 Machine side dtc:
Error 6
0029 Machine side dtc:
Error 7
002A Machine side dtc:
Error 8
002B Motor side dtc: The motor side detector (linear scale in the case of linear motor)
Error 1 detected an error.
002C Motor side dtc: As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the separate table
Error 2 (1).
002D Motor side dtc:
Error 3
002E Motor side dtc:
Error 4
002F Motor side dtc: An error was detected in communication data with the motor end
Commu error detector or with the linear scale of a linear servo system. Or the
communication was interrupted.
0030 Over regeneration Over-regeneration detection level became over 100%. The
regenerative resistor is overloaded.
0031 Overspeed The motor was detected to rotate at a speed exceeding the
allowable speed. (In the case of linear motor, it was detected to
move at a speed exceeding the allowable speed.)

II - 14
1. List of Alarms
1.3 Servo/Spindle Alarms

Alarm No. Message Meaning

0032 Power module Overcurrent protection function in the power module has started its
overcurrent operation.
0033 Overvoltage PN bus voltage in main circuit exceeded the allowable value.
0034 NC-DRV commu: An error was detected in the data received from the CNC.
CRC error
0035 NC command error The travel command data that was received from the CNC was
excessive.
0036 NC-DRV commu: The communication with the CNC was interrupted.
Commu error
0037 Initial parameter An incorrect parameter was detected among the parameters
error received from the CNC at the power ON.
0038 NC-DRV commu: An error was detected in the communication frames received from
Protocol error 1 the CNC.
0039 NC-DRV commu: An error was detected in the axis information data received from the
Protocol error 2 CNC.
003A Overcurrent Excessive current was detected in the motor drive current.
003B Power module Thermal protection function in the power module has started its
overheat operation.
003C Regeneration circuit An error was detected in the regenerative transistor or in the
error regenerative resistor.
003D Spindle speed The spindle motor failed to rotate faster than 45 r/min, even when
blocked the max. torque command was given.
003E Spindle speed 1. The spindle motor speed feedback was detected to be
overrun accelerated exceeding the commanded speed.
2. The spindle motor was detected to be rotated at a speed
exceeding the parameter value, while the speed command was
"0" (including the case of operation stoppage during the position
control).
0040 Detector select unit An error was detected in the motor switching signals that were
swtch err received from the detector selection unit, while controlling one drive
unit and two motors.
0041 Detector select unit An error was detected in the communication with the detector
commu err selection unit, while controlling one drive unit and two motors.
0042 Feedback error 1 An error was detected in the feedback signals of the position
detector in a servo system, or in PLG's feedback signals in a spindle
system.
0043 Feedback error 2 Excessive difference was detected in position data between the
motor end detector and the machine end detector in a servo system.
In a spindle system, an error was detected in the encoder feedback
signals.
0044 Inappropriate coil When using a coil changeover motor, C-axis was controlled while
for C axis the high-speed coil was selected.
0045 Fan stop A cooling fan built in the drive unit stopped, and the loads on the unit
exceeded the specified value.
0046 Motor overheat Thermal protection function of the motor or in the detector, has
started its operation.
0047 Regenerative Thermal protection function of the regenerative resistor, has started
resistor overheat its operation.

II - 15
1. List of Alarms
1.3 Servo/Spindle Alarms

Alarm No. Message Meaning

0048 Motor side dtc: The motor side detector (linear scale in the case of linear motor)
Error 5 detected an error.
0049 Motor side dtc: As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the separate
Error 6 table (1).
004A Motor side dtc:
Error 7
004B Motor side dtc:
Error 8
004C Current err at mag A current error was detected in the IPM spindle motor when the
pole detect initial magnetic pole was being formed.
004E NC command mode The mode outside the specification was input in spindle control
error mode selection.
004F Instantaneous The power was momentarily interrupted.
power interrupt
0050 Overload 1 Overload detection level became over 100%. The motor or the
drive unit is overloaded.
0051 Overload 2 Current command of more than 95% of the unit's max. current was
being continuously given for longer than 1 second in a servo system.
In a spindle system, current command of more than 95% of the
motor's max. current was being continuously given for longer than 1
second.
0052 Excessive error 1 A difference between the actual and theoretical motor positions
during servo ON exceeded the setting value.
0053 Excessive error 2 A difference between the actual and theoretical motor positions
during servo OFF exceeded the setting value.
0054 Excessive error 3 When an excessive error 1 occurred, detection of the motor current
failed.
0055 External emergency There is no contactor shutoff command, even after 30 seconds has
stop error passed since the external emergency stop was input.
0058 Collision detection When collision detection function was valid, the disturbance torque
1: G0 in rapid traverse (G0) exceeded the collision detection level.
0059 Collision detection When collision detection function was valid, the disturbance torque
1: G1 in cutting feed (G1) exceeded the collision detection level.
005A Collision detection 2 When collision detection function was valid, the command torque
reached the max. Motor torque.
005B Sfty obsrvation: In safety monitoring mode, the command speed was detected to
Cmd spd err exceed the safe speed.
005C Orientation After orientation was achieved, a difference between the command
feedback error and feedback exceeded the parameter setting.
005D Sfty obsrvation: In safety monitoring mode, the door state signal from the NC and the
Door stat err same signal from the drive unit don't match. Otherwise, door open
state was detected in normal mode.
005E Sfty obsrvation: FB In safety monitoring mode, the motor speed was detected to exceed
speed err the safe speed.
005F External contactor A contact of the external contactor is welding. Or the contactor fails
error to be ON during ready ON.
0060 Pw sply:Inst pw It was detected that the 24VDC power supply lowered.
interpt(DC24V)
0061 Pw sply: Pwr Overcurrent protection function in the power module has started its
module overcurnt operation.

II - 16
1. List of Alarms
1.3 Servo/Spindle Alarms

Alarm No. Message Meaning

0062 Pw sply: Frequency The input power supply frequency increased above the specification
error range.
0063 Pw sply: The supplementary regenerative transistor is being ON.
Supplement regen
err
0065 Pw sply: Rush relay A resistor relay for rush short circuit fails to be ON.
error
0067 Pw sply: Phase An open-phase condition was detected in input power supply circuit.
interruption
0068 Pw sply: Watchdog The system does not operate correctly.
0069 Pw sply: Grounding The motor power cable is in contact with FG (Frame Ground).
006A Pw sply: Ext A contact of the external contactor is welding.
contactor weld
006B Pw sply: Rush relay A resistor relay for rush short circuit fails to be OFF.
welding
006C Pw sply: Main An error was detected in charging operation of the main circuit
circuit error capacitor.
006D Pw sply: Parameter The capacity of the power supply unit and the regenerative resistor
error type that was set in the parameter are mismatched.
006E Pw sply: Memory An error was detected in the internal memory or A/D converter.
error/AD error
006F Power supply error No power supply is connected to the drive unit, or a communication
error was detected.
0070 Pw sply: Ext A mismatch of the external emergency stop input and CNC
emergency stp err emergency stop input continued for 30 seconds.
0071 Pw sply: Instant pwr The power was momentarily interrupted.
interrupt
0072 Pw sply: Fan stop A cooling fan built in the power supply unit stopped, and overheat
occurred in the power module.
0073 Pw sply: Over Over-regeneration detection level became over 100%. The
regeneration regenerative resistor is overloaded. This alarm cannot be reset for
15 min from the occurrence. Leave the drive system emergized for
more than 15 min, then turn the power ON to reset the alarm.
0074 Pw sply: Regen Thermal protection function of the regenerative resistor, has started
resist ovheat its operation.
0075 Pw sply: L+ and L- bus voltage in main circuit exceeded the allowable value.
Overvoltage As the voltage between L+ and L- is high immedialtey after this
alarm, another alarm may occur if this alarm is reset in a short time.
Wait more than 5 min before resetting so that the voltage drops.
0076 Pw sply: Ext EMG As for the external emergency stop settings, the setting on the rotary
stop set err switch and the parameter setting are mismatched.
0077 Pw sply: Power Thermal protection function in the power module has started its
module overheat operation.
007F Drv unit pw supply A mismatch of program mode selection was detected. Turn the
restart req drive unit power ON again.
0087 Drive unit Answers from a drive unit connected to the power supply stopped.
communication
error
0088 Watchdog The system does not operate correctly.

II - 17
 1. List of Alarms
1.3 Servo/Spindle Alarms

Separate table (1)

Alarm number when motor
002B 002C 002D 002E
end is connected
Alarm number when machine
001B 001C 001D 001E
end is connected
OSA105 -
LED error
Detector type OSA166 CPU error Data error -
MDS-B-HR - -
A CPU initial error Deterioration of the An error was
Meaning of alarm -
was detected. LED was detected. detected in the data.

Alarm number when motor

0048 0049 004A 004B
end is connected
Alarm number when machine
0027 0028 0029 002A
end is connected
OSA105 - - - -
OSA166 - - - -
Detector type
MDS-B-HR Communication
Connection error Judgment error Magnetic error
error
An error was An error was The linear scale An error was
detected in the detected in the analog frequency detected in the
Meaning of alarm connection with the communication with cycle could not be magnetic data for
analog output linear the serial output judged. the linear servo
scale. linear scale. system.

Alarm number when motor

002B 002C 002D 002E
end is connected
Alarm number when machine
001B 001C 001D 001E
end is connected
TS5690 - -
Detector type Initialization error Waveform error
TS5691 - -
An initialization error An error was
was detected when detected in the A, B,
Meaning of alarm - -
the power was Z analog signal
turned ON. waveform.

Alarm number when motor

0048 0049 004A 004B
end is connected
Alarm number when machine
0027 0028 0029 002A
end is connected
TS5690 - - Relative position
Detector type Overspeed
TS5691 - - data error
The tolerable An error was
rotation speed was detected in the
Meaning of alarm - -
exceeded. relative position
data.

II - 18
 1. List of Alarms
1.3 Servo/Spindle Alarms

Alarm number when motor

002B 002C 002D 002E
end is connected
Alarm number when machine
001B 001C 001D 001E
end is connected
Manufacturer
Detector type
name
AT342 Photo-electric type,
AT343 Mitsutoyo static capacity data
mismatch
AT543
LC191M ROM/RAM error
Initialization error EEPROM error Relative/absolute
LC491M
position data
RCN723 Heidenhain mismatch
RCN223
ERM280 - -
MJ831 Sony - - - -
Faulty mounting Detection position
ADB-20J60 MHI - Scale disconnected
accuracy deviated
Futaba
FMD Denshi - - - -
Kogyo

Alarm number when motor

0048 0049 004A 004B
end is connected
Alarm number when machine
0027 0028 0029 002A
end is connected
Manufacturer
Detector type
name
AT342
Photo-electric type Static capacity type Photo-electric type
AT343 Mitsutoyo
overspeed error error
AT543
LC191M
CPU error
LC491M Absolute position
data error Absolute position
RCN723 Heidenhain Overspeed
data error
RCN223
ERM280 -
MJ831 Sony - - - Encoder error
ADB-20J60 MHI - - Gain fault Phase fault
Futaba
FMD Denshi - - Waveform error Excessive speed
Kogyo

II - 19
 1. List of Alarms
1.3 Servo/Spindle Alarms

(2) Class: S02 Message: Initial parameter error

An error was found in the parameters transmitted from the controller to the drive unit when the power
was turned ON.
Remove the cause of the alarm, and then reset the alarm by turning the controller power OFF once.
Alarm
Details Remedy
No.
2201 The servo parameter setting data is illegal. Check the descriptions for the appropriate servo
to The alarm No. is the No. of the servo parameter parameters and correct them.
2264 where the error occurred.
2301 The number of constants to be used in the Check that all the related parameters are
following functions is too large: specified correctly.
• Electronic gears sv001:PC1, sv002:PC2, sv003:PGN1
• Position loop gain sv018:PIT, sv019:RNG1, sv020:RNG2
• Speed feedback conversion
2302 When high-speed serial incremental detector Check that all the related parameters are
(OSE104, OSE105) is connected, parameters for specified correctly.
absolute position are set to ON. sv017:SPEC, sv025:MTYP
Set the parameters for absolute position
detection to OFF.
To detect an absolute position, replace the
incremental specification detector with an
absolute position detector.
2303 No servo option is found. Check that all the related parameters are
The closed loop (including the ball screw- specified correctly.
end detector) or dual feedback control is an sv025:MTYP/pen
optional function. sv017:SPEC/dfbx
2304 No servo option is found. Check that all the related parameters are
The SHG control is an optional function. specified correctly.
sv057:SHGC
sv058:SHGCsp
2305 No servo option is found. Check that all the related parameters are
The adaptive filtering is an optional function. specified correctly.
sv027:SSF1/aflt
13001 Parameter error Check the descriptions for the appropriate
to The spindle parameter setting data is illegal. spindle parameters and correct them.
13256 The alarm No. is the No. of the spindle Refer to Alarm No.37 in Spindle Drive
parameter where the error occurred. Maintenance Manual.

(3) Class: S51 Message: Parameter error

This warning is displayed if a parameter outside the tolerance range is set.
Illegal settings will be ignored.
This alarm will be reset when a correct value is set.
Alarm
Details Remedy
No.
2201 Servo parameter setting data is illegal. Check the descriptions for the appropriate servo
to The alarm No. is the No. of the servo parameter parameters and correct them.
2264 where the warning occurred.
13001 Spindle parameter setting data is illegal. Check the descriptions for the appropriate
to The alarm No. is the No. of the spindle spindle parameters and correct them.
13256 parameter where the warning occurred. Refer to Spindle Drive Maintenance Manual.

II - 20
 1. List of Alarms
1.3 Servo/Spindle Alarms

(4) Class: S52 Servo warning

Displays servo and spindle tool warnings.
Alarm No. Message Meaning
0093 Init abs pos fluctuation The position data have fluctuated during the absolute position
initializing.
0096 Scale feedback error An excessive deviation was detected between the motor end
detector and MP scale feedback data in a MP scale absolute
position detection system.
0097 Scale offset error An error was detected in the offset data received from the MP scale
in a MP scale absolute position detection system.
009B Detector converting An error was detected in the shift distance of the magnetic pole in a
unit: Magnetic pole shift linear servo system.
warning
009E Absolute position An error was detected in the revolution counter of the absolute
detector: Revolution position detector. The absolute position data cannot be
counter error compensated.
009F Battery voltage drop The battery voltage that is supplied to the absolute position detector
dropped. The absolute position data is retained.
00A6 Fan stop warning A cooling fan built in the drive unit stopped.
00A8 Turret indexing warning The designated position shift amount of turret indexing is outside
the setting range.
00A9 Orientation feedback As an orientation feedback error occurred, the retrial has been
warning conducted.
00E0 Overregeneration Over-regeneration detection level exceeded 80%.
warning
00E1 Overload warning Overload detection level exceeded 80%.
00E2 Continuous high-speed The motor was continuously rotated at a speed exceeding the rated
revolution warning speed.
00E3 Absolute position Deviation between the absolute and relative position data was
counter warning detected.
00E4 Set parameter warning An incorrect parameter was detected among the parameters
received from the CNC.
00E6 Control axis Control axis detachment was commanded.
detachment warning
00E7 In NC emergency stop Emergency stop was input from the CNC.
state
00E8 Power supply: Over Regeneration that are beyond the power supply limitation has
supplementary frequently occurred.
regeneration frequency
00E9 Instantaneous power The power was momentarily interrupted.
interruption warning
00EA In external emergency External emergency stop signal was input.
stop state
00EB Power supply: Over Over-regeneration detection level exceeded 80%.
regeneration warning
00EE Pw sply: Fan stop A cooling fan built in the power supply unit stopped.
warning

II - 21
 1. List of Alarms
1.4 MCP Alarm

1.4 MCP Alarm

An error has occurred in the drive unit and other interfaces. (The bold characters are the messages displayed
on the screen.)

YUU Message {{{{ {{{{

Alarm No.
Error No.
Message
Class

II - 22
 1. List of Alarms
1.4 MCP Alarm

(1) Class: Y02 System alarm

An error occurred in the data transmitted between the MCP and drive unit after the power was turned
ON.

Error No. Details Remedy

0050 System alm: Process time over The software or hardware may be damaged.
Contact the service center.
0051 Alarm No. A communication error has occurred between the
SV commu er: CRC error 1 controller and drive unit.
0000 • Take measures against noise.
(10 times/910.2 ms)
• Check that the communication cable connector
SV commu er: CRC error 2 between the controller and drive unit and one
0001
(2 continuous times) between the drive units are tight.
SV commu er: Recv timing err • Check whether the communication cable
0002 between the controller and drive unit and one
(2 continuous times)
between the drive units are disconnected.
xy03 SV commu er: Data ID error • A drive unit may be faulty. Take a note of the
(2 continuous times) 7-segment LED contents of each drive unit and
x: Channel No. (0 to) report to the Service Center.
y: Drive unit rotary switch No. • Update the drive unit software version.
(0 to)
xy04 SV commu er: Recv frame No.
(2 continuous times)
x: Channel No. (0 to)
y: Number of reception frame -1
(0 to)
x005 SV commu er: Commu error
(No error classification)
x: Channel No. (0 to)
x006 SV commu er: Connect error
x: Channel No. (0 to)
xy20 SV commu er: Init commu error
The drive unit could not shift to the
initial communication run time and
stopped.
x: Channel No. (0 to)
y: Drive unit rotary switch No.
(0 to)
xy30 SV commu er: Node detect error
No response from drive unit to the
request from NC when setting
network configuration.
x: Channel No. (0 to)
y: Station No. (0 to)
xy31 SV commu er: Commu not
support
Drive unit's software version
doesn't support the
communication mode that the
controller requires.
x: Channel No. (0 to)
y: Station No. (0 to)

(Note) When two or more "Y02 System alarms" occur at the same time, only the alarm which occurs first is
displayed.

II - 23
 1. List of Alarms
1.4 MCP Alarm

(2) Class: Y03 Message: Drive unit unequipped

The drive unit is not correctly connected.

Error No. Details Remedy

Alphabet Servo axis drive unit not mounted Check the drive unit mounting state.
(axis • Check the end of the cable wiring.
name) • Check the cable for broken wires.
1 to 4 PLC axis drive unit not mounted • Check the connector insertion.
• The drive unit input power is not being input.
S No.1 spindle axis drive unit not mounted • The drive unit axis No. switch is illegal.
T No.2 spindle axis drive unit not mounted
M No.3 spindle axis drive unit not mounted
N No.4 spindle axis drive unit not mounted

(3) Class : Y05 Message: Initial parameter error

Details Remedy
There is a problem in the value set for the number of axes or Check the value set for the corresponding
the number of part systems. parameters.
#1001 SYS_ON
#1002 axisno
#1039 spinno, etc.

(4) Class: Y06 Message: mcp_no setting error

There are differences in the MCP and axis parameters when the NC power is turned ON.

Error No. Details Remedy

0001 There is a skipped number in the channels. Check the values set for the following
parameters.
0002 The random layout setting is duplicated.
#1021 mcp_no
0003 The drive unit fixed setting "0000" and random #3031 smcp_no
layout setting "∗∗∗∗" are both set.
0004 The spindle/C axis "#1021 mcp_no" and "#3031
smcp_no" are not set to the same values.
0005 A random layout is set for the "#1154 pdoor" =1
two-part system.
0006 The channel No. parameter is not within the
setting range.

II - 24
 1. List of Alarms
1.4 MCP Alarm

(5) Class: Y07 Message: Too many axes connected

The number of connected axes exceeds the number allowed in the system.

(Alarm No.)

0 0

Exceeded number of axes

at drive unit interface channel 1
Exceeded number of axes
at drive unit interface channel 2

Alarm No. Details Remedy

0000 The number of axes connected to each Remove connected axes from the channel
to channel exceeds the maximum number of whose alarm No. is other than 0 for the
00FF connectable axes. number displayed as the alarm No. Keep the
The exceeded number of axes per channel number of connected axes to or less than the
is displayed as alarm No. maximum that can be connected.
This alarm occurs when the drive unit is
connected only with the 2nd channel without
connecting with the 1st channel.
(Note 1) The number of axes is limited per each drive unit interface channel.
(Note 2) Maximum number of axes that can be connected differs depending on whether or not an
expansion unit is available or the setting of "#11012 16 axes for 1ch". The maximum number of
connectable axes is as shown below.
Maximum number of axes to be connected
Extension unit #11012 16 axes for 1ch
(Per 1 channel)
Yes 0/1
8 axes
0
No
1 16 axes
(Note 3) If this alarm occurs, the alarm "Y03 Message: Drive unit unequipped" will not occur.
(Note 4) This alarm is displayed taking precedence over the alarm "Y08 Too many drive units connected"
and "Y09 Too many axisno connected".

II - 25
 1. List of Alarms
1.4 MCP Alarm

(6) Class: Y08 Message: Too many drive units connected

The number of connected drive units exceeds the number allowed in the system.

(Alarm No.)

0 0

Exceeded number of drive units

at drive unit interface channel 1

Exceeded number of drive units

at drive unit interface channel 2

Alarm No. Details Remedy

0000 The number of drive units connected to each Remove drive units from the channel whose
to channel exceeds 8. alarm No. is other than 0 for the number
00FF The exceeded number of drive units per displayed as the alarm No. Keep the number
channel is displayed as alarm No. of connected drive units to 8 or less.
(Note 1) The drive unit is not counted when all the axes connected to it are invalid.
(Note 2) If this alarm occurs, the alarm "Y03 Message: Drive unit unequipped" will not occur.
(Note 3) The alarm "Y07 Too many axes connected" and "Y09 Too many axisno connected" are
displayed taking precedence over this alarm.

II - 26
 1. List of Alarms
1.4 MCP Alarm

(7) Class: Y09 Message: Too many axisno connected

The connected axes No. (drive unit's rotary switch No.) is bigger than the No. allowed in the system.

(Alarm No.)

0 0

"1" when the axis No. at drive unit interface channel 1

is too big

"1" when the axis No. at drive unit interface channel 2

is too big

Alarm No. Details Remedy

0000 The No. of the axis (drive unit's rotary switch For the channel whose alarm No. is 1, keep
to No.) connected to each channel is bigger the axis No. (drive unit's rotary switch No.)
0011 than the No. allowed. not bigger than the No. allowed.
(Note 1) The axis No. is limited per each drive unit interface channel.
(Note 2) The biggest allowed connected axis No. differs depending on whether or not an expansion unit
is available or the setting of "#11012 16 axes for 1ch". The biggest connectable axis No. is as
shown below.

Highest allowed connected axis No.

Extension unit #11012 16 axes for 1ch
(Per 1 channel)
Yes 0/1
0 to 7
No 0
1 0 to F
(Note 3) If this alarm occurs, the alarm "Y03 Message: Drive unit unequipped" will not occur.
(Note 4) This alarm is displayed taking precedence over the alarm "Y08 Too many drive units
connected".
(Note 5) The alarm "Y07 Too many axes connected" is displayed taking precedence over this alarm.

II - 27
 1. List of Alarms
1.4 MCP Alarm

(8) Class: Y20 Safety observation alarm

When this alarm is output, emergency stop mode is applied.
Refer to "remedy" of each alarm as to how to cancel the alarm.
Error No. Alarm No. Details Remedy
0001 Axis name Parameter compare error The NC or the servo drive unit may be
The speed monitoring parameter damaged.
in the NC and the parameter Contact the service center.
transmitted to the drive unit are not
matched.
The name of the axis with an error
is displayed.
0002 Axis name Sfty obsrvation: Cmd spd err Check the speed monitoring parameter
The speed exceeding the speed and the user PLC.
set with the parameter was Restart the NC.
commanded during the speed
monitoring mode.
The name of the axis with an error
is displayed.
0003 Axis name Sfty obsrvation: FB pos err The NC or the servo drive unit may be
The commanded position damaged.
transmitted to the servo drive unit Contact the service center.
from NC and the feedback position
to be received from the servo drive
unit are totally different during the
speed monitoring mode.
The name of the axis with an error
is displayed.
0004 Axis name Sfty obsrvation: FB speed err Check the speed observation parameter
Actual rotation speed of the motor and the user PLC.
is exceeding the speed set with Restart the NC.
speed monitoring parameter
during the speed monitoring mode.
The name of the axis with an error
is displayed.
0005 Door No. Door signal: Input mismatch Check the cable.
Door state signals on the NC side Check the door switch.
and the drive side do not match. It Restart the NC.
may be caused by the followings:
• Cable disconnection
• Damaged door switch
• Damaged NC or servo drive unit
0006 Door No. No spd obsv mode in door open Check the user PLC.
The door open state was detected Restart the NC.
when the speed monitoring mode
was invalid.
The causes may be same as the
ones for 0005 (Door signal: Input
mismatch). Also the user PLC may
not be correct.

II - 28
 1. List of Alarms
1.4 MCP Alarm

Error No. Alarm No. Details Remedy

0007 Axis name Speed obsv: Para incompatible Change the relevant parameters so that
Two speed monitoring parameters the two speed monitoring parameters
are not matched at the rising edge match.
of the speed monitoring mode Restart the NC.
signal.
The name of the axis with an error
is displayed.
0008 Contactor Contactor welding detected Make sure that contactor's auxiliary b
No. Contactor welding was detected. contact signal is output correctly to the
device set on "#1380 MC_dp1" and
"#1381 MC_dp2".
If welding, replace the contactor.
Restart the NC.
0009 - No spec: Safety observation Turn OFF the servo parameter SV113/bitF,
The servo parameter and the the spindle parameter SP229/bitF and the
spindle parameter of the speed spindle type servo parameter SV113/bitF.
monitor are set for a system with Then, restart the NC.
no safety observation option.
0010 - SDIO connector input volt err Check the wiring. Supply 24VDC power to
24VDC power is not supplied to the SDIO connector.
SDIO connector correctly. (SDIO Restart the NC.
4A pin supply voltage was dropped
to 16V or less, or 1ms or more
instant power interrupt was
detected.)
In this case, "Pw sply:Inst pw
interpt(DC24V)" alarm occurs
because the contactor control
output signal cannot be controlled.
This state remains until restarting
the NC even if the cause of the
alarm has been removed.

(9) Class: y21 Safety observation warning

The warning will be cancelled when the cause of the warning is removed.
Error No. Alarm No. Details Remedy
0001 Axis name Speed obsv signal: Speed over When decelerated, the warning will be
The speed exceeds the safety removed, and the speed monitor will be
speed limit when the speed started.
monitoring mode signal is ON.
The name of the axis with an error
is displayed.

II - 29
 1. List of Alarms
1.4 MCP Alarm

(10) Class: Y51 Parameter error

An error occurred in a parameter that causes an alarm while the control axis was operating.

Error No. Details Remedy

0001 Parameter G0tL illegal • Check "#2004 G0tL".
The time constant has not been set or the
setting exceeded the setting range.
0002 Parameter G1tL illegal • Check "#2007 G1tL".
The time constant has not been set or the
setting exceeded the setting range.
0003 Parameter G0t1 illegal • Check "#2005 G0t1".
The time constant has not been set or the
setting exceeded the setting range.
0004 Parameter G1t1 illegal • Check "#2008 G1t1".
The time constant has not been set or the
setting exceeded the setting range.
0009 Parameter grid space illegal • Check "#2029 grspc".
0012 Parameter stapt1-4 illegal • Check spindle parameters" #3017 stapt1" to
The time constant has not been set or the "#3020 stapt4".
setting exceeded the setting range.
0015 Parameter skip_tL illegal • Check "#2102 skip_tL".
The time constant has not been set or the
setting exceeded the setting range.
0016 Parameter skip_t1 illegal • Check "#2103 skip_t1".
The time constant has not been set or the
setting exceeded the setting range.
0017 Parameter G0bdcc illegal • Check "#1205 G0bdcc".
"#1205 G0bdcc" for the 2nd part system is set
to acceleration/deceleration before G0
interpolation.
0018 OMR-II parameter error • Check the related parameter settings.
The OMR-II related parameter settings are
incorrect. In this case, the OMR-II is disabled.
0101 Values of PC1/PC2 too large • Check "#2201 PC1" and "#2202 PC2".
The PC1 and PC2 settings used for the rotary
axis are too large.

II - 30
 1. List of Alarms
1.4 MCP Alarm

(11) Class: Y90 Message: No spindle signal

(Alarm No.) Z open B open A open

Alarm No. phase phase phase

0 0 1 ×
No.1 spindle
2 ×
No.2 spindle
3 × ×
4 ×
No.3 spindle
5 × ×
No.4 spindle
6 × ×
7 × × ×

Alarm
Details Remedy
No.
0001 There is an error in the spindle encoder signal. • Check the spindle encoder's feedback cable
to The data transmission to the drive unit is stopped and the encoder.
0007 when this error occurs.

II - 31
 1. List of Alarms
1.5 System Alarms

1.5 System Alarms

(The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)

Z31 DataServer error {{{{

Warning No.
Message

Warning No. Explanation

0001 Socket open error(socket)
0002 Socket bind error(bind)
0003 Connection wait queue error(listen)
0004 Connection request error(accept)
0005 Data recv error(socket error)
0006 Data recv error(data error)
0007 Data send error(socket error)
0008 Data send error(data error)
000A Socket close error(close)

(Note) If warning No. 0001, 0002, 0003, or 000A is displayed, set the parameters, then turn power OFF and
turn it ON again.

II - 32
 1. List of Alarms
1.5 System Alarms

(The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)

Message Details Remedy
Z40 This appears when the parameter MemVal • Either return the MemVal setting, or format
Format is formatted at 0, and MemVal is set to 1. and restart.
mismatch
Z51 <Type> • If the same alarm is output by the same
E2PROM error Z51 E2PROM error 0011: Read error operation, the cause is an H/W fault.
00xx Z51 E2PROM error 0012: Write error Contact the Service Center.
Z52 The voltage of the battery inserted in the NC • Replace the battery of the NC control unit.
Battery fault control unit has dropped. (The battery used • Check for disconnection of the battery
000x to save the internal data.) cable.
0001: Battery warning • After treating the battery‚ check the
0002: Battery detecting circuit error machining program.
0003: Battery alarm
(Note 1)
Z53 The controller or operation board • Cooling measures are required.
CNC overheat temperature has risen above the designated • Turn OFF the controller power‚ or lower
value. (Note 2) the temperature with a cooler‚ etc.
Z55 This occurs when an error occurs in the • Check and replace the cables.
RIO communication between the controller and • Replace the remote I/O unit.
communication remote l/O unit. • Check the power supply. (existence of
stop • Cable breakage supply‚ voltage)
• Remote l/O unit fault
• Power supply to remote l/O unit fault
(Note 3)
Z57 The program memory capacity setting value Check the state of the following items.
System warning cannot be formatted. • Program memory capacity
The expansion cassette (HR437) is not • Status of expansion cassette (HR437)
mounted after formatting. mounting
An expansion cassette different from the • APLC open option
expansion cassette (HR437) mounted
during formatting is mounted.
Z58 The machine tool builder macro program • Write the machine tool builder macro
ROM write not was not written to the FROM after being program to the FROM.
completed registered, edited, copied, condensed,
• If the operations, such as editing, done
merged, the number changed, or deleted.
while the NC power was OFF can be
invalidated, the program does not need to
be written to the FROM.
Z59 Acceleration and deceleration time • Increase the value specified as the "#1206
Acc/dec time constants are too large. G1bF" parameter.
cnst too large (This alarm is output at the same time as • Decrease the value specified as the
"T02 Acc/dec time cnst too large 0206.") "#1207 G1btL" parameter.
• Lower the feedrate.
Z60 Communication error has occurred on the • Refer to (Note 4) for details.
Fieldbus Fieldbus communication using
communi- HN571/HN573/HN575.
cation error
Z64 The valid term will be expired in less than a • Obtain a decryption code by making a
Valid term soon week. Remaining valid term is xx more days. payment. Enter the decryption code.
to be expired
xx
Z65 No decryption code was input before the • Obtain a decryption code by making a
Valid term has valid term was expired. payment. Enter the decryption code.
been expired

II - 33
 1. List of Alarms
1.5 System Alarms

Message Details Remedy

Z67 A communication error occurred during • Refer to "List of Messages" in CC-Link
CC-Link CC-Link communication using (Master/Slave) Specification manual
communication HN566/HN576. (BNP-C3039-214).
error
Z68 The cable connected between • Connect the cable.
CC-Link HN566/HN576 and each device is • Check whether or not the cable is broken.
unconnected disconnected or broken.

! CAUTION
If the battery low warning is issued, save the machining programs, tool data and parameters in an
input/output device, and then replace the battery. When the battery alarm is issued, the machining
programs, tool data and parameters may be destroyed. Reload the data after replacing the battery.
Do not replace the battery while the power is ON.
Do not short circuit, charge, heat, incinerate or disassemble the battery.
Dispose of the spent battery following local laws.

(Note 1) The display of Z52 battery fault 0001 can be removed by resetting. However, the warning state will
not be cancelled until the battery is replaced.
(Note 2) Temperature warning
If the alarm is displayed when an overheat alarm is detected‚ the overheat signal will be output
simultaneously. If the machine is in automatic operation‚ the operation will be continued‚ but
restarting will not be possible after resetting or stopping with M02/M30. (Starting will be possible
after block stop or feed hold.) The alarm will be reset and the overheat signal will turn OFF when the
temperature drops below the specified temperature.

Z53 CNC overheat 000x

↑
0001 : The temperature in the controller is high.
0002 : The temperature around the communication terminal
(setting and display unit) is high.
0003 : The temperature in the controller and around the communication
terminal (setting and display unit) is high.
The ambient temperature must be lowered immediately when a "Z53 CNC overheat" alarm occurs‚
but if machining must be continued‚ the alarm can be invalidated by turning the following parameter OFF.

76543210
PLC parameter bit selection #6449 ††††††††

Communication terminal
(setting and display unit) 0: Detection invalid
Controller 1: Detection valid

II - 34
 1. List of Alarms
1.5 System Alarms

(Note 3) RIO communication interrupt

If communication between the control unit and remote I/O unit fails, the alarm and remote I/O unit
number are displayed.
(a)(b) Board connection remote I/O
communication interrupted station
↓↓
Z55 RIO communication stop ††††††††

Remote I/O 3rd part system

communication interrupted station
Remote I/O 1st part system
communication interrupted station
Remote I/O 2nd part system
communication interrupted station

(a) and (b) above indicate the following matters.

Alarm RIO RIO RIO RIO Alarm RIO RIO RIO RIO
number (seventh (sixth (fifth (fourth number (third (second (first (0th
station) station) station) station) station) station) station) station)

0 0
1 × 1 ×
2 × 2 ×
3 × × 3 × ×
4 × 4 ×
5 × × 5 × ×
6 × × 6 × ×
7 × × × 7 × × ×
8 × 8 ×
9 × × 9 × ×
A × × A × ×
B × × × B × × ×
C × × C × ×
D × × × D × × ×
E × × × E × × ×
F × × × × F × × × ×

This also applies for the remote I/O 1st part system communication interrupted station, remote I/O 3rd part
system communication interrupted station and board connection remote I/O communication interrupted
station.

II - 35
 1. List of Alarms
1.5 System Alarms

(Note 4)
Z60 Fieldbus communication error n1 n2 n3 n4
Classification No.
Message

Class.
Details
No.
n1 Shows state of the master channel (shown in hexadecimal number)
00: Offline In initializing
40: Stop Cutting I/O communication
80: Clear Resetting output data of each slave by sending 0 data.
C0: In operation In I/O communication
n2 Shows error state (shown in hexadecimal number)
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BIT Details
0 Control error: Parameter error
1 Auto clear error: Communication with all the slave channels was cut because
a communication with one slave channel had an error.
2 Non exchange error: Slave channel with communication error is found
3 Fatal error: The communication cannot be continued because sever network
failure exists.
4 Event error: Short-circuit was found on the network.
5 Not ready: CNC communication is not ready.
6 Time out error: Time out was detected in communication with each channel.
7 Not used

n3 Shows error No. (shown in hexadecimal number)

Refer to "(a) Error in master channel" and "(b) Error in slave channel" for details.
n4 Shows slave No. where communication error has occurred. (shown in hexadecimal
number)
"FF" means an error in master channel.

II - 36
1. List of Alarms
1.5 System Alarms

(a) Error in master channel (when remote address with an error is FF (hexadecimal number))
Value in
Details Remedy
n3
0 No error Operating normally
32 No USR_INTF-task Damage in HN571. Replace HN571.
33 No global data field
34 No FDL-task
35 No PLC-task
37 Master parameter incorrect
39 Slave parameter incorrect
3C Data offset exceeding allowable set Check the configuration setting.
value received
3D Slave data send range overlap
3E Slave data receive range overlap
3F Not set data hand shake Damage in HN571. Replace HN571.
40 RAM range exceeded
41 Slave parameter data set illegal
CA No segment
D4 Data base read illegal Download the configuration data again.
D5 Operating system illegal Damage in HN571. Replace HN571.
DC Watch dog error
DD Hand shake mode
No data communication by 0
DE Master auto clear mode When setting auto clear mode, the auto clear
mode was performed because one slave was
not able to connect in run time.

(b) Error in slave channel (when remote address with an error is other than FF (hexadecimal
number))
Value in
Details Remedy
n4
2 Station overflow reported Check the configuration of slave channel in
3 Station stopped responding to which error has occurred. Check if there is
master command any short-circuit in wire to bus.
9 No slave required responding data
11 No station respond
12 No master to logical token ring
15 Illegal parameter requested

II - 37
 1. List of Alarms
1.6 Absolute Position Detection System Alarms

1.6 Absolute Position Detection System Alarms

(The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)

ZUU Message {{{{ ††††
Axis name
Error No.
Message
Class

(1) Class: Z70 Abs data error

This error is displayed if the absolute position data is lost in the absolute position detection system.
Alarm reset Servo
Error Zero point
Details Remedy when power alarm
No. initialization
is turned OFF No.
0001 Abs posn base set Complete zero point Required - -
incomplete initialization.
Zero point initialization is
incomplete.
Otherwise, the spindle was
removed.
0002 Absolute position lost Input the parameters. If the (Required) - -
The absolute position reference point data cannot be
reference point data saved in restored‚ perform zero point
the NC has been destroyed. initialization.
0003 Abs posn param changed Correctly set the parameters. Required - -
The parameters used to Turn the power on again‚ and
detect the absolute position perform zero point initialization.
have been changed.

#1003 iunit #2201 PC1

#1016 iout #2202 PC2
#1017 rot #2218 PIT
#1018 ccw #2219 RNG1
#1040 M_inch #2220 RNG2
#2049 type #2225 MTYP
0004 Abs posn initial set illegal Reperform zero point Required - -
The zero point initialization initialization.
point is not at the grid
position.
0005 Abs posn param restored Turn the power on again‚ and Not required - -
Restoration was possible operation will be possible.
with parameter input in the
above No.0002 state.
0080 Abs posn data lost Replace the detector and Required - (9E)
The absolute value data was complete zero point etc.
lost, because the initialization.
multi-rotation counter data in
the detector was incorrect,
etc.

II - 38
 1. List of Alarms
1.6 Absolute Position Detection System Alarms

Alarm reset Servo

Error Zero point
Details Remedy when power alarm
No. initialization
is turned OFF No.
0101 Abs posn error(servo alm 25) Reperform zero point Required - (25)
The power was turned ON initialization.
again after the servo alarm
No. 25 displayed.
0106 Abs posn error(servo alm Reperform zero point Required - (E3)
E3) initialization.
The power was turned ON
again after the servo alarm
No. E3 displayed.

(Note) To release alarm "Z70 Abs data error", enter the parameter data output when establishing the
absolute position and turn ON the power again. For the rotary axis, however, the alarm cannot be
released by entering the parameter data.

(2) Class: Z71 Abs encoder failure

This alarm is displayed if an error is found in the detector for the absolute position detection system.
Alarm reset Servo
Error Zero point
Details Remedy when power alarm
No. initialization
is turned OFF No.
0001 AbsEncoder:Backup voltage Replace the battery‚ check the Required - 25
drop cable connections‚ and check (Z70-0101
The backup voltage in the the detector. Turn the power displays after
absolute position detector ON again‚ and perform zero power is
dropped. point initialization. turned ON
again.)
0003 AbsEncoder: Commu error Check and replace the cables‚ (Required) Reset 91
Communication with the card or detector. Turn the Only when
absolute position detector power ON again‚ and perform detector is
was not possible. zero point initialization. replaced.
0004 AbsEncoder: Abs data Check and replace the cables‚ (Required) Reset 93
changed card or detector. Turn the Only when
The absolute position data power ON again‚ and perform detector is
fluctuated when establishing zero point initialization. replaced.
the absolute position.
0005 AbsEncoder: Serial data Check and replace the cables‚ (Required) Reset 92
error card or detector. Turn the Only when
An error was found in the power ON again‚ and perform detector is
serial data from the absolute zero point initialization. replaced.
position detector.
0006 AbsEncoder: Abs/inc posn Operation is possible until the (Required) Reset E3
diffr power is turned off. When power (Z70-0106
Servo alarm E3 is turned ON displays after
Absolute position counter again. power is
warning turned ON
again.)
0007 AbsEncoder: Initial commu Check and replace the cables‚ (Required) Reset 18
err card or detector. Turn the Only when
Initial communication with the power ON again‚ and perform detector is
absolute position detector zero point initialization. replaced.
was not possible.

II - 39
 1. List of Alarms
1.6 Absolute Position Detection System Alarms

(3) Class: Z72 Message: Position check error

This alarm is displayed if an error is detected when comparing the detector's absolute position and
controller coordinate values in the absolute position system.

(4) Class: Z73 Message: Absolute position data warning

This warning is displayed for the absolute position detection system.
Alarm
Details Remedy
No.
0001 Battery for abs data fault If the battery voltage is low or the cable is
Servo alarm 9F damaged, there is no need to initialize the
Low battery voltage absolute position.

(Note) When this alarm occurs, do not turn OFF the drive unit power to protect the absolute position data.
Replace the battery while the drive unit power is ON.

II - 40
 1. List of Alarms
1.7 Distance-coded Reference Scale Errors

1.7 Distance-coded Reference Scale Errors

(The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)

ZUU Message {{{{ ††††
Axis name

Error No.

Message

Alarm class

(1) Class: Z80 Distance-coded ref scale err

Error
Details Remedy
No.
0001 Basic position lost • Input the parameter. If the basic point data
The basic point data memorized by the NC is cannot be recovered, perform the initial
broken. reference position setting.
0002 Basic position restore • Operation can be started after turning the power
The basic point data is recovered by ON.
parameter input.
0003 No spec: Distance-coded scale • Check the specification.
Even if the distance-coded reference scale is • If you do not use this function, set the detector
not included in the specification, it is set to be type in servo parameters correctly.
available.

II - 41
 1. List of Alarms
1.8 Messages during Emergency Stop

1.8 Messages during Emergency Stop

(The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)

EMG Emergency stop ††††

Error items

Error Item Details Remedy

PLC The user PLC has entered the emergency stop • Investigate and remove the cause of the user
state during the sequence process. PLC emergency stop.
EXIN The emergency stop input signal for machine • Cancel the emergency stop input signal.
operation board or handy terminal is significant • Check the wiring to see if any wiring is broken.
(open).
SRV An alarm occurred in the servo system causing • Investigate and remove the cause of the servo
an emergency stop. alarm.
STOP The user PLC (ladder sequence) is not running. • Check if the rotary switch CS2 on the top of the
controller front panel is set to 1.
• Check if the PLC edit file save screen (onboard
function) [4RUN/SP] (run/stop) switch is turned
ON.
SPIN Spindle drive unit not mounted • Cancel the causes of the other emergency
The spindle drive unit is not mounted. stop.
• Check emergency stop signal input in the
spindle drive unit.
PC_H High-speed PC processing abnormal • Check the sequence program.
(To stop monitoring the high-speed PC
processing temporarily, set 1 in "#1219
aux03/bit1". Disable the monitoring function
only as a temporary measure.)
PARA Setting of the door open II fixed device is illegal. • Specify the "#1155 DOOR_m" and "#1156
The dog signal random assignment parameter DOOR_s" parameters correctly.
setting is illegal. (When the door open II fixed device is not
used, set "#1155 DOOR_m" and "#1156
DOOR_s" to "100".)
• Correctly set the "#2073 zrn_dog", "#2074
H/W_OT+", "#2075 H/W_OT-" and "#1226
aux10/bit5" parameters.

II - 42
 1. List of Alarms
1.8 Messages during Emergency Stop

Error No. Details Remedy

LINK If the FROM/TO instruction is not executed within • Try to execute the FROM or TO instruction one
500 ms, an emergency stop occurs. or more times every 500 ms.
* Measure the time in which no interrupt request
is issued from MELSEC and store the result in
the R register.
R10190: Current time-out counter
R10191: Counter for maximum time-out after
power-on
R10192: Counter for maximum time-out after
system start-up (backed up)
MELSEC is held in error and reset states. • Check the MELSEC states.
The contents of MELSEC-specific code area in • Check the MELSEC states.
buffer memory have been destroyed.
PLC serial link communication has stopped. • Check that HR571 card wiring and external
sequencer transmission are normal.
(Note) When "WAIT" is entered for the PLC
• Check the diagnostic screen for link
serial link, only the preparation sequence
communication errors.
has been established before the
• Check whether the basic specification
communication stops. Therefore, it is
parameters related to serial link parameters are
supposed that the basic specification
specified correctly.
parameters related to serial link
parameters #1902 and #1903 are
incorrect or the #1909 set-time is too
short.
WAIT The preparation sequence is not sent from the • Check that the HR571 card rotary switch and
master station. Otherwise, the contents of the wiring and the external sequencer transmission
received preparation sequence are inconsistent are normal.
with those of the parameters, so that the usual • Check the diagnostic screen for link
sequence cannot be started. communication errors.
(Note) When "LINK" is also entered for the PLC
serial link, refer to "Note" in the section,
"LINK".
XTEN The HR571 card operates abnormally or the • Check the HR571 card rotary switch and
rotary switch is set incorrectly. replace the HR571 card if required.
LAD The user PLC (ladder sequence) has an illegal • Check the user PLC (ladder sequence) to see if
code. it uses illegal device numbers or constants.
CVIN The external emergency stop function for power • Cancel the emergency stop input signal.
supply is valid. So, the emergency stop input • Check the wiring to see if any wiring is broken.
signal for power supply is significant (open).
MCT An emergency stop occurs because the • Automatically cancel the emergency stop after
contactor shutoff test is executing. the contactor shutoff is confirmed.
• When the contactor shutoff cannot be
confirmed within 5 seconds after contactor
shutoff test signal (Y742) is input, "Y20
Contactor welding detected" alarm will occur,
and the emergency stop status remains.
• Turn the power ON again after confirming
"contactor's auxiliary b contact" signal is
correctly output to the device that is set with
"#1330 MC_dp1" and "#1331 MC_dp2".

II - 43
 1. List of Alarms
1.9 Auxiliary Axis Alarms

1.9 Auxiliary Axis Alarms

Refer to "1.3 Servo/spindle alarms" for details of the alarm class and alarm clear class combination.

(The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)

S{{ Message UUUU ††††
Axis No. 1 to 4
Alarm information
(Follows MR-J2-CT alarm information)
Message
Alarm class

(1) Class: S01 Aux ax servo alarm

Alarm
Details Remedy
information
0011 Aux ax PCB err (Drive circuit) • Replace servo drive unit.
An error occurred in the drive unit's internal PCB.
0013 Aux ax S/W processing error • Replace servo drive unit.
An error occurred in the drive unit's internal reference
clock.
0016 Aux ax motor/detector type err
Motor type error. • Use a correct drive unit and motor
combination.
Detector initial communication error. • Connect correctly.
• Replace the motor.
• Replace or repair cable.
Detector CPU error. • Replace the motor (detector).
0017 Aux ax PCB error(A/D err) • Replace servo drive unit.
An error occurred in the drive unit's internal A/D converter.
0025 Aux ax absolute posn lost • Turn the power ON for 2 to 3
An error occurred in the detector's internal absolute minutes while the alarm is
position data. occurring, and then turn the power
ON again.
• Replace the battery, and initialize
the absolute position again.
0034 Aux ax CRC error • Take countermeasures against
An error occurred in the communication with the NC. noise.
0036 Aux ax communication timeout • Connect correctly.
Communication with the NC was cut off. • Turn the NC power ON.
• Replace the drive unit or NC.

0037 Aux ax parameter error • Set the parameter correctly.

The parameter setting value is incorrect.
0038 Aux ax frame error • Take countermeasures against
An error occurred in the communication with the NC. noise.
0039 Aux ax commu INFO error • Change the NC software version to
Undefined data was transferred from the NC. a compatible version.

II - 44
 1. List of Alarms
1.9 Auxiliary Axis Alarms

(2) Class: S02 Aux ax servo alarm

Alarm
Details Remedy
information
0011 Aux ax PCB err (Drive circuit) • Replace servo drive unit.
An error occurred in the drive unit's internal PCB.
0013 Aux ax S/W processing error • Replace servo drive unit.
An error occurred in the drive unit's internal reference
clock.
0015 Aux ax EEROM error • Replace servo drive unit.
A write error occurred to the EEROM in the drive unit.
0017 Aux ax PCB error(A/D err) • Replace servo drive unit.
An error occurred in the drive unit's internal A/D converter.
0018 Aux ax PCB error(LSI err) • Replace servo drive unit.
An error occurred in the drive unit's internal LSI.
0020 Aux ax detector error • Connect correctly.
An error occurred in the communication between the servo • Replace or repair cable.
drive unit and detector.
0024 Aux ax ground fault detection • Repair the ground fault section.
A ground fault of the output was detected when the power • Replace the cable or motor.
was turned ON.

(3) Class: S03 Aux ax servo alarm

Alarm
Details Remedy
information
0010 Aux ax under voltage • Review the power supply.
The power voltage is 160V or less. • Replace the servo drive unit.

0030 Aux ax regeneration error

The tolerable regeneration power of the internal • Set the parameter #50002 correctly.
regenerative resistor or external regenerative option was • Connect correctly.
exceeded. • Lower the positioning frequency.
• Change the regenerative option to
a larger capacity.
• Lower the load.
• Review the power supply.
Regenerative transistor error • Replace the servo drive unit.

0031 Aux ax overspeed • Increase the acceleration/

The motor's rotation speed exceeded the tolerable deceleration time constant.
momentary speed. • Review the gear ratio.
• Replace the detector.

0032 Aux ax overcurrent • Repair the wiring.

A current exceeding the servo drive unit's tolerable current • Replace the servo drive unit.
flowed. • Take countermeasures against
noise.

II - 45
 1. List of Alarms
1.9 Auxiliary Axis Alarms

Alarm
Details Remedy
information
0033 Aux ax overvoltage • Wire correctly.
The voltage of the converter in the servo drive unit was • Replace the servo drive unit.
400V or more. • For the internal regenerative
resistor, replace the drive unit.
• For the external regenerative option,
replace the regenerative option.
0046 Aux ax motor overheating • Reduce the motor load.
An operation state causing the motor to overheat • Review the operation pattern.
continued.
0050 Aux ax overload 1 • Reduce the motor load.
The servo drive unit or servomotor overload protection • Review the operation pattern.
function activated. • Change to a motor or drive unit
with large output.
• Change the setting of the
automatic tuning response
characteristics.
• Correct the connection.
• Replace the servomotor.

0051 Aux ax overload 2 • Review the operation pattern.

The max. output current flowed for several seconds due to • Change the setting of the
a machine collision or overload. automatic tuning response
characteristics.
• Correct the connection.
• Replace the servomotor.

0052 Aux ax excessive error • Increase the acceleration/

A position deflection exceeding the excessive error deceleration time constant.
detection setting value occurred. • Increase the torque limit value.
• Review the power facility capacity.
• Review the operation pattern.
• Replace the servomotor.
• Connect correctly.
• Repair or replace the cable.

II - 46
 1. List of Alarms
1.9 Auxiliary Axis Alarms

(4) Class: S52 Message: Aux ax servo warning

Alarm
Details Remedy
information
0092 Aux ax battery voltage drop • Mount a battery.
The absolute position detection battery voltage dropped. • Replace the battery and initialize
the absolute position.
00E0 Aux ax overregeneration warning • Lower the positioning frequency.
The regeneration power may have exceeded the tolerable • Change the regenerative option to
range of the built-in regenerative resistor or external a larger one.
regenerative option. • Lower the load.
00E1 Aux ax overload warning • Refer to the items for S03 0050.
The overload alarm 1 could occur.
00E3 Aux ax abs position counter warning • Take countermeasures against
There is an error in the absolute position detector internal noise.
data. • Replace the servomotor.

00E9 Aux ax main circuit OFF warning • Turn ON the main circuit power.
The servo ON signal was input while the main circuit
power was OFF.
The contactor operation is faulty.

(5) Class: Z70 Message: Aux ax abs position error

Alarm
Details Remedy
information
0001 Aux ax abs posn base set incomplete • Initialize the zero point (reference
The zero point (reference point) has not been initialized in point).
the absolute position system.
0002 Aux ax absolute position lost • Initialize the zero point (reference
The absolute position coordinate data in the drive unit has point).
been lost.
0003 Aux ax abs posn param changed • Correctly set the parameters and
The absolute position system related parameters have then initialize the zero point
been changed or lost. (reference point).

(6) Class: Z71 Message: Aux ax drop voltage

Alarm
Details Remedy
information
0001 Aux ax abs encoder: back up voltage drop • Check the battery and detector
The data in the detector has been lost. cable and then initialize the zero
Battery voltage drop. point (reference point).
Detector cable wire breakage or looseness.

II - 47
 1. List of Alarms
1.9 Auxiliary Axis Alarms

(7) Class: Z73 Message: Aux ax system warning

Alarm
Details Remedy
information
0001 Aux ax battery for abs data fault • Check the battery and detector
Battery voltage drop. cable. The zero point does not
Detector cable wire breakage or looseness. need to be initialized.
0003 Aux ax absolute position counter warning • Replace the detector.
An error occurred in the detector's absolute position
counter.

(8) Class: M00 Aux ax operation error

Alarm
Details Remedy
information
0001 Aux ax dog overrun • Lower the zero point return speed
When executing dog-type reference position, the zero or increase the dog length.
point return speed is too fast or the dog length is too short.
0003 Aux ax R-pnt direction illegal • Move the axis in the correct
When executing reference position return, the axis was direction.
moved in the opposite of the designated direction.
0004 Aux ax external interlock • Cancel the interlock signal
The axis interlock function is valid.
0005 Aux ax internal interlock • Cancel the servo OFF.
An interlock was established by the servo OFF function.
0007 Aux ax soft limit • Check the soft limit setting and
The soft limit was reached. machine position
0024 Aux ax R ret invld at abs alm • Initialize the absolute position
Reference position return was executed during an reference point and then fix the
absolute position alarm. absolute position coordinates.
0025 Aux ax R ret invld at ini • Initialize the absolute position
Reference position return was executed while initializing reference point and then fix the
the absolute position. absolute position coordinates.

II - 48
 1. List of Alarms
1.9 Auxiliary Axis Alarms

(9) Class: M01 Aux ax operation error

Alarm
Details Remedy
information
0101 Aux ax no operation mode • Correctly designate the operation
The operation mode is not designated, or the operation mode.
mode was changed during axis movement.
0103 Aux ax feedrate 0 • Set a value other than zero in the
The operation parameter's feedrate setting is zero. feedrate setting or override value.
The operation parameter feedrate setting is zero.
Or, the override is valid, and the override value is zero.
0160 Aux ax sta No. illegal • Correctly designate the station No.
A station No. exceeding the No. of indexed divisions was
designated.
0161 Aux ax R-pnt ret incomplete • Execute the reference position
Automatic/manual operation was started before reference return.
position return was executed with the incremental system.
0162 Aux abs position initializing • Complete the absolute position
The start signal was input while initializing the absolute reference point initialization.
position reference point.
0163 Aux ax abs position error • Initialize the absolute position
The start signal was input during an absolute position reference point and then fix the
alarm. absolute position coordinates.
0164 Aux ax arbitrary positioning • Turn the random positioning mode
The manual operation mode was started during the OFF before switching to the
random positioning mode. manual operation mode.
0165 Aux uneven index sta No. ilgl • Check the commanded station No.
The commanded station No. was higher than 9 or the and the parameter "#50100 station"
number of indexing stations during uneven indexing. setting.

II - 49
 1. List of Alarms
1.9 Auxiliary Axis Alarms

(10) Class: Y02 Auxiliary axis MCP alarms

An error occurred during data transfer between the MCP and auxiliary axis drive unit after turning on the
power.
Error No. Details Remedy
0050 Aux ax sys alm: Proc time over The software or hardware may be damaged.
Contact the service center.
0051 0000 Aux ax commu er:CRC error 1 A communication error has occurred between the
(10 times/910.2ms) controller and drive unit.
0001 Aux ax commu er:CRC error 2 • Take measures against noise.
(2 continuous times) • Check that the communication cable connector
between the controller and drive unit and one
0002 Aux ax commu er:Recv timing between the drive unit are tight.
(2 continuous times) • Check whether the communication cable
xx03 Aux ax commu er:Data ID between the controller and drive unit and one
(2 continuous times) between the drive units are disconnected.
xx: Axis No. • A driving drive unit may be faulty. Take a note of
xx04 Aux ax commu er:Recv frame no. the 7-segment LED contents of each driving
(2 continuous times) drive unit and report to the Service Center.
xx: Axis No.

(11) Class: Y03 Message: Aux ax drive unit unequipped

The drive unit is not properly connected.
Error No. Details Remedy
Axis No. bit correspondence (bit 0: 1st axis, bit 1: 2nd axis, Check the auxiliary axis drive unit mounting
1 to 4 bit 2: 3rd axis, bit 3: 4th axis) state.
• Check the end of the cable wiring.
• Check the cable for broken wires.
• Check the connector insertion.
The auxiliary axis drive unit input power is not
being input.
The auxiliary axis drive unit axis No. switch is
illegal.

II - 50
 1. List of Alarms
1.10 Computer Link Errors

1.10 Computer Link Errors

(The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)

LUU Message {
Error No.

Message

Alarm class

(1) Class: L01 Computer link error

Error
Details Remedy
No.
-2 Serial port being used • Check whether the same port being used by
Serial port has already being opened or Anshin-net, etc.
cannot be used. • Recheck the parameters for tape operation port.
-4 Timeout error • Set a greater timeout value in the input/output
Communication ends with timeout device parameter.
CNC has a 248-byte receive buffer. • Recheck the HOST software as to whether or not
The time during which CNC receives 248 the HOST transmits data in response to DC1
bytes exceeds the "TIME-OUT" value set in from CNC (data request).
the I/O device parameter. • Check whether or not start code of computer link
parameter is set to 0.
-10 Host ER signal OFF • Check whether or not the cable is disconnected
HOST ER (CNC DR) signal is not turned ON. from the connector.
• Check whether or not the cable is broken.
• Check whether or not the HOST power is turned
ON.
-15 Parity H error • Recheck the HOST software as to whether or not
Communication ends with parity H. the data to be transmitted to CNC is ISO code.
-16 Parity V error • Recheck the data to be transmitted to CNC.
Communication ends with parity V.
-17 Overrun error • Recheck the software as to whether or not the
Although CNC transmits DC3 (request to stop HOST stops transmitting data within 10 bytes
data transfer) to the HOST, it receives data of after receiving DC3.
10 bytes or more from the HOST, thus • Recheck the HOST software as to whether or not
terminates communication. the HOST transmits data such as a command or
When CNC is transmitting data to the HOST, it header to CNC during receiving a work program.
receives data of 10 bytes or more from the
HOST.

II - 51
 1. List of Alarms
1.11 User PLC Alarms

1.11 User PLC Alarms

(The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.)

UUU Message {{{{ {{{{
Sub-status 2
Sub-status 1
Message
Alarm class

Sub-status
Message Details Remedy
1 2
U01 - - PLC program is not input. Download the PLC program of the
No user (Note) Emergency stop (EMG) will format selected with the PLC
PLC be applied. environment selection parameters
(bit selection #51/bit 4).
U10 0x0010 - PLC scan time error Edit the PLC program size to a
Illegal PLC The scan time is 1 second or smaller size.
longer.
0x0040 - PLC program operation mode Download the PLC program
illegal having the same format as when
PLC program different from the the power was reset or turned
designated mode was ON.
downloaded.
(Note) Emergency stop (EMG) will
be applied.
0x0080 - GPPW ladder code error Download the correct GPPW
(Note) Emergency stop (EMG) will format PLC program.
be applied.
0x008x - PLC4B ladder code error Download the correct PLC4B
An illegal circuit was found in the format PLC program.
PLC4B ladder.
bit1: PC medium-speed circuit
illegal
bit2: PC high-speed circuit illegal
(Note) Emergency stop (EMG) will
be applied.
0x0400 Number of Software illegal interrupt Turn the power ON again.
ladder The PLC program process stopped If the error is not reset, download
steps abnormally due to an illegal the correct PLC program.
software command code.
(Note) Emergency stop (EMG) will
be applied.

II - 52
 1. List of Alarms
1.11 User PLC Alarms

Sub-status
Message Details Remedy
1 2
U10 0x800x Number of Software exception
Illegal PLC PLC The PLC program process stopped
program abnormally due to a bus error, etc.
steps bit 0: BIN command operation error Refer to the methods for using the
bit 1: BCD command operation BCD and BIN function
error commands.
bit6: CALL/CALLS/RET Turn the power ON again.
command error If the error is not reset, download
bit7: IRET command execution the correct PLC program.
error
(Note) Emergency stop (EMG) is
applied for bit 6/7.
U50 The PLC program is stopped. Start the PLC program.
PLC
stopped
U55 The PLC program is stopped and not Write the PLC program into ROM.
PLC written into ROM.
stopped /
is not
saved
U60 The PLC program is not written into Write the PLC program into ROM.
Ladder is ROM.
not saved

(Note) The number of PLC program steps displayed on the screen may not match the actual number of error
occurrence steps because of the PLC program timing. Use this as a guideline of the occurrence
place.

II - 53
 1. List of Alarms
1.12 Network Service Errors

1.12 Network Service Errors

Message Details Remedy

N001 • There is an error in the modem • Check the connection between the NC and
Modem initial connection when the power is turned modem, connection port and modem power.
error ON.
N002 • The dial transmission failed more than • Wait a while, and then transmit again.
Redial over the designated No. of redial times.
N003 • The phone line is not connected. • Check the modem’s phone line connection.
TEL unconnect
N004 • An error other than the above errors • Note down the circumstances under which
Net occurred during communication. this error occurred, and contact the Service
communication Center.
error
N005 • The modem connection port is being • Quit using the modem connection port with
Invalid net used for another function such as the other function, and then turn the power
communication input/output. ON again.
• The modem connection port settings • Check the modem connection port settings.
are incorrect.
N006 • The diagnosis data file has been • Erase the message.
Received result received
of diagnosis
N007 • A file larger than Anshin-net server • Reduce the size of machining program file
Send data size capacity (64Kbyte) has been so that it won't exceed the capacity of
over transmitted during machining data Anshin-net server.
sharing.
N008 • When machining data sharing function • Before receiving file, confirm that a
No file on server is being executed, file reception machining program file exists on Anshin-net
fails, as the file does not exist on server.
Anshin-net server.
N009 • File reception fails due to wrong • Input the password again.
Password error password when machining data
sharing is being executed.
N010 • Data reception fails due to wrong • Input the customer number again.
Customer customer number when machining
number error data sharing is being executed.
N011 • As the size of file to be received is • Ensure sufficient free space on the NC side.
Storage capacity bigger than free space on the NC side,
over file reception fails during machining
data sharing.
N012 • A file on Anshin-net server cannot be • Check if the file exists on Anshin-net server.
File deletion error deleted when machining data sharing • Note down the circumstances under which
is being executed. this error occurred, and contact the Service
Center.

II - 54
 2. Operation Messages
2.1 Search-related Operation Messages

2. Operation Messages
The following messages display on each screen.

2.1 Search-related Operation Messages

Message Details
Searching • The operation search is being executed.

Search completed • The operation search was completed correctly.

Verifying • The program is being verified.
Verifying stopped • The program verification stopped.
Search error • Could not find the designated ONB number.
Review the ONB number or machining program settings.
• The operation search could not be completed correctly.
• When the parameter (#9005) of the tape mode port was set out of the
range or when the port was not connected, an operation search of
NC serial was performed.
• The T code list search failed. Review the program name.
• Could not find the machining program in HD or IC card.
• Check the parameters for HD operation or IC card operation.
• Tape search was executed during the HOST LINK communication.
Setting error • The directory name exceeded the display range.
A directory path for which the entire directory cannot be displayed
cannot be designated in the directory name area.
• The search is not possible because ONB number is not designated.

Restart search is completed • The restart search was completed.

Executing restart search • The restart search is being executed.
Execute operation search • The program is not searched.
Execute the operation search.
Can't cancel verify stop • The compare stop cannot be canceled because the operation is not
in a compare stop.
Executing top search • The top search is being executed correctly.
Top search completed • The top search was completed correctly.
Top search not completed • The restart search (type 2) was executed without the top search.
Can't input data • Data input was attempted during M, S, T, B history display.
Input some of ONB • Awaiting ONB number input
Verifying stop posn already • The verify stop position has already been registered.
registered
No searched program • The program has not been searched.
Program restarting • The program is being restarted.
Program error • The restart search was executed in the program with an error.
N/B block not found • The restart search was executed, designating N or B No. not exist.
Restart search interrupted by • Reset was executed during the restart search.
reset
No. of repetitions exceeded • The restart search was executed, designating the number of
repetitions exceeding the number set in the program.
Program not found • The restart search was executed, designating a program No. not
exist.

II - 55
 2. Operation Messages
2.2 Graphic Display-related Operation Messages

2.2 Graphic Display-related Operation Messages

Message Details
Searching • The check search is being executed.

Search error • Could not find the designated ONB number.

Review the ONB number or machining program settings.
• The check search could not be completed correctly.
• When the parameter (#9005) of the tape mode port was set out of the
range or when the port was not connected, an operation search of
NC serial was performed.
Executing automatic operation • An attempt was made to perform operations such as parameter, tool
compensation amount data and coordinate system offset settings
during auto operation. (Input/output also possible during auto
operation)
• The machining program and MDI data that the operator is attempting
to edit cannot be edited during auto operation.
• It is not possible to be executed a check search or check start-up
during auto operation.
• An attempt was made to set the verify stop position during auto
operation.
Setting error • The directory name exceeded the display range.
A directory path for which the entire directory cannot be displayed
cannot be designated in the directory name area.
• The check search is not possible because ONB number is not
designated.
• A non-existent axis name or setting that does not exist in the format
was made when making the display mode settings.
Set using an existing axis name.
• Incorrect tool No. was specified at the execution of tool clear.

Execute operation search • The program is not searched.

Execute the operation search.
Checking • The program check is being executed.
Check stopped • The program check is being stopped.
Work form is illegal • A workpiece is not drawn correctly because the two or more
workpiece widths are set to "0".
Push [Check reset] menu • An error occurred in the graphic check.
Press the [Check reset] menu key to reset the error.
Executing trace • The trace mode is valid.
Program check completed • The trace in the program check completed with an M02/M30 code.
Reset complete • The program check was reset.
Tool interfere with work • The tool contacted the workpiece when performing rapid traverse
(G0) movement with the interference check enabled.
Program checking • The program check is being executed.
Executing reset operation • The program check is being reset.
Executing trace(tip posn) • The tip position trace mode is valid.
Executing BG simulation • The back ground simulation is being executed.
Draw library inside error (n) • Contact the service center.

II - 56
 2. Operation Messages
2.3 Variable (Common variables, local variables) - related Operation Messages

Message Details
Program check not possible • Graphic check was attempted during the Computer link B operation.
Execute check search • The program check is disabled. Execute the check search.
Solid check disabled (memory • The 3D program check is disabled due to the memory shortage.
shortage) Separate the programs and execute the check drawing again.
Press the menu [Work init] once before performing the check
drawing again.

2.3 Variable (Common variables, local variables) - related Operation Messages

Message Details
Erase? (Y/N) • Message to confirm the line erase.
[Y] or [INPUT] : Variables are deleted.
[N] : Variables are not deleted.

2.4 PLC Switch-related Operation Messages

Message Details
Set up parameter ?(Y/N) • Message to confirm the parameter setup.
[Y] or [INPUT] : It will be possible to make settings.
[N] : It will not be possible to make settings.

2.5 Compensation-related (Tool compensation, coordinate system offset) Operation

Messages
Message Details
Erase? (Y/N) • Message to confirm the erasing.
[Y] or [INPUT] : Erase the data.
[N] : Do not erase the data.
Clear all axes? (Y/N) • Message to confirm the all axes clear.
[Y] or [INPUT] : Clear the data for all axes.
[N] : Do not clear the data.
Cannot return to origin • Operations other than line paste, paste and data input cannot be
undone.
• It is the initial state. Cannot undo.
• The last operation was performed in another part system. Cannot
undo the operation.
Clear all? (Y/N) • Message to confirm the clearing the all data.
[Y] or [INPUT] : Clear all data.
[N] : Do not clear the data.
Input P number • The coordinate system [Coord G54.1 P] menu was pressed.
• The expansion workpiece coordinate system P No. was input.
Data clear complete • Clearing of the collection data is complete.
Execute the collection data • Determines whether to clear the collection data. Press [Y] or [INPUT]
clear? to clear the data.

II - 57
 2. Operation Messages
2.6 Data Input/Output-related Operation Messages

2.6 Data Input/Output-related Operation Messages

Message Details
Overwrite this file?(Y/N) • Message to confirm the overwriting.
[Y] or [INPUT] : Overwrite the file.
[N] : Do not overwrite the file.
Over run error • The buffer overran or overflowed.
Memory over • The program cannot be written, because the memory capacity will be
exceeded.
Edit lock B • It is not possible to change machining program B (8000 to 8999: user
standard subprogram) or machining program C (9000 to 9999:
machine tool builder custom program) as edit lock B is enabled.
Edit lock C • It is not possible to change machining program C (9000 to 9999:
machine tool builder custom program) as edit lock C is enabled.
Can't make directory on this • Creation of a directory was attempted for a device that cannot have a
device directory.
Designated file does not exist • The file specified in device A, and B does not exist.
• The applicable file does not exist in the specified directory.
The file name is a directory • A directory was designated for the file transfer. A directory cannot be
transferred.
Change complete • The data conversion completed correctly.
Changing • The data is being converted.
Erase complete • The file has been erased.
Erase ended. Some file not • The file erasing completed, but there are some files that could not be
erased erased.
Verify error • An error occurred when performing a file verification.
Compare error. Compare next • Message to confirm the comparison
file?(Y/N) [Y] or [INPUT] : Compare the next file.
[N] : Do not compare the next file.
Compare complete • The data comparison completed.
Verifying • The data is being compared.
The file already exists • The input file name already exists.
• The file name after renaming already exists.

Can't erase designated file • Erasing was attempted of a file that cannot be erased.
Can't rename designated file • An attempt was made to change the name of a file that cannot be
renamed.
Can't condense designated file • Condensing of a file that cannot be condensed was attempted.
Designated file is locked • Changing was attempted of a locked file.
Can't open file for dev A • Could not find the file for device A.
Or, the file is in a state in which it cannot be accessed.
Can't open file for dev B • Could not find the file for device B.
Or, the file is in a state in which it cannot be accessed.
Can't read file for dev A • Could not read in the file for device A.
Recheck the connection status for device A or the input/output
parameter setting.
Can't read file for dev B • Could not read in the file for device B.
Recheck the connection status for device B or the input/output
parameter setting.

II - 58
2. Operation Messages
2.6 Data Input/Output-related Operation Messages

Message Details
Can't close file for dev A • Contact the service center

Can't close file for dev B • Contact the service center.

Can't write file for dev A • Could not write in the file for device B.
Recheck the connection status for device A or the input/output
parameter setting.
Can't write file for dev B • Could not write in the file for device B.
Recheck the connection status for device B or the input/output
parameter setting.
Can't seek file for dev A • Contact the service center.
Can't seek file for dev B • Contact the service center.
File name not designated for dev • A file name was not designated for device A.
A
File name not designated for dev • A file name was not designated for device B.
B
Can't open directory for dev A • Could not find a directory corresponding to device A.

Can't open directory for dev B • Could not find a directory corresponding to device B.

Different devices designated in A • The same device must be designated for devices A and B, but
and B differing devices were designated.
Timeout error • A timeout error occurred when communicating with the external
device.
Checking • Cannot be executed during a check
Make directory complete • Creation of the directory has been completed.

Dir create Complete • Creation of the directory has been completed.

Can't make directory • An error occurred while creating the directory.
The directory is not empty • A filewas found in the directory.
Erase the file in the directory.
Directory pass is illegal • The designated directory path name is illegal.
Input a correct directory path name.
Data protect • Setting, erasing, parameter setting, etc., of the various data is
prohibited, because the data protect key is validated.
Transfer complete • The data transfer completed correctly.
Transferring • The data is being transferred.
Parity H error • A parity H error was detected.
Parity V error • A parity V error was detected.
File entry over • The No. of registration files designated in the specifications was
exceeded, so the file could not be registered.
Program No. not found in the file • There is no program number in the selected file.
Executing format • The formatting is being executed.
Format complete • The formatting completed.
Format error • The formatting failed.
Framing error • An error occurred between the NC and the external device.
Variable conversion error • An error occurred during the M2 macro conversion, and the
conversion failed.

II - 59
2. Operation Messages
2.6 Data Input/Output-related Operation Messages

Message Details
Merge complete • The data merge completed.
Merge execution • The data merge is being executed.
Memory alloc error • Securing of the communication data range failed.
Rename complete • The rename has been completed.
• Message to confirm the operation.
OK? (Y/N)
[Y] or [INPUT] : Execute the operation
[N] : Cancel the operation.
I/O not ready • An error occurred between the NC and the external device.
I/O parameter error • The external device settings and input/output parameters do not
match.
I/O port busy • Input/output was not possible as the I/O port is busy.
FD write protect • The FD is write-protected.
Release the write protection.
PLC running • An attempt was made to input a user PLC during PLC RUN.
• Stop the PLC on the maintenance screen.

FD not ready • An attempt was made to perform an FD operation search with no FD.
• An attempt was made to display the FD list with no FD.
MemoryCard not ready • An attempt was made to perform operations with no memory card.
DS not ready • An attempt was made to perform operations with no data server.
Can't write in READ-ONLY file • Contact the service center.
Condense complete • Condensing has been completed.
A directory does not exist • The specified directory does not exist.
Setting complete normally • Decryption code setting file of the credit system was set normally.

II - 60
 2. Operation Messages
2.7 Parameter-related Operation Messages

2.7 Parameter-related Operation Messages

Message Details
Designate copy end posn • The copy start position was specified using the cursor. Continue and
specify the copy end position using the cursor.
Copy start posn and end posn • When the copy range was designated, a position before the start
reversed position was designated as the end position.
Columns of copy start and end • A different column (axis or part system) was specified for the copy
different start/end position at the screen with the arrangement configuration
for each axis and part system.
Copy range is inadequate • Could not find the parameter No. for the copy start position.
• A value larger than the last parameter No. was designated as the
copy end position parameter No.
Check the designated copy range.
Setting error • The port is already being used.
• The parameter HOST LINK was turned ON during the Anshin-net
communication.
Setting error: column n • The nth column setting data is inappropriate when multiple axes were
set at the same time (/ division). (Settings have been made up to the
(n-1)th column.)
Password is illegal • The password designated for displaying the Machine
Parameter screen is illegal.
Input the password • The menu key for first displaying the Machine Parameter
screen was pressed after the power was turned ON.
Paste error • An attempt was made to paste in a different parameter from the copy
parameter.
Paste? (Y/N) • Message to confirm the operation when pasting.
[Y] or [INPUT] : Paste the data at the current cursor position.
[N] : Do not paste the data.
Data protect • Setting, erasing, parameter settings, etc., of the various data is
prohibit, because the data protect key is validated.
Executing automatic operation • An attempt was made to make parameter settings during auto
operation.
Can't select • The password designated for displaying the machine parameters has
not been input.
• Display of the machine parameters was attempted on the [Param
No.] menu, but the password has not been input.
Press the [Machine param] menu, and input the password for
displaying the machine parameters.
No odd number for R register • An odd number cannot be used for R register start No.

start No. Use an even number.

II - 61
 2. Operation Messages
2.8 Measurement-related (Workpiece, rotation) Operation Messages

2.8 Measurement-related (Workpiece, rotation) Operation Messages

Message Details
TLM switch OFF • Measurement, retrieving of the skip position, writing the coordinates
data etc. was attempted when the TLM switch was OFF.
Can't take-in skip posn •Could not retrieve the skip position.
Check the following:
< When measuring the workpiece >
1. Is the name of the axis to be measured designated in the basic axis
(I, J, K)?
2. Is the axis that executed the axis movement a measurement axis?
< When measuring the rotation >
1. Is the name of the axis to be measured designated in the coordinate
rotation plane (horizontal axis, vertical axis)?
2. Is the axis that executed the axis movement a measurement axis?
Can't write coordinates data • Could not obtain the measured axis No.
• The measured angle was illegal.
• Could not write into the coordinate system offset.
Measure again.
• The work coordinate offset data was attempted to set when the
measurement counter does not have the necessary values.
• The work coordinate offset date was attempted to set in the slave
axis.
Sensor take in not possible • Could not retrieve the position measured with the touch sensor.
Measure again.
Can't measure • Measurement failed.
Sensor signal was illegally • The sensor signal was already ON when the tool measurement mode
turned on (TLM) signal was validated.
• The sensor signal turned ON when there was no axis movement after
the tool measurement mode (TLM) signal was validated.
• The sensor signal turned ON at a position within 100µm from the final
entry start position.
• Move the axis in a safe direction after turning the sensor signal OFF
or turning the tool measurement mode signal OFF.
Can't write compensation data • The cursor position and the cell for writing the compensation amount
(length dimension, radius dimension) do not match.
Match the cursor position with the cell for writing the compensation
amount.
Offset No. not found • During manual tool length measurement, the sensor was turned ON
designating tool compensation No. not exist.
• During manual tool length measurement, the measurement method
was switched to manual tool length measurement 2 designating tool
compensation No. not exist.
• Correctly set the R register of compensation No.

TLM axis is illegal • During 2 or more axes movement, the tool length measurement was
executed by turning the sensor ON. Keep the tool away from the
sensor and execute the measurement by one axis.
TLM axis not returned to ref. • The tool length measurement was executed by tuning the sensor ON
position for the axis in which dog-type reference point return has not been
executed. Carry out reference point return for the measurement axis.
Can't write rotation parameter • The measured result cannot be set in the process parameter.

II - 62
2. Operation Messages
2.8 Measurement-related (Workpiece, rotation) Operation Messages

Message Details
Can't calculate center & angle for • Three points necessary for calculation are not retrieved.
rot • Center shift amount or censor radius was failed to retrieve.
• Calculation of the center and the angle was failed.
Input 0 to coord center & angle • The center and the angle are not "0".
for rot Set "0" in the parameter "#8623 Coord rot centr (H)", "#8624 Coord
rot centr (V)" and "#8627 Coord rot angle".
Can't calculate • Hole center cannot be determined.
Meas axis not returned to ref. • The workpiece measurement was executed when dog-type reference
position point return has not been executed. Carry out reference point return
for the measurement axis.

II - 63
 2. Operation Messages
2.9 Tool (Tool registration, tool life) -related Operation Messages

2.9 Tool (Tool registration, tool life) -related Operation Messages

Message Details
Designated group already exists • An already existing group No. was designated when changing the
group No. (Tool life screen (grp))
• An already existing group No. was designated when newly creating
the group. (Tool life screen (grp list))
Designate a group No. that does not already exist.
Designated group does not exist • Erasing was attempted on the Tool life screen (grp list) of a group that
does not exist.
Can't register group • The group registration process on the Tool life screen (grp list) failed.
Can't delete group • The group deletion process on the Tool life screen (grp list) failed.
Erase? (Y/N) • Message to confirm the erasing.
[Y] or [INPUT] : Erase the data
[N] : Do not erase the data.
Delete all groups? (Y/N) • Message to confirm the erasing of all groups.
[Y] or [INPUT] : Erase all groups
[N] : Do not erase all groups.
Can't delete all groups • All groups' deletion cannot be executed because data protection key
(KEY 1) is validated or automatic operation mode is validated, etc.
during all groups' deletion. All groups' deletion cannot be executed
because nothing has been registered to group, also.
Pot number not exist • The set pot number does not exist.
Check the pot number.
Create new file? (Y/N) • Message to confirm the operation when newly creating data, files,
etc.
[Y] or [INPUT] : Newly create.
[N] : Cancel the operation.
Input the tool number • Waiting tool number input.
Clear not possible • The clear range is incorrect.
Spindle/stndby tool display not • The spindle standby cannot be displayed due to the user PLC setting.
possible Contact the machine tool builder.
Format tool life data? (Y/N) • Determines whether to format the tool life management data. When
[Y] is input, the formatting is executed.
Tool life format complete • The tool life management data formatting completed.
Exists in spindle/standby. Set? • An attempt was made to set the same No. as the tool No. for
(Y/N) spindle/standby.
Exists in magazine 1. Set? (Y/N) • An attempt was made to set the same No. as the tool No. that has
been registered to the valid magazine.
Exists in magazine 2. Set? (Y/N) • An attempt was made to set the same No. as the tool No. that has
been registered to the valid magazine.
Exists in magazine 3. Set? (Y/N) • An attempt was made to set the same No. as the tool No. that has
been registered to the valid magazine.
Exists in magazine 4. Set? (Y/N) • An attempt was made to set the same No. as the tool No. that has
been registered to the valid magazine.
Exists in magazine 5. Set? (Y/N) • An attempt was made to set the same No. as the tool No. that has
been registered to the valid magazine.

II - 64
 2. Operation Messages
2.10 Editing-related Operation Messages

2.10 Editing-related Operation Messages

Message Details
Buffer correct not possible • Buffer correction cannot be performed for this program.
• Buffer correction was attempted during the BTR operation.
Can't write into file • Could not write the data to the memory with the buffer correction.
Contact the service center.
Overwrite this file?(Y/N) • Message to confirm when registering MDI
[Y] or [INPUT] : Overwrite the file.
[N] : Do not overwrite the file.
Memory over • The program cannot be written, because the memory capacity will be
exceeded.
Designated character string not • Could not find the search results and character string in the program.
found
Save current file ?(Y/N) • Message to confirm the saving.
[Y] : Save the changes to the current file.
[N] : Do not save the changes to the current file.
A file does not exist • An attempt was made to select and edit a non-existent file.
Executing • Following menu's process is executing now:
"Line paste", "Line clear", "Undo", "String search", "String replace",
"Miss warning", or "Next miss".
Designated file does not exist • An attempt was made to select and erase a non-existent file.
Erase complete • The data erasing completed.
Can't erase designated file • The selected file cannot currently be erased.
Designated file does not exist • A file that does not exist was designated when file editing.
Designated file already exists • When creating a new file, a file name was designated that already
exists.
Replace? (Y/N) • Message to confirm the character string replacement.
[Y] or [INPUT] : Replace the character string.
[N] : Do not replace the character string.
File access error • Contact the Service Center.
File open error • The designated file is already open.
Editing • A program is being edited on the screen.
Save the program to write it into the memory.
Program entry over • The program could not be registered in the memory when attempted,
because the No. of registrations designated in the specifications
would be exceeded.
Block char nos over • The character number limitation in one block was exceeded.

Paste error • Pasting was attempted within the copy range of the same file.
Copy range is inadequate • The copy range designation is inadequate.
Check whether the designated range exists.
• The range was designated exceeding 100 lines during mass editing.
Area designation is inadequate • The area designation is inadequate.
Check whether the designated area exists.
Designated line is out of • Designation was attempted of a line No. larger than the No. of lines in
program range the entire program.

II - 65
2. Operation Messages
2.10 Editing-related Operation Messages

Message Details
MDI no setting • Editing of the MDI was started, but the MDI setting was incomplete.
Abs/Inc mode is illegal • During playback editing:
G90 was set when control parameter "Playback G90" was OFF.
G91 was set when control parameter "Playback G90" was ON.
MDI search complete • The MDI search completed.

Can't search in MDI mode • The restart search was attempted during MDI mode.
• Execute the restart search after switching other than MDI mode.
MDI Set ended • MDI setting cannot be executed.
MDI Setting error • MDI setting was completed.
MDI search error • Could not execute the MDI search.
MDI entry complete • MDI entry has been completed.
Can't edit except in MDI mode • "#1144 mdlkof" (MDI setting lock) is "0" and therefore it is not possible
to edit the MDI program in a mode other than MDI mode.
Input miss was detected • An input miss was detected.
Input miss was not detected • A search was performed for an input miss, however, none was found.
Can't edit a file except in NC • Editing cannot be performed at the edit window for programs other
memory than those in the NC memory.
Save it • The cursor was tried to move beyond the editable range during
mass-editing. Save, then operate again.
Save not possible • A special file (history file etc.) that cannot be saved was edited and an
attempt was made to save it. Perform an operation to quit editing.
• Failed saving due to file size over, etc. during mass-editing.
• Setting of "#1166 fixpro" was illegal. Use the settings for a regular
program.
• MDI cannot be entered due to MDI editing mode. Press INPUT key
and finish editing.
Save left side file? (Y/N) • Message to confirm whether saving the left side file of the
multi-program display type
[Y]: Save the change
[N]: Do not save the change
Save right side file? • Message to confirm whether saving the right side file of the
(Y/N) multi-program display type
[Y]: Save the change
[N]: Do not save the change
Can't edit because of size over • The program cannot be written, because the memory capacity will be
exceeded.
• If the memory capacity of the transfer designation device is exceeded
during the automatic backup, increase the available memory of the
device.
Can't edit the searched file • The serial file cannot be edited.
DS not ready • Operation was attempted when a DS was not inserted.
• Creating or opening a program was attempted when a DS was not
inserted.
FD not ready • The FD operation search was attempted when an FD was not
inserted.
• The FD list display was attempted when an FD was not inserted.
• Creating or opening a program was attempted when an FD was not
inserted.

II - 66
 2. Operation Messages
2.11 Diagnosis-related Operation Messages

Message Details
MemoryCard not ready • Operation was attempted when a memory card was not inserted.
This cannot be specified • Invalid special characters (/E, etc.) were set.
Loading • Loading file.
Saving • Saving file.
Can't execute playback edit • The playback editing cannot be executed because the right side
area is mass-editing mode.
• Playback editing was attempted while program file to be edited is not
designated. Display a program file in the right side area.
Program display lock C • The program display or search cannot be executed. Review the
parameter "#1121 pglk_c" (program display lock).

2.11 Diagnosis-related Operation Messages

Message Details
Erase? (Y/N) • Message to confirm alarm history clear operation
[Y] or [INPUT] : Erase the data
[N] : Do not erase the data.
Can't write data • The data cannot be written.
Device is illegal • The designated device is inadequate.
Modal output not possible • The modal output process failed.
Modal clear not possible • The modal cancel process failed.
Continue display not possible • Continuous display is not possible because data is not set at the
cursor position.
One-shot output not possible • The one-shot output process failed.
Setting data not found • The data has not been set.
Select a menu • A device No. was set without selecting a menu operation.
Press any operation menu and input the device No. with a menu
highlighted.

II - 67
 2. Operation Messages
2.12 Maintenance-related Operation Messages

2.12 Maintenance-related Operation Messages

Message Details
Password is illegal • The input password is incorrect.
Input password • The [Password] menu key was pressed, and the password input
mode was entered.
Input a password.
Now making back-up • Currently backing up system data and the user PLC program to a
specified device.
Backupping • The SRAM data is being backed up on the HD.
Backup complete • Backup of the SRAM data on the HD has been completed.
• Back up of system data and user PLC program to a specified device
has been completed.
Backup error • An error occurred while backing up the SRAM data on the HD.
Select directory to backup • Select area by moving cursor, using ↑ and ↓ keys.
Press the "INPUT" key to confirm.
Select directory to restore • Select file by moving cursor, using ↑ and ↓ keys.
Press the "INPUT" key to confirm.
Executing format • The formatting is being executed correctly.
Format complete • The formatting completed correctly.
Format error • The NC memory formatting failed.
Contact the nearest service center.
Quit HMI ?(Y/N) • Message to confirm the HMI quitting
[Y] or [INPUT] : Quit the HMI.
[N] : Do not quit the HMI.
Format NC memory?(Y/N) • Message to confirm the NC memory formatting
[Y] or [INPUT] : Start formatting the NC memory.
[N] : Do not format the NC memory.
Execute SRAM backup ?(Y/N) • Message to confirm the SRAM back up
[Y] or [INPUT] : The SRAM data is backed up to the HD.
[N] : The SRAM data is not backed up to the HD.
PLC running. Does it stop? (Y/N) • Message to confirm the PLC STOP
[Y] or [INPUT] : Backup the SRAM data on the HD.
[N] : Do not backup the SRAM data on the HD.
Restoring • The system data and user PLC program are now being restored to
the NC from a specified device.
Restore complete • Restoration of system data and user PLC program to the NC from a
specified device has been completed.
Auto adjust error • The H/W status cannot be read properly, and therefore it is not
possible to perform auto adjustments.
Check the remote I/O unit.
Perform manual adjustments.
• The unit is defective. Replace the unit.

Change Ope. test mode • Operation of the Operation test screen was attempted when the
operation adjustment mode was not selected.
Test mode sig valid signal is now • The operation adjustment mode cannot be selected because the
OFF operation adjustment mode valid signal (R9998/bit0) is 0.

II - 68
2. Operation Messages
2.12 Maintenance-related Operation Messages

Message Details
Auto adjust complete • Analog output adjustment completed normally.
Auto adjust execution • Performing analog output adjustment normally.
Execute? (Y/N) • Message to confirm the operation
[Y] or [INPUT] : The currently selected operation is performed.
[N] : The currently selected operation is not performed.
Unit not equipped • The machine is not equipped with an analog output unit.
A serial number is inaccurate • The system data to be restored and the serial number in the NC do
not match, and therefore it is not possible to restore.
• Check to ensure that the serial number in the NC has been set and
that the system data to be restored matches.
Operating aux axis • It is not possible to set parameter and input/output data during
auxiliary axis operation.
• It is not possible to change the display axis during auxiliary axis
operation.

II - 69
 2. Operation Messages
2.13 Data Sampling-related Operation Messages

2.13 Data Sampling-related Operation Messages

Message Details
Executing sampling • The waveform data is being sampled.

Input the axis name • This appears when the data type is selected in the Ch1 or Ch2 data
setting area.
Input the name of the axis to be sampled.
Input axis name/signal No./bit • This appears when the data type is selected in the Ch1 or Ch2 data
setting area.
Set the sampling conditions common for Ch1 and Ch2.
Input device name/device No. • Input device name/device No.
Input file/sub-ID/item/data • This appears when an NC file is selected in the Ch1 or Ch2 data
setting area.
Change the area • Change the area.
Sampling conditions are illegal • The data cannot be sampled as the setting conditions are illegal.
Review the data, vertical scale, sampling rate and horizontal scale on
the Condition setting screen.
Can't start sampling • "#1224 aux08/bit0" is "0" and sampling start-up cannot be performed.
The collection invalid • The parameters are set to prevent data being collected. Check the
parameters.
The collection begin? • Determines whether to start data collection. Press [Y] or [INPUT] to
start data collection.
The collection stop? • Determines whether to stop data collection. Press [Y] or [INPUT] to
stop data collection.
The collection is being executed • An attempt was made to start data collection while data collection
was being performed.
The collection is stopping • An attempt was made to stop data collection while data collection was
stopped.
The collection invalid • The data collection is set invalid in the parameter. Check the
parameter.
Scroll execution • The waveform display is being scrolled.

Refresh execution • The waveform is being refreshed.

II - 70
 2. Operation Messages
2.14 Absolute Position Detection-related Operation Messages

2.14 Absolute Position Detection-related Operation Messages

Message Details
Setting absolute position set • Setting from the screen was attempted of absolute position detection
data when the "Absolute Position Set" was not ON.
Press the menu key [Absolute Position Set] to turn it ON.
Not the abs position detection • An absolute position detection system has not been selected for the
system currently selected axis.
The machine parameter (Axis specification parameter "#2049 type")
must be set.
Axis name inappropriate • The set axis name is inappropriate. Check the axis name.
Not passed on grid • The absolute position basic point was set without passing the grid
after the power ON in the dogless-type absolute position detection.
Return one grid back and repeat the procedure.
Can't start • Settings of "#0 absolute posn set", "#2 Z-point" and "#2055 pushf" are
not adequate.
• "AbsEncoder: Serial data error" alarm (Z71 0005) has occurred.
Check the parameter and the alarm.
Illegal direction • JOG starting direction is illegal in the machine end stopper method of
the dogless-type absolute position detection.

2.15 System Setup-related Operation Messages

Message Details
Initial parameter creating • The initial parameter is being created.
Initial parameter transferring • The initial parameter is being transferred.
Spindle initial parameter • The spindle initial parameter is being transferred.
transferring
Can't write data • The data cannot be written.
• Setting of the initial parameter failed.
• Contact the service center.
Param set ended. • After completing the parameter setting, it determines whether
Format NC memory? (Y/N) executing the file format or not.
Enter [Y] or [INPUT] to execute the file format.
Write sample ladder? (Y/N) • It determines whether executing writing the sample PLC program or
not. Enter [Y] or [INPUT] to start writing the sample PLC program.
Sample ladder not found • The file to set the sample PLC program is lost.
Contact the service center.

II - 71
 2. Operation Messages
2.16 Automatic Backup-related Operation Messages

2.16 Automatic Backup-related Operation Messages

Message Details
Auto backup disabled • Set a correct value in the device No. of the automatic backup device.
(Device illegal)
Auto backup disabled (No DS) • When turning ON the power next time, insert DS.
Auto backup disabled • When turning ON the power next time, insert the memory card.
(No memory card)
Auto backup proceeding • Wait for the automatic backup to complete.
Auto backup completed • The automatic back up is completed.
Memory over • The memory capacity of the transfer designation device was
exceeded during the automatic backup. Increase the available
memory of the transfer designation device.
File access error • A file access error occurred during the automatic backup. Contact
the service center.
Can't make directory • The storage destination directory of the automatic backup data
described in the custom definition file does not exist. Create the
directory of the storage destination.
Write protect • The memory card is write-protected. Release the write protection.

2.17 Alarm History-related Operation Messages

Message Details
The collection begin? (Y/N) • Determines whether to start alarm history. Press [Y] or [INPUT] to
start alarm history.
The collection stop? (Y/N) • Determines whether to stop alarm history. Press [Y] or [INPUT] to
stop alarm history.
The collection is being executed • An attempt was made to start alarm history while alarm history was
being performed.
The collection is stopping • An attempt was made to stop alarm history while alarm history was
being stopped.
Execute the collection data • Determines whether to clear alarm history. Press [Y] or [INPUT] to
clear?(Y/N) clear alarm history.
Data clear complete • The alarm history cleared was completed.
The collection begin • The alarm history was started.
The collection stop • The alarm history was stopped.

II - 72
 2. Operation Messages
2.18 Anshin-net-related Operation Messages

2.18 Anshin-net-related Operation Messages

(1) Messages related to all Anshin-net screens
Message Details
(None) Press one-touch call to • Communication has not been started.
call the NC service. • A call is being placed with automatic alarm
Do not turn the power OFF notification or one-touch call, and a call is being
received from the NC service.
during the one-touch call.

(2) Messages related to automatic alarm notification

Message Details
dialing Do not turn the power OFF • A call is being placed with automatic alarm
until the automatic alarm notification.
• Communication starts when an alarm occurs,
notification ends.
but the line is not connected yet in this state.
• This state is also entered when standing by for
transmission.
• Communication has been started with
emergency stop by the servo, spindle or PLC
alarm, or by the establishment of the conditions
set in the parameters.
Waiting for dialing Do not turn the power OFF ● Redialing since the NC service is using the line
until the automatic alarm for other communication.
notification ends.
Verifying the user Do not turn the power OFF • User authentication is being executed by the
registration until the automatic alarm NC service side.
notification ends.
Connecting Do not turn the power OFF • The line is connected with automatic alarm
until the automatic alarm notification.
notification ends.
Receiving Do not turn the power OFF • The diagnosis data is being received with
until the automatic alarm automatic alarm notification.
notification ends.
Sending Do not turn the power OFF • The diagnosis data is being sent with automatic
until the automatic alarm alarm notification.
notification ends.
Transmission Press one-touch call to • Automatic alarm notification has ended, and the
completed call the NC service. line has been disconnected.
Do not turn the power OFF
during the one-touch call.
Reception completed Press one-touch call to • Automatic alarm notification has ended, and the
call the NC service. line has been disconnected.
• This is displayed when at least one file has
Do not turn the power OFF
been received.
during the one-touch call.
(Status of Connecting with NC • In connection standby state since line is being
communication with service. used by Anshin-net.
NC service) Wait for communication to
end.

II - 73
 2. Operation Messages
2.18 Anshin-net-related Operation Messages

(3) Messages related to automatic alarm notification

Message Details
Operator notice If automatic operation • Operator notification is valid.
effective stops while operator • If machining ends normally or abnormally in this
state, communication with operator notification
notification is valid, the
will start.
designated telephone
number will be contacted.
Dialing Do not turn the power OFF • Data is being transmitted with operator
until the operator notification.
• Communication will start when machining ends
notification ends.
normally or abnormally, but the line is not
connected yet in this state.
• This state is also entered when standing by for
transmission.
Waiting for dialing Do not turn the power OFF • Redialing since the NC service is using the line
until the operator for other communication.
notification ends.
Verifying the user Do not turn the power OFF • User authentication is being executed by the
registration until the operator NC service side.
notification ends.
Connecting Do not turn the power OFF • The line is connected with operator notification.
until the operator
notification ends.
Receiving Do not turn the power OFF • The diagnosis data is being received with
until the operator operator notification.
notification ends.
Sending Do not turn the power OFF • The diagnosis data is being sent with operator
until the operator notification.
notification ends.
Transmission Press one-touch call to • Operator notification has ended, and the line
completed call the NC service. has been disconnected.
Do not turn the power OFF
during the one-touch call.
Reception completed Press one-touch call to • Operator notification has ended, and the line
call the NC service. has been disconnected.
• This is displayed when at least one file has
Do not turn the power OFF
been received.
during the one-touch call.
(Status of Connecting with NC • In connection standby state since line is being
communication with service. used by Anshin-net.
NC service) Wait for communication to
end.

II - 74
 2. Operation Messages
2.18 Anshin-net-related Operation Messages

(4) Messages related to automatic alarm notification

Message Details
Carry out one-touch Press "Y" to make a • A connection with NC service has not been
call? (Y/N) one-touch call and "N" to established.
• The system is confirming whether to actually
cancel.
make a one-touch call.
If the line is being in use, a • This is displayed when the Call menu is
connection with NC pressed. Press Y or INPUT to execute
service will be established one-touch call.
as soon as the line
becomes idle.

Message Details
Dialing Do not turn the power OFF • Data is being transmitted with one-touch call.
until the one-touch call • Communication will start when one-touch call is
executed, but the line is not connected yet in
ends.
this state.
• This state is also entered when standing by for
transmission.
Waiting for dialing Do not turn the power OFF • Redialing since the NC service is using the line
until the one-touch call for other communication.
ends.
Verifying the user Do not turn the power OFF • User authentication is being executed by the
registration until the one-touch call NC service side.
ends.
Connecting Do not turn the power OFF • The line is connected with one-touch call.
until the one-touch call
ends.
Receiving Do not turn the power OFF • The diagnosis data is being received with
until the one-touch call one-touch call.
ends.
Sending Do not turn the power OFF • The diagnosis data is being sent with one-touch
until the one-touch call call.
ends.
Transmission Press one-touch call to • Communication with one-touch call has ended,
completed call the NC service. and the line has been disconnected.
Do not turn the power OFF
during the one-touch call.
Reception completed Press one-touch call to • Communication with one-touch call has ended,
call the NC service. and the line has been disconnected.
• This is displayed when at least one file has
Do not turn the power OFF
been received.
during the one-touch call.
(Status of Connecting with NC • In connection standby state since line is being
communication with service. used by Anshin-net.
NC service) Wait for communication to
end.

II - 75
 2. Operation Messages
2.18 Anshin-net-related Operation Messages

(5) Messages related to transmission request from NC service

Message Details
Verifying the Connecting with NC • User authentication is being executed by the
distination service. NC system side.
Wait for communication to
end.
Connecting Connecting with NC • The line is connected upon transmission
service. request from NC service.
Wait for communication to
end.
Receiving Connecting with NC • Data is being received upon transmission
service. request from NC service.
Wait for communication to
end.
Sending Connecting with NC • Data is being sent upon transmission request
service. from NC service.
Wait for communication to
end.
Transmission Press one-touch call to • Transmission request from NC service has
completed call the NC service. been completed, and the line has been
disconnected.
Do not turn the power OFF
during the one-touch call.
Reception completed Press one-touch call to • Transmission request from NC service has
call the NC service. been completed, and the line has been
disconnected.
Do not turn the power OFF
• This is displayed when at least one file or
during the one-touch call. message has been received.

(6) Messages related to number 1 to 3 menu operations

Message Details
(None) Press one-touch call to • The selected telephone No. will be set as the
call the NC service. telephone No. to be notified to the NC service.
• Hereafter, the telephone No. set with one-touch
Do not turn the power OFF
call or operator notification will be notified to the
during the one-touch call. NC service.

(7) Messages related to arbitrary number setting

Message Details
(None) Input the telephone No. to • The input telephone No. will be set as the
be notified. telephone No. to be notified to the NC service.
• Hereafter, the telephone No. set with one-touch
call or operator notification will be notified to the
NC service.

II - 76
 2. Operation Messages
2.18 Anshin-net-related Operation Messages

(8) Messages related to sharing of machining data

Message Details
Transmit by the set • The line is not connected with NC service.
password?(Y/N) • The system is confirming whether to transfer machining data. Press
"Y" or "INPUT" to transfer machining data, "N" to cancel.
OK? (Y/N) • The line is not connected with NC service.
• The system is confirming whether to erase machining data. Press
"Y" or "INPUT" to erase machining data, "N" to cancel.
dialing • A call is being placed.
• "Transmit by the set password?(Y/N)" or "OK? (Y/N)" is shown.
Pressing "Y" or "INPUT" starts the communication. The line is not
connected yet in this state.
Connecting • The line is connected for sharing of machining data.
Transmitting • The machining data is being transmitted.
Transmission completed • Machining data transmission has ended, and the line has been
disconnected.
Receiving • The machining data is being received.
Reception completed • Machining data reception has ended, and the line has been
disconnected.
Erase complete • Machining data erasing has ended, and the line has been
disconnected.
Waiting for dialing • In dialing standby state since the line is being used.
Input the password • The password, which is required for the transmission/reception of
machining data, has not been set. Input the password set on the
Anshin-net parameter 1 screen.
Input the user number • The user number, which is required for the transmission/reception
of machining data, has not been set. Input the user number set on
the Anshin-net parameter 1 screen.

II - 77
 2. Operation Messages
2.19 Messages Related to Machine Tool Builder Network System

2.19 Messages Related to Machine Tool Builder Network System

(1) Messages related to all Machine Tool Builder Network System (MTB net) Screens.
Message Details
(None) Press the [Send] menu • Communication has not been started.
when you transmit the
diagnosis data to MTB.
Don't turn OFF the power
supply while transmitting.

Message Details
Network service is connected • The settings of the MTB net parameter 1,2 cannot be changed
since the system is communicating with Call Center or machine
tool builder. Set again after the communication has ended.

(2) Messages related to transmission of diagnosis data

Message Details
Transmit diagnosis Press Y (transmit the • The system is confirming the transmission of
data? (Y/N) diagnosis data) or N (cancel). diagnosis data.
You'll connect with MTB
when it gets available if line
used.
dialing Don't turn OFF a power • The diagnosis data is being transmitted.
supply until diagnosis data • The line is not connected yet in this state.
transmission ends.
Verifying the user Don't turn OFF a power • The system is waiting for an authentication
registration supply until diagnosis data response from remote diagnosis tool kit.
transmission ends.
Waiting for the reply Don't turn OFF a power • The line has been disconnected once, and
supply until diagnosis data the system is waiting for a connection with
the machine tool builder.
transmission ends.
Verifying the Don't turn OFF a power • The line has been connected corresponding
destination supply until diagnosis data to the received call from the machine tool
builder. The system is confirming the
transmission ends. destination of connection.
Connecting Don't turn OFF a power • The system is connected or connecting with
supply until diagnosis data machine tool builder.
transmission ends.
Transmitting Don't turn OFF a power • The diagnosis data is actually being
supply until diagnosis data transmitted.
transmission ends.
Transmission Press Y (transmit the • The transmission of diagnosis data has
completed diagnosis data) or N (cancel). ended, and the line has been disconnected.
You'll connect with MTB
when it gets available if line
used.

II - 78
 2. Operation Messages
2.19 Messages Related to Machine Tool Builder Network System

Message Details
Waiting for dialing Don't turn OFF a power • The machine tool builder is using the line for
supply until diagnosis data other communication.
transmission ends.
(Status of Connecting with NC service. • In connection standby state since line is being
communication with Please wait until the used by Anshin-net.
NC service) communication ends.
(Status of Connecting with MTB. • In connection standby state since line is being
communication with Please wait until the used by the machine tool builder.
machine communication ends.
manufacturer)

(3) Messages related to reception of the diagnosis results

Message Details
Verifying the Connecting with MTB. • The line has been connected corresponding
destination Please wait until the to the received call from the machine tool
builder. The system is confirming the
communication ends. destination of connection.
Connecting Connecting with MTB. • The system is connected or connecting with
Please wait until the machine tool builder.
communication ends.
Receiving Connecting with MTB. • The diagnosis results are actually being
Please wait until the received.
communication ends.
Reception completed Press the [Send] menu • Reception of the diagnosis results has ended,
when you transmit the and the line has been disconnected.
diagnosis data to MTB.
Don't turn OFF the power
supply while transmitting.

(4) Messages related to reception of messages

Message Details
Verifying the Connecting with MTB. • The line has been connected corresponding to
destination Please wait until the the received call from the machine tool builder.
The system is confirming the destination of
communication ends. connection.
Connecting Connecting with MTB. • The system is connected or connecting with
Please wait until the machine tool builder.
communication ends.
Reception completed Press the [Send] menu • Reception of the message has ended, and the
when you transmit the line has been disconnected.
diagnosis data to MTB.
Don't turn OFF the power
supply while transmitting.

II - 79
 2. Operation Messages
2.20 Other Operation Messages

2.20 Other Operation Messages

Message Details
Executing automatic operation • Cannot be performed during automatic operation.
Perform the operation again after automatic operation has been
completed.
Setting error • The setting data is inadequate. (Alphabetic characters were set
where only numeric characters can be set, etc.)
• The data has not been set.
• There is no specification.

Data range error • The input data exceeded the range.

Set the value again within the range.
Data protect • Setting, erasing, parameter setting, etc., of the various data is
prohibited, because the data protect key is validated.
Reconsider the data protect key setting.
Write protect • Attempted to create a new program file in the write-protected device
• Opened the program file of the write-protected device
• Attempted to save the program file of the write-protected device
• Attempted to correct the buffer for the write-protected file.
• Attempted to edit or correct the buffer for the read-only program file.
Edit lock B • It is not possible to change machining program B (8000 to 8999: user
standard subprogram) or machining program C (9000 to 9999:
machine tool builder custom program) as edit lock B is enabled.
Edit lock C • It is not possible to change machining program C (9000 to 9999:
machine tool builder custom program) as edit lock C is enabled.
Origin set not possible • The operation is in a state in which origin set is not possible.
Check the parameter "#1123 origin (Origin set prohibited)" setting.
• Check that the axis has stopped.
• Check that idling (post-reset status) is currently being performed.

Can't command manual value • The manual numerical value protect is valid and therefore it is not
possible to perform a manual numerical value command.
Getting T code list • T code list is being retrieved.
T code list complete • Retrieving T code list is completed.
Load meter display not possible • The load meter cannot be displayed.
Contact the machine tool builder.
Pallet running • Each setting was executed during pallet running.
APC executing • Each setting was executed during automatic pallet changer
executing.

II - 80
 3. Program Error

3. Program Error
(The bold characters are the message displayed in the screen.)
These alarms occur during automatic operation‚ and the causes of these alarms are mainly program errors
which occur‚ for instance‚ when mistakes have been made in the preparation of the machining programs or
when programs which conform to the specification have not been prepared.

Error No. Details Remedy

P 10 No. of simultaneous axes over • Divide the alarm block command into two.
The number of axis addresses commanded in • Check the specifications.
the same block exceeds the specifications.
P 11 Illegal axis address • Revise the axis names in the program.
The axis address commanded by the
program and the axis address set by the
parameter do not match.
P 20 Division error • Check the program.
An axis command which cannot be divided by
the command unit has been issued.
P 29 Not accept command • Check the program.
The normal line control command (G40.1,
G41.1, G42.1) has been issued during the
modal in which the normal line control is not
acceptable.
P 30 Parity H error • Check the paper tape.
The number of holes per character on the • Check the tape puncher and tape reader.
paper tape is even for EIA code and odd for
ISO code.
P 31 Parity V error • Make the number of characters per block on
The number of characters per block on the the paper tape even.
paper tape is odd. • Set the parameter parity V selection OFF.
P 32 Illegal address • Check and revise the program address.
An address not listed in the specifications has • Check and correct the parameters values.
been used. • Check the specifications.
P 33 Format error • Check the program.
The command format in the program is not
correct.
P 34 Illegal G code • Check and correct the G code address in the
A G code not listed in the specifications has program.
been used.
An illegal G code was commanded during the
coordinate rotation command (G68).
G51.2 or G50.2 was commanded when the • Check the parameter setting values.
rotary tool axis No. (#1501 polyax) was set to
"0".
G51.2 or G50.2 was commanded when the
tool axis was set to the linear axis (#1017 rot
"0").
P 35 Setting value range over • Check the program.
The setting range for the addresses has been
exceeded.
P 36 Program end error • Enter the M02 and M30 command at the end
"EOR" has been read during tape and of the program.
memory mode. • Enter the M99 command at the end of the
subprogram.

II - 81
 3. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P 37 O, N number zero • The program Nos. are designated across a
A zero has been specified for program and range from 1 to 99999999.
sequence Nos. • The sequence Nos. are designated across a
range from 1 to 99999.
P 39 No specifications • Check the specifications.
• A non-specified G code was specified.
• The selected operation mode is not used.
P 40 Pre-read block error • Reconsider the program.
When tool radius compensation is executed‚
there is an error in the pre-read block and so
the interference check is disabled.
P 48 Restart pos return incomplete • Carry out program restart again. Movement
Movement command was executed before command cannot be executed before
executing the block that is restart-searched. executing the block that is restart-searched.
P 49 Invalid restart search • Reconsider the program.
• Restart search was attempted for the • Reconsider the restart search position.
3-dimensional circular interpolation.
• Restart search was attempted during the
cylindrical interpolation, polar coordinate
interpolation, and tool tip center control.
P 50 No spec: Inch/Metric change • Check the specifications.
Inch/Metric changeover (G20/G21) command
was issued even though there is no
inch/metric conversion specification.
P 60 Compensation length over • Reconsider the axis address command.
The commanded movement distance is
excessive. (Over 231)
P 61 No spec: Unidirectional posit. • Check the specifications.
Unidirectional positioning (G60) was
commanded even though there is no
unidirectional positioning specification.
P 62 No F command • The default movement modal command at
• No feed rate command has been issued. power ON is G01. This causes the machine
• There is no F command in the cylindrical to move without a G01 command if a
interpolation or polar coordinate movement command is issued in the
interpolation immediately after the G95 program, and an alarm results. Use an F
mode is commanded. command to specify the feed rate.
• Specify F with a thread lead command.
P 63 No spec: High-speed machining • Check the specifications.
High-speed machining cancel (G5P0) was
commanded even though there is no
high-speed machining mode specification.
P 65 No spec: High speed mode 3 • Check the high-speed mode III specifications.
P 70 Arc end point deviation large • Check the numerical values of the addresses
• There is an error in the arc start and end that specify the start and end points, arc
points as well as in the arc center. center as well as the radius in the program.
• The difference of the involute curve through • Check the "+" and "-" directions of the
the start point and the end point is large. address numerical values.
• When arc was commanded, one of the two • Check the scaling valid axis.
axes configuring the arc plane was a
scaling valid axis.

II - 82
 3. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P 71 Arc center error • Check the numerical values of the addresses
• The arc center is not sought during in the program.
R-specified circular interpolation. • Check whether the start point or end point is
• The curvature center of the involute curve on the inner side of the base circle for involute
cannot be obtained. interpolation. When carrying out tool radius
compensation, check that the start point and
end point after compensation are not on the
inner side of the base circle for involute
interpolation.
• Check whether the start point and end point
are at an even distance from the center of the
base circle for involute interpolation.
P 72 No spec: Herical cutting • Check the helical specifications.
A helical command has been issued though it • An Axis 3 command was issued by the
is not included in the specifications. circular interpolation command. If there is
no helical specification, the linear axis is
moved to the next block.
P 73 No spec: Spiral cutting • The G02.1 and G03.1 commands are issued
A spiral command was issued despite the fact for circular interpolation.
that such a command does not exist in the • Check the spiral specifications.
specifications.
P 74 Can't calculate 3DIM arc • Reconsider the program.
The end block was not specified during
3-dimension circular interpolation
supplementary modal, and therefore it is not
possible to calculate the 3-dimension circular
interpolation.
Furthermore, it not possible to calculate the
3-dimension circular interpolation due to an
interruption during 3-dimension circular
interpolation supplementary modal.
P 75 3DIM arc illegal • Reconsider the program.
An unusable G code was issued during
3-dimension circular interpolation modal.
Or, a 3-dimension circular interpolation
command was issued during a modal for
which a 3-dimension circular interpolation
command cannot be issued.
P 76 No spec: 3DIM arc interpolat • Check the specifications.
G02.4/G03.4 was commanded even though
there is no 3-dimension circular interpolation
specification.
P80 No spec: Hypoth ax interpolat • Check the specifications.
Hypothetical axis interpolation (G07) was
commanded even though there is no
hypothetical axis interpolation specification.
P 90 No spec: Thread cutting • Check the specifications.
A thread cutting command was issued even
though there is no thread cutting command
specification.
P 91 No spec: Var lead threading • Check the specifications.
Variable lead thread cutting (G34) was
commanded even though there is no variable
lead thread cutting specification.

II - 83
 3. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P 93 Illegal pitch vaule • Set the correct thread lead command for the
The thread lead (thread pitch) when thread cutting command.
performing the thread cutting command is
incorrect.
P100 No spec: Cylindric interpolat • Check the specifications.
A cylindrical interpolation command was
issued even though there is no cylindrical
interpolation specification.
P110 Plane select during figure rot • Check the machining program.
Plane selection (G17/G18/G19) was
commanded during figure rotation.
P111 Plane selected while coord rot • After command G68, always issue a plane
Plane selection commands (G17, G18, G19) selection command following a G69
were issued during a coordinate rotation (coordinate rotation cancel) command.
command (G68).
P112 Plane selected while R compen • Issue plane selection commands after
• Plane selection commands (G17, G18, completing (axis movement commands
G19) were issued while tool radius issued after G40 cancel command) tool
compensation (G41, G42) and nose R radius compensation and nose R
compensation (G41, G42, G46) commands compensation commands.
were being issued.
• Plane selection commands were issued
after completing nose R compensation
commands when there are no further axis
movement commands after G40, and
compensation has not been cancelled.
P113 Illegal plane select • Issue a circular command after correct plane
The circular command axis differs from the selection.
selected plane.
P120 No spec: Feed per rotation • Check the specifications.
Feed per rotation (G95) was commanded
even though there is no feed per rotation
specification.
P121 F0 command during arc modal • Check the machining program.
F0 (F 1-digit feed) was commanded during
the arc modal (G02/G03).
P122 No spec: Auto corner override • Check the specifications.
An auto corner override command (G62) was • Delete the G62 command from the program.
issued even though there is no auto corner
override specification.
P123 No spec: High-accuracy control • Check the specifications.
High-accuracy control command was issued
even though there is no high-accuracy control
specification
P124 No spec: Inverse time feed • Check the specifications.
There is no inverse time option.

P125 G93 mode error • Reconsider the program.

• A G code command that cannot be issued
was issued during G93 mode.
• G93 command was issued during a modal
for which inverse time feed cannot be
performed.

II - 84
 3. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P126 Invalid cmnd in high-accuracy • Reconsider the program.
An illegal command was issued during the
high-accuracy control mode.
• A G code group 13 command was issued
during the high-accuracy control mode.
• Milling, cylindrical interpolation or pole
coordinate interpolation was commanded
during the high-accuracy control mode.
P127 No spec: SSS Control • Check the specifications.
The SSS control valid parameter was set to If there is no SSS control specification, set the
ON although there is no SSS control parameter #8090 SSS ON to 0.
specification.
P130 2nd M function code illegal • Check and correct the 2nd miscellaneous
The 2nd miscellaneous function address function address in the program.
commanded in the program differs from the
address set in the parameters.
miscellaneous function.
P131 No spec: Cnst surface ctrl G96 • Check the specifications.
A constant surface speed control command • Change the constant surface speed control
(G96) was issued even though there is no command (G96) to a rotation speed
specification. command (G97).
P132 Spindle rotation speed S=0 • Reconsider the program.
No spindle rotation speed command has
been issued.
P133 Illegal P-No. G96 • Reconsider the parameter specified for the
An invalid constant surface speed control axis constant surface speed control axis.
has been specified.
P140 No spec: Pos compen cmd • Check the specifications.
The position compensation command (G45
to G48) specifications are not available.
P141 Pos compen during rotation • Reconsider the program.
Position compensation was commanded
during the figure rotation or coordinate
rotation command.
P142 Pos compen invalid arc • Reconsider the program.
A position compensation invalid arc
command was commanded.
P150 No spec: Nose R compensation • Check the specifications.
• Even though there were no tool radius
compensation specifications, tool radius
compensation commands (G41 and G42)
were issued.
• Even though there were no nose R
compensation specifications, nose R
compensation commands (G41, G42, and
G46) were issued.
P151 Radius compen during arc mode • Issue the linear command (G01) or rapid
A compensation command (G40‚ G41‚ G42‚ traverse command (G00) in the
G43‚ G44‚ G46) has been issued in the arc compensation command block or cancel
modal (G02‚ G03). block.
(Set the modal to linear interpolation.)

II - 85
 3. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P152 No intersection • Reconsider the program.
In interference block processing during
execution of a tool radius compensation (G41
or G42) or nose R compensation (G41‚ G42‚
or G46) command‚ the intersection point after
one block is skipped cannot be determined.
P153 Compensation interference • Reconsider the program.
An interference error has arisen while the tool
radius compensation command (G41‚ G42) or
nose R compensation command (G41‚ G42‚
G46) was being executed.
P154 No spec: 3D compensation • Check the specifications.
A three-dimensional compensation command
was issued even though there are no
three-dimensional compensation
specifications.
P155 Fixed cyc exec during compen • The radius compensation mode is established
A fixed cycle command has been issued in when a fixed cycle command is executed and
the radius compensation mode. so the radius compensation cancel command
(G40) should be issued.
P156 R compen direction not defined • Change the vector to that with which the
At the start of G46 nose R compensation‚ the compensation direction is defined.
compensation direction is undefined if this • Exchange with a tool having a different tip
shift vector is used. point No.
P157 R compen direction changed • Change the G command to that which allows
During G46 nose R compensation‚ the inversion of the compensation direction (G00‚
compensation direction is inverted. G28‚ G30‚ G33‚ or G53).
• Exchange with a tool having a different tip
point No.
• Turn ON the "#8106 G46 NO REV-ERR"
parameter.
P158 Illegal tip point • Change the tip point No. to a legal one.
During G46 nose R compensation‚ the tip
point is illegal (other than 1 to 8).
P170 No offset number • Add the compensation No. command to the
The compensation No. (DOO‚ TOO‚ HOO) compensation command block.
command was not given when the radius • Check the number of compensation No. sets
compensation (G41‚ G42‚ G43‚ G46) a correct it to a compensation No. command
command was issued. Alternatively‚ the within the permitted number of tool
compensation No. is larger than the number compensation sets.
of sets in the specifications.
P171 No spec:Comp input by prog G10 • Check the specifications.
Compensation data input by program (G10)
was commanded even though there is no
specification of compensation data input by
program.
P172 G10 L number error • Check the address L-No. of the G10
(G10 L-No. error) command and correct the No.
The L address command is not correct when
the G10 command is issued.

II - 86
 3. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P173 G10 P number error • First check the number of compensation sets
(G10 compensation error) and then set the address P designation to
When the G10 command is issued‚ a within the permitted number of sets.
compensation No. outside the permitted
number of sets in the specifications has been
commanded for the compensation No.
command.
P174 No spec:Comp input by prog G11 • Check the specifications.
Compensation data input by program cancel
(G11) was commanded even though there is
no specification of compensation data input
by program.
P177 Tool life count active • The tool life management data cannot be
Registration of tool life management data with registered when counting the used data. Turn
G10 was attempted when the used data count the used data count valid signal OFF.
valid signal was ON.
P178 Tool life data entry over • Review the number of registrations.
The number of registration groups‚ total
number of registered tools or the number of
registrations per group exceeded the
specifications range.
P179 Illegal group No. • The group No. cannot be commanded in
• When registering the tool life management duplicate. When registering the group data‚
data with G10‚ the group No. was register it in group units.
commanded in duplicate. • Correct to the correct group No.
• A group No. that was not registered was
designated during the T 99
command.
• An M code command must be issued as a
single command but coexists in the same
block as that of another M code command.
• The M code commands set in the same
group exist in the same block.
P180 No spec: Drilling cycle • Check the specifications.
A fixed cycle command was issued though • Correct the program.
there are not fixed cycle (G72 - G89)
specifications.
P181 No spindle command (Tap cycle) • Issue the spindle rotation speed command
The spindle rotation speed command has not (S) when the fixed cycle for drilling command
been issued when the fixed cycle for drilling G84‚ G74 (G84‚ G88) is given.
command is given. • Enter "S*****" type S command.
"S*****" type S command does not exist in the
same block with the synchronous tapping
cycle.
P182 Synchronous tap error • Check connection to the main spindle.
• Connection to the main spindle unit was not • Check that the main spindle encoder exists.
established. • Set 1 to the parameter #3024 (sout).
• The synchronous tapping was attempted
with the spindle not serially connected
under the multiple-spindle control I.
P183 No pitch/thread number • Specify the pitch data and the number of
The pitch or thread number command has not threads by F or E command.
been issued in the tap cycle of a fixed cycle
for drilling command.

II - 87
 3. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P184 Pitch/thread number error • Check the pitch or the number of threads per
• The pitch or the number of threads per inch inch.
is illegal in the tap cycle of the fixed cycle
for drilling command.
• The pitch is too small for the spindle rotation
speed.
• The thread number is too large for the
spindle rotation speed.
P185 No spec: Sync tapping cycle • Check the specifications.
Synchronous tapping cycle (G84/G74) was
commanded even though there is no
synchronous tapping cycle specification.
P186 Illegal S cmnd in synchro tap • Cancel the synchronous tapping before
S command was issued during synchronous
tapping modal. issuing the S command.

P190 No spec: Turning cycle • Check the specification.

A lathe cutting cycle command was input • Delete the lathe cutting cycle command.
although the lathe cutting cycle was
undefined in the specification.
P191 Taper length error • The radius set value in the lathe cycle
In the lathe cutting cycle‚ the specified length command must be smaller than the axis shift
of taper section is illegal. amount.
P192 Chamfering error • Set a chamfering amount not exceeding the
Chamfering in the thread cutting cycle is cycle.
illegal.
P200 No spec: MRC cycle • Check the specification.
The compound type fixed cycle for turning
machining I (G70 to G73) was commanded
when the compound type fixed cycle for
turning machining I specifications were not
provided.
P201 Program error (MRC) • Delete the following G codes from this
• When called with a compound type fixed subprogram that is called with the compound
cycle for turning machining I command, the type fixed cycle for turning machining I
subprogram contained at least one of the commands (G70 to G73): G27‚ G28‚ G29,
following commands: G30‚ G31‚ G33‚ G34, and fixed cycle G
• Reference position return command codes.
(G27, G28, G29, G30) • Remove G2 and G3 from the first move block
• Thread cutting (G33, G34) of the finish shape program in compound type
• Fixed cycle skip-function (G31, G31.n) fixed cycle for turning machining I.
• The first move block of the finish shape
program in compound type fixed cycle for
turning machining I contains an arc
command.
P202 Block over (MRC) • Specify 50 or a less value. The number of
The number of blocks in the shape program blocks in the shape program called by the
of the compound type fixed cycle for turning compound type fixed cycle for turning
machining I is over 50 or 200 (this differs machining I commands (G70 to G73) must be
according to the model). decreased below 50 or 200 (this differs
according to the model).

II - 88
 3. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P203 D cmnd figure error (MRC) • Check the compound type fixed cycle for
The compound type fixed cycle for turning turning machining I (G70 to G73) shape
machining I (G70 to G73) shape program program.
could not cut the work normally because it
defined an abnormal shape.
P204 E cmnd fixed cycle error • Check the compound type fixed cycle for
A command value of the compound type fixed turning machining (G70 to G76) command
cycle for turning machining (G70 to G76) is value.
illegal.
P210 No spec: Pattern cycle • Check the specification.
A compound type fixed cycle for turning
machining II (G74 to G76) command was
input although it was undefined in the
specification.
P220 No spec: Special fixed cycle • Check the specifications.
No special fixed cycle specifications are
available.
P221 No. of special fixed holes = 0 • Reconsider the program.
A 0 has been specified for the number of
holes in special fixed cycle mode.
P222 G36 angle error • Reconsider the program.
A G36 command specifies 0 for angle
intervals.
P223 G12/G13 radius error • Reconsider the program.
The radius value specified with a G12 or G13
command is below the compensation
amount.
P224 No spec: Circular (G12/G13) • Check the specifications.
There are no circular cutting specifications.
P230 Subprogram nesting over • Check the number of subprogram calls and
• A subprogram has been called 8 or more correct the program so that it does not exceed
times in succession from the subprogram. 8 times.
• The program in the data server contains the
M198 command.
• The program in the IC card has been called
more than once (the program in the IC card
can be called only once at a time).
P231 No sequence No. • Specify the sequence Nos. in the call block of
At subprogram call time‚ the sequence No. the subprogram.
set at return from the subprogram or specified
by GOTO‚ was not set.
P232 No program No. • Enter the machining program.
• The machining program has not been found • Check the subprogram storage destination
when the machining program is called. parameters.
• The file name of the program registered in • Ensure that the external device (including IC
IC card is not corresponding to O No. card) that contains the file is mounted.
P235 Program editing • Execute the program again after completion
Operation was attempted for the file under of program editing.
program editing.
P240 Program editing • Check the specifications.
Operation was attempted for the file under
program editing.

II - 89
 3. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P241 No variable No. • Check the specifications.
The variable No. commanded is out of the • Check the program variable No.
range specified in the specifications.
P242 = not defined at vrble set • Designate the "=" sign in the variable
The "=" sign has not been commanded when definition of the program.
a variable is defined.
P243 Can't use variables • Correct the program.
An invalid variable has been specified in the
left or right side of an operation expression.
P244 Invalid set date or time • Date or time cannot be changed.
Date or time was set earlier than current date • Reconsider the program.
or time in the system variables (#3011,
#3012) when the credit system was valid.
P250 No spec: Figure rotation • Check the specifications.
Figure rotation (M98 I_J_P_H_L_) was
commanded even though there is no figure
rotation specification.
P251 Figure rotation overlapped • Check the machining program.
Figure rotation command was issued during
figure rotation.
P252 Coord rotate in fig. rotation • Reconsider the program.
A coordinate rotation related command (G68,
G69) was issued during figure rotation.
P260 No spec: Coordinates rotation • Check the specifications.
Even though there were no coordinate
rotation specifications, a coordinate rotation
command was issued.
P270 No spec: User macro • Check the specifications.
A macro specification was commanded
though there are no such command
specifications.
P271 No spec: Macro interrupt • Check the specifications.
A macro interruption command has been
issued though it is not included in the
specifications.
P272 NC and macro texts in a block • Reconsider the program and place the
A statement and a macro statement exist executable statement and macro statement in
together in the same block. separate blocks.
P273 Macro call nesting over • Reconsider the program and correct it so that
The number of macro call nests exceeded the the macro calls do not exceed the limit
specifications. imposed by the specification.
P275 Macro argument over • Reconsider the program.
The number of macro call argument type II
sets has exceeded the limit.
P276 Illegal G67 command • Reconsider the program.
A G67 command was issued though it was • The G67 command is the call cancel
not during the G66 command modal. command and so the G66 command must be
designated first before it is issued.
P277 Macro alarm message • Refer to the operator messages on the DIAG
An alarm command has been issued in screen.
#3000. • Refer to the instruction manual issued by the
machine tool builder.

II - 90
 3. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P280 Brackets [ ] nesting over • Reconsider the program and correct it so the
The number of parentheses "[" or "]" which number of "[" or "]" is five or less.
can be commanded in a single block has
exceeded five.
P281 Brackets [ ] not paired • Reconsider the program and correct it so that
The number of "[" and "]" parentheses "[" and "]" parentheses are paired up properly.
commanded in a single block does not match.
P282 Calculation impossible • Reconsider the program and correct the
The arithmetic formula is incorrect. formula.
P283 Divided by zero • Reconsider the program and correct it so that
The denominator of the division is zero. the denominator for division in the formula is
not zero.
P290 IF sentence error • Reconsider the program.
There is an error in the IF conditional
GOTO statement.
P291 WHILE sentence error • Reconsider the program.
There is an error in the WHILE conditional
DO -END statement.
P292 SETVN sentence error • Reconsider the program.
There is an error in the SETVN statement • The number of characters in the variable
when the variable name setting was made. name of the SETVN statement must be 7 or
less.
P293 DO-END nesting over • Reconsider the program and correct it so that
The number of DO-END nesting levels in the nesting levels of the DO - END statement
WHILE conditional DO -END statement does not exceed 27.
has exceeded 27.
P294 DO and END not paired • Reconsider the program and correct it so that
The DO's and END's are not paired off the DO's and END's are paired off properly.
properly.
P295 WHILE/GOTO in tape • During tape operation‚ a program which
There is a WHILE or GOTO statement on the includes a WHILE or GOTO statement cannot
tape during tape operation. be executed and so the memory operation
mode is established instead.
P296 No address (macro) • Review the program.
A required address has not been specified in
the user macro.
P297 Address-A error • Review the program.
The user macro does not use address A as a
variable.
P298 G200-G202 cmnd in tape • Review the program.
User macro G200‚ G201‚ or G202 was
specified during tape or MDI mode.
P300 Variable name illegal • Reconsider the variable names in the
The variable names have not been program and correct them.
commanded properly.
P301 Variable name duplicated • Correct the program so that the name is not
The name of the variable has been duplicated.
duplicated.
P310 Not use GMSTB macro code • Review the program.
G, M, S, T, or B macro code was called • Review the parameter.
during fixed cycle.

II - 91
 3. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P350 No spec: Scaling command • Check the specifications.
The scaling command (G50, G51) was
issued when the scaling specifications were
not available.
P360 No spec: Program mirror • Check the specifications.
A mirror image (G50.1 or G51.1) command
has been issued though the programmable
mirror image specifications are not provided.
P370 No spec: Facing t-post MR • Check the specifications.
The facing turret mirror image specifications
are not provided.
P371 Facing t-post MR illegal • Check the program.
Mirror image for facing tool posts was • Check the parameters.
commanded to an axis for which external
mirror image or parameter mirror image is
valid.
Mirror image for facing tool posts validating
mirror image for a rotary axis was
commanded.
P380 No spec: Corner R/C • Check the specifications.
The corner R/C was issued when the corner • Remove the corner chamfering/corner
R/C specifications were not available. rounding command from the program.

P381 No spec: Arc R/C • Check the specifications.

Corner chamfering II /corner rounding II was
specified in the arc interpolation block
although corner chamfering/corner rounding II
is unsupported.
P382 No corner movement • Replace the block succeeding the corner
The block next to corner chamfering/ chamfering/corner rounding command by
corner rounding is not a movement G01 command.
command.
P383 Corner movement short • Make the corner chamfering/corner rounding
In the corner chamfering/corner rounding less than the movement distance since this
command‚ the movement distance was distance is shorter than the corner chamfering/
shorter than the value in the corner corner rounding.
chamfering/corner rounding command.
P384 Corner next movement short • Make the corner chamfering/corner rounding
When the corner chamfering/corner rounding less than the movement distance since this
command was input‚ the movement distance distance in the following block is shorter than
in the following block was shorter than the the corner chamfering/corner rounding.
length of the corner chamfering/corner
rounding.
P385 Corner during G00/G33 • Recheck the program.
A block with corner chamfering/corner
rounding was given during G00 or G33
modal.
P390 No spec: Geometric • Check the specifications.
A geometric command was issued though
there are no geometric specifications.
P391 No spec: Geometric arc • Check the specifications.
There are no geometric IB specifications.

II - 92
 3. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P392 Angle < 1 degree (GEOMT) • Correct the geometric angle.
The angular difference between the
geometric line and line is 1° or less.
P393 Inc value in 2nd block (GEOMT) • Specify this block by an absolute value.
The second geometric block was specified by
an incremental value.
P394 No linear move command (GEOMT) • Specify the G01 command.
The second geometric block contains no
linear command.
P395 Illegal address (GEOMT) • Recheck the program.
The geometric format is invalid.
P396 Plane selected in GEOMT ctrl • Execute the plane switching command before
A plane switching command was executed geometric command processing.
during geometric command processing.
P397 Arc error (GEOMT) • Recheck the geometric circular arc command
In geometric IB‚ the circular arc end point and the preceding and following commands.
does not contact or cross the next block start
point.
P398 No spec: Geometric1B • Check the specifications.
Although the geometric IB specifications are
not included‚ a geometric command is given.
P420 No spec: Para input by program • Check the specifications.
Parameter input by program (G10) was
commanded even though there is no
specification of parameter input by program.
P421 Parameter input error • Check the program.
• The specified parameter No. or set data is
illegal.
• An illegal G command address was input in
parameter input mode.
• A parameter input command was input
during fixed cycle modal or nose R
compensation.
• G10L50, G10L70, G11 were not
commanded in independent blocks.
P430 R-pnt return incomplete • Execute reference position return manually.
• A command was issued to move an axis‚ • The command was issued to an axis for
which has not returned to the reference which axis removal is validated so invalidate
position‚ away from that reference position. axis removal.
• A command was issued to an axis removal
axis.
P431 No spec: 2,3,4th R-point ret • Check the specifications.
A command for second‚ third or fourth
reference position return was issued though
there are no such command specifications.
P432 No spec: Start position return • Check the specifications.
Start position return (G29) was commanded
even though there is no start position return
specification.
P433 No spec: R-position check • Check the specifications.
Reference position check (G27) was
commanded even though there is no
reference position check specification.

II - 93
 3. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P434 Compare error • Check the program.
One of the axes did not return to the
reference position when the reference
position check command (G27) was
executed.
P435 G27 and M commands in a block • An M code command cannot be issued in a
An M command was issued simultaneously in G27 command block and so the G27
the G27 command block. command and M code command must be
placed in separate blocks.
P436 G29 and M commands in a block • An M code command cannot be issued in a
An M command was issued simultaneously in G29 command block and so the G29
the G29 command block. command and M code command must be
placed in separate blocks.
P438 G52 invalid during G54.1 • Review the program.
A local coordinate system command was
issued during execution of the G54.1
command.
P450 No spec: Chuck barrier • Check the specification.
The chuck barrier on command (G22) was
specified although the chuck barrier was
undefined in the specification.
P451 No spec: Stroke chk bef travel • Check the specification.
Stroke check before travel (G22/G23) was
commanded even though there is no stroke
check before travel specification.
P452 Limit before travel exists • Review the coordinate values of the axis
An illegal command such as the start or end address commanded in the program.
point of the traveling axis is inside the
prohibited area or the axis passes through the
prohibited area, was detected when Stroke
check before travel (G22) was ON.
P460 Tape I/O error • Check the power and cable of the connected
An error has arisen in the tape reader or‚ devices.
alternatively‚ in the printer during macro • Check the I/O device parameters.
printing.
P461 File I/O error • In memory mode, the programs stored in
A file of the machining program cannot be memory may have been destroyed. Output
read. all of the programs and tool data once and
IC card has not been inserted. format them.
• Ensure that the external device (including an
IC card, etc) that contains the file is mounted.
• Check the parameters for HD operation or IC
card operation.
P462 Computer link commu error • "L01 Computer link error" is displayed
A communication error occurred during the simultaneously, so remedy the problem
BTR operation. according to the error No.
P480 No spec: Milling • Check the specification.
• Milling was commanded when the milling
specifications were not provided.
• Polar coordinate interpolation was
commanded when the polar coordinate
interpolation specifications were not
provided.

II - 94
 3. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P481 Illegal G code (mill) • Check the program.
• An illegal G code was used during the
milling mode.
• An illegal G code was used during
cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate
interpolation.
• The G07.1 command was issued during the
tool radius compensation.
P482 Illegal axis (mill) • Check the machining program, parameters
• A rotary axis was commanded during the and PLC I/F signal.
milling mode.
• Milling was executed even though an illegal
value was set for the milling axis No.
• Cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate
interpolation was commanded during mirror
image.
• Cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate
interpolation was commanded before the
tool compensation was completed after the
T command.
• G07.1 was commanded when cylindrical
interpolation was not possible (there is no
rotary axis, or external mirror image is ON).
• An axis other than a cylindrical coordinate
system axis was commanded during
cylindrical interpolation.
P484 R-pnt ret incomplete (mill) • Carry out manual reference position return.
• Movement was commanded to an axis that
had not completed reference position return
during the milling mode.
• Movement was commanded to an axis that
had not completed reference position return
during cylindrical interpolation or polar
coordinate interpolation.

II - 95
 3. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P485 Illegal modal (mill) • Check the program.
• The milling mode was turned ON during • Before issuing G12.1, issue G40 or G97.
nose R compensation or constant surface • Before issuing G12.1, issue a T command.
speed control. • Before issuing G13.1, issue G40.
• A T command was issued during the milling • Specify the radius value of a cylinder other
mode. than 0, or specify the X axis's current value
• The mode was switched from milling to other than 0 before issuing G12.1/G16.
cutting during tool compensation.
• Cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate
interpolation was commanded during the
constant surface speed control mode
(G96).
• The command unacceptable in the
cylindrical interpolation was issued.
• A T command was issued during the
cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate
interpolation mode.
• A movement command was issued when
the plane was not selected just before or
after the G07.1 command.
• A plane selection command was issued
during the polar coordinate interpolation
mode.
• Cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate
interpolation was commanded during tool
radius compensation.
• The G16 plane in which the radius value of
a cylinder is 0 was specified.
• A cylindrical interpolation or polar
coordinate interpolation command was
issued during coordinate rotation by
program (G68).
P486 Milling error • Check the program.
• The milling command was issued during the
mirror image (when parameter or external
input is turned ON).
• Polar coordinate interpolation, cylindrical
interpolation or milling interpolation was
commanded during mirror image for facing
tool posts.
• The start command of the cylindrical
interpolation or polar coordinate
interpolation was issued during the normal
line control.
P511 Synchronization M code error • Check the program.
• Two or more synchronization M codes were
commanded in the same block.
• The synchronization M code and "!" code
were commanded in the same block.
• Synchronization with the M code was
commanded in 3rd part system or more.
(Synchronization with the M code is valid
only in 1st part system or 2nd part system.)
P550 No spec: G06.2(NURBS) • Check the specifications.
There is no NURBS interpolation option.

II - 96
 3. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P551 G06.2 knot error • Reconsider the program.
The knot (k) command value is smaller than • Specify the knot by monotone increment.
the value for the previous block.
P552 Start point of 1st G06.2 err • Match the G06.2 first block coordinate
The block end point immediately before the command value with the previous block end
G06.2 command and the G06.2 first block point.
command value do not match.
P554 Invld manual interrupt in G6.2 • Perform for blocks other than G06.2 mode
Manual interruption using a block was when manually interrupting.
performed while in G06.2 mode.
P555 Invalid restart during G06.2 • Restart from the block other than in G06.2
Restart was attempted from the block in mode.
G06.2 mode.
P600 No spec: Auto TLM • Check the specifications.
An automatic tool length measurement
command (G37) was execute though there
are no such command specifications.
P601 No spec: Skip • Check the specifications.
A skip command (G31) was issued though
there are no such command specifications.
P602 No spec: Multi skip • Check the specifications.
A multiple skip command (G31.1‚ G31.2 or
G31.3) was issued though there are no such
command specifications.
P603 Skip speed 0 • Specify the skip speed.
The skip speed is 0.
P604 TLM illegal axis • Specify only one axis.
No axis or more than one axis was specified
in the automatic tool length measurement
block.
P605 T & TLM command in a block • Specify this T code before the block.
The T code is in the same block as the
automatic tool length measurement block.
P606 T cmnd not found before TLM • Specify this T code before the block.
The T code was not yet specified in automatic
tool length measurement.
P607 TLM illegal signal • Check the program.
Before the area specified by the D command
or decelerating area parameter d‚ the
measurement position arrival signal went ON.
The signal remains OFF to the end.
P608 Skip during radius compen • Specify a radius compensation cancel (G40)
A skip command was specified during radius command or remove the skip command.
compensation processing.
P610 Illegal parameter • Check whether "#1549 Iv0vR1" to "#1553
• The parameter setting is not correct. Iv0vR5" are set in descending order (in order
• G114.1 was commanded when the spindle of large values).
synchronization with PLC I/F command was • Check whether "#1554 Iv0rd2" to "#1557
selected. Iv0rd5" are set in descending order.
• G113 was commanded when the • Check and correct "#1514 expLinax" and
spindle-spindle polygon machining option "#1515 expRotax".
was OFF and the spindle synchronization • Check the program.
with PLC I/F command was selected. • Check the parameter.

II - 97
 3. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P611 No spec: Exponential function • Check the specification.
Specification for exponential interpolation is
not available.
P612 Exponential function error • Check the program.
A movement command for exponential
interpolation was issued during mirror image
for facing tool posts.
P700 Illegal command value • Check the program.
Spindle synchronization was commanded to a • Check the parameter.
spindle that is not connected serially.
P900 No spec: Normal line control • Check the specifications.
A normal line control command (G40.1,
G41.1, G42.1) was issued when the normal
line control specifications were not provided.
P901 Normal line control axis G92 • Check the program.
A coordinate system preset command (G92)
was issued to a normal line control axis
during normal line control.
P902 Normal line control axis error • Correct the normal line control axis.
• The normal line control axis was set to a
linear axis.
• The normal line control axis was set to the
linear type rotary axis II axis.
• The normal line control axis has not been
set.
• The normal line control axis was the same
as the plane selection axis.
P903 Plane chg in Normal line ctrl • Delete the plane selection command (G17,
The plane selection command (G17, G18, G18, G19) from the program for normal line
G19) was issued during normal line control. control.
P920 No spec: 3D coord conv • Check the specifications.
There is no specification for 3-dimensional
coordinate conversion.
P921 Illegal G code at 3D coord • Refer to "Mitsubishi CNC 700/70 Series
A G code command that cannot be performed Programming Instruction Manual (Machining
was made during 3-dimensional coordinate Center Series)" for further details of usable G
conversion modal. commands.
• When the basic specification parameter
"#1229 set01/bit3" is ON, turn the parameter
OFF or specify the constant surface speed
control cancel (G97).
P922 Illegal mode at 3D coord • Refer to "Mitsubishi CNC 700/70 Series
A 3-dimensional coordinate conversion Programming Instruction Manual (Machining
command was issued during a modal for Center Series)" for further details of usable G
which 3-dimensional coordinate conversion commands.
cannot be performed.
P923 Illegal addr in 3D coord blk • Refer to "Mitsubishi CNC 700/70 Series
A G code for which G68 to combination could Programming Instruction Manual (Machining
not be performed was specified for the same Center Series)" for further details of usable G
block. commands.

II - 98
 3. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P930 No spec: Tool axis compen • Check the specifications.
A tool length compensation along the tool axis
command was issued even though there is no
tool length compensation along the tool axis
specification.
P931 Executing tool axis compen • Reconsider the program.
A G code that cannot be commanded exists
during tool length compensation along the
tool axis.
P932 Rot axis parameter error • Set the correct value and reboot.
There is a mistake in the linear axis name and
rotary axis name in the rotary axis
configuration parameters.
P940 No spec: Tool tip control • Check the specifications.
There is no tool tip center control
specification.
P941 Invalid T tip control command • Reconsider the program.
A tool tip center control command was issued
during a modal for which a tool tip center
control command cannot be issued.
P942 Invalid cmnd during T tip ctrl • Reconsider the program.
A G code that cannot be commanded was
issued during tool tip center control.
P943 Tool posture command illegal • Reconsider the program.
In the case of tool tip center control type 1, if
the signs at the tool-side rotary axis or table
base-side rotary axis start and finish points
differ, a tool base-side rotary axis or table
workpiece-side rotary axis rotation exists for
the same block, and does not pass a singular
point.
In the case of tool tip center control type 2,
the posture vector command is incorrect.
P990 PREPRO error • Reduce the number of commands that
Combining commands that required require pre-reading or delete such
pre-reading (nose R offset‚ corner commands.
chamfering/corner rounding‚ geometric I‚
geometric IB‚ and compound type fixed cycle
for turning machining) resulted in eight or
more pre-read blocks.

II - 99
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting
4.1.1 Troubleshooting at Power ON
If the NC system does not start up correctly and a system error occurs when the NC power is turned ON, the
drive unit may not have been started up properly. Check the LED display on the drive unit, and take
measures according to this section.

LED
Symptom Cause of occurrence Investigation method Remedy
display
AA Initial communication with The drive unit axis No. Is there any other drive unit that has the Set correctly.
the CNC was not setting is incorrect. same axis No. set?
completed correctly. The CNC setting is incorrect. Is the No. of CNC controlled axes Set correctly.
correct?
Communication with CNC is Is the connector (CN1A, CN1B) Connect correctly.
incorrect. connected?
Is the cable broken? Replace the cable.
Ab Initial communication with The axis is not used, the Is the DIP switch set correctly? Set correctly.
the CNC was not carried setting is for use inhibiting.
out. Communication with CNC is Is the connector (CN1A, CN1B) Connect correctly.
incorrect. connected?
Is the cable broken? Replace the cable.
12 An error was detected in The CPU peripheral circuit is Check the repeatability. Replace the unit.
the unit's memory and IC abnormal. Check whether there is any abnormality Improve the
during the self-diagnosis with the unit's surrounding environment, surrounding
at power ON. etc. environment.

The drive unit has started up normally if the following type of emergency stop (E7) is displayed on the display
unit's LED display.

F1 E7 F2 E7 Not lit
F+axis No. Emergency stop F+axis No. Emergency stop

Normal drive unit LED display at NC power ON (for 1st axis)

II - 100
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

4.1.2 Troubleshooting for each alarm No.

Alarm No. Insufficient voltage

Insufficient bus voltage was detected in main circuit.
10
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the timing when the alarm The moment of READY ON Check the investigation item No. 2.
occurs. { {
During operation Review the power supply capacity.
2 Did the external contactor turn ON at The external contactor did not turn Check the investigation item No. 3.
the READY ON? ON.
{ {
The external contactor turned ON, Check the investigation item No. 4.
but the alarm occurred immediately.
3 Check the wiring of contactor The wiring is correct. Replace the contactor.
excitation circuit. { {
The wiring is not correct. Rewire.
4 Check the input voltage of the drive The input voltage is normal. Replace the drive unit.
unit. (Voltage between L1 and L2, L2 The input voltage is abnormal. Review the power supply capacity. { {
and L3, L1 and L3)

Alarm No. Axis selection error

Setting of the axis No. selection switch is incorrect.
11
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the setting of the axis The same axis No. is set for the L and Correctly set the axis No.
selection switch (rotary switch) on the M axes. 0 = No. 1 axis, 1 = No. 2 axis, ...
top of the unit. The value is duplicated with other Correctly set the axis No. { {
axis. 0 = No. 1 axis, 1 = No. 2 axis, ...
No abnormality is found in particular. Replace the drive unit.

Alarm No. Memory error 1

A CPU error or an internal memory error was detected during the power ON self-check.
12
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check whether the servo or spindle The version was changed. There is a possibility that the spindle
software version was changed software was downloaded into servo,
recently. or the servo software was
{ {
downloaded into spindle. Download
servo/spindle software again.
The version was not changed. Check the investigation item No. 2.
2 Check the repeatability. The error is always repeated. Replace the drive unit.
The state returns to normal once, but Check the investigation item No. 3. { {
occurs sometimes thereafter.
3 Check if there is any abnormality in Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the unit's ambient environment. environment.
{ {
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)

Alarm No. Software processing error 1

Software processing has not finished within the specified time.
13
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check whether the servo or spindle The version was changed. Change software version back to the
software version was changed original. { {
recently. The version was not changed. Check the investigation item No. 2.
2 Check the repeatability. The error is always repeated. Replace the drive unit.
The state returns to normal once, but Check the investigation item No. 3. { {
occurs sometimes thereafter.
3 Check if there is any abnormality in Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the unit's ambient environment. environment.
{ {
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)

II - 101
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

Alarm No. Magnetic pole position detection error

An error was detected in the magnetic pole detection for controlling the motor.
16
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the parameters. The parameters specified with the Replace the drive unit.
adjustment are not set. {
Correct parameters are set. Check the investigation item No. 2.
2 Check the repeatability. The error is always repeated. Replace the drive unit.
The state returns to normal once, but Check the investigation item No. 3. {
occurs sometimes thereafter.
3 Check if there is any abnormality in Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the unit's ambient environment. environment.
{
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)

Alarm No. A/D converter error

An error was detected in the A/D converter for detecting current FB.
17
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the repeatability. The error is always repeated. Replace the drive unit.
The state returns to normal once, but Check the investigation item No. 2. { {
occurs sometimes thereafter.
2 Check if there is any abnormality in Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the unit's ambient environment. environment.
{ {
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)

Alarm No. Motor side detector: Initial communication error

Initial communication with the motor side detector failed.
18
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the servo parameter The value is not set correctly. Correctly set SV025.
(SV025.ent) setting value. The value is set correctly. Check the investigation item No. 2.
OSE104: 0, OSA104: 1 {
Are all others set to 2?
(Excluding slave axis for
synchronous control)
2 Jiggle the detector connectors (drive The connector is disconnected (or Correctly install.
unit side and detector side) and loose). { {
check if they are disconnected. The connector is not disconnected. Check the investigation item No. 3.
3 Turn the power OFF, and check the The connection is faulty. Replace the detector cable.
detector cable connection with a The connection is normal. Check the investigation item No. 4. { {
tester.
4 Replace with another unit, and check The alarm is on the drive unit side. Replace the drive unit.
whether the fault is on the unit side or The alarm is on the detector side. Check the investigation item No. 5. { {
detector side.
5 Check if there is any abnormality in Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the detector's ambient environment. environment.
{ {
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)

II - 102
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

Alarm No. Machine side detector: Initial communication error

Initial communication with the linear scale or the ball screw side detector failed.
1A
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the servo parameter The value is not set correctly. Correctly set SV025.
(SV025.pen) setting value. The value is set correctly. Check the investigation item No. 2.
Are the serial communication type {
detector parameters set for the pulse
type detector?
2 Jiggle the detector connectors (drive The connector is disconnected (or Correctly install.
unit side and detector side) and loose). {
check if they are disconnected. The connector is not disconnected. Check the investigation item No. 3.
3 Turn the power OFF, and check the The connection is faulty. Replace the detector cable.
detector cable connection with a The connection is normal. Check the investigation item No. 4. {
tester.
4 Replace with another unit, and check The alarm is on the drive unit side. Replace the drive unit.
whether the fault is on the unit side or The alarm is on the detector side. Check the investigation item No. 5. {
detector side.
5 Check if there is any abnormality in Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the detector's ambient environment. environment.
{
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)

Machine side detector: Error 1

Alarm No.
The machine side detector detected an error. As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the
1B separate table (1).
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check whether the servo axis has The axis has operated. Check the investigation item No. 3.
moved and the spindle has rotated The axis has not operated. Check the investigation item No. 2. { {
when an alarm occurred.
2 Check whether the operation at low The operation is normal. Check the investigation item No. 3.
speed is normal. The operation is not normal. Check the cautions at power ON. { {
• Wiring check
• Parameter check
3 Jiggle the detector connectors (drive The connector is disconnected (or Correctly install.
unit side and detector side) and loose). { {
check if they are disconnected. The connector is not disconnected. Check the investigation item No. 4.
4 Turn the power OFF, and check the The connection is faulty. Replace the detector cable.
detector cable connection with a The connection is normal. Check the investigation item No. 5. { {
tester.
5 Replace with another unit, and check The alarm is on the drive unit side. Replace the drive unit.
whether the fault is on the unit side or The alarm is on the detector side. Check the investigation item No. 6. { {
detector side.
6 Check if there is any abnormality in Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the detector's ambient environment. environment.
{ {
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)

Machine side detector: Error 2

Alarm No.
The machine side detector detected an error. As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the
1C separate table (1).
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the alarm No. "1B" items. {

Machine side detector: Error 3

Alarm No.
The machine side detector detected an error. As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the
1D separate table (1).
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the alarm No. "1B" items. {

Machine side detector: Error 4

Alarm No.
The machine side detector detected an error. As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the
1E separate table (1).
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the alarm No. "1B" items. {

II - 103
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

Machine side detector: Communication error

Alarm No.
An error was detected in communication data with the linear scale or the ball screw side detector. Or
1F the communication was interrupted.
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Jiggle the detector connectors (drive The connector is disconnected (or Correctly install.
unit side and detector side) and loose). {
check if they are disconnected. The connector is not disconnected. Check the investigation item No. 2.
2 Is the detector cable wired in the The cables are wired near each Improve the cable wiring.
same conduit as the motor's power other. (Noise is entering from the
{
cable, or are the two cables laid in power cable.)
parallel near each other? The wires are sufficiently separated. Check the investigation item No. 3.
3 Is the motor FG wire connected only The motor FG wire is grounded on Ground the motor to one point,
to the drive unit which drives it? the motor side. connecting the wires together on the
{
(Is the motor grounded to one point?) drive unit side.
The motor is grounded to one point. Check the investigation item No. 4.
4 Turn the power OFF, and check the The connection is faulty. Replace the detector cable.
detector cable connection with a The connection is normal. Check the investigation item No. 5. {
tester. (Is the cable shielded?)
5 Replace with another unit, and check The alarm is on the drive unit side. Replace the drive unit.
whether the fault is on the unit side or The alarm is on the detector side. Check the investigation item No. 6. {
detector side.
6 Check if there is any abnormality in Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the detector's ambient environment. environment.
{
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)

Alarm No. Machine side detector: No signal

When an excessive error alarm occurred, no signal from the machine side detector was detected.
21
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the servo parameter (SV025. The value is not set correctly. Correctly set SV025.
pen) setting value. The value is set correctly. Check the investigation item No. 3.
Are the pulse type detector {
parameters set for a serial
communication type detector?
2 Jiggle the detector connectors (drive The connector is disconnected (or Correctly install.
unit side and detector side) and loose). {
check if they are disconnected. The connector is not disconnected. Check the investigation item No. 4.
3 Turn the power OFF, and check the The connection is faulty. Replace the detector cable.
detector cable connection with a The connection is normal. Check the investigation item No. 5. {
tester.
4 Replace with another unit, and check The alarm is on the drive unit side. Replace the drive unit.
whether the fault is on the unit side or The alarm is on the detector side. Check the investigation item No. 6. {
detector side.
5 Check if there is any abnormality in Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the detector's ambient environment. environment.
{
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)

II - 104
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

Excessive speed error

Alarm No.
A difference between the speed command and speed feedback was continuously exceeding 50 r/min
23 for longer than the setting time.
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the U, V and W wiring The wires are not correctly Correctly connect.
between the spindle drive unit and connected. {
spindle motor. The wires are correctly connected. Check the investigation item No. 2.
2 Check the spindle parameter (SP017, The correct values are not set. Correctly set.
SP018, SP019, SP020, SP117 and The correct values are set. Check the investigation item No. 3. {
SP129 or later) setting value.
3 Measure the acceleration/ 12sec or more. Increase the spindle
deceleration time up to the point acceleration/deceleration time
where the spindle speed reaches its constant setting value.
maximum. Less than 12sec. Check the investigation item No. 4.
If the alarm occurs when forward run {
is changed to reverse run, measure
the acceleration/ deceleration time
from the forward run's maximum
speed to reverse run's maximum
speed.
4 Check the load amount when the Load amount is 120% or more. Reduce the load.
{
alarm occurred during cutting. Load amount is less than 120%. Check the investigation item No. 5.
5 Check the fluctuation of the input Voltage drop during acceleration Review the power supply capacity.
voltage into the power supply unit. does not satisfy the motor voltage.
{
Voltage drop during acceleration Check the investigation item No.6.
satisfies the motor voltage.
6 Check the capacity of the drive unit. The capacity does not satisfy the Increase the capacity.
motor output.
{
The capacity satisfies the motor Replace the unit.
output.

Alarm No. Grounding

The motor power cable is in contact with FG (Frame Ground).
24
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Measure the insulation across the Less than 100kΩ. The motor or power cable may be
power cables (U,V,W) for connected ground faulted. { {
motors and the ground. (Carry out a 100kΩ or more. Check the investigation item No. 2.
megger test.)
2 Has oil come in contact with the Oil has come in contact. Take measures so that oil does not
motor or power cable? come in contact. Check the motor's
cannon connector and the inside of
{ {
the terminal box, and clean as
necessary.
Oil has not come in contact. Check the investigation item No. 3.
3 Measure the insulation again. Less than 1MΩ. Replace the motor or cable.
{ {
1MΩ or more. Check the investigation item No. 2.
4 Measure the resistance across the U, Less than 100kΩ. Replace the drive unit.
V, W phase terminals of the 100kΩ or more. Replace the power supply unit.
servo/spindle drive unit and the { {
ground.
(Do not measure the insulation as the
unit could be damaged.)

II - 105
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

Alarm No. Absolute position data lost

The absolute position was lost, as the backup battery voltage dropped in the absolute position detector.
25
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Is warning 9F occurring at the same The warning is occurring. Check the investigation item No. 2.
{
time? The warning is not occurring. Check the investigation item No. 3.
2 Measure the battery voltage with a Less than 3V. Replace the battery, and establish the
tester. zero point. {
3V or more. Check the NC bus cable connection.
3 Did alarm No.18 occur when the Alarm No.18 occurred. Turn the drive unit control power ON
power was turned ON the last time? again, and establish the zero point. {
Alarm No.18 did not occur. Check the investigation item No. 4.
4 Was the detector cable or battery The unit was left disconnected for a Turn the drive unit control power ON
cable left disconnected from the unit long time. again, and establish the zero point.
for a long time? Guide at delivery : 20 hours or more
{
After 5 years : 10 hours or more
The cables were not left Check the investigation item No. 5.
disconnected.
5 Check the detector cable or battery The connection is faulty. Replace the cable.
{
cable connection with a tester. The connection is normal. Replace the drive unit.

Alarm No. Unused axis error

A power module error occurred in the axis whose axis No. selection switch was set to "F"(free axis).
26
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the repeatability. The error is always repeated. Replace the drive unit.
The state returns to normal once, but Check the investigation item No. 2. { {
occurs sometimes thereafter.
2 Check if there is any abnormality in Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the unit's ambient environment. environment.
{ {
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)

Machine side detector: Error 5

Alarm No.
The machine side detector detected an error. As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the
27 separate table (1).
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the alarm No. "1B" items. {

Machine side detector: Error 6

Alarm No.
The machine side detector detected an error. As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the
28 separate table (1).
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the alarm No. "1B" items. {

Machine side detector: Error 7

Alarm No.
The machine side detector detected an error. As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the
29 separate table (1).
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the alarm No. "1B" items. {

Machine side detector: Error 8

Alarm No.
The machine side detector detected an error. As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the
2A separate table (1).
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the alarm No. "1B" items. {

II - 106
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

Motor side detector: Error 1

Alarm No.
The motor side detector (linear scale in the case of linear motor) detected an error.
2B As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the separate table (1).
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the alarm No. "1B" items. { {

Motor side detector: Error 2

Alarm No.
The motor side detector (linear scale in the case of linear motor) detected an error.
2C As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the separate table (1).
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the alarm No. "1B" items. { {

Motor side detector: Error 3

Alarm No.
The motor side detector (linear scale in the case of linear motor) detected an error.
2D As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the separate table (1).
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the alarm No. "1B" items. { {

Motor side detector: Error 4

Alarm No.
The motor side detector (linear scale in the case of linear motor) detected an error.
2E As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the separate table (1).
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the alarm No. "1B" items. { {

Motor side detector: Communication error

Alarm No.
An error was detected in communication data with the motor side detector or with the linear scale of a
2F linear servo system. Or the communication was interrupted.
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Jiggle the detector connectors (drive The connector is disconnected (or Correctly install.
unit side and detector side) and loose). { {
check if they are disconnected. The connector is not disconnected. Check the investigation item No. 2.
2 Is the detector cable wired in the The cables are wired near each Improve the cable wiring.
same conduit as the motor's power other. (Noise is entering from the
{ {
cable, or are the two cables laid in power cable.)
parallel near each other? The wires are sufficiently separated. Check the investigation item No. 3.
3 Is the motor FG wire connected only The motor FG wire is grounded on Ground the motor to one point,
to the drive unit which drives it? the motor side. connecting the wires together on the
{ {
(Is the motor grounded to one point?) drive unit side.
The motor is grounded to one point. Check the investigation item No. 4.
4 Turn the power OFF, and check the The connection is faulty. Replace the detector cable.
detector cable connection with a The connection is normal. Check the investigation item No. 5. { {
tester. (Is the cable shielded?)
5 Replace with another unit, and check The alarm is on the drive unit side. Replace the drive unit.
whether the fault is on the unit side or The alarm is on the detector side. Check the investigation item No. 6. { {
detector side.
6 Check if there is any abnormality in Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the detector's ambient environment. environment.
{ {
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)

II - 107
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

Alarm No. Over-regeneration

The over-regeneration level exceeded 100%. The regenerative resistor is in the overload state.
30
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check again if the regenerative The regenerative capacity exceeds Add the option regenerative resistor
capacity exceeds the regenerative the regenerative resistor tolerable or replace it.
resistor tolerable capacity. capacity. { {
The regenerative resistor selection Check the investigation item No. 2.
is appropriate.
2 Check if the parameter is set The parameters are set incorrectly. Change the parameters.
incorrectly, and check the values of The parameters are correct. Check the investigation item No. 3. { {
sv036 and sp032.
3 Is an external regenerative resistor An external regenerative resistor is To the investigation item No. 5.
used? used.
{
A built-in regenerative resistor is To the investigation item No. 4.
used.
4 Is the short wire connected between The wire is not connected. Connect the wire.
P and D terminal? The connector is disconnected. Reconnect the connector.
Are there any problems with the {
The connector has a contact fault. Replace the connector.
connection condition? The connection is correct. To the investigation item No. 6.
5 Is the connection of the regenerative The connection is incorrect. Rewire.
resistor or regeneration resistor The connection is correct. To the investigation item No. 6. { {
cable correct?
6 Is the regeneration resistor or the The regeneration resistor is broken. Replace the regenerative resistor
regeneration resistor cable broken? Or the resistance value is large.
Disconnect the regenerative resistor The regeneration resistor cable is Replace the cable. { {
terminal and check the resistance broken.
value with a tester. The resistance value is normal. To the investigation item No. 7.
7 Check if the power supply voltage is The power supply voltage exceeded Review the power supply.
too high. 253V. { {
The power supply voltage is normal. Replace the drive unit.

Overspeed
Alarm No.
The motor was detected to rotate at a speed exceeding the allowable speed. (In the case of linear
31 motor, it was detected to move at a speed exceeding the allowable speed.)
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check if the unit in which the alarm The alarm was detected in servo. Check the investigation item No. 2.
{ {
was detected is servo or spindle. The alarm was detected in spindle. Check the investigation item No. 3.
2 Check the servo parameters SV001 The settings are incorrect. Correctly set.
(PC1), SV002 (PC2), SV018 (PIT) Correctly set. Check the investigation item No. 5. {
and SV025 (MTYP) settings.
3 Check the spindle parameter SP017 The setting is incorrect. Correctly set.
(TSP) setting. The alarm is detected at 115% of
{
SP017.
Correctly set. Check the investigation item No. 4.
4 Check the PLG output waveform. There is a problem. Adjust the PLG output waveform.
{ {
Normal. Check the investigation item No. 5.
5 Check whether the speed waveform The waveform is overshooting. Increase the acceleration/
is overshooting. deceleration time constant.
The waveform is not overshooting. Check if there is any abnormality in
the unit's ambient environment. { {
(Ex.: Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)
Check the investigation item No. 6.
6 Check the repeatability. The alarm occurs when the motor is Replace the detector or detector
stopped. cable. { {
The alarm occurs at all time. Check the investigation item No. 7.

II - 108
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

Alarm No. Power module overcurrent

Overcurrent protection function in the power module has started its operation.
32
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Disconnect the power cable (U, V, W) Short-circuited or not conducted. Replace the power cables (U, V, W).
from the unit’s terminal block and There is no problem. Check the investigation item No. 2.
motor, and check whether a { {
short-circuit between the power cable
or whether conduction at both end of
wiring occurs with a tester.
2 Check the motor insulation with a Less than 1MΩ. (Grounding) Replace the motor.
(megger) tester under the condition 1MΩ or more. (Normal) Check the investigation item No. 3.
of the investigation item No. 1. { {
(between motor power and ground
earth)
3 Check the parameter setting values. The value is not set correctly. Correctly set.
• Refer to the adjustment The value is set correctly. Check the investigation item No. 4. { {
procedure.
4 Jiggle the detector connectors (drive The connector is disconnected (or Correctly install.
unit side and detector side) and loose). { {
check if they are disconnected. The connector is not disconnected. Check the investigation item No. 5.
5 Turn the power OFF, and check the Connection is faulty. Replace the detector cable.
detector cable connection with a Connection is normal. Check the investigation item No. 6. { {
tester.
6 Check the repeatability. The state returns to normal once, but Check the investigation item No. 8.
occurs sometimes thereafter. { {
The error is always repeated. Check the investigation item No. 7.
7 Replace with another unit, and check The alarm is on the drive unit side. Replace the drive unit.
whether the fault is on the drive unit The alarm is on the detector side. Replace the detector. { {
side or detector side.
8 Check for any abnormalities in the Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
unit's ambient environment. environment.
{ {
(Ex.: Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)

Overvoltage
Alarm No.
The main circuit bus voltage exceeded the tolerable value.
33
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Is an external regenerative resistor An external regenerative resistor is To the investigation item No. 3.
used? used.
{
A built-in regenerative resistor is To the investigation item No. 2.
used.
2 Is the short wire connected between The wire is not connected. Connect the wire.
P and D terminal? The connector is disconnected. Reconnect the connector.
Are there any problems with the {
The connector has a contact fault. Replace the connector.
connection condition? The connection is correct. To the investigation item No. 6.
3 Is the combination of the used The combination is incorrect. Replace the correct regenerative
regenerative resistor and drive unit resistor. { {
appropriate? The combination is normal. To the investigation item No. 4.
4 Is the connection of the The connection is incorrect. Rewire.
regenerative resistor or The connection is correct. To the investigation item No. 5. { {
regeneration resistor cable correct?
5 Is the regeneration resistor or the The regeneration resistor is broken. Replace the regenerative resistor.
regeneration resistor cable broken? Or the resistance value is large.
Disconnect the regenerative resistor The regeneration resistor cable is Replace the cable. { {
terminal and check the resistance broken.
value with a tester. The resistance value is normal. To the investigation item No. 6.
6 The acceleration/deceleration time Reached to the current limit Increase the acceleration/
constant is too short. The speed overshoot is applied. deceleration time constant.
At acceleration/deceleration, has The connection is normal. Replace the drive unit. { {
the speed overshoot reached to the
current limit?

II - 109
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

Alarm No. NC-DRV communication: CRC error

An error was detected in the data received from the CNC.
34
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Manually shake the connection The connector is disconnected (or Correctly install.
connectors between NC and drive loose).
unit, battery unit and drive unit, or The connector is not disconnected. Check the investigation item No. 2.
among multiple drive units to check if { {
they are disconnected.
Also, check if an excessive force is
not applied on them.
2 Turn the power OFF, and check the The connection is faulty. Replace the communication cable.
connection of the communication The connection is normal. Check the investigation item No. 3.
cables indicated in item 1 with a { {
tester. Or, replace with a correct
cable.
3 Check whether the NC or drive unit The version was changed. Change software version back to the
software version was changed original. { {
recently. The version was not changed. Check the investigation item No. 4.
4 Replace with another drive unit, and The alarm is on the drive unit side. Replace the drive unit.
check whether the fault is on the NC The alarm is on the unit connections. Check the investigation item No. 5. { {
side or drive unit side.
5 Check if there is any abnormality in Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the unit's ambient environment. environment.
{ {
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)

Alarm No. NC command error

The travel command data that was received from the CNC was excessive.
35
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the alarm No. "34" items. { {

Alarm No. NC-DRV communication: Communication error

The communication with the CNC was interrupted.
36
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the alarm No. "34" items. { {

Alarm No. Initial parameter error

An incorrect parameter was detected among the parameters received from the CNC at the power ON.
37
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check if the unit in which the alarm The alarm was detected in servo. Check the investigation item No. 2.
{ {
was detected is servo or spindle. The alarm was detected in spindle. Check the investigation item No. 3.
2 An error parameter No. is displayed Wrong parameters were set. Correct the parameter.
on the NC diagnosis screen. Check SV001 to SV005 Set the value within the designated
the servo parameter with the setting range.
parameter adjustment procedure. -1 Check SV001, SV002 and SV018.
The electronic gears are overflowing.
-2 In order to use the absolute position {
The absolute position detection control function, an absolute position
parameter is valid when OSE104 and option is required.
OSE105 are connected. (Absolute
position control cannot be used.)
Correct parameters were set. Check the investigation item No. 4.
3 An error parameter No. is displayed SP001 to SP384 Set the value within the designated
on the NC diagnosis screen. Check setting range.
{
the servo parameter with the
parameter adjustment procedure.
4 Check the alarm No. "34" items. { {

II - 110
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

Alarm No. NC-DRV communication: Protocol error 1

An error was detected in the communication frames received from the CNC.
38
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the alarm No. "34" items. { {

Alarm No. NC-DRV communication: Protocol error 2

An error was detected in the axis information data received from the CNC.
39
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the alarm No. "34" items. { {

Alarm No. Overcurrent

Excessive current was detected in the motor drive current.
3A
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check whether vibration is occurring. Vibration is occurring. • Set a filter.
• Lower the speed loop gain
{ {
(SV005/SP005).
There is no vibration. Check the investigation item No. 2.
2 The speed loop gain setting is larger The setting is too large. Set an appropriate value.
than the standard value. The setting is approximately the Check the investigation item No. 3. { {
Servo: SV005 / Spindle: SP005 same as the standard value.
3 Check the current loop gain. The setting is incorrect. Set the standard value.
Servo: SV009,SV010,SV011,SV012 The standard value is set. Check the investigation item No. 4. { {
Spindle: SP081,SP082,SP083,SP084
4 Disconnect the power cable (U,V,W) The power cable is short-circuited. Replace the motor power cable.
from the terminal block and the There is no problem. Check the investigation item No. 5. { {
cannon plug from the motor. Check
the insulation with a tester.
5 Check the insulation between the There is a ground fault at the power Replace the motor power cable.
motor power cable and FG. cable. { {
There is no problem. Check the investigation item No. 6.
6 Connect the cannon plug, and check There is a ground fault in the motor.Replace the motor.
the insulation between the power (With the absolute position system,
{ {
cable and FG. the zero point must be established.)
There is no problem. Check the investigation item No. 7.
7 Check if there is any abnormality in Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the motor's ambient environment. environment.
{ {
(Ex. Ambient temperature, cutting
water)

Alarm No. Power module overheat

Thermal protection function in the power module has started its operation.
3B
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check that the fan is rotating Large amounts of cutting oil or cutting Clean or replace the fan.
correctly. chips, etc., are adhered, or the
{ {
rotation is slow.
The fan is rotating properly. Check the investigation item No. 2.
2 Check whether the heat dissipating Cutting oil or cutting chips, etc., are Clean the fins.
fins are dirty. adhered, and the fins are clogged. { {
The fins are normal. Check the investigation item No. 3.
3 Measure the drive unit's ambient 55°C or more. Improve the ventilation and cooling
temperature. for the power distribution panel. { {
Less than 55°C. Check the investigation item No. 4.
4 Check if there is any abnormality in Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the unit's ambient environment. environment.
{ {
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)

II - 111
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

Alarm No. Regeneration circuit error

An error was detected in the regenerative transistor or in the regenerative resistor.
3C
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Is an external regenerative resistor An external regenerative resistor is To the investigation item No. 3.
used? used.
{
A built-in regenerative resistor is To the investigation item No. 2.
used.
2 Is the short wire connected between The wire is not connected. Connect the wire.
P and D terminal? The connector is disconnected. Reconnect the connector.
Are there any problems with the {
The connector has a contact fault. Replace the connector.
connection condition? The connection is correct. Replace the drive unit.
3 Is the connection of the regenerative The connection is incorrect. Rewire.
resistor or regeneration resistor The connection is correct. To the investigation item No. 4. { {
cable correct?
4 Is the regeneration resistor or the The regeneration resistor is broken. Replace the regenerative resistor.
regeneration resistor cable broken? Or the resistance value is large.
Disconnect the regenerative resistor The regeneration resistor cable is Replace the cable. { {
terminal and check the resistance broken.
value with a tester. The resistance value is normal. Replace the drive unit.

Feedback error 1
Alarm No.
An error was detected in the feedback signals of the position detector in a servo system, or in PLG's
42 feedback signals in a spindle system.
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check SP019 and SP020. Parameter is set incorrectly. Correctly set.
{
Parameter is set correctly. Check the investigation item No. 2.
2 Check the alarm No. "2C" items. {

II - 112
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

Feedback error 2
Alarm No. Excessive difference was detected in position data between the motor side detector and the machine
43 side detector in a servo system. In a spindle system, an error was detected in the encoder feedback
signals.
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Jiggle the detector connectors (drive The connector is disconnected (or Correctly install.
unit side and detector side) and loose). {
check if they are disconnected. The connector is not disconnected. Check the investigation item No. 2.
2 Is the detector cable wired in the The cables are wired near each Improve the cable wiring.
same conduit as the motor's power other. (Noise is entering from the
{
cable, or are the two cables laid in power cable.)
parallel near each other? The wires are sufficiently separated. Check the investigation item No. 3.
3 Is the motor FG wire connected only The motor FG wire is grounded on Ground the motor to one point,
to the drive unit which drives it? the motor side. connecting the wires together on the
{
(Is the motor grounded to one point?) drive unit side.
The motor is grounded to one point. Check the investigation item No. 4.
4 Turn the power OFF, and check the The connection is faulty. Replace the detector cable.
detector cable connection with a The connection is normal. Check the investigation item No. 5. {
tester. (Is the cable shielded?)
5 Replace with another unit, and check The alarm is on the drive unit side. Replace the drive unit.
whether the fault is on the unit side or The alarm is on the detector side. Check the investigation item No. 6. {
detector side.
6 Check if there is any abnormality in Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the detector's ambient environment. environment.
{
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)
7 Check SP019 and SP020. Parameter is set incorrectly. Correctly set.
{
Parameter is set correctly. Check the investigation item No. 8.
8 Check the alarm No. "1B" items. {

Alarm No. Fan stop

A cooling fan built in the drive unit stopped, and overheat occurred in the power module.
45
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Turn the unit power ON again, and The fan is rotating, and an alarm did Continue to use.
confirm the rotation of the fan. not occur again. The power may be turned ON without
assuring more than 10 seconds for
Note) Assure more than 10 seconds the time from when the power is
for the time from when the turned OFF till when it is turned ON.
power is turned OFF till when it Leave for more than 10 seconds, and { {
is turned ON. For the fan used turn the power ON again.
for the drive unit, assuring The fan did not rotate. Or, an alarm Check the investigation item No. 2.
more than 10 seconds for the occurred again.
time from when the power is
turned OFF till when it is turned
ON is required.
2 Check if the connector connected to The connector is disconnected. Correctly connect the connector.
{ {
a fan is disconnected. The connector is not disconnected. Check the investigation item No. 3.
3 Check if oil or cutting chips are Oil or cutting chips are adhered. Improve the use environment and
adhered to the fan. replace the drive unit.
{ {
Oil or cutting chips are not adhered. Replace the drive unit.
The cable may be broken.

II - 113
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

Alarm No. Motor overheat

Thermal protection function of the motor or in the detector, has started its operation.
46
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the repeatability. The alarm occurs before operation. Check the investigation item No. 2.
The alarm occurs occasionally after Check the investigation item No. 5. { {
operation is started.
2 Jiggle the detector connectors (drive The connector is disconnected (or Correctly install.
unit side and detector side) and loose). { {
check if they are disconnected. The connector is not disconnected. Check the investigation item No. 3.
3 Turn the power OFF, and check the The connection is faulty. Replace the cable.
detector cable connection with a The connection is normal. Check the investigation item No. 4. { {
tester. (Is the cable shielded?)
4 When using MDS-B-HR, check if the SV034/bit2 = 0 Set SP034/bit2 to 1.
motor is validated even if a motor SV034/bit2 = 1 Check the investigation item No. 5. {
thermal is not provided?
5 Check the overload % (servo) or load The load is large. Servo : Check the investigation
meter (spindle). item No. 6.
Spindle : Check the investigation { {
item No. 8.
The load is not large. Check the investigation item No. 9.
6 Is the unbalance torque high? The constant load torque (friction + Select the motor so that the constant
unbalance) is 60% or more. load torque is 60% or less.
{
The constant load torque is less than Check the investigation item No. 7.
60%.
7 Was the overload alarm (50) forcibly The alarm was forcibly reset. Do not turn the drive unit's power
reset by turning the drive unit power OFF when an overload alarm occurs.
{ {
OFF? (The NC power can be turned OFF.)
The alarm was not forcibly reset. Check the investigation item No. 9.
8 Check the parameter settings. The parameter is not set correctly. Correctly set.
{
The parameter is set correctly. Check the investigation item No. 9.
9 Measure the motor temperature The motor is hot. Check the investigation item No. 10.
{ {
when the alarm occurs. The motor is not hot. Check the investigation item No. 12.
10 When using a motor with fan, check The motor fan was stopped. Check the investigation item No. 11.
whether the fan is stopped, or it is The motor fan wind flow is poor. Clean the fan. { {
clogged with dust, etc.
11 Check the fan wiring. There is no problem. Check the investigation item No. 12.
The cable is broken. Replace the cable. { {
The cable is not broken. Replace the fan.
12 Replace the drive unit or motor with The alarm is on the drive unit side. Replace the drive unit.
another drive unit or motor, and The alarm is on the motor side. Replace the motor. { {
check whether the fault is on the
drive unit side or motor side
13 Check if there is any abnormality in Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the unit's ambient environment. environment.
{ {
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)

Motor side detector: Error 5

Alarm No.
The motor side detector (linear scale in the case of linear motor) detected an error.
48 As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the separate table (1).
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the alarm No. "1B" items. { {

Motor side detector: Error 6

Alarm No.
The motor side detector (linear scale in the case of linear motor) detected an error.
49 As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the separate table (1).
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the alarm No. "1B" items. {

II - 114
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

Motor side detector: Error 7

Alarm No.
The motor side detector (linear scale in the case of linear motor) detected an error.
4A As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the separate table (1).
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the alarm No. "1B" items. { {

Motor side detector: Error 8

Alarm No.
The motor side detector (linear scale in the case of linear motor) detected an error.
4B As details defer from detector to detector, refer to the separate table (1).
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the alarm No. "1B" items. { {

Alarm No. NC command mode error

The mode outside the specification was input in spindle control mode selection.
4E
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the wiring and setting 1) The grounding is incomplete. Correctly ground.
environment. 2) The alarm occurs easily when a Use noise measures on the device
1) Correctly grounded? specific device operates. described on the left.
2) Any noise generating devices {
3) The cable is not correctly shielded. Correctly shield the cable.
around the unit?
3) Are the speed/position detector No abnormality is found in particular. Replace the drive unit.
cables correctly shielded?

Alarm No. Overload 1

Overload detection level became over 100%. The motor or the drive unit is overloaded.
50
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the overload parameters. The standard values (below) are not Set the standard values.
Servo : SV021, SV022 set.
Spindle : SP063, SP064 Servo : SV021 = 60, SV022 = 150 { {
Spindle : SV063 = 60, SP064 = 110
The standard values are set. Investigate item 2.
2 Check the overload % (servo) or load The load is large. Servo : Investigate item 3.
meter (spindle). Spindle : Investigate item 7. { {
The load is not large. Investigate item 9.
3 Check whether machine resonance is Resonance is occurring. Adjust the parameters.
occurring. • Set the notch filter.
{
• Lower VGN1 (SV005).
Resonance is not occurring. Investigate item 4.
4 Check whether the shaft sways when The motor is hunting. Adjust the parameters.
the motor is stopped. (Hunting) • Increase VGN1 (SV005).
{
• Lower VIA (SV008).
The motor is not hunting. Investigate item 5.
5 Check the brake operation. The motor brakes are not released. Correct the faulty section.
• Check the brake relay. The motor brake operation is normal. Investigate item 6. {
• Check the connector (CN20)
connection.
6 Check the load current with the NC The cutting load is large. Lower the cutting load.
Servo Monitor, and investigate the There is interference with the When using the positioning pin, turn
machine load. positioning pin. the servo OFF when stopped.
An excessive force is applied from Check whether the ball screw is bent, {
the machine. or whether there is a fault in the
guide.
The machine load is not large. Investigate item 8.
7 Check the PLG output waveform. There is a problem. Adjust the PLG output waveform.
{
Normal Investigate item 8.
8 Confirm the motor capacity selection The motor performance is Lower the acceleration/deceleration
again. insufficient. rate or cutting load. { {
The motor performance is sufficient. Investigate item 9.
9 Try replacing the drive unit. Improved. Replace the drive unit.
{ {
Not improved. Replace the motor.
(Note) NR and PR resetting are not possible when the overload level is 50% or more. Do not forcibly reset (AR) by turning the unit power
OFF. If AR resetting is used at 50% or higher, the level is set to 80% when the power is turned ON next. (Servo)

II - 115
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

Overload 2
Alarm No. Current command of more than 95% of the unit's max. current was being continuously given for longer
51 than 1 second in a servo system. In a spindle system, current command of more than 95% of the
motor's max. current was being continuously given for longer than 1 second.
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Did the alarm occur immediately after The alarm occurred after ready ON Investigate item 2.
READY ON? before operation starts.
{
The alarm occurred after normal Investigate item 5.
operation.
2 Check that the PN voltage is supplied The voltage is not supplied. Correctly supply the PN voltage.
to the drive unit. Approx. 300V is correctly supplied. Investigate item 3. {
• Is the CHARGE lamp ON?
3 Check the motor power cable (U, V, The connections are incorrect. Connect correctly.
W phases).
• The power cable is not connected. {
The connections are correct. Investigate item 4.
• Is the cable connected to the motor
for another axis?
4 Check the detector cable connection. The connections are incorrect. Connect correctly.
• Is the cable connected to the motor The connections are correct. Investigate item 5. {
for another axis?
5 Check whether the machine has The machine has collided. Check the machining program and
collided. soft limit settings. {
The machine has not collided. Investigate item 6.
6 Check whether the current value on The current is saturated during Increase the acceleration/
the NC Servo Monitor screen is acceleration/deceleration. deceleration time constant.
saturated during The current value during Investigate item 7. {
acceleration/deceleration. acceleration/deceleration is
appropriate.
7 Check the detector FB. The FB signal is abnormal. Replace the detector.
(With the absolute position system,
{
the zero point must be established.)
The FB signal is normal. Replace the drive unit.
8 Check the load meter value. The load is large. Lower the load.
{
The load is not large. Investigate item 9.
9 Check the PLG output waveform. There is a problem. Adjust the PLG output waveform.
{
Normal Replace the drive unit.

Excessive error 1
Alarm No.
A difference between the actual and theoretical motor positions during servo ON exceeded the setting
52 value.
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the excessive error detection The excessive error detection width is Set appropriate values.
width. too small.
SV023 (Servo) Servo standard value:
SP102 (Orientation control) RAPID
SV023 = 60 × PGN1 ÷ 2
SP154, SP155 (C-axis control)
SP177/bitD, SP186 For the spindle, a value larger than { {
(Spindle synchronous control) the droop amount:
SP193/bitD, SP218 Droop amount =
(Synchronous tap) Spindle rotation speed × No. of pulses
60 × position loop gain
Appropriate values are set. Investigate item 2.
2 Check the position detector polarity. The polarity is reversed. Correctly set the parameters.
SV017/bit4 (Servo) Normal. Investigate item 3.
SP097/bit5 (Orientation control)
SP129/bit5 (C-axis control) { {
SP177/bit5
(Spindle synchronous control)
SP193/bit5
(Synchronous tap control)
3 Check the alarm No. "51" items. { {

II - 116
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

Excessive error 2
Alarm No.
A difference between the actual and theoretical motor positions during servo OFF exceeded the setting
53 value.
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the follow-up function while The axis detachment function (NC Check the investigation item No. 2.
the NC is in the servo OFF state. parameter) is invalid.
(Note) For the axis detachment
function, refer to the NC
manual.
{
The axis detachment function (NC Check the investigation item No. 3.
parameter) is valid.
(Note) For the axis detachment
function, refer to the NC
manual.
2 Check whether the axis has moved The axis has moved. Adjust the brakes, etc. so that the
during servo OFF, and check the axis does not move. {
motor brake operation. The axis has not moved. Check the investigation item No. 3.
3 Check the excessive error detection The excessive error detection width is Set an appropriate value.
width. too small.
SV026 (Servo) RAPID
SV026 = 60 × PGN1 ÷ 2
{
An appropriate value is set. Check for problems on the NC side,
such as the position FB follow-up
control.

Alarm No. Excessive error 3

When an excessive error 1 occurred, detection of the motor current failed.
54
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check that the PN voltage is supplied The voltage is not supplied. Correctly supply the PN voltage.
to the drive unit. Approx. 300V is correctly supplied. Investigate item 2. {
• Is the CHARGE lamp ON?
2 Check the motor power cable (U, V, The connections are incorrect. Connect correctly.
W phases).
The connections are correct. Replace the drive unit.
• The power cable is not connected. {
• Is the cable connected to the motor
for another axis?

Supplement (servo)
Depending on the ideal machine position in respect to the command position, the actual machine
position could enter the actual shaded section shown below, which is separated more than the distance
set in OD1.

Position
Command position

OD1
Ideal machine position

OD2

OD2

OD1

Time
Servo OFF Servo ON

II - 117
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

Collision detection 1: G0
Alarm No.
When collision detection function was valid, the disturbance torque in rapid traverse (G0) exceeded the
58 collision detection level.
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check whether the machine has The machine has collided. Check the machining program and
collided. soft limit settings.
The machine has not collided. Increase the detection level (SV060). {
(The detection level should be set as
1.5-times the maximum torque or
more.)

Collision detection 1: G1
Alarm No.
When collision detection function was valid, the disturbance torque in cutting feed (G1) exceeded the
59 collision detection level.
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check whether the machine has The machine has collided. Check the machining program and
collided. soft limit settings.
The machine has not collided. Increase the detection level (SV035. {
clG1).
(Set the detection level larger than
the maximum cutting load.)

Alarm No. Collision detection 2

When collision detection function was valid, the command torque reached the max. motor torque.
5A
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check whether the machine has The machine has collided. Check the machining program and
collided. soft limit settings. {
The machine has not collided. Check the investigation item No. 2.
2 Check whether the current value on The current is saturated during Check the investigation item No. 3.
the NC Servo Monitor screen is acceleration/deceleration.
saturated during The current value during Investigate the cause of the load {
acceleration/deceleration. acceleration/deceleration is fluctuation.
appropriate.
3 Can the acceleration/deceleration The constant can be changed. Increase the acceleration/
time constant be changed? deceleration time constant.
{
The constant cannot be changed. Set to ignore collision detection
method 2.

Alarm No. Safety observation: Commanded speed error

In safety monitoring mode, the commanded speed was detected to exceed the safe speed.
5B
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the commanded speed on the The commanded speed and safe Reduce the commanded speed on
NC side. speed limit value are the same. the NC side or increase the safe
speed limit value. { {
The commanded speed is slower Replace the drive unit.
than the safe speed.

Safety observation: Door state error

Alarm No.
In safety monitoring mode, the door state signal from the NC and the same signal from the drive unit
5D don't match. Otherwise, door open state was detected in normal mode.
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the DI input timing. Both NC side and drive unit side input Review the DI input sequence.
timings match one another within Check if the cable for the DI input
500ms. signal is broken. { {
NC side and drive unit side inputs do Investigate the wiring and connection
not match one another within 500ms. environment.

II - 118
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

Alarm No. Safety observation: Feedback speed error

In safety monitoring mode, the motor speed was detected to exceed the safe speed.
5E
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the DI input timing. The feedback speed and safe speed Reduce the commanded speed on
limit value are the same. the NC side or increase the safe
speed limit value. { {
The feedback speed is slower than Replace the drive unit.
the safe speed.
2 Check the wiring and setting 1) The grounding is incomplete. Correctly ground.
environment. 2) The alarm occurs easily when a Use noise measures on the device
1) Correctly grounded? specific device operates. described on the left.
2) Any noise generating devices { {
3) The cable is not correctly shielded. Correctly shield the cable.
around the unit?
3) Are the speed/position detector No abnormality is found in particular. Replace the drive unit.
cables correctly shielded?

Alarm No. External contactor error

A contact of the external contactor is welding.
5F
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check whether the contactor's The contactor has melted. Replace the contactor.
contact has melted. The contactor has not melted. Check the investigation item No. 2. { {

2 Check whether the axis where an The alarm occurred at the axis where Set the parameter correctly.
alarm occurred was a contactor the contactor control is not executed.
{ {
control axis. The alarm occurred at the axis where Replace the drive unit.
the contactor control is executed.

Alarm No. Power supply: Power module overcurrent

Overcurrent protection function in the power module has started its operation.
61
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies CV
1 Check the state of the operation The alarm occurs each time Replace the unit.
when the alarm occurs, and check immediately after 200VAC is supplied
the repeatability. or after READY is turned ON.
The alarm occurs frequently during Check the investigation item No. 3. {
READY ON.
The alarm occurs after continuous Check the investigation item No. 2.
operation for a long time.
The unit is hot.
2 Check the load state of all motors, The total load of all motors exceeds Lower the motor load and operation
and the starting/stopping frequency. the rated capacity of the power frequency.
supply unit. {
The total does not exceed the Check the investigation item No. 3.
capacity.
3 Check the power capacity. The power capacity is insufficient. Increase the power capacity.
The specified power capacity is Check the investigation item No. 4. {
secured.
4 Measure the voltage across wires. The voltage drops to 170V or less Increase the power capacity.
• Is the voltage 170V or more even occasionally.
when the motor is accelerating? The difference of the voltage across Improve the power phase balance. {
wires is 10V or more.
The difference of the voltage across Check the investigation item No. 5.
wires is less than 10V.
5 Measure the power voltage with a The power voltage is distorted. Improve the source of the distortion.
synchroscope, and check whether Install an AC reactor.
there is any distortion. The power voltage waveform is not Check the investigation item No. 6. {
• Are there any other devices abnormal.
causing the power distortion?
6 Check if there is any abnormality in Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the unit's ambient environment. environment. {
(Ex. Noise, grounding, etc.)

II - 119
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

Alarm No. Power supply: Frequency error

The input power supply frequency increased above the specification range.
62
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies CV
1 Check the state of the operation The alarm occurs each time Check the investigation item No. 2.
when the alarm occurs, and check immediately after the power is turned
the repeatability. ON. Or, the alarm occurs
occasionally regardless of the {
operation state.
The alarm occurs only while the Check the investigation item No. 3.
motor is accelerating/decelerating.
2 Measure the power voltage waveform The frequency is deviated from Review the power facilities.
during normal operation. 50Hz±3% or 60Hz±3%.
The voltage waveform dips at some Improve the source of the distortion. {
sections. Install an AC reactor.
There is no problem. Check the investigation item No. 4.
3 Measure the power voltage when the The frequency greatly fluctuates Review the power facilities.
motor is accelerating/decelerating. during acceleration/deceleration.
The voltage waveform during Improve the source of the distortion. {
deceleration dips in some sections. Install an AC reactor.
There is no problem. Check the investigation item No. 4.
4 Check if there is any abnormality in Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the unit's ambient environment. environment. {
(Ex. Noise, grounding, etc.)

Alarm No. Power supply: Phase interruption

An open-phase condition was detected in input power supply circuit.
67
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies CV
1 Check the voltage for each input There are phases with no voltage. Correct the power supply.
{
phase. There is no problem. Check the investigation item No. 2.
2 Check the alarm No. "71" items. {

Alarm No. Power supply: Watchdog

The system does not operate correctly.
68
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies CV
1 Check the repeatability. The alarm occurs each time READY Replace the unit.
is turned ON. {
The alarm occurs occasionally. Check the investigation item No. 2.
2 Check if there is any abnormality in Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the unit's ambient environment. environment. {
(Ex. Noise, grounding, etc.)

II - 120
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

Alarm No. Power supply: Grounding

The motor power cable is in contact with FG (Frame Ground).
69
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Measure the insulation across the Less than 100kΩ. (Grounding) The motor or power cable may be
power cables (U,V,W) for all motors ground faulted. { {
and the ground. (Carry out a megger 100kΩ or more. (Normal) Check the investigation item No. 2.
test.)
2 Has oil come in contact with the Oil has come in contact. Take measures so that oil does not
motor or power cable? come in contact. Check the motor's
cannon connector and the inside of
{ {
the terminal box, and clean as
necessary.
Oil has not come in contact. Check the investigation item No. 3.
3 Measure the insulation again. Less than 1MΩ. (Grounding) Replace the motor or cable.
{ {
1MΩ or more. (Normal) Check the investigation item No. 2.
4 Measure the resistance across the U, Less than 100kΩ. Replace the drive unit.
V, W phase terminals of the 100kΩ or more. Replace the power supply unit.
servo/spindle drive unit and the { {
ground.
(Do not measure the insulation as the
unit could be damaged.)
5 Check whether there is any axis in There is an axis in which alarm has Check the alarm No. "24" items.
which alarm has occurred. occurred.
{ {
There is no axis in which alarm has Check the investigation item No. 2.
occurred.

Alarm No. Power supply: External contactor welding

A contact of the external contactor is welding.
6A
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies CV
1 Check whether any alarm has An alarm has occurred. Remove the cause of the alarm on
occurred on the drive unit side. the drive side, and check the
{
investigation item No. 2.
An alarm has not occurred. Check the investigation item No. 2.
2 Check whether the contactor's The contactor has melted. Replace the contactor.
{
contact has melted. The contactor has not melted. Check the investigation item No. 3.
3 Check that the contactor excitation The connection is correct. Correctly connect.
wiring is correctly connected from the The connection is incorrect. Replace the power supply unit. {
power supply unit's MC1 terminal.

Alarm No. Power supply: Rush relay welding

A resistor relay for rush short circuit fails to be OFF.
6B
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies CV
1 Check whether any alarm has An alarm has occurred. Remove the cause of the alarm on
occurred on the drive unit side. the drive side, and then carry out the
{
investigation details 2.
An alarm has not occurred. Check the investigation item No. 2.
2 Check the repeatability. The alarm occurs each time READY Replace the unit.
is turned ON. {
The alarm occurs occasionally. Check the investigation item No. 3.
3 Check if there is any abnormality in Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the unit's ambient environment. environment. {
(Ex. Noise, grounding, etc.)

II - 121
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

Alarm No. Power supply: Main circuit error

An error was detected in charging operation of the main circuit capacitor.
6C
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies CV
1 Check the CHARGE lamp state when The CHARGE lamp remains ON for Replace the power supply unit.
the alarm occurs. some time.
The lamp turns ON instantly, but Check the investigation item No. 2.
when the alarm occurs and the {
contactor turns OFF, the lamp turns
OFF immediately.
The lamp never turns ON. Check the investigation item No. 2.
Then replace the unit.
2 Disconnect the power supply unit's 1) The power supply unit side is Replace the power supply unit.
PN terminal block wiring, and abnormal.
measure the resistance value at 1) 2) The drive unit side is abnormal. Disconnect the PN wiring, and then
and 2) shown below. check the drive unit side.
Power supply 1) and 2) are both normal. Replace the power supply unit.
Drive unit unit
Tester Polarity {
measure- Normal Abnormal
2)
ment point + -
P N Several 100Ω Short-circuit/∞Ω
1) 1)
P N P ∞Ω Several 100Ω
N P N Several 100Ω Short-circuit/∞Ω
2)
N P ∞Ω Several 100Ω

Alarm No. Power supply: Memory error/AD error

An error was detected in the internal memory or A/D converter.
6E
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies CV
1 Check the repeatability. The alarm occurs each time READY Replace the unit.
is turned ON. {
The alarm occurs occasionally. Check the investigation item No. 2.
2 Check if there is any abnormality in Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the unit's ambient environment. environment. {
(Ex. Noise, grounding, etc.)

Alarm No. Power supply error

No power supply is connected to the drive unit, or a communication error was detected.
6F
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies CV
1 Check the LED display on the power "F" is flickering. An A/D converter error has occurred.
supply unit. Check the alarm No. "6E" items.
Another alarm code is flickering. Check items of each alarm No.
"0" is displayed. Check the investigation item No. 2.
{
"F" is displayed. Check the investigation item No. 2.
"8" is displayed. Check the alarm No. "68" items.
"b", "C", "d" is displayed. Check the investigation item No. 3.
Something else is displayed. Check the alarm No. "68" items.
2 Check the rotary switch setting. 0 or 4 is set. Check the investigation item No. 3.
{
A value other than the above is set. Correctly set the rotary switch.
3 Check the communication cable There is a problem with the wiring or Replace the cable.
(CN4) connected with the drive unit. shield. {
There is no problem. Replace the unit.
(Note) Alarm 6F is detected at the same time other power supply alarms occur.

II - 122
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

Power supply: External emergency stop error

Alarm No.
A mismatch of the external emergency stop input and CNC emergency stop input continued for 30
70 seconds.
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies CV
1 Check the connection between Not wired. Correctly wire the external
external emergency stop and NC emergency stop and NC emergency {
emergency stop. stop.
2 Check if there is any abnormality in No abnormality is found in particular. Replace the drive unit.
the unit's ambient environment. The grounding is incomplete. Take remedies according to the {
causes of the abnormality.
Additionally ground and review.

Alarm No. Power supply: Instantaneous power interruption

The power was momentarily interrupted.
71
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies CV
1 Investigate the sequence to check The contactor has been turned OFF Review the machine sequence.
whether the contactor has been externally. When turning the contactor OFF with
turned OFF with an emergency stop external means, such as an
button, etc. emergency stop button, this alarm
{
can be avoided by inputting NC
emergency stop at the same time.
The contactor has not been turned Check the investigation item No. 2.
OFF.
2 Check the repeatability. The alarm occurs each time READY Check the investigation item No. 3.
is turned ON.
The alarm occurs at a certain Check the investigation item No. 1.
operation. If there is no problem, check the {
investigation item No. 3.
The alarm occurs occasionally during Check the investigation item No. 4.
operation.
3 Check whether the power input wire The wiring is incorrect. Correctly connect.
{
and contactor are correctly wired. There is no problem. Check the investigation item No. 4.
4 Check the power voltage waveform An instantaneous power failure or Correct the power facility.
with a synchroscope. voltage drop occurs frequently. {
There is no problem. Replace the unit.

Alarm No. Power supply: Fan stop

A cooling fan built in the power supply unit stopped, and overheat occurred in the power module.
72
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies CV
1 Turn the unit power ON again, and The fan is rotating, and an alarm did Continue to use.
confirm the rotation of the fan. not occur again. The power may be turned ON without
assuring more than 10 seconds for
Note) Assure more than 10 seconds the time from when the power is
for the time from when the turned OFF till when it is turned ON.
power is turned OFF till when it Leave for more than 10 seconds, and {
is turned ON. For the fan used turn the power ON again.
for the drive unit, assuring The fan did not rotate. Or, an alarm Check the investigation item No. 2.
more than 10 seconds for the occurred again.
time from when the power is
turned OFF till when it is turned
ON is required.
1 Check if the connector connected to The connector is disconnected. Correctly connect the connector.
a fan is disconnected. The connector is not disconnected. Check the investigation item No. 3. {

2 Check if oil or cutting chips are Oil or cutting chips are adhered. Improve the use environment and
adhered to the fan. replace the drive unit.
{
Oil or cutting chips are not adhered. Replace the drive unit.
The cable may be broken.

II - 123
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

Power supply: Over regeneration

Alarm No. Over-regeneration detection level became over 100%. The regenerative resistor is overloaded. This
73 alarm cannot be reset for 15 min from the occurrence. Leave the drive system energized for more
than 15 min, then turn the power ON to reset the alarm.
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies CV
1 Check the alarm occurrence state The regenerative load value Check whether the state is affected
and regenerative load displayed on increases when the power is turned by power fluctuation, grounding or
the NC Monitor screen while ON and the motor is not rotated. noise. If there is no problem, replace
changing the operation mode. the unit.
The regenerative load value A-CR : Check the investigation
increases each time the motor item No. 2.
decelerates, and the alarm occurs. C1-CV : Check the investigation {
item No. 4.
The regenerative load value A-CR : Check the investigation
increases each time the motor item No. 2.
decelerates, but the alarm does not C1-CV : Ease the operation mode.
occur when the operation mode is
eased.
2 Check whether the parameter The setting is incorrect. Correctly set. (Check the alarm No.
(regenerative resistor type) of the "6D" items.) {
drive unit controlling the power The setting is correct. Check the investigation item No. 3.
supply unit is correct.
3 Check the regenerative resistor's The regenerative resistor is Replace the regenerative resistor.
state. abnormal.
{
• Is oil adhered? There is no problem. Check the investigation item No. 4.
• Measure the resistance value.
4 Check the alarm No. "75" items. {

Power supply: Overvoltage

Alarm No. L+ and L- bus voltage in main circuit exceeded the allowable value. As the voltage between L+ and L- is
75 high immediately after this alarm, another alarm may occur if this alarm is reset in a short time. Wait
more than 5 min before resetting so that the voltage drops.
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies CV
1 Check the repeatability. The alarm occurs each time the Check the investigation item No. 3.
motor decelerates. {
The alarm occurs occasionally. Check the investigation item No. 2.
2 Check the power supply's alarm Auxiliary regeneration frequency over Limit the occurrence of the excessive
history. (E8) occurs just before the instantaneous regeneration by not
over-voltage occurs. decelerating multiple axes at the {
same time.
Others. Check the investigation item No. 3.
3 Check the power capacity. The power capacity is insufficient. Increase the power capacity.
The specified power capacity is Check the investigation item No. 4. {
secured.
4 Measure the voltage across wires. The voltage drops to 170V or less Increase the power capacity.
• Is the voltage 170V or more even occasionally.
when the motor is accelerating? The difference of the voltage across Improve the power phase balance. {
wires is 10V or more.
The difference of the voltage across Check the investigation item No. 5.
wires is less than 10V.
5 Measure the power voltage with a The power voltage is distorted. Improve the source of the distortion.
synchroscope, and check whether Install an AC reactor.
there is any distortion. The power voltage waveform is not Check the investigation item No. 6. {
• Are there any other devices abnormal.
causing the power distortion?
6 Check if there is any abnormality in Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the unit's ambient environment. environment. {
(Ex. Noise, grounding, etc.)

II - 124
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

Power supply: External emergency stop setting error

Alarm No.
The rotary switch setting of external emergency stop is not correct, or a wrong external emergency stop
76 signal is input.
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies CV
1 Check the rotary switch setting. When using external emergency Set the rotary switch to "4".
{
stop, rotary switch is not set to "4".
2 Check if there is any abnormality in No abnormality is found in particular. Replace the drive unit.
the unit's ambient environment. The grounding is incomplete. Take remedies according to the {
causes of the abnormality.
Additionally ground and review.

Alarm No. Power supply: Power module overheat

Thermal protection function in the power module has started its operation.
77
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies CV
1 Confirm that the fan is properly Large amounts of cutting oil or cutting Clean or replace the fan.
rotating. chips, etc., are adhered, or the
{
rotation is slow.
The fan is properly rotating. Check the investigation item No. 2.
2 Check whether the heat dissipating Cutting oil or cutting chips, etc., are Clean the fins.
fins are dirty. adhered, and the fins are clogged. {
The fins are normal. Check the investigation item No. 3.
3 Measure the power supply unit's 55°C or more Improve the ventilation and cooling
ambient temperature. for the power distribution panel. {
Less than 55°C. Check the investigation item No. 4.
4 Check if there is any abnormality in Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the unit's ambient environment. environment.
{
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)

Alarm No. Watchdog

The system does not operate correctly.
88
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check whether the servo or spindle The version was changed. Change software version back to the
software version was changed original. { {
recently. The version was not changed. Check the investigation item No. 2.
2 Check the repeatability. The error is always repeated. Replace the drive unit.
The state returns to normal once, but Check the investigation item No. 3. { {
occurs sometimes thereafter.
3 Check if there is any abnormality in Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the unit's ambient environment. environment.
{ {
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)

II - 125
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

4.1.3 Troubleshooting for each warning No.

Absolute position detector: Revolution counter error

Warning No.
An error was detected in the revolution counter of the absolute position detector. The absolute
9E position data cannot be compensated.
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check if there is any abnormality in Take remedies according to the causes of the abnormality in the ambient
the detector's ambient environment. environment.
{
(Ex. Ambient temperature, noise,
grounding)
2 Check the repeatability. Occurs frequently. Replace the detector.
{ {
Is not repeated. Check the investigation item No. 1.

Battery voltage drop

Warning No.
The battery voltage that is supplied to the absolute position detector dropped. The absolute position
9F data is retained.
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Measure the battery (MDS-A-BT) Less than 3V. Replace the battery unit.
{
voltage. 3V or more. Check the investigation item No. 2.
2 Check whether the NC bus cable is The cable is disconnected. Correctly connect.
{
disconnected. The cable is not disconnected. Check the investigation item No. 3.
3 Check whether the battery wire in the The cable is broken. Replace the cable.
{
detector cable is broken. The cable is not broken. Check the investigation item No. 4.
4 Replace the drive unit. Improved. Replace the drive unit.
Not improved. Replace the detector. {
(With the absolute position system,
the zero point must be established.)
(Note) When warning 9F occurs, do not turn the drive unit power OFF to ensure that the absolute position data is held.
Replace the battery with the drive unit power ON.

Warning No. Fan stop warning

A cooling fan built in the drive unit stopped.
A6
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the alarm No. "45" items. { {

Warning No. Overload warning

Overload detection level exceeded 80%.
E1
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check if the motor is hot. Motor is hot. Check the alarm No. "50" items.
{
Motor is not hot. Check the investigation item No. 2.
2 Check if an error occurs when Error is not found in operation. Thus, Ease the operation patter, if possible.
executing acceleration/deceleration operation is possible. If no alarm occurs, operation can be
operation. continued as it is. {
Error is found in operation. Check the investigation item 3 or later
of Alarm No. 50.
3 Check the alarm No. "50" items. { {

Warning No. Set parameter warning

An incorrect parameter was detected among the parameters received from the CNC.
E4
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check the error parameter No. SV001 to SV256 Set the value within the designated
{ {
SP001 to SP256 setting range.
2 Check the spindle control input 4/bit 0 Selected other than 000, 001, 010 Correctly select.
{
to 2. and 100 when the alarm occurred.

Warning No. Control axis detachment warning

Control axis detachment was commanded.
E6
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 The status in which removal of the control axis was commanded from the NC is indicated. {

II - 126
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

Warning No. In NC emergency stop state

Emergency stop was input from the CNC.
E7
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies SV SP
1 Check if the emergency stop is The emergency stop is applied. Check the investigation item No. 2.
{ {
applied on the NC side. The emergency stop is cancelled. Check the investigation item No. 3.
2 Cancel the emergency stop. Normally starts up. Normal.
{ {
"E7" remains displayed. Check the investigation item No. 3.
3 Check whether an alarm is occurring An alarm is occurring in another drive Reset the alarm in the other drive
in another drive unit. unit. unit. { {
An alarm is not occurring. Check the investigation item No. 4.
4 Turn the power of NC and 200VAC (400V) ON again { {

Warning No. Instantaneous power interruption warning

The power was momentarily interrupted.
E9
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies CV
1 Check the alarm No. "71" items. {

Warning No. In external emergency stop state

External emergency stop signal was input.
EA
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies CV
1 Check whether the specifications Use is not allowed. Invalidate the external emergency
allow use of the external emergency stop. {
stop. Use is allowed. Check the investigation item No. 2.
2 Measure the input voltage of the 24V is input. Replace the power supply unit.
CN23 connector. (While emergency 24V is not input. Check whether the external {
stop is cancelled.) emergency stop cable is broken, or
check the external contact operation.

Warning No. Power supply: Over regeneration warning

Over-regeneration detection level exceeded 80%.
EB
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies CV
1 Check the alarm No. "73" items. {

Warning No. Power supply: Fan stop warning

A cooling fan built in the power supply unit stopped.
EE
Investigation details Investigation results Remedies CV
1 Check the alarm No. "72" items. {

II - 127
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

4.1.4 Parameter numbers during initial parameter error

If an initial parameter error (alarm 37) occurs, the alarm and the No. of the parameter set exceeding the
setting range will appear on the NC Diagnosis screen as shown below.

S02 Initial parameter error {{{{ †

{{{{ : Error parameter No.
† : Axis name

If an error No. larger than the servo parameter No. is displayed for the servo drive unit (MDS-D/DH-V1/V2),
the alarm is occurring for several related parameters. Refer to the following table, and correctly set the
parameters.

Error parameter No. Details Related parameters

2301 The following settings are overflowing. SV001, SV002 SV003,
• Electronic gears SV018
• Position loop gain SV019, SV020
• Speed feedback SV049
2302 The absolute position parameter is valid when OSE104 and SV017, SV025
OSE105 are connected.

II - 128
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

4.1.5 Troubleshooting the spindle system when there is no alarm or warning

If an abnormality is observed in the spindle system but no alarm or warning has occurred, refer to the
following table and check the state.

[1] The rotation speed command and actual rotation speed do not match.
Investigation item Investigation results Remedies
1 Check the speed command. The speed command is not input Input the correct speed command.
correctly.
The speed command is correct. Check the investigation item No. 2.
2 Check whether there is slipping There is slipping. Repair the machine side.
between the motor and spindle. No particular problems found. Check the investigation item No. 3.
(When connected with a belt or
clutch.)
3 Check the spindle parameters The correct values are not set. Set the correct values.
(SP026, SP129 and following). The correct values are set. Replace the spindle drive unit.

[2] The starting time is long or has increased in length.

Investigation item Investigation results Remedies
1 Check whether the friction torque The friction torque has increased. Repair the machine side.
has increased. No particular problems found. Check the investigation item No. 2.
2 Manually rotate the motor bearings The bearings do not rotate Replace the spindle motor.
and check the movement. smoothly.
The bearings rotate smoothly. Check the investigation item No. 3.
3 Check whether the torque limit The signal has been input. Do not input this signal.
signal has been input. The signal is not input. Replace the drive unit.

[3] The motor stops during cutting.

Investigation item Investigation results Remedies
1 Check the load rate during cutting. The load meter sways over 120% Reduce the load.
during cutting.
No particular problems found. Check the investigation item No. 2.
2 Carry out the same investigations and remedies as section (4).

[4] The vibration and noise (gear noise), etc., are large.
Investigation item Investigation results Remedies
1 Check the machine's dynamic The same noise is heard during Repair the machine side.
balance. (Coast from the maximum coasting.
speed.) No particular problems found. Check the investigation item No. 2.
2 Check whether there is a resonance Vibration and noise increase at a Repair the machine side.
point in the machine. (Coast from set rotation speed during coasting.
the maximum speed.) No particular problems found. Check the investigation item No. 3.
3 Check the machine's backlash. The backlash is great. Repair the machine side.
No particular problems found. Check the investigation item No. 4.
4 Check the spindle parameter The vibration and noise levels will
Change the setting value.
settings. increase when the setting value isNote that the impact response will
(SP005:VGN1, SP006:VIA1, set to approx. half. drop.
SP007:VIL1, SP008:VGN2, The symptoms do not change Return the setting values to the
SP009:VIA2, SP010:VIL2, even if the above value is set. original values.
SP014:PY1) Check the investigation item No. 5.
5 Jiggle the detector connectors (drive The connector is disconnected (or Correctly connect the connector.
unit side and detector side) and loose).
check if they are disconnected. The connector is not disconnected Check the investigation item No. 6.
(or loose).
6 Turn the power OFF, and check the The connection is faulty or Replace the detector cable.
connection of the speed detector disconnected. Correct the connection.
cable with a tester. The connection is normal. Replace the drive unit.

II - 129
 4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Drive System Troubleshooting

[5] The spindle coasts during deceleration.

Investigation item Investigation results Remedies
1 Check whether there is slipping There is slipping. Repair the machine side.
between the motor and spindle. No particular problems found. Replace the drive unit.
(When connected with a belt or
clutch.)

[6] The rotation does not stabilize.

Investigation item Investigation results Remedies
1 Check the spindle parameter SP005 The rotation stabilizes when the Change the setting value.
(SP008) settings. settings values are both set to Note that the gear noise may
approx. double. increase.
The symptoms do not change Return the setting values to the
even when the above value is set. original values.
Check the investigation item No. 2.
2 Manually shake the speed detector The connector is disconnected (or Correctly connect the connector.
connectors (spindle drive unit side loose).
and speed detector side) to check if The connector is not disconnected Check the investigation item No. 3.
they are disconnected. (or loose).
3 Turn the power OFF, and check the The connection is faulty or Replace the detector cable.
connection of the speed detector disconnected. Correct the connection.
cable with a tester. The connection is normal. Check the investigation item No. 4.
(Especially check the shield wiring.)
4 Investigate the wiring and 1) The grounding is incomplete. Correctly ground.
installation environment. 2) The alarm occurs easily when a Use noise measures on the device
1) Is the ground correctly specific device operates. described on the left.
connected? No particular problems found. Replace the spindle drive unit.
2) Are there any noise-generating
devices near the drive unit?

[7] The speed does not rise above a set level.

Investigation item Investigation results Remedies
1 Check the speed command. The speed command is not input Input the correct speed command.
Check whether the override input is correctly.
input from the machine operation The speed command is input Check the investigation item No. 2.
panel. correctly.
2 Check whether the load has The load has become heavier. Repair the machine side.
suddenly become heavier. No particular problems found. Check the investigation item No. 3.
3 Manually rotate the motor bearings The bearings do not rotate Replace the spindle motor.
and check the movement. smoothly.
The bearings rotate smoothly. Check the investigation item No. 4.
4 Manually shake the speed detector The connector is disconnected (or Correctly connect the connector.
connectors (spindle drive unit side loose).
and speed detector side) to check if The connector is not disconnected Check the investigation item No. 5.
they are disconnected. (or loose).
5 Turn the power OFF, and check the The connection is faulty or Replace the detector cable.
connection of the speed detector disconnected. Correct the connection.
cable with a tester. The waveform is normal. Replace the spindle drive unit.
(Especially check the shield wiring.)

II - 130
III Explanation of Parameters
 1. Outline
1.1 Screen Transition Chart

1. Outline
1.1 Screen Transition Chart

The menus for screens related to maintenance appear when the function key Mainte is pressed.
The parameter menu appears when the menu key Param is pressed.

Process Control Axis Operation

Barrier data
parameters parameters parameters parameters

Computer Subprogram
I/O Ethernet storage
parameters parameters link User parameters
destination
parameters parameters

Base Base axis Base Axis Zero point

specifica- common specifica- return Machine parameters
system
tion tions parameters
parameters parameters
parameters parameters

Absolute Spindle
Servo specifica- Spindle
position
parameters tion parameters
parameters
parameters

Rotary axis PLC

configura- PLC PLC
PLC timer integrated
tion counter constants
timer
parameters

Error
Selecting compensa- Position
Error data Macro list
the PLC bit tion switches
parameters

Auxiliary
Open Open
axis
param 1 param 2
parameters

(Note) There are user parameter dedicated menus in the screens related to setup. The menu configuration
differs slightly from the above configuration. Refer to the Instruction Manual for details.

1.2 Unit
(1) Input setting unit and number of decimal digits
The number of digits in the decimal section of the parameters related to length is determined by the input
setting unit.
The input setting unit is set with parameter "#1003 iunit".

Input setting No. of digits in

Example of setting range
unit decimal section
B 3 0 to 999.999 (mm)
C 4 0 to 999.9999 (mm)
D 5 0 to 999.99999 (mm)
E 6 0 to 999.999999 (mm)

The setting ranges indicated in this manual use the input setting unit "B".

III - 1
 2. User Parameters
2.1 Process Parameters

2. User Parameters
2.1 Process Parameters

<WRK COUNT> (No. of workpieces machined)

# Item Contents Setting range (unit)
8001 WRK COUNT M Set the M code that counts the No. of workpiece 0 to 99
repeated machining.
The No. will not be counted when set to 0.
8002 WRK COUNT The current machining No. is displayed. Set the 0 to 999999
initial value.
8003 WRK COUNT LIMIT Set the maximum No. of workpieces machined. 0 to 999999
A signal is output to PLC when the No. of
machining times is counted to this limit.

<AUTO TLM> (Automatic tool length measurement)

# Item Contents Setting range (unit)
8004 SPEED Set the feedrate during automatic tool length 1 to 1000000 (mm/min)
measurement.
8005 ZONE r Set the distance between the measurement point 0 to 99999.999 (mm)
and deceleration start point.
8006 ZONE d Set the tolerable zone of the measurement point. 0 to 99999.999 (mm)
If the sensor signal turns ON in front of d before the
measurement point‚ or if the signal does not turn
ON after d is passed‚ an alarm will occur.

<AUTO CORNER OVR.> (Automatic corner override)

# Item Contents Setting range (unit)
8007 OVERRIDE Set the override value for automatic corner 0 to 100 (%)
override.
8008 MAX ANGLE Set the max. corner opening angle where 0 to 180 (°)
deceleration should start automatically.
If the angle is larger than this value‚ deceleration
will not start.
8009 DSC. ZONE Set the position where deceleration starts at the 0 to 99999.999 (mm)
corner.
Designate at which length point before the corner
deceleration should start.

<T-TIP OFFSET> (Wear data input)

# Item Contents Setting range (unit)
8010 ABS. MAX. Set the max. value when inputting the tool wear 0 to 99.999 (mm)
(For L system only) compensation amount. (Input setting
A value exceeding this setting value cannot be set. increment applies)
Absolute value of the input value is set.
(If a negative value is input, it is treated and set as a
positive value.)
If "0" is input, this parameter will be invalid.
8011 INC. MAX. Set the max. value for when inputting the tool wear 0 to 99.999 (mm)
(For L system only) compensation amount in the incremental mode. (Input setting
A value exceeding this setting value cannot be set. increment applies)
Absolute value of the input value is set.
(If a negative value is input, it is treated and set as a
positive value.)
If "0" is input, this parameter will be invalid.

III - 2
 2. User Parameters
2.1 Process Parameters

<FIXED C.> (Fixed cycle)

# Item Contents Setting range (unit)
8012 G73 n Set the return amount for G73 (step cycle). 0 to 99999.999 (mm)
(For M system only)
8013 G83 n Set the return amount for G83 (deep hole drilling 0 to 99999.999 (mm)
cycle).
8014 CDZ-VALE Set the screw cut up amount for G76‚ G78 (thread 0 to 127 (0.1 lead)
(For L system only) cutting cycle).
8015 CDZ-ANGLE Set the screw cut up angle for G76‚ G78 (thread 0 to 89 (°)
(For L system only) cutting cycle).
8016 G71 MINIMUM The end of cutting in the rough cutting cycle (G71, 0 to 999.999 (mm)
(For L system only) G72) is the remainder cutting amount. If the amount
is smaller than the value set with this parameter,
the last cycle will not be executed.
8017 G71 DELTA-D The rough cutting cycle (G71, G72) cutting amount 0 to 999.999 (mm)
(For L system only) repeats d+ d, d, d- d using the value (d)
commanded with D as a reference. Set the change
amount d.
8018 G84/G74 n This is not used. Set it to "0". 0
(For M system only)

III - 3
 2. User Parameters
2.1 Process Parameters

<PRECISION> (High-accuracy control)

# Item Contents Setting range (unit)
8019 R COMP Set up a compensation coefficient for reducing a 0 to 99 (%)
control error in the reduction of a corner roundness
and arch radius.
The larger the setup value, the smaller the
theoretical error will be. However, since the speed
at the corner goes down, the cycle time is
extended.
Coefficient = 100 - setting value
(Note) This is valid when "#8021 COMP CHANGE"
is set to "0".
Theor R decrease The value calculated with the following data is
displayed for the theoretical radius reduction error
amount ∆R (mm).
∆R is the value when the high accuracy control
mode is valid.
This data is calculated using the following
parameters.
• #2203 SV003(PGN1)
(Position loop gain 1st axis (1/s))
• #2010 fwd_g
(Feed forward gain 1st axis (%))
• #1570 Sfilt2
(Soft acceleration/deceleration filter 2)
• #8019 R COMP
(When "#8021 COMP_CHANGE" is "0".)
• #8023 CURVE COMP
(When "#8021 COMP_CHANGE" is "1".)
Path after soft Command path
acceleration/ Δra ΔR
deceleration 2
F

Path after Δrs

servo control

Theoretical radius reduction amount at arc center

III - 4
2. User Parameters
2.1 Process Parameters

# Item Contents Setting range (unit)

8020 DCC. ANGLE Set up the minimum value of an angle (external 0 to 89 (degrees)
angle) that should be assumed to be a corner. 0: The angle will be
When an inter-block angle (external angle) in high- 5°.
accuracy mode is larger than the set value, it is
determined as a corner and the speed goes down
to sharpen the edge.

θ If the set value is smaller than

θ, the speed goes down to
optimize the corner.

(Note) If "0" is set, it will be handled as 5 degrees.

8021 COMP_CHANGE Select whether to share or separate the 0/1
compensation coefficient at the corner/curve during
the high-accuracy control mode.
0: Share ("#8019 R COMP" is applied.)
1: Separate
• Corner : #8022 CORNER COMP
• Curve : #8023 CURVE COMP
(Note) Set "1" when using SSS control.
8022 CORNER COMP Set the compensation coefficient to further reduce -1000 to 99 (%)
or increase the roundness at the corner during the
high-accuracy control mode.
Coefficient = 100 - setting value
(Note) This is valid when "#8021 COMP CHANGE"
is set to "1".
8023 CURVE COMP Set the compensation coefficient to further reduce -1000 to 99 (%)
or increase the radius reduction amount at the
curve (arc, involute, spline) during the
high-accuracy control mode.
Coefficient = 100 - setting value
(Note) This is valid when "#8021 COMP CHANGE"
is set to "1".
Theor R decrease Refer to "Theor R decrease" for "#8019 R COMP".

III - 5
 2. User Parameters
2.1 Process Parameters

<SPILINE> (High-accuracy spline)

# Item Contents Setting range (unit)
8025 SPLINE ON Specify whether to enable the spline function. 0/1
(for M system only) 0: Disable the spline function.
1: Enable the spline function.
Spline interpolation will be valid during G61.2
modal regardless of this setting.
8026 CANCEL ANG. When the angle made by blocks exceeds the set 0 to 180 (°)
(for M system only) value, spline interpolation is canceled temporarily. 0: 180 (°)
In consideration of the pick feed, set a value a little
smaller than the pick feed angle.
8027 Toler-1 Specify the maximum chord error (tolerance) in a 0.000 to 100.000 (mm)
(for M system only) block that includes an inflection point. Set the
tolerance applicable when the applicable block is
developed to fine segments by CAM. (normally
about 10 μm)
When 0.000 is set, the applicable block is linear.
8028 Toler-2 Specify the maximum chord error (tolerance) in a 0.000 to 100.000 (mm)
(for M system only) block that includes no inflection point. Set the
tolerance applicable when the applicable block is
developed to fine segments by CAM. (normally
about 10 μm)
When 0.000 is set, the applicable block is linear.
8029 FairingL Set the length of the block subject to fairing. 0 to 100.000 (mm)
(for M system only) (Valid when "#8033 Fairing ON" is set to 1.)
8030 MINUTE LENGS When the length of one block exceeds the set -1 to 127 (mm)
(for M system only) value, spline interpolation is canceled temporarily 0: 1 (mm)
and linear interpolation is performed. Set a value a
little smaller than one block length of the program.
If - 1 is set, spline interpolation is performed
regardless of block length.

<Fairing>
# Item Contents Setting range (unit)
8033 Fairing ON Set whether to use the fairing function. 0/1
(for M system only) 0: Fairing invalid
1: Fairing valid
Fairing function will be valid during G61.2 modal
regardless of this setting.
8034 AccClamp ON Set the method for clamping the cutting speed. 0/1
(for M system only) 0: Clamp with parameter "#2002 clamp" or the
corner deceleration function.
1: Clamp the cutting speed with acceleration
judgment.
(Valid when "#8033 Fairing ON" is set to 1.)
8036 CordecJudge Change the conditions for judging a corner. 0/1
(for M system only) 0: Judge the corner from the angle of the
neighboring block.
1: Judge the corner from the angle of the
neighboring block, excluding minute blocks.
(Valid when "#8033 Fairing ON" is set to 1.)
8037 CorJudgeL Set the length of the block to be excluded. 0 to 99999.999 (mm)
(for M system only) (Valid when "#8036 CordecJudge" is set to 1.)

III - 6
 2. User Parameters
2.1 Process Parameters

<C-MODAL> (C axis normal line)

# Item Contents Setting range (unit)
8041 C-rot.R This is valid with normal line control type II. 0.000 to 99999.999
Set the length from the center of the normal line (mm)
control axis to the end of the tool. This is used to
calculate the turning speed at the block joint.
8042 C-ins.R This is valid with normal line control type I. 0.000 to 99999.999
Set the radius of the arc to be automatically (mm)
inserted into the corner during normal line control.

# Item Contents Setting range (unit)

8043 Tool HDL FD OFS Set the length from the tool holder to the tool tip. 0.000 to 99999.999
(mm)
8044 UNIT*10 Set the command increment scale. 0 to 10000 (fold)
• The scale is 1 when 0 is set.

<FIXED C.> (Fixed cycle)

# Item Contents Setting range (unit)
8051 G71 THICK Set the amount of cut-in by the rough cutting cycle 0 to 99999.999 (mm)
(G71, G72)
8052 G71 PULL UP Set the amount of pull-up when returning to the 0 to 99999.999 (mm)
cutting start point for the rough cutting cycle (G71.
G72).
8053 G73 U Set the X-axis cutting margin of the forming rough -99999.999 to
cutting cycle (G73). 99999.999 (mm)
8054 G73 W Set the Z-axis cutting margin of the forming rough -99999.999 to
cutting cycle (G73). 99999.999 (mm)
8055 G73 R Set the number of times cutting is performed by the 0 to 99999 (times)
forming rough cutting cycle (G73).
8056 G74 RETRACT Set the amount of retract (amount of cut-up) of the 0 to 999.999 (mm)
push-cut cycle (G74, G75).
8057 G76 LAST-D Set the amount of final cut-in by the compound type 0 to 999.999 (mm)
thread cutting (G76).
8058 G76 TIMES Set the number of times the amount of final cut-in 0 to 99 (times)
cycle (G76 finish margin) is divided in the
compound type thread cutting (G76).
8059 G76 ANGLE Set the angle (thread angle) of the tool nose in the 0 to 99 (°)
compound type thread cutting (G76).

<3-dimensional tool radius compensation>

# Item Contents Setting range (unit)
8071 3-D CMP Set the value of the denominator constants for 0 to 99999.999
(for M system only) 3-dimensional tool radius compensation.
Set the value of p in the following formula.
Vx = i x r/p, Vy = j x r/p, Vz = k x r/p
Vx, Vy, Vz : X, Y, and Z axes or vectors of
horizontal axes
i, j, k : Program command value
r : Offset
p= i2 + j2 + k 2 when the set value is 0.

III - 7
 2. User Parameters
2.1 Process Parameters

<Scaling>
# Item Contents Setting range (unit)
8072 SCALING P Set the scale factor for reduction or magnification 0 to 99.999999
(for M system only) for the machining program for which the G50 or
G51 command is issued.
This parameter is effective when the program
specifies no scale factor.

<Spiral interpolation>
# Item Contents Setting range (unit)
8075 SpiralEndErr Designate the tolerable error range (absolute value) 0 to 99999.999 (mm)
(for M system only) when the end point position commanded with the
command format type 2 spiral interpolation or
conical interpolation command differs from the end
point position obtained from the speed and
increment/decrement amount.

# Item Contents Setting range (unit)

8078 Screen Saver Timer When not using, set to "0". 0

<Deep hole drilling cycle>

# Item Contents Setting range (unit)
8083 G83S modeM Set the M command code for changing to the small 1 to 99999999
(for M system only) diameter deep hole drilling cycle mode.
8084 G83S Clearanse Set the clearance amount for the small diameter 0 to 999.999 (mm)
(for M system only) deep hole drilling cycle (G83).
8085 G83S Forward F Set the feedrate from the R point to the cutting start 0 to 99999 (mm/min)
(for M system only) position in the small diameter deep hole drilling
cycle (G83).
8086 G83S Back F Set the speed for returning from the hole base 0 to 99999 (mm/min)
(for M system only) during the small diameter deep hole drilling cycle
(G83).

III - 8
 2. User Parameters
2.1 Process Parameters

<SSS control>
# Item Contents Setting range (unit)
8090 SSS ON Set whether to validate SSS control with G05 0/1
(for M system only) P10000.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
8091 StdLength Adjust the maximum value of the range for 0 to 100.000 (mm)
(for M system only) recognizing the shape.
To eliminate the effect of steps or errors, etc., set a
large value. To enable sufficient deceleration, set a
small value.
If "0.000" is set, the standard value (1.000mm) will
be applied.
8092 ClampCoeff Adjust the clamp speed at the curved section 1 to 100
(for M system only) configured of fine segments.
Coefficient = setting value
8093 StepLeng Set the width of the step at which the speed is not -1000 to 0.100 (mm)
(for M system only) to be decelerated. (Approximately the same as the
CAM path difference [Tolerance].)
If 0 is set, the standard value (5µm) will be applied.
If a minus value is set, the speed will decelerate at
all minute steps.
8094 DccWaitAdd Set the time to wait for deceleration when the 0 to 100 (ms)
(for M system only) speed FB does not drop to the clamp speed.

<Coord rotation>
# Item Contents Setting range (unit)
8621 Coord rot plane (H) This sets the plane, center coordinates, vector Axis name
components and angle.
Plane (horizontal axis):
8622 Coord rot plane (V) This sets the name of the 1st axis when measuring
the rotation.
When not set, the name will be the X axis.
8623 Coord rot centr (H) Plane (vertical axis): -999999.999 to
This sets the name of the 2nd axis when 999999.999 (mm)
measuring the rotation.
8624 Coord rot centr (V) When not set, the name will be the Y axis.

Center
8625 Coord rot vctr (H) Plane (vertical)
coordi-
nates Vector (vertical)
Angle

8626 Coord rot vctr (V) Center coordi-

nates (vertical) Vector (horizontal)

M Plane (horizontal)
8627 Coord rot angle -360.000 to 360.000
Center coordinates (°)
(horizontal)

(Note) The angle is automatically calculated and

enumerated at vector component setting,
but direct setting of the angle is possible.
When directly setting the angle, "0" appears
in both the horizontal axis and vertical axis
of the vector components.

III - 9
 2. User Parameters
2.1 Process Parameters

<TLM>
# Item Contents Setting range (unit)
8701 Tool length This sets the length to the touch tool tip. ±99999.999 (mm)
8702 Tool Dia This sets the diameter of the sphere at the touch ±99999.999 (mm)
tool tip.
8703 OFFSET X This sets the deviation amount (X direction) from ±99999.999 (mm)
the touch tool center to the spindle center.
8704 OFFSET Y This sets the deviation amount (Y direction) from ±99999.999 (mm)
the touch tool center to the spindle center.
8705 RETURN This sets the one-time return distance for 0 to 99999.999 (mm)
contacting again.
8706 FEED This sets the feedrate when contacting again. 1 to 60000 (mm/min)
8707 Skip past amout (H) This sets the difference (horizontal axis direction) of ±99999.999 (mm)
the skip read value and actual skip position.
8708 Skip past amout (V) This sets the difference (vertical axis direction) of ±99999.999 (mm)
the skip read value and actual skip position.
8709 EXT work sign rvs This is set when using the external workpiece 0/1
coordinate system with Z shift.
0: External workpiece offset (Z shift) no sign
reversal (Conventional)
1: External workpiece offset (Z shift) sign reversal
8710 EXT work ofs invld This sets whether external workpiece offset 0/1
subtraction is valid when setting the workpiece
coordinate offset.
0: Do not subtract external workpiece offset.
(Conventional)
1: Subtract the external workpiece offset.
8711 TLM L meas axis This designates the tool length measurement axis. Axis name (Note 1)
This sets the #1022 axname2 axis name.
8712 TLM D meas axis This designates the tool diameter measurement Axis name (Note 2)
axis.
This sets the #1022 axname2 axis name.

(Note 1) If the axis name is illegal or not set, the 3rd axis name will be set as a default.
(Note 2) If the axis name is illegal or not set, the 1st axis name will be set as a default.

III - 10
 2. User Parameters
2.1 Process Parameters

<Surface speed control>

# Item Contents Setting range (unit)
19425 ManualB Std R1 This sets a radius used as standard for the rotary 0 to 99999.999 (mm)
axis speed.
19426 ManualB Std F1 This sets the rotary axis speed for surface speed 1 to 1000000 (°/min)
control standard radius 1 (ManualB Std R1).
19427 ManualB Std R2 This sets a radius used as standard for the rotary 0 to 99999.999 (mm)
axis speed.
When the same value is set as "#19425 ManualB
Std R1", the surface speed control standard speed
1 (ManualB Std F1) will be selected as the rotary
axis speed if the radius is less than that value. The
surface speed control standard speed 2 (ManualB
Std F2) is selected if larger than the set value.
19428 ManualB Std F2 This sets the rotary axis speed for surface speed 1 to 1000000 (°/min)
control standard radius 2 (ManualB Std R2).

(Note) The relation of the parameter settings is as follows.

When #19425 setting > #19427 setting : #19425 setting is used as surface speed control standard
radius 2 (ManualB Std R2). Similarly, #19427 setting is used as surface speed control standard radius
1 (ManualB Std R1).
When #19426 setting > #19428 setting : #19426 setting is used as surface speed control standard
speed 2 (ManualB Std F2). Similarly, #19428 setting is used as surface speed control standard speed
1 (ManualB Std F1).

III - 11
 2. User Parameters
2.2 Control Parameters

2.2 Control Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)
1103 T_life Validate life Select the usage of the tool life management 0/1
management function.
0: Do not manage tool life.
1: Execute tool life management function
control.
1104 T_Com2 Tool Select the command method for when #1103 T_Life 0/1
command is set to 1.
method 2 0: Handle the program tool command as the
group No.
1: Handle the program tool command as the tool
No.
1105 T_Sel2 Tool selection Select the tool selection method for when #1103 0/1
method 2 T_Life is set to 1.
0: Select in order of registered No. from the
tools used in the same group.
1: Select the tool with the longest remaining life
from tools used in the same group and the
unused tools.
1106 Tcount Life Specify the function when address N is omitted 0: Time specified
(For L management when inputting data (G10 L3 command) for tool life input
system count management function ll. 1: No. of times
only) specified input

III - 12
2. User Parameters
2.2 Control Parameters

# Item Contents Setting range (unit)

8101 MACRO SINGLE Select the control of the blocks where the user 0/1
macro command continues.
0: Do not stop while macro block continues.
1: Stop every block during signal block
operation.
8102 COLL. ALM OFF Select the interference (bite) control to the 0/1
workpiece from the tool diameter during tool radius
compensation and nose R compensation.
0: An alarm is output and operation stops when
an interference is judged.
1: Changes the path to avoid interference.
8103 COLL. CHK OFF Select the interference (bite) control to the 0/1
workpiece from the tool diameter during tool radius
compensation and nose R compensation.
0: Performs interference check.
1: Does not perform interference check.
8105 EDIT LOCK B Select the edit lock for program Nos. 8000 to 9999 0/1
in the memory.
0: Program can be edited.
1: Editing of above program is prohibited. The
file cannot be opened.
8106 G46 NO REV-ERR Select the control for the compensation direction 0/1
(For L system only) reversal in G46 (nose R compensation).
0: An alarm is output and operation stops when
the compensation direction is reversed (G41
→ G42’ G42 → G41).
1: An alarm does not occur when the
compensation direction is reversed’ and the
current compensation direction is maintained.
8107 R COMPENSATION 0: In arc cutting mode, the machine moves to 0/1
the inside because of a delay in servo
response to a command, making the arc
smaller than the command value.
1: In arc cutting mode, the machine
compensates the movement to the inside
because of a delay in servo response to a
command
8108 R COMP Select Select whether to perform arc radius error 0/1
compensation over all axes or axis by axis.
0: Perform compensation over all axes.
1: Perform compensation over axis by axis.
(Note) This parameter is effective only when
“#8107 R COMPENSATION” is “1”.
8109 HOST LINK Select whether to enable computer link B instead of 0/1
the RS-232C port.
0: Disable computer link B to enable normal
RS-232C communication.
1: Enable computer link B to disable normal
RS-232C communication.
8110 G71/G72 POCKET Set the pocket machining if there is a dimple 0/1
(pocket) in the rough cutting cycle (G71, G72)
finishing program.
0: Pocket machining OFF
1: Pocket machining ON

III - 13
2. User Parameters
2.2 Control Parameters

# Item Contents Setting range (unit)

8111 Milling Radius Select the diameter and radius of the linear axis for 0/1
milling (cylindrical/pole coordinate) interpolation.
0: All axes radius command
1: Each axis setting (follows “#1019 dia”)
(Note) This parameter is valid only in the milling
(cylindrical/pole coordinate) interpolation
mode.
8112 DECIMAL PNT-P 0: The decimal point command for G04 address 0/1
P is invalidated.
1: The decimal point command for G04 address
P is validated.
8113 Milling Init G16 Designate which plane to use for milling machining 0: Plane other than
after the power is turned ON or reset. G16
#8113 #8114 Plane 1: Select G16 plane
0 0 G17 plane
0 1 G19 plane
1 0
G16 plane
8114 Milling Init G19 1 1 0: Plane other than
(Note) This parameter is valid for the G code G19
system 2, 3 (“#1037 cmdtyp”=3, 4). 1: Select G19 plane

8116 Coord rot para invd Select the validity of coordinate rotation by the 0/1
parameters.
0: Valid
1: Invalid
8117 OFS Diam DESIGN Select whether tool radius compensation amount is 0/1
designated with tool radius or tool diameter.
0: Tool radius compensation amount
1: Tool diameter compensation amount
8145 Validate F1 digit Specify whether to execute the F command with a 0/1
1-digit code command or with a direct numerical
command.
0: Direct numerical command (command
feedrate during feed per minute or rotation)
1: 1-digit code command (feedrate specified
with #1185 spd_F1 - #1189 F5)

III - 14
 2. User Parameters
2.3 Axis Parameters

2.3 Axis Parameters

Set up the parameter required for each axis.

# Item Contents Setting range (unit)

8201 AX. RELEASE Select the function to remove the control axis from 0/1
the control target.
0: Control as normal.
1: Remove from control target.
8202 OT-CHECK OFF Select the stored stroke limit II function set in #8204 0/1
and #8205.
0: Valid
1: Invalid
8203 OT-CHECK-CANCEL When the simple absolute position method (#2049 0/1
type is 9) is selected, the stored stroke limits I, II (or
IIB) and IB will be invalid until the first reference
position return is executed after the power is turned
ON.
0: Valid (according to #8202)
1: Temporary cancel
(Note) "#8203 OT-CHECK-CANCEL" affects all the
stored stroke limits.
8204 OT-CHECK-N This sets the coordinates of the (-) direction in the ±99999.999 (mm)
moveable range of the stored stroke limit II or the
lower limit coordinates of the prohibited range of
stored stroke limit IIB.
If the sign and value are the same as #8205, the
stored stroke limit II (or IIB) will be invalid.
If the stored stroke limit IIB function is selected, the
prohibited range will be between two points even
when #8204 and #8205 are set in reverse.
When II is selected, the entire range will be
prohibited if #8204 and #8205 are set in reverse.
8205 OT-CHECK-P This sets the coordinates of the (+) direction in the ±99999.999 (mm)
moveable range of the stored stroke limit II or the
upper limit coordinates of the prohibited range of
stored stroke limit IIB.
8206 TOOL CHG. P Set the coordinates of the tool change position for ±99999.999 (mm)
G30. n (tool change position return).
Set with coordinates in the basic machine
coordinate system.
8207 G76/87 IGNR Select the shift operation at G76 (fine boring) and 0/1
(For M system only) G87 (back boring).
0: Shift effective
1: No shift
8208 G76/87 (-) Specifies the shift direction at G76 and G87. 0/1
(For M system only) 0: Shift to (+) direction
1: Shift to (-) direction
8209 G60 SHIFT Set the last positioning direction and distance for a ±99999.999 (mm)
(For M system only) G60 (unidirectional positioning) command.
8210 OT INSIDE The stored stoke limit function to be set in #8204 0/1
and #8205 prevents the machine from moving to
the inside or outside of the specified range.
0: Inhibits outside area
(Select stored stroke limit II.)
1: Inhibits inside area
(Select stored stroke limit II B.)

III - 15
2. User Parameters
2.3 Axis Parameters

# Item Contents Setting range (unit)

8211 MIRR. IMAGE Enable or disable the parameter mirror image 0/1
function.
0: Disable
1: Enable
8213 Rotation axis type This designates the rotation type (short-cut 0: Short-cut invalid
(PR) valid/invalid) or linear type (workpiece coordinate 1: Short-cut valid
linear type/all coordinate linear type). 2: Workpiece
This parameter is valid only when "#1017 rot" is set coordinate linear
to 1. (Note) type
3: All coordinate
linear type
8215 TLM standard length This sets the TLM standard length. -99999.999 to
TLM standard length is the distance from a tool 99999.999 (mm)
replacement point (reference position) to the
measurement basic point (surface) which is used to
measure the tool length.
8216 Type in G28 return Define the performance after establishing the 0/1
reference position in automatic reference position
return command when the reference position has
not been established with the distance-coded
reference position detection.
0: Move to reference position
1: Won't move to reference position
8217 Check start point Set up a drawing start position in graphic check of -99999.999 to
each axis. 99999.999 (mm)

III - 16
 2. User Parameters
2.3 Axis Parameters

(Note) The movement method is as follows by the specified rotation axis type.
Setting value 0 1 2 3
Workpiece Display range: 0° to 359.999° Display range: 0° to ±99999.999°
coordinate value
Machine Display range: 0° to 359.999° Display range: 0°
coordinate to ±99999.999°
value/relative
position
ABS command The incremental Moves with a In the same manner as the normal
amount from the short-cut to the linear axis, moves according to the
end point to the end point. sign by the amount obtained by
current position subtracting the current position from
is divided by the end point.
360, and the axis
moves by the
remainder
amount
according to the
sign.
INC command Moves in the direction of the commanded sign by the commanded
incremental amount starting at the current position.
Reference The movement to the middle point applies to the ABS command or the INC
position return command.
Returns with movement within 360 degrees from the Moves and
middle point to reference position. returns in the
reference
position direction
for the difference
from the current
position to the
reference
position.

III - 17
 2. User Parameters
2.4 Operation Parameters

2.4 Operation Parameters

# Item Contents Setting range (unit)

8901 Counter type 1 This sets the type of counter displayed at the upper 0 to 255
left of the AUTO/MDI display on the Monitor screen. 1: Current position
2: Work coordinate
position
3: Machine position
8902 Counter type 2 This sets the type of counter displayed at the lower
left of the AUTO/MDI display on the Monitor screen. 4: Program position
8: Remain
command
9: Manual interrupt
8903 Counter type 3 This sets the type of counter displayed at the upper amount
right of the AUTO/MDI display on the Monitor
10: Next command
screen.
11: Restart position
12: Remain distance
8904 Counter type 4 This sets the type of counter displayed at the lower 16: Tip work
right of the AUTO/MDI display on the Monitor coordinate
screen. position
18: Tool axis
movement
8905 Counter type 5 This sets the type of counter displayed at the left of
19: Tip machine
the Manual display on the Monitor screen.
position
20: Relative position

8906 Counter type 6 This sets the type of counter displayed at the right
of the Manual display on the Monitor screen.

8910 Edit undo This sets whether to validate the Undo function 0/1
during program edit on the Monitor screen or Edit
screen.
0: Invalid
1: Valid

III - 18
2. User Parameters
2.4 Operation Parameters

# Item Contents Setting range (unit)

8914 Auto Top search This sets the operation method for restart search 0/1
type 2.
0: It is necessary to set the top search position
arbitrarily.
1: The restart search is executed from O No.
that is designated as head.
8915 Auto backup day 1 When the NC power is ON after the designated -1 to 31
date was passed over, the automatic backup is (-1 can be set for "Auto
8916 Auto backup day 2 executed. backup day 1" only.)
When -1 is set to "Auto backup day 1", the
8917 Auto backup day 3 automatic backup is executed every turning NC
power ON.
8918 Auto backup day 4 When 0 is set to all on "Auto backup day 1" to "4",
the automatic backup is not executed. It is possible
to specify the designated date up to 4 days for a
month.
8919 Auto backup device This sets the automatic backup target device. 0: DS
1: HD
2: Memory card
8920 3D tool ofs select This designates the method to calculate the drawing 0 to 3
position when drawing a solid.
With 3D drawing, the drawing position (tool tip
position) is calculated with the method designated
with this parameter, and the image is drawn.
0: Machine position ± tool shape setting window
data
1: Machine position ± tool compensation amount
2: Machine position ± tool shape setting window
data
3: Machine position ± tool shape setting window
data
8921 Mass Edit select This sets the editing mode for the machining 0/1
programs saved in HD, FD, and memory card.
0: Regular editing mode
If the program size is 1.0MB (When #8910
Edit Undo is invalid, 2.0MB) or more,
mass-editing will be applied.
1: Mass-editing mode
8922 T-reg-no dup check Set whether to validate the duplication check in 0/1
registering tools to magazine pots, and in setting
tool Nos. for spindle/standby.
0: Duplication check valid
1: Duplication check invalid

III - 19
 2. User Parameters
2.5 Barrier Data

2.5 Barrier Data (For L system only)

# Item Contents Setting range (unit)

8300 P0 Set the reference X-coordinates of the chuck and ±99999.999 (mm)
the tail stock barrier.
Set the center coordinate (radius value) of
workpiece by the basic machine coordinate
system.
8301 P1 Set the area of the chuck and tail stock barrier. ±99999.999 (mm)
8302 P2 Set the coordinate from the center of workpiece for
8303 P3 X-axis. (radius value)
8304 P4 Set the coordinate value by basic machine
8305 P5 coordinate system for Z-axis.
8306 P6
8311 P7 Set the area of the left spindle section. ±99999.999 (mm)
• X axis: Set the coordinate from the workpiece
8312 P8 center (P0). (radius value)
• Z axis: Set the coordinates in the basic
machine coordinate system.
8313 P9 Set the area of the right spindle section. ±99999.999 (mm)
• X axis: Set the coordinate from the workpiece
8314 P10 center (P0). (radius value)
• Z axis: Set the coordinates in the basic
machine coordinate system.
8310 Barrier ON Select the validity of the chuck and tailstock barrier. 0/1
0: Invalid (Setting from special display unit valid)
1: Valid
8315 Barrier Type (L) Set the shape of the left chuck and tailstock barrier. 0/1/2
0: No area
1: Chuck
2: Tailstock
8316 Barrier Type (R) Set the shape of the right chuck and tailstock 0/1/2
barrier.
0: No area
1: Chuck
2: Tailstock
8317 ELIV. AX. Name When the right chuck and tailstock barrier is A/B/.. : (axis
movable, set the name of the delivery axis. address)
When using the multi-part system method and the 1A/1B/..
delivery axis is an axis in the other part system, 2A/2B/.. : (part system
designate the axis including the part system as 1A, designation)
1B or 2A, 2B. If the part system is not designated 0 : cancel
as A and B, the set part system will be used.
8318 Stock Angle (L) Set the angle for the left tailstock end section. 0 to 180 (°)
The angle will be interpreted as 90° if there is no 0: 90° default
setting (when 0 is set).
8319 Stock Angle (R) Set the angle for the right tailstock end section. 0 to 180 (°)
The angle will be interpreted as 90° if there is no 0: 90° default
setting (when 0 is set).

III - 20
 2. User Parameters
2.6 I/O Parameters

2.6 I/O Parameters

There are basically two types of input/output parameters which must be set when inputting‚ outputting or
referring to data‚ or when performing tape operation.

9001 to 9018 parameters:

Set which channel to connect which device to for each I/O application.

9101 to 9528 parameters:

Set the transmission speed, etc., for each input/output device.
Up to five types of input/output device parameters can be set in device 0 to 4.

<I/O> # <PORT No.> # <DEV. No.> <DEV. NAME>

Specify the board No. to which the serial Set the input/output device No. for
input/output device is connected. each application.
• Set "1" to use ch1. The device Nos. are 0 to 4 and
• Set "2" to use ch2. correspond to the input/output
device parameters.
The device name set in the
input/output device parameter is
also displayed for identification.
DATA IN 9001 Specify the port for inputting the data 9002 Specify the device No. that inputs
such as machine program and the data.
parameters.
DATA OUT 9003 Specify the port for outputting the data 9004 Specify the device No. that outputs
such as machine program and the data.
parameters.
TAPE MODE 9005 Specify the input port for running with 9006 Specify the device No. to be run
the tape mode. with the tape mode.
MACRO PRINT 9007 Specify the output port for the user 9008 Specify the device No. for the
macro DPRINT command. DPRINT command.
PLC IN/OUT 9009 Specify the port for inputting/outputting 9010 Specify the device No. for the PLC
various data with PLC. input/output.
REMOTE PRG 9011 Specify the port for inputting remote 9012 Specify the device No. used to
IN programs. input remote programs.
EXT UNIT 9013 Specify the port for communication with 9014 Specify the unit No. used for
an external unit. communication with an external
unit
HANDY 9017 Specify the port for communication with 9018 Specify the device No. used for
TERMINAL a handy terminal. communication with a handy
terminal.

III - 21
2. User Parameters
2.6 I/O Parameters

# Item Contents Setting range (unit)

9101 DEV0 Set the device name corresponding to the device Use alphabet
DEVICE NAME No. characters‚ numerals
Set a simple name for quick identification. and symbols to set a
name within 3
characters.
9102 DEV0 Set the serial communication speed. 0: 19200 (bps)
BAUD RATE 1: 9600
2: 4800
3: 2400
4: 1200
5: 600
6: 300
7: 110
9103 DEV0 Set the stop bit length used in the start-stop 1: 1 (bit)
STOP BIT system. 2: 1.5
3: 2
9104 DEV0 Specify whether to add the parity check bit to the 0: Parity bit not added
PARITY CHECK data during communication. 1: Parity bit added
9105 DEV0 Specify the odd or even parity when it is added to 0: Odd parity
EVEN PARITY the data. 1: Even parity
9106 DEV0 Set the length of the data bit. 0: 5 (bit)
CHR. LENGTH 1: 6
2: 7
3: 8
9107 DEV0 The code to terminate data reading can be 0 and 3: EOR
TERMINATR TYP selected. 1 and 2: EOB or EOR
9108 DEV0 Specify the transmission control method. 1: RTS/CTS method
HAND SHAKE The method will be no procedure if a value except 1 2: No procedure (No
to 3 is set. handshaking)
3: DC code method
9109 DEV0 Specify the DC code when the DC code method is 0: No parity to DC
DC CODE PRTY selected. code (DC3 = 13H)
1: DC code with parity
(DC3 = 93H)
9111 DEV0 Specify the DC code handling when outputting data DC2 / DC4
DC2/4 OUTPUT to the output device. 0: None / None
1: Yes / None
2: None / Yes
3: Yes / Yes
9112 DEV0 Specify whether to insert the (CR) code just before 0: Do not add
CR OUTPUT the EOB (L/F) code during output. 1: Add
9113 DEV0 In data output mode, select the ISO or EIA code for 0: ISO code output
EIA OUTPUT data output. 1: EIA code output
In data input mode, the ISO and EIA codes are
identified automatically.
9114 DEV0 Specify the length of the tape feed to be output at 0 to 999 (characters)
FEED CHR. the start and end of the data during tape output.

III - 22
2. User Parameters
2.6 I/O Parameters

# Item Contents Setting range (unit)

9115 DEV0 Specify whether to check the parity of the No. of 0: Do not perform
PARITY V characters in block during data input. parity V check
The No. of characters is factory-set so that the 1: Perform parity V
check is valid at all times. check
9116 DEV0 Set the time out time to detect an interruption in 0 to 30 (s)
TIME-OUT (sec) communication.
Time out check will not be executed when set to 0
to 30 seconds.
9117 DEV0 Specify whether to check the DR data at the data 0: DR check valid
DR OFF input/output. 1: DR check invalid
9118 DEV0 0: Output in ISO/EIA code (Depends on whether 0/1
DATA ASCII #9113, #9213, #9313, #9413, or #9513 EIA
output parameter is set up)
1: Output in ASC II code
9119 DEV0 Specify the mode for input (collation). 0/1
INPUT TYPE 0: Standard input (Data from the very first EOB is
handled as significant information.)
1: EOBs following the first EOB of the input data
are skipped until data other than EOB is input.
DEV0 When output with EIA code‚ data can be output 0 to FF (hexadecimal)
9121 EIA CODE [ using the alternate code in which the special ISO
9122 ] code not included in EIA is specified.
9123 # Specify the codes which do not duplicate the
9124 ∗ existing EIA codes by hexadecimal for respective
9125 = special codes.
9126 :
9127 $
9128 !

9201 to Set the same settings for device 1.

9301 to Set the same settings for device 2.
9401 to Set the same settings for device 3.
9501 to Set the same settings for device 4.

III - 23
 2. User Parameters
2.7 Ethernet Parameters

2.7 Ethernet Parameters

Set the parameters related to Ethernet input/output.
After setting up the parameter (PR) listed in the table, turn OFF the NC power. To validate the parameter, turn
ON the power again.

9701 to 9706 parameters:

When several TCP/IP drivers are installed and the IP address is set manually ("#9701 IP address
automatic setting" is set to 0), the same setting will be made for all parameters.

9711 to 9781 parameters:

Set the server information required for using the Ethernet function.
Server information for up to four units can be set.

# Item Contents Setting range (unit)

9701 IP addr auto set The IP address is automatically assigned from the 0: Manual setting
(PR) DHCP server. 1: Automatic setting
(Note) When this setting is validated, the following
parameters "#9702 IP address", "#9703
Sub-net address" and "#9704 Gateway
setting" will be invalid.
9702 IP address Set the IP address. 15 characters or less
(PR) This sets the IP address of the TCP/IP assigned to Dot notation numeric
the NC (Windows) computer. Contact the network value train
controller for the address to be set.
(Note) This setting is valid only for 700 Series.
9703 Subnet mask This sets the subnet mask of the TCP/IP assigned 15 characters or less
(PR) to the NC (Windows) computer. Contact the Dot notation numeric
network controller for the subnet mask to be set. value train
(Note) This setting is valid only for 700 Series.
9704 Gateway This sets the gateway of the TCP/IP assigned to the 15 characters or less
(PR) NC (Windows) computer. Dot notation numeric
(Note) This setting is valid only for 700 Series. value train
9705 Timeout This sets the timeout time (s) for when the 10 to 99 (s)
communication is not completed correctly, or when (Standard: 30)
there is no communication response.
9706 Host No. This selects the number of the host to be used from 1 to 4 : Host No.
host 1 to host 4.
9711 Host1 host name This sets the host computer name. 15 characters
This parameter allows the NC to easily recognize (alphanumeric) or less
the host computer on the network. Set the host
computer's name (name registered in
C:\windows\hosts) or the IP address.
<Setting example>
For host name : Mspc160
For IP address : 150.40.0.111
(Note) Set the host computer's TCP/IP address if
communication is not carried out correctly.

9712 Host1 user name This sets the user name when logging into the host 15 characters
computer. (alphanumeric) or less
9713 Host1 password This sets the password when logging into the host 15 characters
computer. (alphanumeric) or less
9714 Host1 directory This sets the directory name of the host computer. 31 characters
Refer to (Note 4) for details. (alphanumeric) or less

III - 24
 2. User Parameters
2.7 Ethernet Parameters

# Item Contents Setting range (unit)

9715 Host1 host type This sets the type of host computer. 0: UNIX/PC automatic
(Note) When "0" is set, the settings for the judgment
following parameters will be invalid. 1: UNIX
• Wrd pos: name 2: PC (DOS)
• Wrd pos: size
• Wrd pos: Dir
• Wrd pos: cmnt
• Wrd num: cmnt
9716 Host 1 This sets the file name display position (nth word 0 to 100
Wrd pos: name from left) of the list displayed when the ftp 0: Default value
command "dir" is executed.
(Note) One word designates a character string
divided by one or more spaces.
9717 Host 1 This sets the size display position (nth word from 0 to 100
Wrd pos: size left) of the list displayed when the ftp command "dir" 0: Default value
is executed.
(Note) One word designates a character string
divided by one or more spaces.
9718 Host 1 This sets the <DIR> display position (nth word from 0 to 100
Wrd pos: Dir left) of the list displayed when the ftp command "dir" 0: Default value
is executed.
(Note) One word designates a character string
divided by one or more spaces.
9719 Host 1 This sets the comment (date, time, etc.) display 0 to 100
Wrd pos: cmnt position (nth word from left) of the list displayed 0: Default value
when the ftp command "dir" is executed.
(Note) One word designates a character string
divided by one or more spaces.
9720 Host 1 This sets the number of words to be displayed as a 0 to 100
Wrd num: cmnt comment. 0: Default value
(Note) One word designates a character string
divided by one or more spaces.
9721 Host 1 This sets whether to display the total number of 0: Display
no total siz characters registered in the machining programs of 1: Do not display
host1 when displaying the file list.
If there are many files in the directory to be referred
to, the list can be updated quickly by setting "1".

9731 to Set the same settings for host 2.

9751 to Set the same settings for host 3.
9771 to Set the same settings for host 4.

(Note 1) The user name and password are required when logging in.
(Note 2) It is necessary to enable reading/writing when exchanging files.
(Note 3) With the Personal WEB Server and Windows NT 4.0 fpt Server, the file list format can be selected
from DOS or UNIX.
(Note 4) The directory released to the client (NC unit) with the host computer's server is handled as the root
directory by the NC unit.

III - 25
 2. User Parameters
2.8 Computer Link Parameters

2.8 Computer Link Parameters

# Item Contents Setting range (unit)
9601 BAUD RATE Specify the rate at which data is transferred. 0: 19200 (bps)
1: 9600
2: 4800
3: 2400
4: 1200
5: 600
6: 300
7: 110
8: 38400
9602 STOP BIT Specify stop bit length used in start-stop mode. 1: 1
See "PARITY EFFECTIVE" in #9603. The 2: 1.5
number of characters is adjusted in output mode so 3: 2
that no problems occur if the parity check is
enabled.

9603 PARITY EFFECTIVE This parameter is set when using a parity bit 0: No parity bit used in
separately from the data bit. I/O mode
1 character
ON
1: Parity bit used in I/O
OFF b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 bn mode

Start bit Data bit Parity bit Stop bit

Set this to match the input/output device

specifications.
9604 EVEN PARITY Specify whether even or odd parity is used when 0: Odd parity
parity is used. This parameter is ignored when no 1: Even parity
parity is used.
9605 CHR. LENGTH Specify data bit length. 0: 5
See "PARITY EFFECTIVE" in #9603. 1: 6
2: 7 (NC connection not
supported)
3: 8
9606 HAND SHAKE Select RS-232C transmission control mode. 0: No control
"3" (DC control mode) should be set for computer 1: RTS/CTS method
link B. 2: No handshaking
3: DC control mode
9607 TIME-OUT SET Specify time-out time at which an interruption of 0 to 999 (1/10s)
data transfer during data input/output should be
detected.
If 0 is set, time infinity is specified.
9608 DATA CODE Specify the code to be used. 0: ASCII code
See "PARITY EFFECTIVE" in #9603. 1: ISO code
9609 LINK PARAM. 1 Bit 1: DC1 output after NAK or SYN 0: Don't output the
Specify whether to output the DC1 code after DC1 code.
the NAK or SYN code is output. 1: Output the DC1
code.
Bit 7: Enable/disable resetting 0: Enable resetting.
Specify whether to enable resetting in the 1: Disable resetting.
computer link.

III - 26
2. User Parameters
2.8 Computer Link Parameters

# Item Contents Setting range (unit)

9610 LINK PARAM. 2 Bit 2: Specify the control code parity (even parity 0: No control code
for the control code). parity added
Set the parity in accordance with the I/O device 1: Control code parity
specifications.
added
Bit 3: Parity V 0: Disable
Specify whether to enable checking of parity 1: Enable
V in one block in data input mode.
9611 LINK PARAM. 3 Not used
9612 LINK PARAM. 4 Not used
9613 LINK PARAM. 5 Not used
9614 START CODE Specify the code by which file data transfer begins 0: DC1 (11H)
at first. 1: BEL (07H)
This parameter is used for a specific user, and set 0
in this parameter for normal operation.
9615 CTRL. CODE OUT Bit 0: NAK output 0: Do not output the
Specify whether to send the NAK code to the NAK code.
host if a communication error occurs in 1: Output the NAK
computer link B. code.
Bit 1: SYN output 0: Do not output the
Specify whether to send the SYN code to the SYN code.
host if NC resetting or an emergency stop 1: Output the SYN
occurs in computer link B.
code.
Bit 3: DC3 output 0: Do not output the
Specify whether to send the DC3 code to the DC3 code.
host when communication ends in computer link 1: Output the DC3
B.
code.
9616 CTRL. INTERVAL Not used
9617 WAIT TIME Not used
9618 PACKET LENGTH Not used
9619 BUFFER SIZE Not used
9620 START SIZE Not used
9621 DC1 OUT SIZE Not used
9622 POLLING TIMER Not used
9623 TRANS. WAIT TMR Not used
9624 RETRY COUNTER Not used

III - 27
 2. User Parameters
2.9 Subprogram Storage Destination Parameters

2.9 Subprogram Storage Destination Parameters

# Item Contents Setting range (unit)
8880 Subpro stor D0: dev If D1 to D4 is designated when calling the Device name (Note 3)
subprogram, the subprogram to be called will be
searched from the storage destination (device and
8881 Subpro stor D0: dir directory) designated with this parameter. Directory 48
(Example) characters
The following will be searched:
8882 Subpro stor D1: dev M98 P (program No.), D0 Device name (Note 3)
Device : "8880 Subpro stor D0:dev" device
Directory : "8881 Subpro stor D0:dir" directory
8883 Subpro stor D1: dir (Note 1) If the called subprogram is not found in Directory 48
the designated storage destination, a characters
program error will occur.
8884 Subpro stor D2: dev (Note 2) If D0 to D4 is not designated when the Device name (Note 3)
subprogram is called, the subprogram
will be searched from the memory.
(Note 3) The following values are set in the device
8885 Subpro stor D2: dir Directory 48
name.
characters
Setting value Display name
8886 Subpro stor D3: dev M Memory Device name (Note 3)
G HD
F FD
8887 Subpro stor D3: dir Directory 48
R Memory card characters
D Data server
8888 Subpro stor D4: dev E Ethernet Device name (Note 3)

8889 Subpro stor D4: dir Directory 48

characters

III - 28
 2. User Parameters
2.10 Anshin-net Parameter 1

2.10 Anshin-net Parameter 1

# Item Details Setting range (unit)
10801 Notice tel num 1 Set the call-back telephone No. (1) used for Within 28 characters
one-touch call and operator notification.
Enter from the area code for domestic calls, and
from the communication company No. for
international calls.
Hyphens "-" can be used as a delimiting
character.
10802 Comment 1 Set a comment, such as the party's name, for the Within 20
notification party telephone number 1. alphanumerical
characters (excluding
spaces)
10803 Notice tel num 2 Set the call-back telephone No. (2) used for Within 28 characters
one-touch call and operator notification.
Enter from the area code for domestic calls, and
from the communication company No. for
international calls.
Hyphens "-" can be used as a delimiting
character.
10804 Comment 2 Set a comment, such as the party's name, for the Within 20
notification party telephone number 2. alphanumerical
characters (excluding
spaces)
10805 Notice tel num 3 Set the call-back telephone No. (3) used for Within 28 characters
one-touch call and operator notification.
Enter from the area code for domestic calls, and
from the communication company No. for
international calls.
Hyphens "-" can be used as a delimiting
character.
10806 Comment 3 Set a comment, such as the party's name, for the Within 20
notification party telephone number 3. alphanumerical
characters (excluding
spaces)
10807 Password Set the password for sharing of machining data 4 characters
(one-byte alphanumeric
characters, without
space)
10808 Customer number Set the user number for sharing of machining Within 8 characters
data. (one-byte alphanumeric
characters, without
space)
10812 Anshin-net valid Set valid/invalid of the Anshin-net function. 0: Invalid
1: Valid

2.11 Machine Tool Builder Network System (MTB-net) Parameter 1

# Item Details Setting range (unit)
10813 MTBnet enable Set valid/invalid for the machine tool builder 0: Valid
network functions. 1: Invalid
Standard setting: 0
(Note) Other than 0/1 is
invalid.

III - 29
 3. Setting the Machine Parameters

3. Setting the Machine Parameters

A password must be set before the machine parameters can be set.

Machine parameter password setting method

(1) Press the function key Mainte. The menu for the maintenance related
screen will appear.

(2) Press the menu Param. The parameter menu will appear.

(3) Press the machine parameter selection A message prompting input of the password
menu. will appear.
(Example) Menu Basesys param If the password has been input once after
the power was turned ON, the cursor will
appear at the Machine Parameter screen.

(4) Set the password and press the INPUT The cursor will appear at the Machine
key. Parameter screen, and the machine
parameters can be set.
MPARA INPUT

(Note 1) Refer to the section "4. Base Specification Parameters" and following for details on the
machine parameters.
(Note 2) Always turn the power OFF after setting the machine parameters.

III - 30
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

4. Base Specifications Parameters

Base specification parameter is the generic term for the following three parameters.
In this Manual, the parameters are explained in order of number.

Base system parameters Base axis specification parameters Base common parameters
#1001-#1006, #1025-#1037 #1010-#1024, #1061-#1072 #1038-#1059, #1077-#1084
#1073-#1076, #1085-#1086 #1087-#1108, #1112-#1149
#1109-#1111, #1151 #1153-#1168, #1217-#1348
#1169-#1216, #1501-#1574 #1801-#1827, #1901-#1911
#1590-#1593, #12001-#12012 #1925-#1935, #11001-#11012

After setting up the parameter (PR) listed in the table, turn OFF the NC power. To validate the parameter, turn
ON the power again.

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1001 SYS_ON System Specify the existence of the 1st system‚ 2nd system 0: Not used
(PR) validation and PLC axis with 1 or 0. 1: Used
setup
1002 axisno Number of Set No. of axes in each system and the No. of PLC 0 to 16
(PR) axes axes.
A total of 16 axes can be set.
Part system 1 : 1 to 8
Part system 2 to 4 : 0 to 8
PLC axis : 0 to 2
1003 iunit Input setup Specify the input setting value for each system and B : 1 µm
(PR) unit the PLC axis. The parameter units will follow this C : 0.1 µm
specification. D : 0.01 µm (10nm)
E : 0.001 µm (1nm)
1004 ctrl_unit Control Specify the control unit for each part system and B: 1 µm
(PR) unit PLC axis. C : 0.1 µm
Set the unit for the NC internal position data, data D : 0.01 µm (10nm)
communciated between the NC and drive unit, and E : 0.001 µm (1nm)
the servo movement data. Some parameter units,
such as the pitch error and backlash, follow this
specification.
1005 plcunit PLC unit Specify the PLC interface setting and display unit. B: 1 µm
(PR) The PLC interface setting and display unit follow C : 0.1 µm
this specification. Note that the PLC axis follows D : 0.01 µm (10nm)
#1003 iunit. E : 0.001 µm (1nm)
1006 mcmpunit Machine Specify the machine error compensation setting and B: 1 µm
(PR) error display unit. C : 0.1 µm
compensa- The parameters related to machine error D : 0.01 µm (10nm)
tion unit compensation (backlash, pitch error compensation, E : 0.001 µm (1nm)
etc.) and PLC interface (external machine
coordinate system compensation) follow this
specification.
1007 System System Select your NC system type. 0/1
(PR) type type select 0: Machining center system (M system)
select 1: Lathe system (L system)

(Note 1) If the setting value is out of range, M

system will be selected.
(Note 2) This parameter is exclusively for M70
series. M700 series doesn’t support this
parameter.

III - 31
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1010 srvunit Output unit Specify the unit for data communicated with the B: 1 µm
(PR) (servo) drive unit. C: 0.1 µm
The data communicated between the NC and drive D: 0.01 µm (10nm)
unit and the servo movement data unit follow this E: 0.001 µm (1nm)
specification. (The standard value when using an
optical cable is E.)
1013 axname Axis name Specify each axis’ name address with an alphabetic Axis addresses such as
(PR) character. X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B,
Use the characters X‚ Y‚ Z‚ U‚ V‚ W‚ A‚ B or C. and C
Do not specify the same address in one part
system.
The same address as one used in another part
system can be specified.
The PLC address does not need to be set. (The
axis name is displayed as 1 and 2.)
1014 incax Increment When specifying the program movement rate’s Axis addresses such as
(PR) command absolute or incremental method with an address‚ X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B,
axis name specify the incremental command axis name and C
address with an alphabetic character.
The address that can be used is the same as #1013
axname.
Specify an address that is different from that #1013.
Setting is not required if absolute/incremental
specification with addresses is not performed
(#1076 Abslnc = 0).
1015 cunit Program Specify the minimum unit of the program movement
(PR) command amount. 0 #1003 iunit
unit cunit Movement amount for movement
command 1 1 0.1µm
0: Follow #1003 iunit
10 1µm
1: 0.0001 mm (0.1µm)
10: 0.001 mm (1µm) 100 10µm
100: 0.01 mm (10µm)
1000: 0.1 mm (100µm) 1000 100µm
10000: 1.0 mm
10000 1mm
If there is a decimal point in the movement
command‚ the decimal point position will be
handled as 1mm regardless of this setting.
1017 rot Rotational Specify whether the axis is a rotary axis or linear 0: Linear axis
(PR) axis axis. 1: Rotary axis
When a rotary axis is designated, the axis is
controlled with the rotary axis' coordinate system.
Set the rotary axis type by "#8213 Rotation axis
type".
1018 ccw Motor Specify the direction of the motor rotation to the 0/1
(PR) CCW command direction.
0: Rotates clockwise (looking from motor shaft)
with the forward rotation command.
1: Rotates counterclockwise (looking from
motor shaft) with the forward rotation
command.

III - 32
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1019 dia Diameter Specify whether the program movement amount is 0: Command with
(PR) specification to be commanded with the diameter dimension or movement amount
axis as movement amount. 1: Command with
When the movement amount is commanded with diameter dimension
the diameter dimensions‚ 5mm will be moved when
the command is a movement distance of 10mm.
The movement amount per pulse will also be
halved during manual pulse feed.
Among parameters concerning length‚ the tool
length‚ the wear compensation amount and the
workpiece coordinate offset are displayed in
diameter value when diameter is specified‚ but
other parameters are always displayed in radius
value.
1020 sp_ax Spindle Specify 1 when the NC control axis is used as the 0: The NC control axis
(PR) Interpolation spindle. is used as the servo
axis.
1: The NC control axis
is used as the
spindle.
1021 mcp_no Drive unit I/F Using a 4-digit number, set the drive unit 1001 to 1010
(PR) channel No. interface channel No. and which axis in that 2001 to 2010
(servo) channel is to be used when connecting a
servo drive unit. * Note that this will
change according to
the communication
Axis No. cycle.
Not used. (Set to 0)
Number of drive unit channel

1022 axname2 2nd axis Set the name of the axis displayed on the screen Two digits between A to
(PR) name with two characters. (X1, Z2, etc.) Z and 1 to 9 (Setting is
Always use an alphabetic character (A to Z) for the cleared when 0 is set)
first character.
1023 crsadr Command Set the address for issuing a command to this axis A to Z
(PR) address during cross machining control. (Setting is cleared when
during cross 0 is set)
machining
1024 crsinc Incremental Set the address for issuing an incremental A to Z
(PR) command command to this axis during cross machining (Setting is cleared when
address control. 0 is set)
during cross
machining
1025 l_plane Initial plane Specify the plane to be selected when the power is 1: X-Y plane (G17
selection turned ON or reset. command state)
When 0 is specified, 1 is assumed (X-Y plane). 2: Z-X plane (G18
command state)
3: Y-Z plane (G19
command state)

III - 33
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1026 base_l Base axis I Specify the basic axis address that composes the Control axis addresses
1027 base_J Base axis J plane. such as X, Y, and Z
1028 base_K Base axis K Specify the axis address set in #1013 axname.
If all three items do not need to be specified‚ such
as for 2-axis specifications‚ input "0"‚ and the
parameter will be blank.
Normally‚ when X‚ Y and Z are specified
respectively for base_l‚_J‚_K‚ the following relation
will be established:
G17: X-Y
G18: Z-X
G19: Y-Z
Specify the desired address to set an axis address
other than the above.
1029 aux_I Flat axis I If there is an axis parallel to #1026 base_l‚ specify Control axis addresses
that axis address. such as X, Y, and Z
1030 aux_J Flat axis J If there is an axis parallel to #1027 base_J‚ specify Control axis addresses
that axis address. such as X, Y, and Z
1031 aux_K Flat axis K If there is an axis parallel to #1028 base_K‚ specify Control axis addresses
that axis address. such as X, Y, and Z
1037 cmdtyp Command Specify the program G code series and 1 to 8
(PR) type compensation type.
cmdtyp G code series Compensation type
1 System 1 (for M) Type A (one compensation
amount for one compen-
sation number)
2 System 1 (for M) Type B (shape and wear
amounts for one compen-
sation number)
3 System 2 (for L) Type C (two kinds of
compensation amount of
shape and wear per
compensation No.)
4 System 3 (for L) Same as above
5 System 4 Same as above
(for special L)
6 System 5 Same as above
(for special L)
7 System 6 Same as above
(for special L)
8 System 7 Same as above
(for special L)
9 System 8 (for M) Type A (one compensation
M2 format type A amount for one compen-
sation number)
10 System 8 (for M) Type B (shape and wear
M2 format type B amounts for one compen-
sation number)

There are some items in the specifications that can

be used or cannot be used according to the value
set in this parameter.
The file structure may also change depending on
the compensation data type.
1038 plcsel Ladder Specify the PLC type. 0: User custom PLC
selection 1: Standard PLC
2: Exclusive PLC for
MELSEC bus link

III - 34
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1039 spinno Number of Specify the existence of a spindle. 0: No spindle
(PR) spindles 1: One spindle
2: Two spindles
3: Three spindles
4: Four spindles
1040 M_inch Constant Specify the parameter unit system for the position, 0: Metric system
(PR) input (inch) length and speed of machine parameters and PLC 1: Inch system
interface.
1041 l_inch Initial state Specify the unit system for the program movement 0: Metric system
(PR) (inch) amount when the power is turned ON or reset and 1: Inch system
for position display.

(Note) Selection of inch and metric unit

When set value of "#1041 I_inch" is changed‚ the unit of length is changed after reset.
Among parameters concerning length‚ following items are not changed automatically‚ therefore
change the set values to agree with the new unit system when the unit system is changed.

Tool compensation amount (Tool length compensation amount‚ tool wear compensation amount
and tool tip compensation amount)
Workpiece coordinate offset
#8004 SPEED #8027 Toler-1 #8056 G74 RETRACT
#8005 ZONE r #8028 Toler-2 #8057 G76 LAST-D
#8006 ZONE d #8029 FairingL #8075 SpiralEndErr
#8009 DSC. ZONE #8030 MINUTE LENGS #8084 G83S Clearance
#8010 ABS. MAX. #8037 CorJudgeL #8085 G83S Forward F
Machining
parameter #8011 INC. MAX. #8041 C-rot. R #8086 G83S Back F
#8012 G73n #8042 C-ins. R
#8013 G83n #8051 G71 THICK
#8016 G71 MINIMUM #8052 G71 PULL UP
#8017 G71 DELTA-D #8053 G73 U
#8018 G84/G74n #8054 G73 W
#8204 OT-CHECK-N
#8205 OT-CHECK-P
Axis parameter
#8206 TOOL CHG.P
#8209 G60 Shift
Barrier data #8300 - #8306, #8311 - #8314
Basic specification
#1084 RadErr
parameter

"#8004 SPEED" is 10 inches/min. unit for the inch system.

III - 35
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1042 pcinch PLC axis Specify the unit system for the commands to the 0: Metric system
(PR) command PLC axis. 1: Inch system
(inch)
1043 lang Select Specify the display language. 0/1
language 11 to 22
displayed 0: English display (Standard)
1: Japanese display (Standard)

11:Display in German (Option)

12:Display in French (Option)
13:Display in Italian (Option)
14:Display in Spanish (Option)
15:Display in Chinese (Option)
(traditional Chinese)
16:Display in Korean (Option)
17:Display in Portuguese (Option)
18:Display in Dutch (Option)
19:Display in Swedish (Option)
20:Display in Hungarian (Option)
22:Display in Chinese (Option)
(simplified Chinese)

(Note) If no character package is available for a

specified language, the screen is
displayed in English.
1044 auxno MR-J2-CT Specify the number of MR-J2-CTs connected. 0 to 6
(PR) Connections
1045 nskno Megatorgue Specify the number of NSK megatorque motors 0 to 16
(PR) motor connected. When a value other than 0 is specified,
connections 2nd miscellaneous function data is output as signed
binary data.
1050 MemPrg Definition of 0 to 7
(PR) program save MemPrg 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
area Machining program
MDI data

(Machining program)
: Part system common
Machining program save area is shared by
part systems.
: Part system independent
Machining programs can be registered for
each part system.

(MDI data)
: Part system common
MDI data is shared by part systems.
: Part system independent
MDI data can be set for each part system.

When this parameter is changed, the power must

be turned OFF and ON, and the system formatted.
(Note) This parameter is valid when the
multi-part system is valid.

III - 36
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1051 MemTol Tool 0: Tool compensation memory separate for part 0/1
(PR) compensa- systems ($1: #1 to #40, $2: #1 to #40)
tion memory 1: Tool compensation memory common for part
common for systems ($1: #1 to #80)
part systems
1052 MemVal No. of 0: Common variables common for part system 0/1
(PR) common (number fixed)
variables #100 to : Per part system
shared in part #500 to : Common for part systems
system 1: Common variables common for part system
designation (number fixed)
#100 to : Designate with V1comN
#500 to : Designate with V0comN
(Note) When this parameter is changed, the
method of reading the file system will
change after the power is turned ON, so
always reformat again.

Setting order

MemVal Format Turn

change- Mismatch Format power ON
over displays again

1061 intabs Manual ABS Defines whether to update the absolute value data 0: Do not update
(PR) updating during automatic handle interrupt. (shift coordinates
This parameter is valid only when "#1145 l_abs" is the amount of the
set to 1. interruption)
1: Update (same
coordinates as
when interrupt did
not occur will be
applied.)
1062 T_cmp Tool Specify whether the tool length offset and wear 0 to 3
compensation compensation is valid during T command execution.
function
Setting value Tool length offset Wear compensation
0 Valid Valid
1 Valid Invalid
2 Invalid Valid
3 Invalid Invalid

1063 mandog Manual The initial return to the reference position is per- 0: High speed return
dog-type formed with dog-type return after the power is turned 1: Dog-type
ON‚ and the coordinate system is established.
Specify the manual reference position return method
after the coordinate system is established with this
parameter. (This setting is not required when using
absolute position detection.)
1064 svof Error Specify whether to correct the error when the servo 0: Do not correct the
(PR) correction is OFF. error
1: Correct the error

III - 37
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1068 slavno Slave axis Specify the number of the slave axis for synchronous 0: No slave axis
(PR) number control. The axis number is an NC number excluding 1 to 16:
the spindle and PLC axis. First to sixteenth
Two or more slave axes cannot be set up for one axes
master axis.
slaveno cannot be set up for a slave axis.
When using the multi-part system, the relation of the
master axis and slave axis cannot extend over part
systems.
1069 no_dsp Axis with no Set up an axis that displays no counter. This option 0: Displays the
counter is valid on the counter display screen (relative value counter
display screen). 1: Does not display
the counter.
1070 axoff Axis removal Define an axis that enables axis removal control. 0: Disables axis
removal.
1: Enables axis
removal
1072 chop_ax Chopping Designate the chopping axis. 0: Non-chopping
axis axis
1: Chopping axis
1073 I_Absm Initial Specify the absolute setting/incremental setting 0: Absolute setting
absolute mode for when the power is turned ON or reset. 1: Incremental
setting setting
1074 l_Sync Initial Specify the feedrate specification mode for when the 0/1
synchronous power is turned ON or reset.
feed 0: Asynchronous feed (feed per minute)
1: Synchronous feed (feed per rotation)
1075 I_G00 Initial G00 Specify the linear command mode for when the 0/1
power is turned ON or reset.
0: Linear interpolation (G01 command state)
1: Positioning (G00 command state)
1076 Abslnc ABS/INC The absolute command/incremental command can 0/1
(For L address be issued by using the absolute command address
system and incremental command address for the same
only) axis.
0: Absolute command/incremental command with
G command
1: Absolute command/incremental command with
address code
(The #1013 axname address will be the
absolute command‚ and #1014 incax address
will be the incremental command)
1077 radius Incremental Specify if the diameter specification axis' (#1019 dia 0: Diameter value
command for is set to 1) incremental command uses the diameter 1: Radius value
diameter value or radius value
specification
axis

III - 38
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1078 Decpt2 Decimal point Specify the unit of position commands that do not 0/1
type 2 have a decimal point.
0: The min. input command unit is used
(follows #1015 cunit)
1: 1mm (or 1inch) unit is used
(For the dwell time, 1s unit is used.)
1079 F1digt Validate F1 Specify whether to execute the F command with a 0/1
digit 1-digit code command or with a direct numerical
command.
0: Direct numerical command (command
feedrate during feed per minute or rotation)
1: 1-digit code command (feedrate specified
with #1185 spd_F1 – #1189 F5)
1080 Dril_Z Specify boring Specify a fixed cycle hole drilling axis. 0/1
(For D axis 0: Use an axis vertical to the selected plane as
system the hole drilling axis.
only) 1: Use the Z axis as the hole drilling axis
regardless of the selected plane.
1081 Gmac_P Give priority Specify the G code priority relationship during the 0/1
to G code macro call with the G command.
parameter 0: G code used in system is priority.
1: Registered G code for call out is priority.
1082 Geomet Geometric Specify whether to use the geometric I or IB 0/1/2
function.
0: Do not use.
1: Use only geometric I.
2: Use geometric I and IB.
With geometric, specific address codes are used
for exclusive meanings. Thus, if A or C is used for
the axis address or 2nd miscellaneous command
code, the A used for the axis address may
function as the geometric's angle designation.
Take special care when designating the axis
name, etc., when using this function.
1084 RadErr Arc error Specify the tolerable error range when a deviation 0 to 1.000 (mm)
occurs in the end point and center coordinate in
the circular command.
1085 G00Drn G00 dry run Specify whether to apply dry run (feed with 0/1
manual setting speed instead of command
feedrate) to the G00 command.
0: Do not apply to G00. (move at rapid
traverse rate)
1: Apply to G00. (move at manual set
feedrate)
1086 G0lntp G00 Specify the G00 movement path type 0/1
non-interpolat 0: Move linearly toward the end point.
ion (interpolation type)
1: Move to the end point of each axis at the
rapid traverse feedrate for each axis.
(non-interpolation)

III - 39
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1087 G96_G0 Constant Specify how to handle the cycle speed for the G00 0/1
surface command when using the constant surface speed
speed control function.
control by 0: Calculate the cycle speed constantly even
rapid during G00 movement.
traverse 1: Calculate the cycle speed at the block end
feed point in the G00 command.
command
1088 G30SL Disable G30 Specify how to handle the soft limit during G30 (2nd 0/1
soft limit reference position return) movement.
0: Soft limit valid during G30 movement
1: Soft limit invalid during G30 movement
1091 Mpoint Ignore Specify now to handle the middle point during G28 0/1
middle point and G30 reference position return.
0: Move to the reference position after passing
the middle point designated in the program.
1: Ignore the middle point designated in the
program and move straight to the reference
position.
1092 Tchg _A Replace Specify the movement of the additional axis during 0/1
tools for tool change position return.
additional 0: The additional axis does not move with the
axis tool change position return command.
1: After returning the standard axis with the tool
change position return command‚ the
additional axis also returns to the tool change
position.
1093 Wmvfin Synchroni- Specify the method for synchronization between 0/1
zation part systems when using the multi-part system.
between When the movement command is found in the
part synchronization command (!, M) block:
systems 0: Synchronize before executing movement
method command
1: Synchronize after executing movement
command
1094 Tl_SBK Select life Select whether to count the data units to be used 0/1
(for L count for for a single block when using the tool life
system single block management II function (L system).
only) 0: Does not count the data units.
1: Count the data units.
1095 T0tfof TF output Select how to handle TF for T00 command. 0/1
0: TF is output.
1: TF is not output

III - 40
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1096 T_Ltyp Tool life Specify the tool life management type. 1/2
(PR) management 1: Life management type l
type The usage time or No. of uses of the tool
commanded in the program is incremented, and
the usage state of that tool is monitored.
2: Life management type ll
This method is the same as tool life
management I, but with a spare tool selection
function added.
A spare tool is selected from the group of tool
commands commanded in the program. Tool
compensation (tool length compensation and
tool radius compensation) is carried out for the
selected tool.
1097 T1digt Tool wear Specify the No. of digits in the tool wear 0/1
compensation compensation No. in the T command.
number 0: The 2 high-order digits are the tool No.‚ and
1-digit the 2 Iow-order digits are the wear
command compensation No.
1: The 3 high-order digits are the tool No.‚ and
the 1 Iow-order digit is the wear
compensation No.
This parameter will be fixed to 0 when tool life
management II is selected.
1098 Tlno. Tool length Specify the No. of digits in the tool length offset No. 0/1
offset number in the T command.
0: The 2 or 3 high-order digits are the tool No.
The 2 or 1 Iow-order digits are the tool length
offset and wear compensation Nos.
1: The 2 or 3 high-order digits are the tool No.
and tool length offset Nos.
The 2 or 1 Iow-order digits are the wear
compensation No.
1099 Treset Cancel tool Specify how to handle tool compensation vector 0/1
compensation when resetting system.
amount 0: Clear the tool length and wear compensation
vectors when resetting.
1: Save the tool length and wear compensation
vectors when resetting.
When the values are cleared‚ the compensation will
not be applied‚ so the axis will move the
compensation amount in the next compensation
operation.
When the values are saved‚ the compensation will
be applied‚ so the axis will shift the differential
amount of the compensation amount in the next
compensation operation.

III - 41
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1100 Tmove Tool wear Specify the period to perform tool length offset and 0 to 2
compensation wear compensation.
0: Compensate when T command is executed.
1: Superimpose and compensate with the
movement command in the block where the T
command is located. If there is no movement
command in the same block‚ compensation
will be executed after the movement
command is superimposed in the next
movement command block.
2: Compensate when the T command is
executed.
Superimpose and compensate a tool length
offset with the movement command in the
same block. If there is no movement
command in the same block, compensation
will be executed after the movement
command is superimposed in the next
movement command block.
1101 Tabsmv Tool wear Specify the type of movement command when 0/1
compen- #1100 Tmove is set to 1.
sation method 0: Compensate regardless of the movement
command type.
1: Compensate only at the movement command
in the absolute command.
1102 tlm Manual tool Specify the measurement method for manual tool 0/1
(For L length measurement l. (Interpreted as 0
system measuring 0: Align tool with reference position when other than 0 or
only) system 1: Input measurement results 1 is set.)
1103 T_life Validate life Select the usage of the tool life management 0/1
management function.
0: Do not manage tool life.
1: Execute tool life management function
control.
1104 T_Com2 Tool Select the command method for when #1103 T_Life 0/1
command is set to 1.
method 2 0: Handle the program tool command as the
group No.
1: Handle the program tool command as the tool
No.
1105 T_Sel2 Tool selection Select the tool selection method for when #1103 0/1
method 2 T_Life is set to 1.
0: Select in order of registered No. from the
tools used in the same group.
1: Select the tool with the longest remaining life
from tools used in the same group and the
unused tools.
1106 Tcount Life Specify the function when address N is omitted 0: Time specified
(For L management when inputting data (G10 L3 command) for tool life input
system count management function ll. 1: No. of times
only) specified input

III - 42
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1107 Tllfsc Split life Set up the number of groups to be displayed on the 0 to 2
(For L management tool life management II (L system) screen.
system display 0: Displayed group count 1,
only) screen maximum number of registered tools: 16
1: Displayed group count 2,
maximum number of registered tools: 8
2: Displayed group count 4,
maximum number of registered tools: 4
1108 TlrectM Life Set up the M code for tool life management II (L 0 to 99
(For L management system) re-count.
system re-count M
only) code
1109 subs_M Validate Select the user macro interrupt with the substitute M 0: Alternate M code
alternate M code. invalid
code 1: Alternate M code
valid
1110 M96_M M96 Specify an M code to replace M96 when #1109 3 to 97
alternate M subs_M is set to 1. (excluding 30)
code
1111 M97_M M97 Specify an M code to replace M97 when #1109 3 to 97
alternate M subs_M is set to 1. (excluding 30)
code
1112 S_TRG Validate Specify the validity conditions for the user macro 0/1
(PR) status trigger interrupt signal.
method 0: Valid when interrupt signal (UIT) turns OFF to
ON.
1: Valid when interrupt signal (UIT) is ON.
1113 INT_2 Validate Specify the movement after user macro interrupt 0/1
(PR) interrupt signal (UIT) input.
method type 0: Execute interrupt program without waiting for
2 block being executed to end.
1: Execute interrupt program after completing
block being executed.
1114 mcrint Macro Select whether to clear statements other than 0/1/2
argument specified arguments by macro call. Also, select
initialization whether to clear local variables by power-ON and
resetting.
0: Delete non-specified arguments by macro call.
1: Retain non-specified arguments by macro call.
2: Retain non-specified arguments by macro call
and clear local variables by power-ON and
resetting.
1115 thwait Waiting for Set the queue number during screw thread cutting 0 to 99
thread when the chamfering is not valid. (Approx. 4 ms.)
cutting Standard set value: 4
1116 G30SLM Invalidate Enable this function when disabling the soft limit 0: Enable soft limit
soft limit check function from the second to fourth reference function.
(manual position return. 1: Disable soft limit
operation) function.
1117 H_sens Handle Switch the handle response mode when feeding the 0/1
response handle.
switch 0: Standard handle response
1: High-speed handle response

III - 43
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1118 mirr_A Select how to Select one of the following two methods: 0/1
(For L set up the • Set up the current length of tools on each
system length of tools facing turret.
only) on cutter • Set up a value, assuming that the tools on
tables each facing turret are in the same direction as
(opposed that of those on the base turret.
tables) 0: Current length of the tools on each facing
turret
1: Value, assuming that the tools on each facing
turret are in the same direction as that of
those on the base turret.
1119 Tmiron Select the Select whether to validate the mirror image of each 0: Invalid
(For L mirror image facing turret with the T command. 1: Valid
system of each facing
only) turret with T
command
1120 TofVal Change Specify whether to change the macro variable (tool 0/1
(PR) macro offset) numbers for shape compensation and wear
variable compensation.
0: Do not change. (Conventional specifications)
1: Change the shape and wear compensation
variable numbers each for X, Z, and R.
1121 edlk_c Edit lock C Select the edit lock for program Nos. 9000 to 9999 0/1
in memory.
0: Program can be edited.
1: Editing of above program is prohibited. The
file cannot be opened.
(Note) If #1122 is set to 1 or 2, 1 will be set in
#1121 when the power is turned ON.
1122 pglk_c Program Specify whether to prohibit the program display and 0 to 2
(PR) display lock C search for program Nos. 9000 to 9999 in
memory.
(Note) If #1122 is set to 1 or 2, 1 will be set in
#1121 when the power is turned ON.
0: The program display and search can be
executed.
1: The program display cannot be executed. The
search can be executed.
2: The program display and search cannot be
executed.
1123 origin Origin set Select whether to use the origin set function. 0/1
prohibit 0: Use
1: Do not use
1124 ofsfix Fix tool wear Specify whether to automatically increment the 0/1
compensation compensation No. by 1 with the input or to display
No. the No. as it is in the setting on the tool
compensation screen.
0: Increment the # No. by 1 when the input key
is pressed. (Same as general parameters)
1: # No. does not change even if INPUT key is
pressed.
When making settings in sequence‚ 0 is handier.
When changing and setting repeatedly while
adjusting one compensation value‚ 1 is handier

III - 44
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1125 real_f Actual Specify the feedrate display on the monitor screen. 0: Command speed
feedrate 1: Real movement
display feedrate
1126 PB_G90 Playback G90 Specify whether the playback movement amount 0: Incremental value
when performing playback editing is to be an 1: Absolute value
absolute value or incremental value.
1127 DPRINT DPRINT Specify the alignment for printing out with the 0/1
alignment DPRINT function.
0: No alignment‚ data is printed with left
justification.
1: Align the minimum digit and output.
1128 RstVCI Clear Specify how to handle the common variables when 0/1
variables by resetting.
resetting 0: Common variables do not change after
resetting.
1: The following common variables are cleared
by resetting:
During variable 100 group specifications:
#100 to #149 are cleared.
Variable 200 and more group specifications:
#100 to #199 are cleared.
1129 PwrVCl Clear Specify how to handle the common variables when 0/1
variables by the power is turned ON.
power-ON 0: The common variables are in the same state
as before turning the power OFF.
1: The following common variables are cleared
when the power is turned ON.
During variable 100 group specifications:
#100 to #149 are cleared.
Variable 200 and more group specifications:
#100 to #199 are cleared.
1130 set_t Display Specify the tool command value display on the 0/1
selected tool POSITION screen.
number 0: T-modal value of program command is
displayed.
1: Tool number sent from PLC is displayed.
1132 CRT Not used. Set to "0". 0
1133 ofsmem Not used. Set to "0". 0
1134 LCDneg Not used. Set to "0". 0
1135 unt_nm Unit name Set up a unit name. 4 or less characters
Set up the unit name with 4 or less characters consisting of both
consisting of both alphabets and numbers. If 0 is alphabets and
set up, the unit name is not displayed. numbers
1136 optype Not used. Set to "0". 0
1137 Cntsel Not used. Set to "0". 0
1138 Pnosel Not used. Set to "0". 0
1139 edtype Not used. Set to "0". 0
1140 Mn100 M code First number of M code that corresponds to setup 0 to 99999999
number number from 100 to 199
1141 Mn200 M code First number of M code that corresponds to setup 0 to 99999999
number number from 200 to 299
1142 Mn300 M code First number of M code that corresponds to setup 0 to 99999999
number number from 300 to 399

III - 45
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1143 Mn400 M code First number of M code that corresponds to setup 0 to 99999999
number number from 400 to 499
1144 mdlkof MDI setup Select whether to enable MDI setup in non-MDI mode. 0: Disable MDI
lock setup
1: Enable MDI setup
1145 I_abs Manual Specify how to handle the absolute position data 0/1
ABS during automatic handle interrupt.
parameter 0: Absolute position data is renewed if manual ABS
switch is ON.
Data is not renewed if switch is OFF.
1: Follows the "intabs" state when "#1061 intabs" is
valid.
1146 Sclamp Spindle Specify how to handle the spindle rotation speed clamp 0/1
rotation function with the G92S command.
speed 0: G92S command is handled as a clamp command
clamp only in the G96 state (during constant surface
function speed control). G92S will be handled as normal
S command in G97 state (constant surface
speed OFF).
1: The S command in the same block as G92 is
constantly handled as a clamp command.
1147 smin_V Minimum Specify the type of spindle min. rotation speed clamp 0/1
spindle value.
rotation 0: Rotation speed setting
speed 1: Output voltage coefficient setting
clamp type Set the #3023 smini parameter according to this type
setting.
1148 I_G611 Initial high The modal state when the power is turned ON is set to 0/1
precision the high accuracy control mode.
0: G64 (cutting mode) at power ON
1: G61.1 (high-accuracy control mode) at power ON
1149 cireft Arc Specify whether to enable deceleration at the arc 0/1
deceleration entrance or exit.
speed 0: Do not decelerate at arc entrance and exit.
change 1: Decelerate at arc entrance and exit.
1151 rstint Reset initial Specify whether to initialize (power ON state) the 0/1
modals by resetting.
0: Do not initialize modal state.
1: Initialize modal state.
1153 FixbDc Hole bottom Specify whether to perform a deceleration check or 0 to 2
deceleration in-position check at the hole bottom in the hole drilling
check cycle. This parameter is valid only for a hole drilling
cycle in which no dwell command can be issued at the
hole bottom.
0: Perform no deceleration check and in-position
check.
1: Perform a deceleration check.
2: Perform an in-position check.
1154 pdoor Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)
1155 DOOR_m Not used. Set to "100". 100 (Hexadecimal)
1156 DOOR_s Not used. Set to "100". 100 (Hexadecimal)
1157 F0atrn Not used. Set to "0". 0
1158 F0atno Not used. Set to "0". 0

III - 46
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1163 No rio RIO Even if an RIO is not connected when the I/O is 0/1
(PR) connection configured only of cards such as CC-Link, the RIO
detection communication cutoff alarm is not detected.
invalid 0: Check the RIO connection.
1: Do not check the RIO connection.
1164 ATS Automatic Set this to validate the automatic tuning function. 0/1
tuning 0: Invalid
function 1: Valid
1166 fixpro Fixed cycle Select whether to use the edit, program list and data 0 to 99999999
editing input/output functions for the fixed cycles, machine
tool builder macro programs or general programs.
0: General programs can be edited, etc.
1: The fixed cycles can be edited, etc.
Password No.: The machine tool builder macro
programs can be edited, etc.
1167 e2rom Not used. Set to "0". 0
1168 test Simulation Specify the test mode for the control unit. 0: Normal operation
test The test mode does not use reference position mode
return‚ and tests with a hypothetical zero point return 1: Test mode
completed state. This is limited to test operation of
the control unit itself‚ and must not be used when
connected to the machine.
1169 part Part system Set the name of each part system. A max. of four
system name This must be set only when using multi-part system. alphabetic characters
name This name is displayed on the screen only when the or numerals.
part systems must be identified.
Use a max. of four alphabetic characters or
numerals.
1170 M2name Second Set this address code when using the 2nd A, B, C
miscellane- miscellaneous command. Set an address with A‚ B
ous code and C that is not used with "#1013 axname" or
"#1014 incax".
1171 taprov Tap return Set the tap return override value for the synchronous 1 to 100 (%)
override tap.
When 0 is set, it will be regarded as 100%.
1172 tapovr Tap return Set the override value when leaving the tap end 1 to 999 (%)
override point in the synchronous tap cycle.
The setting range is 1 to 999‚ and the unit is %.
When a value less than 100 is set‚ it will be judged as
100%.

III - 47
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1173 dwlskp G04 skip Specify the skip signal for ending the G04 (dwell) Skip condition 0 to 7
condition command. Set-
PLC interface input signal

ting Skip 3 Skip 2 Skip 1

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

End when signal is

input.
1174 skip_F G31 skip Specify the feedrate when there is no F command in 1 to 999999 (mm/min)
speed the program at G31 (skip) command.
Specify the skip signal in the G31.1 to G31.3 Skip condition 0 to 7
(multi-step skip) command‚ and the feedrate when Set-
PLC interface input signal

there is no F command in the program. ting Skip 3 Skip 2 Skip 1

1175 skip1 G31.1 skip Skip signal specified at G31.1 0

1
condition 2
1176 skip1f G31.2 skip Skip feedrate at G31.1 3
4
speed 5
1177 skip2 G31.2 skip Skip signal specified at G31.2 6
7
condition
1178 skip2f G31.2 skip Skip feedrate at G31.2
speed Skip feedrate
1179 skip3 G31.3 skip Skip signal specified at G31.3 1 to 999999 (mm/min)
condition
1180 skip3f G31.3 skip Skip feedrate at G31.3
speed
1181 G96_ax Constant Specify the axis to be targeted for constant surface 0 to 8
surface speed control.
speed 0: Program specification will be invalidated‚ and
control the axis will always be fixed to the 1st axis.
1: 1st axis specification
2: 2nd axis specification
3: 3rd axis specification
: :
8: 8th axis specification
The program specification will be the priority for all
settings other than 0.
1182 thr_F Thread Set the screw cut up speed when not using 0 to 60000 (mm/min)
cutting chamfering in the thread cutting cycle.
speed 0: Cutting feed clamp feedrate
1 to 60000 mm/min: Set feedrate
1183 clmp_M M code for Set the M code for C-axis clamp in the hole drilling 0 to 99999999
clamp cycle.
1184 clmp_D Dwelling Set the dwell time after outputting the M code for 0.000 to 99999.999 (s)
time after C-axis unclamp in the hole drilling cycle.
outputting
M code for
unclamp

III - 48
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

F1 digit Specify the feedrate for the F command in the 1 to 60000 (mm/min)
feedrate F1-digit command (#1079 F1 digt is set to 1).
1185 spd_F1 F1 Feedrate when F1 is issued (mm/min)
1186 spd_F2 F2 Feedrate when F2 is issued (mm/min)
1187 spd_F3 F3 Feedrate when F3 is issued (mm/min)
1188 spd_F4 F4 Feedrate when F4 is issued (mm/min)
1189 spd_F5 F5 Feedrate when F5 is issued (mm/min)
1190 s_xcnt Validate Specify whether to disable or enable inclined-axis 0/1
(PR) (For L inclined- control.
system axis control 0: Disable inclined-axis control
only) 1: Enable inclined-axis control
1191 s_angl Inclination Specify the inclination angle (θ). ± 80.000 (°)
(PR) (For L angle (Note) If "0" is specified for this parameter, the
system angle determined by three-side setting is
only) valid.
1192 s_zrmv Compensation Specify whether to perform compensation for the 0/1
(PR) (For L at origin return base axis corresponding to the inclined axis at
system original return.
only) 0: Perform compensation.
1: Don't perform compensation.
1193 inpos The setting is selected with "#1306 InpsTyp Deceleration check
specification type".
0: Deceleration check method 1
1: Validate in-position check

Deceleration Specify the deceleration check method for G0. 0/1

check method 0: Command deceleration check
1 1: In-position check

Validate Specify the deceleration confirmation method for 0/1

in-position the positioning or cutting command.
check 0: G0, G1+G9 Command deceleration check
1: G0, G1+G9 In-position check

1194 H_acdc Time constant Specify the time constant for the manual handle 0/1
0 for handle feed.
feed 0: Use time constant for G01
1: Time constant 0 (step)
Specify the user macro M‚ S or T command macro 0: Invalid
call out. 1: Valid
1195 Mmac Macro call for Macro call out with M command
M command
1196 Smac Macro call for Macro call out with S command
S command
1197 Tmac Macro call for T Macro call out with T command
command
1198 M2mac Macro call with Macro call out with 2nd miscellaneous command
2nd
miscellaneous
code

III - 49
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1199 Sselect Select Select the initial condition of spindle control after 0: G43.1
initial power is turned ON. 1: G44.1
spindle 0: 1st spindle control mode (G43.1) 2: G47.1
control 1: Selected spindle control mode (G44.1)
2: All spindle simultaneously control mode
(G47.1)
(Note) Spindle No. when G44.1 is commanded
is selected with #1534 SnG44.1.
1200 G0_acc G0 constant Set up acceleration and deceleration types when a 0: Acceleration and
(PR) inclination rapid traverse command is issued deceleration with
0: Acceleration and deceleration (conventional) time constant
with time constant 1: Acceleration and
1: Acceleration and deceleration with inclination deceleration with
angle constant inclination angle
constant
1201 G1_acc Validate Set up acceleration and deceleration types when a 0: Acceleration and
(PR) acceleration liner interpolation command is issued. deceleration with
and 0: Acceleration and deceleration (conventional) time constant
deceleration with time constant 1: Acceleration and
with inclination 1: Acceleration and deceleration with inclination deceleration with
constant G1 angle constant inclination angle
constant
1202 mirofs Distance Set up the distance between tools (edges) 0 to 99999.999 (mm)
(For L between facing (between facing turrets).
system turrets
only)
1203 TmirS1 Select turrets Set up turrets as shown in the mirror image of 0 to FFFFFFFF
(For L as facing facing turrets with the T command that
system turrets with T corresponds to tool numbers 1 to 32.
only) command
1204 TmirS2 Select turrets Set up turrets as shown in the mirror image of 0 to FFFFFFFF
(For L as facing facing turrets with the T command that
system turrets with T corresponds to tool numbers 33 to 64.
only) command
1205 G0bdcc Acceleration 0: G00 acceleration and deceleration are 0/1
and selected as those after interpolation.
deceleration 1: The G00 acceleration/deceleration is the
before G0 acceleration/decelerate before interpolation
interpolation regardless of whether the mode is the high
accuracy control mode.
(Note) "1" cannot be set for the 2nd part system
and following.
1206 G1bF Maximum Set up a cutting feedrate when selecting 1 to 999999 (mm/min)
speed acceleration and deceleration before interpolation.

III - 50
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1207 G1btL Time Set up a cutting feed time constant when selecting 1 to 5000 (ms)
constant acceleration and deceleration before interpolation.
Speed

G1bF

G1btL Time

1208 RCK Arc radius An arc radius error compensation can be increased -60.0 to +20.0 (%)
error and decreased from −60.0 to 20.0%.
compen-
sation
factor
1209 cirdcc Arc Specify the deceleration speed at the arc entrance or 1 to 999999 (mm/min)
decelera- exit.
tion speed
1210 RstGmd Modal G Specify whether to initialize each G code group modal Specify a hexadecimal
code reset and the H and D codes when the system is reset. number.
Specify the initialization items in bit correspondence.
0: Initialize.
1: Don't initialize.
M system
0 Group 1 Move G modal
1 Group 2 Flat selection modal
2 Group 3 Absolute/increment command modal
3
4 Group 5 Feed G modal
5 Group 6 Inch/metric modal
6 Group 7 Radius compensation modal
7 Group 8 Length compensation modal
8
9 Group 10 Fixed cycle return command modal
A
B Group 12 Workpiece coordinate system modal
C Group 13 Cut modal
D
E Group 15 Normal line control modal
F
Group 17 Constant surface speed control command
10
modal
11 Group 18 pole coordinate command modal
12 Group 19 G command mirror modal
13 Group 20 Spindle 2 control modal
14
15
16
17
18 H, D codes
19 Spindle clamp rotation speed
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
(To be continued to the next page)

III - 51
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

(Continued from the previous page) Specify a hexadecimal
The H code indicates the tool length offset number, and number.
the D code indicates the tool radius compensation
number.
When bit 18 is set to ON, the H and D codes and group
8 G modal area retained.
When bit 7 is set to ON, the H code and group 8 G
modal are retained.

L system
0 Group 1 Move G modal
1 Group 2 Flat selection modal
2 Group 3 Absolute/increment command modal
3 Group 4 Barrier check modal
4 Group 5 Feed G modal
5 Group 6 Inch/metric modal
6 Group 7 Nose R compensation modal
7
8
9 Group 10 Fixed cycle return command modal
A
B Group 12 Workpiece coordinate system modal
C Group 13 Cut modal
D
E
F

Group 17 Constant surface speed control command

10
modal
11 Group 18 Balance cut
12
13 Group 20 Spindle 2 control modal
14 Group 15 Facing turret mirror image
15
16
17
18
19 Spindle clamp rotation speed
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F

1213 proaxy Side 1 of Specify the length on the rectangular coordinates of the ±9999.999
(PR) (For L inclination inclined axis in the triangle made up of the inclination
system angle angle.
only)
1214 macaxy Side 2 of Specify the length of the actual base axis ±9999.999
(PR) (For L inclination corresponding to the inclined axis in the triangle made
system angle up of the inclination angle.
only)
1215 macaxx Side 3 of Specify the length of the actual axis of the inclined axis ±9999.999
(PR) (For L inclination in the triangle made up of the inclination angle.
system angle
only)

III - 52
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1216 extdcc External Use an upper limit value at the feedrate indicated when 1 to 999999 (mm/min)
deceleration validating external deceleration signals.
level This parameter is valid when #1239 set11/bit6 is set to
0.
1217 aux01 Not used. Set to "0". 0
1218 aux02 Parameter Specify a parameter input/output format. 0/1
(bit3) input/output 0: Type I
format 1: Type II (related to #1218 aux02/bit5)
aux02 External Specify the R register that contains the tool number 0/1
(bit4) workpiece used for automatic calculation when measuring the
coordinate coordinate offset of an external workpiece.
offset tool 0: Conforms to #1130 set_t.
number 1: Uses the tool number indicated by user PLC
selection
aux02 Parameter Specify the spindle specification address of parameter 0/1
(bit5) I/O II spindle I/O type II.
specification 0: C
address 1: T
This parameter also applies to the spindle specification
address for input and collation.
(Note) This parameter is valid only for parameter I/O
type II ("#1218 aux02/bit3" is "1").
1219 aux03 Stop high- Set "1" to disable the function that stops the system 0/1
(bit1) speed PC when the high-speed processing time is extended.
monitoring Disable the monitoring function only as a temporary
function measure.
aux03 Dog-type Select whether to move to the intermediate point during 0/1
(bit5) intermediate automatic dog-type reference position return.
point 0: Do not move to intermediate point during
dog-type reference position return.
1: Move to intermediate point during dog-type
reference position return.
aux03 Time This switches the time constant for soft 0/1
(bit7) constant acceleration/deceleration.
setting 0: Accelerating time is G0tL (G1tL).
changeover 1: Accelerating time is obtained by G0tL + G0t1
for software (G1tL + G1t1).
acceleration/
deceleration
1220 aux04 Tool life Specify the life check standard applicable when the 0/1
(bit 0) check timing use count is incremented in tool life management II.
(For L selection 0: Determine that the tool life is over when the (Default: 0)
system incremented use count exceeds the life count.
only) (Use count > life count)
1: Determine that the tool life is over when the
incremented use count has reached the life
count. (Use count ≥ life count)
1221 aux05 Not used. Set to "0". 0

III - 53
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1222 aux06 Minimum cut-in Select the minimum cut-in amount command value 0/1
(bit4) amount selection for the compound thread cutting cycle (G76
command).
0: The minimum cut-in amount (Q) is "0".
1: The minimum cut-in amount (Q) is the CNC
internal data.
aux06 Fixed cycle Select the operation to be made if the 1st block of the 0/1
(bit5) for compound fixed cycle for compound lathe is omitted when the
lath command conventional format is selected (#1265 ext01/bit0
format check "0").
selection 0: Program error (P33) occurs.
1: Parameter setting value is used.
aux06 Zero point return Set the deceleration check method used during 0/1
(bit7) deceleration automatic reference position return.
check method 0: In-position check
1: Commanded deceleration check
1223 aux07 Deceleration Select the deceleration check method in G1+G9. 0/1
(bit1) check method 2 0: Command deceleration check in G1+G9
1: In-position check in G1+G9
The deceleration check is not performed except
G1+G9.
When #1306 InpsTyp deceleration check
specification type is set to "1" (Deceleration check
specification type 2), this parameter will be invalid.
aux07 Synchronous 0: Disable the synchronous tap I-point → R-point 0/1
(bit2) tap R-point in-position check.
in-position 1: Enable the synchronous tap I-point → R-point
check in-position check.
(Note) This parameter is valid only when 1
(in-position check is valid) is set in "#1223
aux07/bit3" (synchronous tap in-position
check improvement).
aux07 Synchronous Specify whether to enable the synchronous tap 0/1
(bit3) tap in-position in-position check improvement function.
check 0: Disable
improvement 1: Enable
Related parameters:
#1223
bit 2 Synchronous tap R-point in-position check
bit 4 Synchronous tap hole bottom in-position
check
bit 5 Synchronous tap R-point in-position check 2
(To be continued to the next page)

III - 54
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

aux07 Synchronous (Continued from the previous page) 0/1
(bit4) tap hole bottom 0: Disable the synchronous tap hole bottom
in-position in-position check.
check 1: Enable the synchronous tap hole bottom
in-position check.
(Note) This parameter is valid only when "1"
(in-position check is valid) is set in "#1223
aux07/bit3" (synchronous tap in-position
check improvement).
aux07 Synchronous 0: Disable synchronous tape R-point in-position 0/1
(bit5) tap R-point check.
in-position 1: Enable synchronous tape R-point in-position
check 2 check.
(Note) This parameter is valid only when 1
(in-position check is valid) is set in "#1223
aux07/bit3" (synchronous tap in-position
check improvement).
aux07 Cancel 0: Retains a spindle rotation speed (, S) when 0/1
(bit6) synchronous performing synchronous tap return.
tap (,S) return 1: Cancels a spindle rotation speed (, S) by return
with G80.
aux07 Synchronous Specify a synchronous tap method. 0/1
(bit7) tap method 0: Synchronous tap (multi-step acceleration and
deceleration and rapid return)
1: Conventional type synchronous tap
1224 aux08 Sampling data Set the validity of the sampling data output. 0/1
(bit0) output 0: Sampling output invalid
1: Sampling output valid
1225 aux09 Enable/disable Specify whether to enable spindle rotation speed 0/1
(bit6) spindle clamp by the spindle rotation speed clamp command
rotation speed (G92 Q) for the spindle rotation speed command
clamp 2 (R7000) set by the user ladder.
0: Follows aux09/bit7 setting
1: Only G92 S is valid for R7000. Q is invalid.
When this parameter is set to 1, setting for aux09/bit
7 is invalid.
aux09 Enable/disable Specify whether to enable spindle rotation speed 0/1
(bit7) spindle clamp by the spindle rotation speed clamp command
rotation speed (G92S, Q) instead of the spindle rotation speed
clamp command (R108) specified by the user ladder.
0: Enable
1: Disable

III - 55
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1226 aux10 Tool compen- Select the tool compensation data to be used for 0/1
(bit0) sation data for external workpiece coordinate offset measurement.
external 0: Tool length data and tool nose wear data
workpiece 1: Tool length data
coordinate
offset
measurement
aux10 Optional block Specify whether to enable optional block skipping in 0/1
(bit1) skip type the middle of a block.
0: Enable block skipping only at the beginning of a
block.
1: Enable block skipping at the beginning of the
block and in the middle of a block.
(To be continued to the next page)
aux10 Single block (Continued from the previous page) 0/1
(bit2) stop timing Specify the time at which the single block signal is
activated.
0: When the signal goes ON while automatic
operation is starting, the block stops after it is
finished.
1: When the signal is ON at the end of the block,
the block stops.
aux10 C-axis Specify the C-axis reference position return type. 0/1
(bit3) reference 0: Origin return is performed by the G28 reference
position return position return command or when manual
type reference position return is activated.
The origin dog is used.
1: When the first C-axis command is issued after
the C-axis mode is entered in automatic mode,
reference position return is performed before
execution of the block. Also, reference return is
performed by the G28 reference position return
command or when manual reference position
return is activated.
The Z phase of the encoder is used.
aux10 S command Specify whether to output a strobe signal when the S 0/1
(bit4) during constant command is issued in constant surface speed mode.
surface speed 0: Output no strobe signal in constant surface
speed mode.
1: Output strobe signals in constant surface speed
mode.
aux10 Arbitrary Specify whether to enable the arbitrary allocation 0/1
(bit5) allocation of parameter for the origin dog and H/W OT.
dog signal 0: Disable arbitrary allocation. (Fixed device)
1: Enable arbitrary allocation. (Device specified
by the parameter)
aux10 Shorten JOG Specify whether to shorten the JOG stop time. 0/1
(bit7) stop time 0: Do not shorten the JOG stop time. (Same as
before)
1: Shorten the JOG stop time.

III - 56
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1227 aux11 Select PLC Set up this option when disabling the cutting start 0/1
(bit0) signal or interlock by spindle feedrate attained.
spindle 0: Cutting start interlock by PLC signal
feedrate 1: Cutting start interlock by spindle feedrate attained
attained
aux11 Select H or D Set up this option to validate the data that is set up on 0/1
(bit1) code the tool life management screen when issuing the H99
or D99 command.
0: The H and D codes validate the data that is set up
on the management setup screen.
1: Validates the data that is set up on the
management setup screen when issuing the H99
or D99 command.
aux11 Measures Select a condition where a relieving operation 0/1
(bit2) against tool completes after measurement with tools.
setter 0: Sensor signals has stopped for 500ms or longer.
chattering 1: 100µs or longer has passed after sensor signals
stopped.
aux11 Spindle Specify whether to clamp the rotation in constant 0/1
(bit5) rotation surface speed mode when the spindle rotation speed
speed clamp clamp command is issued.
0: Clamp the rotation regardless of the constant
surface speed mode.
1: Clamp the rotation only in constant surface speed
mode.
aux11 Switch the Set up the range of tool life data to be input or 0/1
(bit7) range of tool compared.
life data to be 0: Inputs or compares all of the data output.
input 1: Inputs or compares part of the data output
(For M (1) Tool life management I data to be input or
system only) compared tool number (D), lifetime (E), life
count (F), and auxiliary data (B).
(2) Tool life management II data to be input or
compared Group number (G), method (M),
life (E/F), tool number (D), and compensation
number (H)
1228 aux12 Switch "offset Set up this option to switch the "offset and parameter" 0/1
(bit1) and screen to the parameter screen.
parameter" 0: Displays the "offset and parameter" screen.
screen 1: Displays the "parameter" screen.
aux12 Switch data Set up the range of data protection in data transmission 0/1
(bit2) protection in mode.
data 0: Protects both send and receive data.
transmission 1: Protects receive data only.
mode
aux12 Nose R Select whether to specify the nose R compensation by 0/1
(bit3) specification shape or wear number.
0: Specifies the nose R compensation by shape
number.
1: Specifies the nose R compensation by wear
number.

III - 57
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

aux12 Select operation Specify both block cutting start interlock and cutting 0/1
(bit4) error or stop start interlock as the operation error or stop code.
code 0: Operation error
1: Stop code
aux12 Select constant Select constant surface speed coordinates. 0/1
(bit5) surface speed 0: Workpiece coordinate value
coordinates 1: Absolute coordinate value
aux12 Switch relative Select whether to preset the relative coordinates 0/1
(bit6) values with workpiece coordinate preset (G92.1) or counter
displayed preset (G92).
0: Preset relative coordinates.
1: Do not preset relative coordinates.
aux12 Protection with Set up this option to protect a manual value 0/1
(bit7) manual value command.
command 0: Does not protect the manual value command
(same as before).
1: Protects the manual value command.
1229 set01 Subprogram 0: Specifies the user macro interrupt of macro type. 0/1
(bit0) interrupt 1: Specifies the user macro interrupt of
sub-program type.
set01 Accurate thread 0: Address E specifies the number of threads per 0/1
(bit1) cutting E inch for inch screw cutting.
1: Address E specifies precise reading for inch
screw cutting.
set01 Radius compen- 0: When the start-up and cancel commands are 0/1
(bit2) sation type B operated during radius compensation, their
(For M system blocks are not handled by intersection operation
only) processing; they are handled as offset vectors in
the direction vertical to that of the commands.
1: When the start-up and cancel commands are
operated during radius compensation, the
intersection operation processing of the
command block and the next block is executed.
set01 Nose R 0: When the start-up and cancel commands are 0/1
(bit2) compensation operated during nose R and radius
type B (For L compensation, their blocks are not handled by
system only) intersection operation processing; they are
handled as offset vectors in the direction vertical
to that of the commands.
1: When the start-up and cancel commands are
operated during nose R and radius
compensation, the intersection operation
processing of the command block and the next
block is executed.

III - 58
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

set01 Initial constant 0: The initial state after power-ON is a constant 0/1
(bit3) surface speed surface speed control cancel mode.
1: The initial state after power-ON is a constant
surface speed control mode.
set01 Synchronous tap 0: Handles the G74 and G84 tap cycles as the tap 0/1
(bit4) cycles with a floating tap chuck.
1: Handles the G74 and G84 tap cycles as the tap
cycles without a floating tap chuck.
set01 Start point alarm Select an operation when the operation start point 0/1
(bit5) cannot be found while moving the next block of
G117.
0: Enables an auxiliary function after the block
has been moved.
1: Outputs an program error (P33) when the
operation start point is not found.
set01 Grid display Select a grid type to be displayed on the servo 0/1
(bit6) selection monitor screen during dog type reference position
return.
0: Selects the distance between dog OFF and
zero point (including a grid mask amount).
1: Selects a value given by reducing a grid mask
amount from the distance between dog OFF
and zero point.
1230 set02 Macro interface 0: The macro interface input/output are shared 0/1
(bit7) input/output for by the part systems.
each part system 1: The macro interface input/output are used
independently by the part systems.
1231 set03 Graphic check When checking a machining program which rewrites 0/1
(bit0) compatibility the common variables, workpiece offsets and tool
parameter offsets, select whether or not to return the data to
the pre-starting data when finished.
0: Return the data.
1: Do not return the data.
set03 Switch zero point Select the position for displaying the zero point mark 0/1
(bit4) mark display in the graphic trace and 2D check.
position 0: Machine coordinate zero point (same as
conventional method)
1: Workpiece coordinate zero point
set03 Switch graphic Select the type of counter displayed on the Graphic 0/1
(bit5) check counter Check screen.
display 0: Machine position counter
1: Workpiece coordinate position counter
1232 set04 Not used. Set to "0". 0
1233 set05 Not used. Set to "0". 0
1234 set06 Not used. Set to "0". 0

III - 59
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1235 set07 Helical 0: Select normal speed designation also for 3rd 0/1
(bit0) interpolation axis
speed 2 1: Select arc plane element speed designation
set07 Fixed type When the fixed type compensation value is 0/1
(bit2) chopping selected, the method is changed to the
compensa- compensation value sequential update type after the
tion valid only at first four cycles.
start 0: Method changeover invalid
1: Method changeover valid
1236 set08 Manual rotary Select the unit of manual rotary axis feedrate. 0/1
(bit0) axis feedrate 0: Fixed to [°/min]
unit 1: Same speed as before (When inch
command, the speed is the command speed
divided by 25.4.)
set08 Spindle speed Select the pulse input source of actual spindle 0/1
(bit1) detection rotation speed output (R6506/R6507) when spindle
encoder serial connection (#3025 enc-on: 2) is
selected.
0: Serial input
1: Encoder input connector
set08 Current limit Set whether to cancel the position droop when the 0/1
(bit2) droop cancel current limit changeover signal is canceled.
invalid 0: Cancel droop.
1: Do not cancel droop.
set08 Rotary axis The rotary axis command speed is multiplied by 10 0/1
(bit3) command speed times.
scale 0: Invalid
1: During initial inching, the rotary axis command
speed is multiplied by 10. In other words, if
"F100" is commanded, the speed will be the
same as when 1000°/min is commanded.
The rotary axis speed display unit is 10°/min.
in this case.
1237 set09 Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)

III - 60
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1238 set10 Switch G36 If a G code system containing the G36 (automatic 0/1
(PR) (bit0) function tool length measurement X) function is selected,
select whether to use G36 for the automatic tool
length measurement or arc thread cutting (CCW)
function.
0: Automatic tool length measurement
1: Arc thread cutting (CCW)
set10 Switch operation Select whether to validate the NC alarm 5 (AL5) 0/1
(bit7) alarm signal output. (Default: 0)
0: NC alarm 5 (AL5) invalid
All operation alarms are output to NC alarm 4
(AL4).
All operation alarms are recorded in the alarm
history.
1: NC alarm 5 (AL5) valid
The following operation alarms are not output
to NC alarm 4 (AL4). These are output to NC
alarm 5 (AL5).
The operation alarms output to NC alarm 5
(AL5) are not recorded in the alarm history.
• External interlock axis found
• Cutting override zero
• External feedrate zero
• Block start interlock
• Cutting block start interlock
• Cutting interlock for spindle-spindle polygon
(G51.2)
1239 set11 Coil switching 0: Via PLC. (Y189F) 0/1
(PR) (bit0) method 1: NC internal processing. (Y189F is invalid.)
set11 Handle I/F Specify the handle connection destination. 0/1
(bit1) selection 0: Use the handle connected to the encoder
communication connector.
1: Use the remote I/O unit as a priority.
When HN391/HN392 is mounted, the handle
connected to the operation panel I/O unit will be
used regardless of this parameter setting.
set11 Polygon Select whether to cancel the polygon machining 0/1
(bit3) machining mode mode when reset is applied.
at reset 0: Do not cancel.
1: Cancel.
(To be continued to the next page)

III - 61
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

set11 Invalidate G51.1 (Continued from the previous page) 0/1
(bit4) phase Select whether to carry out phase control with the
command spindle-spindle polygon function.
0: Always validate phase control.
* When R is not commanded, it is handled as
R0.
1: Validate phase control only at R command
set11 Door interlock Select whether to validate the spindle clamp speed 0/1
(bit5) spindle speed changeover function by the PLC signal.
clamp valid 0: Invalid
1: Valid
set11 External Designate the method for setting the external 0/1
(bit6) deceleration deceleration speed.
axis compliance 0: Set speed common for all axes (#1216 extdcc
valid external deceleration speed)
1: Set speed for each axis (#2086 exdcax
external deceleration speed)
1240 set12 Handle input Select the handle input pulse. 0/1
(PR) (bit0) pulse 0: MITSUBISHI standard handle pulse
1: Handle 400 pulse
set12 Zero point shift If "1" is set, the following magnification will be 0/1
(bit2) amount applied on the #2027 G28sft reference position shift
magnification amount, #2057 zero point proximity + and #2058
zero point proximity - settings.
For 0.1µm : 10-fold
For 0.01µm : 100-fold
set12 Optical Set valid or invalid of the optical communication 0/1
(bit4) communication automatic channel detection.
automatic 0: Valid
channel 1: Invalid
detection invalid
1265 ext01 Command Select the command format for the fixed cycle for 0/1
(PR) (bit0) format 1 compound lathe.
0: Conventional format
1: MITSUBISHI CNC special format
(1 block command method)
ext01 Command Select the command format for the lathe fixed cycle. 0/1
(bit1) format 2 0: Conventional format
1: MITSUBISHI CNC special format
ext01 Command Select the command format for the hole drilling fixed 0/1
(bit2) format 3 cycle.
0: Conventional format
1: MITSUBISHI CNC special format
1266 ext02 Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)

III - 62
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1267 ext03 G code type Select the high-speed high-accuracy G code type. 0/1
(PR) (bit0) 0: Conventional format (G61.1)
1: MITSUBISHI special format (G08P1)
1268 ext04 Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)
1269 ext05 Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)
1270 ext06 Switch Set the continuous thread cutting Z phase wait 0/1
(PR) (bit6) continuous operation.
thread cutting Z 0: If there is no movement command (MST
phase wait command, etc.) between the thread cutting
operation locks, the 2nd block thread cutting waits for
the spindle's single rotation synchronization
signal before starting movement.
1: Even if there is no movement command (MST
command, etc.) between the thread cutting
blocks, the 2nd block thread cutting starts
movement without waiting for the spindle's
single rotation synchronization command.
ext06 Handle C axis Specify whether the rotary axis coordinate before 0/1
(bit7) coordinate the cylindrical interpolation start command is issued
during is kept during the cylindrical interpolation or not.
cylindrical 0: Do not keep
interpolation 1: keep
1271 ext07 Mirror image Select the type of mirror image operation. 0/1
(PR) (bit0) operation 0: Type 1 (Default: 0)
• The program mirror image, external mirror
image, and parameter mirror image are
exclusive to each other.
• An increment command moves the image to
the position indicated by the move amount with
the sign inverted.
1: Type 2
• Mirror image operation is enabled when the
program mirror image (G51.1) command is
issued or when the external signal or
parameter is ON.
• An increment command moves the image to
the position determined by applying the mirror
image to the absolute program coordinates.
ext07 Address Specify the address that specifies the fixed cycle 0/1
(bit1) specifying fixed repetition count. (Default: 0)
cycle repetition 0: Address L only
count (For M 1: Addresses K and L
system only) If addresses K and L are specified simultaneously,
the data at address K is used for operation.
(To be continued to the next page)

III - 63
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

ext07 F-command unit (Continued from the previous page) 0/1
(bit2) Specify the unit to be used if a thread cutting read (Default: 0)
command contains on decimal point.
0: Type 1 (conventional specifications)
F1 → 1 mm/rev, 1 inch/rev
1: Type 2
F1 → 0.01 mm/rev, 0.0001 inch/rev
ext07 G-code group Specify the G-code group for unidirectional 0/1
(bit3) for unidirectional positioning.
positioning (for 0: Unmodal G code (group 00)
M system only) 1: Modal G code (group 01)
Related parameter: #8209 G60 SHIFT (Set the last
positioning direction and distance for each axis
applicable when the unidirectional positioning
command is issued.)
ext07 Operation by Specify the mode of canceling radius compensation 0/1
(bit4) independent vector by the independent G40 command. (Default: 0)
G40 command 0: Type 1 (conventional specifications)
The independent G40 command cancels the
radius compensation vector.
1: Type 2
The radius compensation vector is not
canceled by the independent G40 command
but is canceled by the next move command
for the radius compensation plane.
ext07 Cut start Specify the position from where cutting begins in a 0/1
(bit5) position (For L fixed cycle for compound lathe. (Default: 0)
system only) 0: Conventional specifications
The cut start position is determined by the
final shaping program.
1: Extended specifications
The cut start position is determined from the
cycle start point.
ext07 Nose R Specify whether to apply nose R compensation to 0/1
(bit6) compensation shapes in a rough cutting cycle. (Default: 0)
(For L system 0: Conventional specifications
only) If nose R compensation is enabled for the
final shaping program, the shape obtained
after applying nose R compensation to the
final shaping program is used as the rough
cutting shape.
1: Extended specifications
The shape made by the final shaping
program, without nose R compensation, is
used as the rough cutting shape.
ext07 Cut amount (For Specify the operation to be performed when the 0/1
(bit7) L system only) program-specified cut amount exceeds the cut (Default: 0)
amount of the final shaping program.
0: Conventional specifications
A program error occurs if the
program-specified cut amount exceeds the
cut amount of the final shaping program.
1: Extended specifications
Rough cutting is performed by one cut if the
program-specified cut amount exceeds the
cut amount of the final shaping program.

III - 64
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1272 ext08 Switch pocket 0: Conventional specifications 0/1
(PR) (bit0) machining Pocket machining is selected with the H
operation designation.
The pull direction when pocket machining is
ON is the Z direction.
1: Extended specifications
If there is an X and Z axis in the first
movement block after the finished shape start
block is started, pocket machining will start.
The pull direction when pocket machining is
ON is the X direction.
ext08 M function Specify whether to enable the M function 0/1
(bit1) synchronous tap synchronous tap cycle.
cycle 0: Invalid
1: Valid
ext08 Spiral/conical Select the command format for spiral interpolation 0/1
(bit2) interpolation and conical interpolation.
command format 0: Type 1 (conventional specifications)
2 1: Type 2 (spiral speed L designation, increment
designation)
ext08 Switch macro Select whether to shift the argument to the 0/1
(bit3) call function subprogram if nests are overlapped when per block
call (G66.1) is commanded.
0: Shift argument even if nests are overlapped.
1: Do not shift arguments if nests differ.
(Conventional specifications)
ext08 Tap cycle Select the tap cycle. 0/1
(bit4) selection 0: Pecking tap cycle
1: Deep hole tap cycle
ext08 Deep hole tap Select whether to validate override on the pulling 0/1
(bit5) cycle override operation during synchronized tapping with the
selection deep hole tap cycle.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
ext08 Switch corner The corner chamfering/corner R command format 0/1
(bit6) chamfering/ is extended.
corner R 0: Command format I (conventional format)
command Issue a command with comma (,C and ,R).
format 1: Command format II
In addition to command format I, commands
can be issued with an address that does not
have a comma.
Corner chamfering: I/K or C, corner R: R
ext08 Return position Select the destination to return to after a macro 0/1
(bit7) after macro interrupt in the fixed cycle.
interrupt in fixed 0: Return to block in fixed cycle.
cycle selection 1: Return to block after fixed cycle.

III - 65
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1273 ext09 Switch ASIN Select the ASIN calculation results range. 0/1
(PR) (bit0) calculation 0: -90° to 90°
results range 1: 90° to 270°
ext09 Switch system Select the unit for the system variable #3002 (time 0/1
(bit1) variable unit during automatic start).
0: 1ms unit
1: 1 hour unit
ext09 Switch G71, Select whether to determine the cutting direction 0/1
(bit2) G72, G73 with the finished shape, or according to the
cutting direction commanded finishing allowance and cutting
judgment allowance when the longitudinal rough cutting cycle
(G71), face rough cutting cycle (G72) or closed loop
cutting cycle (G73) is commanded.
0: Conventional specifications
Determined according to the finished shape
program.
1: Extended specifications
Determined according to the finishing
allowance and cutting allowance commanded
in the program.
ext09 Facing turret Select the coordinate values of the axis for which 0/1
(bit3) mirror image facing turret mirror image is valid.
coordinate value 0: Move axis in same direction as machine
type value.
1: Move axis in direction opposite machine
value.
ext09 Facing turret Select the axis for which facing turret mirror image 0/1
(bit4) mirror image is valid.
valid axis 0: Fixed to 1st axis.
selection 1: Determined according to plane selected when
facing turret mirror image is commanded.
1274 ext10 Word range Select whether to check that the operation 0/1
(PR) (bit7) check expression of the word date in the program is
enclosed in brackets ( [ ] ) when the machine
program is executed.
This check is also applied to the 08000 to 09999
and the machine tool builder macro program.
0: Check valid
1: Check invalid
1275 ext11 Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)
1276 ext12 Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)

III - 66
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1277 ext13 Tool life Specify how and when the mount or use count is 0/1
(PR) (bit0) management II incremented in tool life management II. (Default: 0)
count type 2 0: Type 1
The count is incremented when the spindle is
used for cutting.
1: Type 2
The count is incremented for the tool used or
mounted for one program. The increment is
enabled by resetting.
ext13 Tool life Specify whether to validate tool life prediction 0/1
(bit1) management II function in tool life management II.
life prediction 0: Invalid
1: Valid
ext13 Tool life Select the timing in which tool life prediction signal 0/1
(bit2) management II is output in tool life management II.
life end signal 0: Output only when the ["life value" - "used
timing value"] matches the remaining life.
("life value" - "used value" = "remaining life")
1: Output when the ["life value" - "used value"] is
less than the remaining life.
("life value" - "used value" ≤ "remaining life")
ext13 Tool life Select the axis that outputs tool life prediction signal 0/1
(bit3) management II in tool life management II.
life end signal 0: Output the signal tool by tool.
tool 1: Output the signal at last axis in the group.
1278 ext14 Program restart Select the program restart method. 0/1
(PR) (bit0) method selection 0: Restart type A
1: Restart type B
1279 ext15 Part system Select the part system synchronization method. 0/1
(PR) (bit0) synchroniza- 0: If one part system is not in automatic
tion method operation, ignore the synchronization
command and execute the next block.
1: Operate according to the synchronization
ignore signal.
If the synchronization ignore signal is set to
"1", the synchronization command will be
ignored. When set to "0", synchronization will
be applied.
ext15 Interrupt amount Select the manner to handle the interruption 0/1
(bit1) during machine amount during machine lock.
lock 0: Cancel when reset.
1: Do not cancel when reset. Instead cancel
during manual zero point return.
ext15 Selection of Select whether the cutting start interlock is valid for 0/1
(bit2) cutting start successive cutting blocks.
interlock target 0: Valid for successive cutting blocks.
block 1: Invalid for successive cutting blocks.

III - 67
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1280 ext16 I/F per axis Set the handling of the following PLC I/F for axes 0/1
(PR) (bit0) during cross interchanged with cross machining control.
machining • Mirror image
control • Manual/automatic interlock
• Manual/automatic machine lock
0: Follows axis configuration before cross
machining control.
1: Follows axis configuration after cross
machining control.
(Example) Set as follows for the automatic
interlock (+) device for X1 when
carrying out cross machining with the
1st axis (X1) in the 1st part system and
1st axis (X2) in the 2nd part system.
Setting value 0: Y820 (I/F for 1st axis in
1st part system)
Setting value 1: Y828 (I/F for 1st axis in
2nd part system)
(Note) If the number of axes in the part system
changes with cross machining, the I/F of the
target axis may change when this parameter
is set to "1".
(Example) When 1st part system's C axis is moved
to 2nd part system with a 1st part
system (X, Z, C, Y) and 2nd part system
(X, Z) configuration:
When setting value is "1":
Y82A, Y7CA and Y8AA, etc., will be
the I/F for the C axis moved to the 2nd
part system. However, Y7C2, Y822
and Y8A2, etc., will change to the I/F
of the Y axis in the 1st part system
because the axes following the
removed C axis (third place) are
shifted up.
(To be continued to the next page)

III - 68
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

ext16 Cross (Continued from the previous page) 0/1
(bit1) machining Select whether to cancel the cross machining
control cancel control when reset is applied.
with reset 0: Cancel cross machining control with reset.
1: Do not cancel cross machining control with
reset
ext16 Interchange Set whether to interchange (or move) the 0/1
(bit2) coordinate coordinate positions when displaying.
position display This setting will be followed when the axes are
interchanged and when the axes are moved.
0: Interchange (or move) coordinate positions
with cross machining control, and display.
1: Display coordinate positions for cross
machining control without interchanging (or
moving).
(Example) When 1st part system's C axis is moved
to 2nd part system with a 1st part
system (X, Z, C, Y) and 2nd part system
(X, Z) configuration:
1st part system: X, Z and Y coordinate
positions are displayed.
2nd part system: X, Z and C coordinate
positions are displayed.
ext16 Reset operation Select whether to cancel synchronization/ 0/1
(bit3) for synchroniza- superimposition control with resetting.
tion/super- 0: Cancel.
imposition 1: Do not cancel.
control

III - 69
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1281 ext17 Zero point (Zero point setting operation) 0/1
(PR) (bit0) return The "Operation error 1036" will occur regardless of
operation this parameter, and regardless of manual or
changeover automatic operation.
parameter (High-speed zero point return)
0: <During manual operation>
The master axis and slave axis will
simultaneously start zero point return. Even if
one of the axes reaches the zero point, the
other axis will continue to move until it
reaches the zero point. Thus, if the difference
of the master axis and slave axis feedback
position before zero point return is larger than
the tolerable synchronization error amount,
the error "Operation error 0051" will occur
during zero point return.
<During automatic operation>
The master axis and slave axis will
simultaneously start zero point return. When
the master axis reaches the zero point, the
slave axis will stop. Thus, the positional
relation of the master axis and slave axis
established before zero point return is
maintained.
1: <During manual operation>
<During automatic operation>
The master axis and slave axis will
simultaneously start zero point return. When
the master axis reaches the zero point, the
slave axis will stop. Thus, the positional
relation of the master axis and slave axis
established before zero point return is
maintained.
ext17 Synchronous Set whether or not the positioning of slave axis 0/1
(bit3) control aligns with that of master axis when the axis subject
Operation to synchronous control is changed from servo OFF
setting to servo ON.
0: Does not align automatically
1: Align automatically
1282 ext18 Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)
1283 ext19 Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)
1284 ext20 Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)

III - 70
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1285 ext21 Multi-part 0: When a machining program is newly 0/1
(PR) (bit0) system program registered, it is registered as a program for
generation and the selected part system.
operation 1: When a program is newly registered, a part
system common program No. is generated
unconditionally. If there are no contents in the
subprogram when a subprogram is called
during automatic operation, the program will
be searched for and executed from $1.
ext21 Changeover of 0: Select the program in the selected part 0/1
(bit1) method to select system with operation search.
operation 1: Select a common part system program with
program operation search. (A common part system
program No. will be selected.)
1286 ext22 Program 0: Only the programs in the selected part 0/1
(PR) (bit0) input/output system are input/output.
method selection 1: The designated programs are output for all
part systems. The part systems are delimited
with the "$" mark. The programs delimited
with the $ mark are assigned and input into
each part system. (If the program does not
have a $ mark, it will be handled as system
1.)
ext22 0 No. for Select the action to be taken when the same 0/1
(bit2) program input program No. is input during data input.
No. 0: The 0 No. when the same 0 No. is input
successively is handled as a character string
data.
1: The 0 No. is handled as a program No. when
the same 0 No. is input successively.
Whether to overwrite the program or cause
an error is set with #1218 bit 7 "Input by
program overwrite".
ext22 No 0 No. at This setting enables the machining program input 0/1
(bit3) machining even if there is no program No. (0 No.).
program input The program No. is fixed to 01 in this case.
0: Input disabled
1: Input enabled

III - 71
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1287 ext23 Relative (Continued from the previous page) 0/1
(PR) (bit4) coordinate (M system)
display 0: Display the actual position including tool
length offset.
1: Display the machining position in terms of a
program command excluding tool length
offset.
(L system)
0: Display the actual position including tool
shape compensation.
1: Display the machining position in terms of a
program command excluding tool shape
compensation.
ext23 Relative (M system) 0/1
(bit5) coordinate 0: Display the actual position including tool
display radius compensation.
1: Display the machining position in terms of a
program command excluding tool radius
compensation.
(L system)
0: Display the actual position including nose R
compensation.
1: Display the machining position in terms of a
program command excluding nose R
compensation.
ext23 Absolute (M system) 0/1
(bit6) coordinate 0: Display the actual position including tool
display length offset.
[Special display 1: Display the machining position in terms of a
unit compatible] program command excluding tool length
offset.
(L system)
0: Display the actual position including tool
shape compensation.
1: Display the machining position in terms of a
program command excluding tool shape
compensation.
ext23 Absolute (M system) 0/1
(bit7) coordinate 0: Display the actual position including tool
display radius compensation.
[Special display 1: Display the machining position in terms of a
unit compatible] program command excluding tool radius
compensation.
(L system)
0: Display the actual position including nose R
compensation.
1: Display the machining position in terms of a
program command excluding nose R
compensation.
With the L system, the effect onto the nose R
compensation's absolute coordinate counter is also
affected by the L system coordinate changeover
parameter (#1227 aux11/bit 3 absolute coordinate
changeover (nose R)). In actual use, if this
parameter is set to 1, or if #1227 aux 11/bit 3 is set
to 1, the position in the program commands will be
displayed with the absolute coordinate counter.

III - 72
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1288 ext24 MDI program Select whether to initialize the MDI buffer when MDI 0/1
(PR) (bit0) clear operation ends, the power is turned ON again, reset
is input, or emergency stop is canceled.
0: Do not clear programs registered with MDI.
1: Clear programs registered with MDI, and save
only % programs.
1289 ext25 Tool radius Switch judgment method for outer rounding of the 0/1
(PR) (bit0) compensation small corner in tool radius compensation.
switch corner (L system)
judgment 0: Conventional method (When the corner angle
method (Nose R is 0°)
compensation) 1: Method for rounding minute corner angle
(When the corner angle is 1° or smaller)
(M system)
0: Conventional method (When the corner angle
is 1° or smaller)
1: Method for rounding minute corner angle
(When the corner angle is 1° or smaller)
1290 ext26 Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)
1291 ext27 Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)
1292 ext28 Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)
1293 ext29 Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)
1294 ext30 Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)
1295 ext31 Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)
1296 ext32 Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)
1297 ext33 Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)
1298 ext34 Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)
1299 ext35 Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)
1300 ext36 Multiple spindle Select multiple spindle control I or II. 0/1
(PR) (bit0) control II 0: Multiple spindle control I (L system only)
1: Multiple spindle control II (select from ladder)
ext36 Spindle Select the spindle synchronization command 0/1
(bit7) synchroniza- method.
tion command 0: Spindle synchronization with PLC I/F
method 1: Spindle synchronization with G command
1301 nrfchk Origin Select the high-speed check method of the origin 0 to 2
neighboring neighboring signal.
check method 0: Do not check positions near the origin at high
speeds. (Conventional specifications)
1: Check positions near the origin at high speeds
using command machine positions.
2: Check positions near the origin at high speeds
using detector feedback positions.

III - 73
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1302 AutoRP Automatic 0: Return the system to the restart position 0/1
return by manually and then restart the program.
program 1: For program restarting, the first activation
restart automatically moves the system to the restart
position.
1303 V1comN No. of #100 Set the number of common variables common for 0 to 100
(PR) address part the part system starting from address #100.
system This is valid only when #1052 MemVal is set to "1".
common
variables
1304 V0comN No. of #500 Set the number of common variables common for 0 to 500
(PR) address part the part system starting from address #500.
system This is valid only when #1052 MemVal is set to "1".
common
variables
1306 InpsTyp Deceleration Select the parameter specification type for the G0 0/1
check or G1 deceleration check.
specification 0: Deceleration check specification type 1
type G0 is specified with "#1193 inpos", and
G1+G9 with "#1223 aux07/BIT1".
1: Deceleration check specification type 2
G0 or G1+G9 is specified with "#1193 inpos".
1309 GType Switch Select the operation in respect to the command. 0/1
(PR) command 0: Command reverse tap with G84.1/G88.1.
format 1: Command reverse tap with a minus D
command value.
1310 WtMmin Minimum value Set the minimum value for the M code. When "0" is 0, 100 to 99999999
for set, the synchronization M code will be invalid.
synchroniza-
tion M code
1311 WtMmax Maximum Set the maximum value for the M code. When "0" is 0, 100 to 99999999
value for set, the synchronization M code will be invalid.
synchroniza-
tion M code
1312 T_base Tool life When the T code command is issued while 0 to 9999
management specifying a value that exceeds the value set in this
standard parameter, the value obtained by subtracting the
number set value from the command value is used as the
tool group number for tool life management.
The value specified by the T code command is
equal to or less than the value set in this parameter,
the T code is handled as a normal T code and not
subjected to tool life management.
When 0 is set in this parameter, the T code
command always specifies a group number. (This
parameter is valid for M-system tool life
management II.)

III - 74
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1313 TapDw1 Synchronous Specify the hole bottom wait time for synchronous 0 to 999 (ms)
tap hole tapping.
bottom wait When the P address is specified, the greater value is
time used as the hole bottom wait time. When an
in-position check is performed at the hole bottom,
dwelling for the specified time is completed after the
in-position check is complete. (Applicable only to the
M64 D version series)
(Note) This parameter is valid only when "1" is set in
#1223 aux07/bit1 (synchronous tap in-position
check improvement).
1314 TapInp Synchronous Specify the hole bottom in-position check width for 0.000 to 99.999
tap synchronous tapping.
in-position (Note) This parameter is valid only when "1" is set in
check width #1223 aux07/bit1 (synchronous tap in-position
(tap axis) check improvement).
1324 Chop_R Chopping Specify the head No. of the R register used as the 8300 to 9782 (Only
(PR) compensa- compensation amount save area during fixed the even number)
tion value compensation amount method. (Backup area)
fixing method When the first number is an odd number, the
operation message "Setting error" appears.
When overlapping with the chopping control data
area, the operation message "Setting error" appears.
1326 PLC Const PLC constant Set the number of PLC constant extension points. 0 to 750
Ext. extension
Number number

1327 3D ATC Tool change Specify the tool change method for determining the 0 to 2
type method tool used to draw solids.
specification
With 3D drawing, the tool is changed by the method
designated with this parameter, and the image is
drawn.
0: One standby tool
1: Two standby tools
2: No standby tools
1328 TLM type Tool Select the tool measurement method. 0/1
measurement 0: Use the machine position at TLM switch ON as
standard 0.
positions 1: Use the machine zero point as standard.
election
1329 Emgcnt Emergency Set the time taken for the drive section's main power 0 to 60 (s)
stop to be shut-off when the confirmation of all the axes'
contactor stop failed after the emergency stop state.
shut-off time The contactor shut-off signal is output as soon as all
the axses are confirmed stopped if the confirmation is
done prior to the set time.
When there is no safety observation option and "0" is
set, the shut-off time is 30(s).

III - 75
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1330 MC_dp1 Contactor When safety observation is executed, set the remote 000 to 02FF (HEX)
(PR) weld I/O device to input the contactor's auxiliary b contact
detection signal used for the contactor weld detection.
device 1 If "0" is set, weld detection is not executed.
1331 MC_dp2 Contactor
(PR) weld
detection
device 2
1332 F-bus init Fieldbus Start communication after turing CNC power ON. 0 to 255 (0.1s)
(PR) delay communicat- Then, set the time where Fieldbus communication Standard: 0
ion error
error is not detected. Set this in 0.1 second increment.
invalid time
1333 LMC Lost motion 0: Lost motion compensation won't be restrained. 0/1
restrain compensation 1: Lost motion compensation in handle mode will
restraint in be restrained.
handle mode
1334 DI/DO DI/DO refresh Select the DI/DO refresh cycle. 0 to 2
refresh cycle 0: Standard mode
cycl 1: High-speed mode 1
2: High-speed mode 2

(Note 1) This parameter is valid for M700 and M70

(typeA) series. "Standard mode" is applied
to M70 (typeB) regardless of this
parameter.
(Note 2) The speed may not be high if number of
ladder steps is excessive.
(Note 3) If high-speed mode is selected, the fine
segment processing performance may
degrade.
1493 ref_syn Synchronizat- 0: Master axis and slave axis determine their zero 0/1
(PR) ion at zero points individually.
point 1: The zero points of both master and slave axes are
initialization determined by initializing the master axis's zero
point.
The slave axis moves in perfect synchronization
with the master axis.
Set this to "1" for speed/current command
synchronization control.
1501 polyax Rotational Specify the number of the rotational tool axis (servo 0 to controlled axis
(For L tool axis axis) used for polygon machining (G51.2). Set 0 number
system number when not using polygon machining (spindle-servo
only) axis), or when using spindle-spindle polygon
machining. A value exceeding the base specification
parameter #1002 axisno cannot be specified.
This parameter is valid when the G code system is 6
or 7 (7 or 8 is set in base specification parameter
#1037 cmdtyp).
1502 G0Ipfg G1 → G0 0: Do not perform a deceleration check when the 0/1
deceleration move direction is changed from G1 to G0.
check 1: Perform a deceleration check when the move
direction is changed from G1 to G0.
1503 G1Ipfg G1 → G1 0: Do not perform a deceleration check when the 0/1
deceleration move direction is changed from G1 to G1.
check 1: Perform a deceleration check when the move
direction is changed from G1 to G1.

III - 76
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1505 ckref2 Second Specify whether the check is carried out at the 0/1
reference specified position in manual second reference
position position return mode upon completion of spindle
return check orientation or at second reference posirion return
interlock signal.
0: Upon completion of spindle orientation
1: At second reference position return interlock
signal
1506 F1_FM Upper limit of Specify the maximum value up to which the F1 digit 0 to 60000
F1 digit feedrate can be changed. (mm/min)
feedrate
1507 F1_K F1 digit Specify the constant that determines the speed 0 to 32767
feedrate change rate per manual handle graduation in F1
change digit feedrate change mode.
constant
1510 DOOR_H Shorten door Specify whether to shorten the time during which the 0/1
interlock II axis is stopped when the door is opened.
axis stop time 0: Use the conventional axis stop time.
1: Shorten the axis stop time.
(Note) When the door interlock II signal is input via a
ladder, the conventional axis stop time is
used.
1511 DOORPm Signal input Specify the fixed device number (X??) for door 000 to 2FF
device 1 for interlock II signal input for each part system. (hexadecimal)
door interlock A device number from X01 to XFF can be specified.
II: for each Device number 000 is invalid.
part system Specify device number 100 when using no fixed
device number for door interlock II signal input.
Related parameter: #1154 pdoor (Door interlock II
for each part system)
1512 DOORPs Signal input Specify the fixed device number (X??) for door 000 to 2FF
device 2 for interlock II signal input for each part system. (hexadecimal)
door interlock (Specify the same value as that of #1155.)
II: for each Related parameter: #1154 pdoor (Door interlock II
part system for each part system)
1513 stapM M code for Select the synchronous tap mode using the 0 to 99999999
synchronous miscellaneous function code of the value set in this
tap selection parameter. The M function command can be
issued immediately before the tap command or in
the same block. This function is valid only when 1
is set in #1272 ext08/bit 1 (Enable/disable
M-function synchronous tap cycle).
(Note) Do not use M00, 01 02, 30, 98, and 99.
1514 expLinax Exponential Set the axis address name for the linear axis used in A to Z
function exponential function interpolation.
interpolation
linear axis
1515 expRotax Exponential Set the axis address name for the rotary axis used in A to Z
function exponential function interpolation.
interpolation
rotary axis
1516 mill_ax Milling axis Set the name of the rotary axis used in milling A to Z
name interpolation. Only one rotary axis can be set.
When there is no E command in issuing the G12.1
command, this parameter will be followed.

III - 77
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1517 mill_C Milling Select the hypothetical axis command name for 0/1
interpolation milling interpolation.
hypothetical When there is no D command in issuing the G12.1
axis name command, this parameter will be followed.
0: Y axis command
1: Command rotary axis name.
1518 polm Spindle- Set the number of the workpiece spindle used in 0 to number of
spindle spindle-spindle polygon machining. spindles
polygon (Note) The 1st spindle will be selected when "0" is
Workpiece set.
spindle No.
1519 pols Spindle- Set the number of the tool spindle used in spindle- 0 to number of
spindle spindle polygon machining. spindles
polygon (Note) The 2nd spindle will be selected when "0" is
Tool spindle set.
No.
1520 Tchg34 Additional Select whether to carry out the additional axis' tool 0/1
(PR) axis tool compensation function with the 3rd axis or 4th axis.
compensa- 0: Select 3rd axis.
tion operation 1: Select 4th axis.
1521 C_min Minimum Set the minimum turning angle of the normal line 0.000 to 360.000 (°)
turning angle control axis at the block joint during normal line (Input setting
control. increment applies)
1522 C_axis Normal line Set the number of the axis for normal line control. 0: Normal line control
(PR) control axis Designate a rotary axis No. disabled
1 to 8: Axis No.
(number of control
axes)
1523 C_feed Normal line This is valid with normal line control type I. 0 to 1000000
control axis Designate the turning speed of the normal line (°/min)
turning speed control axis at the block joint during normal line
control.
Set a value that does not exceed the normal line
control axis' clamp speed (#2002 clamp).
1524 C_type Normal line Set the normal line control type. 0: Normal line control
control type type I
1: Normal line control
type II
1533 millPax Pole Set the linear axis used for pole coordinate Control axis address
coordinate interpolation. such as X, Y or Z
linear axis
name
1534 SnG44.1 Spindle No. Set the selected spindle No. for the G44.1 0: 2nd spindle
for G44.1 command. 1: 1st spindle
command 2: 2nd spindle
#1199 #1534 Selected spindle 3: 3rd spindle
0:G43.1 Not used. 1st spindle 4: 4th spindle
1:G44.1 0 2nd spindle If a spindle that does
1 1st spindle not exist is set, the
2 2nd spindle 2nd spindle will be
3 3rd spindle used. Note that if
4 4th spindle there is only one
2:G47.1 Not used. All spindles spindle, the 1st
spindle will be used.

III - 78
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1535 C_leng Minimum turning Set the minimum turning movement amount of the 0.000 to 99999.999
movement normal line control axis at the block joint during (mm)
amount normal line control. (Input setting
increment applies)
1537 crsax[1] Cross Set the axis to be interchanged during cross Two digits between A
to to machining machining control. to Z and 1 to 9
1544 crsax[8] control axis Using two digits, set the name of the axis to be (Setting is cleared
interchanged with the axis in the part system where when 0 is set)
the mixed synchronization control (cross machining
control) request signal is input, or the name of the
axis to be shifted to that part system.
1561 3Dcdc Switch The workpiece coordinate display during 3D 0/1
workpiece coordinate conversion is switched to the workpiece
coordinate coordinate system or G68 program coordinate
display during system.
3D coordinate 0: Workpiece coordinate system
conversion 1: G68 program coordinate system
(Note) The special display unit's absolute
coordinates also follow this parameter
setting.
1562 3Dremc Switch The remaining command display during 3D 0/1
remaining coordinate conversion is switched to the workpiece
command coordinate system or G68 program coordinate
display during system.
3D coordinate 0: Workpiece coordinate system
conversion 1: G68 program coordinate system
1563 3Dcdrc Switch The coordinate system of the workpiece/skip 0/1
coordinate coordinate read value in the 3D coordinate
reading during conversion modal is switched.
3D coordinate 0: G68 program coordinate system
conversion 1: Workpiece (local) coordinate system
1564 3Dspd Hole drilling Set the rapid traverse rate for the hole drilling cycle 0/1
speed during 3D during 3D coordinate conversion.
coordinate 0: The cutting feed clamp speed is used.
conversion Other than 0: The set speed is used.
Note that if the rapid traverse rate
is exceeded, the speed will be
clamped at the rapid traverse rate.
1568 SfiltG1 G01 soft This is the filter time constant for smoothly changing 0 to 200 (ms)
acceleration/ the acceleration rate for the cutting feed
deceleration acceleration/deceleration in pre-interpolation
filter acceleration/deceleration.
1569 SfiltG0 G00 soft This is the filter time constant for smoothly changing 0 to 200 (ms)
acceleration/ the acceleration rate for the rapid traverse
deceleration acceleration/deceleration in pre-interpolation
filter acceleration/deceleration.
1570 Sfilt2 Soft This is the filter time constant for smoothly changing 0 to 50 (ms)
acceleration/ the acceleration rate during pre-interpolation
deceleration acceleration/deceleration.
filter 2 This is invalid when "0" or "1" is set.
1571 SSSdis SSS control The shape recognition range for SSS control is 0/1
adjustment fixed.
coefficient
fixed value
selection

III - 79
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1572 Cirorp Arc command This eliminates speed fluctuations at the joint of the 0 to F (HEX)
overlap arc and straight line and arc and arc.
Set as a bit unit.
0: Do not overlap the arc command blocks
1: Overlap the arc command blocks
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Arc command during high-speed

high-accuracy control II
Arc command during high-speed machining
mode II
Arc command during high-accuracy control
(G61.1)
Arc command during cutting mode (G64)

The line command block and arc command block

won't be overlapped during G61.2 modal
regardless of this setting.

(Note) This parameter is invalid during SSS

control.
1573 Ret1 Return type 1 Specify the axis to be moved later after tool return. 00000000 to
This is referred to with the movement path (transit 11111111 (Binary)
point #1 → interrupt point).
Up to eight axes can be specified by expressing
one axis with one bit.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Transit point #1 1st axis

Transit point #1 2nd axis
Transit point #1 3rd axis
Transit point #1 4th axis
Transit point #1 5th axis
Transit point #1 6th axis
Transit point #1 7th axis
Transit point #1 8th axis

1574 Ret2 Return type 2 Specify the axis to be moved later after tool return. 00000000 to
This is referred to with the movement path (return 11111111 (Binary)
start point → transit point #2).
Up to eight axes can be specified by expressing
one axis with one bit.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Transit point #2 1st axis

Transit point #2 2nd axis
Transit point #2 3rd axis
Transit point #2 4th axis
Transit point #2 5th axis
Transit point #2 6th axis
Transit point #2 7th axis
Transit point #2 8th axis

III - 80
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1590 Animate Machine status bit0 0: 1st axis + direction is set to the right 0 to F (HEX)
ax direct animated direction.
display axis ± 1: 1st axis + direction is set to the left
direction direction.
bit1 0: 2nd axis + direction is set to the rear
direction.
1: 2nd axis + direction is set to the front
direction.
bit2 0: 3rd axis + direction is set to the top
direction.
1: 3rd axis + direction is set to the bottom
direction.
1591 Animate Machine status Set the name of the 1st axis displayed with the Address for control
ax-1 animated machine status animation. If the axis name is not axis such as X, Y, Z
display axis specified, the current 1st axis name (#1013
name (1st axis) axname) is used.
3rd axis

1st axis
2nd axis
1592 Animate Machine status Set the name of the 2nd axis displayed with the Address for control
ax-2 animated machine status animation. If the axis name is not axis such as X, Y, Z
display axis specified, the current 2nd axis name (#1013
name (2nd axis) axname) is used.
1593 Animate Machine status Set the name of the 3rd axis displayed with the Address for control
ax-3 animated machine status animation. If the axis name is not axis such as X, Y, Z
display axis specified, the current 3rd axis name (#1013
name (3rd axis) axname) is used.

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1801 Hacc_c Not used. Set to "0". 0
1802 Macc_c
1803 Lacc_c
1811 Hcof_A
1812 Hcof_B
1813 Mcof_A
1814 Mcof_B
1815 Lcof_A
1816 Lcof_B
1817 mag_C
1821 Hcof_A
1822 Hcof_B
1823 Mcof_A
1824 Mcof_B
1825 Lcof_A
1826 Lcof_B
1827 mag_C

III - 81
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1901 station addr Not used. Set to "0". 0
(PR)
1902 Din size
(PR)
1903 Dout size
(PR)
1904 data length
(PR)
1905 baud rate
(PR)
1906 stop bit
(PR)
1907 parity check
(PR)
1908 even parity
(PR)
1909 Tout (ini)
(PR)
1910 Tout (run)
(PR)
1911 clock select
(PR)

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

1925 EtherNet Start of service Start or stop the Ethernet communication function. 0/1
0: Stop
1: Start
1926 IP IP address Set the main CPU's IP address. Set these parameters
(PR) address Set the NC IP address looking from an external in accordance with the
source. network rules in the
1927 Subnet Subnet mask Set the subnet mask for the global IP address. connection
(PR) mask environment.
1928 Gateway Gateway Set the IP address for the global gateway.
(PR) address
1929 Port Port No. Set the port No. for the service function. 1 to 9999
number (Set 2000 when not
connected to the
Ethernet.)
1930 Host Host address Set the host's IP address. 0.0.0.0 to
(PR) address 255.255.255.255
1931 Host Host No. Set the host's port No. 1 to 9999
(PR) number
1934 Local IP HMI side CPU IP address Set these parameters
(PR) address in accordance with the
1935 Local HMI side CPU subnet mask network rules in the
(PR) Subnet connection
mask environment.

III - 82
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

11001 APC type APC screen Set the type of screen displayed with the pallet 0/1
(PR) display type program registration screen.
selection 0: Standard pallet registration screen
1: Pallet 4-page registration screen
11002 Valid Number of Set the number of pallets validated on the pallet 2 to 12 (Interpreted as
(PR) pallet num pallets setting program registration screen. 2 when 0 is set.)
11003 APLC APLC valid Temporarily invalidate APLC. 0/1
(PR) valid Normally set "1".
0: Invalid
1: Valid
11004 PLCauto- PLC automatic Switch starting condition of the built-in PLC. 0/1
(PR) run enable startup valid 0： Start PLC after NC screen startup
1： Start PLC at NC startup
(Note) When standard NC screen is not used, set
"1".
11005 PC IP IP address Set the IP address for the display unit or PC in 0.0.0.0 to
address setting which machining programs are stored. 255.255.255.255
Set the IP address for the display unit of which
power is turned OFF with automatic power OFF.
(Note) When "0.0.0.0" is input, "192.168.100.2" is
automatically set.
11006 PC Port Port No. Set the port No. for the display unit or PC in which 0 to 65535
number setting machining programs are stored.
(Note 1) When 0 is input, 55555 is automatically
set.
(Note 2) When changing the parameter, set the
same value in "PD_Control_Port" in the
PC side environment setting file.
11007 PC Communicatio Set the NC side communication timeout time. 0 to 300 (s)
Timeout n timeout time (Note 1) When 0 is input, 30 is automatically set.
setting (Note 2) When the value greater than 300 is set, a
setting error occurs.
(Note 3) When changing the parameter, set the
same value in "PD_Time_out" in the PC
side environment setting file.
11009 M2 label M2 label O Set the program number label when using the M2 0/1
(PR) O format.
0: Label L
1: Label O
11010 Software Software Select with touch panel whether to use software 0/1
(PR) keyboard keyboard keyboard.
0: Do not use
1: Use

III - 83
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

11011 Handy Handy terminal Set the password used for the handy terminal 0000 to 9999
TERM. password customized downloading.
PW. Blank (when "0" is set) and "0000" are regarded as
no password.
Not the password of a new customizing file but the
password of the customizing file downloaded to the
last handy terminal is set.
Set blank or "0000" when initially downloading.
11012 16 axes Connecting 16 Switch the maximum number of axes (sum of the 0/1
(PR) for 1ch axes for 1ch NC axis, spindle, and PLC axis) connected to the
drive unit interface (channel 1) when not using the
extension unit (FCU7-EX891+HN552)
0: Up to 8 axes can be connected to channel 1.
1: Up to 16 axes can be connected to channel 1.
Note that "OMR-DD function" is not available.
This parameter is invalid when the extension
unit is connected. It is possible to connect only
up to eight axes or less per channel.

III - 84
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

12001 ManualB Manual feed Set the part system axis name (#1013 axname) Axis addresses such
RectanA rate B constant for the two axes that intersect with the rotary axis as X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A,
xH surface control direction. If one of the two axes is blank, a B, and C
intersecting constant speed will be applied without using
part system constant surface speed control.
axis name
(horizontal)
12002 ManualB Manual feed
RectanA rate B constant
xV surface control
intersecting
part system
axis name
(vertical)
12003 ManualB Manual feed Set the machine coordinate position (horizontal -99999.999 to
RotCent rate B constant axis) at the center of the rotary axis. 99999.999 (mm)
erH surface control
rotation center
machine
position
(horizontal)
12004 ManualB Manual feed Set the machine coordinate position (vertical axis) -99999.999 to
RotCent rate B constant at the center of the rotary axis. 99999.999 (mm)
erV surface control
rotation center
machine
position
(vertical)
12005 Mfig Number of M Number of M: Set the number of M that can be 1 to 4
(PR) specified within the same block.
12006 Mbin M binary M binary: Refer to the following table. Data type
(PR) Data type Output data (-1,0,1)
0 BCD
1 Unsigned binary
-1 Singed binary
For unsigned binary:
The absolute value 1 is output for -1.
For singed binary:
-1 is output as "0xFFFFFFFF".

III - 85
 4. Base Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

12007 Sfig Number of S Number of S: Set the number of spindles. 1 to 4
(PR) S binary: Refer to the following table.
12008 Sbin S binary Data type Output data Data type
(PR) 0 BCD (-1,0,1)
1 Unsigned binary
-1 Singed binary
For unsigned binary:
The absolute value 1 is output for -1.
For singed binary:
-1 is output as "0xFFFFFFFF".
(Note 1) Sfig is set in the range of 1 to 4.
However, the number of outputs by Sfig
cannot be controlled. Thus, only one S
command is output regardless of the
Sfig setting value.
(Note 2) Sbin can be set with -1, 0 and 1, but the
S command cannot be BCD output.
If BCD (0) is selected for Sbin, it will be
handled as a singed binary (-1).
12009 Tfig Number of T Number of T: Set the number of T that can be 1 to 4
(PR) specified within the same block.
12010 Tbin T binary T binary: Refer to the following table. Data type
(PR) Data type Output data (-1,0,1)
0 BCD
1 Unsigned binary
-1 Singed binary
For unsigned binary:
The absolute value 1 is output for -1.
For singed binary:
-1 is output as "0xFFFFFFFF".
12011 Bfig Number of B Number of B: Set the number of T that can be 1 to 4
(PR) specified within the same block.
12012 Bbin B binary B binary: Refer to the following table. Data type
(PR) Data type Output data (-1,0,1)
0 BCD
1 Unsigned binary
-1 Singed binary
For unsigned binary:
The absolute value 1 is output for -1.
For singed binary:
-1 is output as "0xFFFFFFFF".

III - 86
 5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.1 Axis Specifications Parameters

5. Axis Specifications Parameters

5.1 Axis Specifications Parameters
After setting up the parameter (PR) listed in the table, turn OFF the NC power. To validate the parameter,
turn ON the power again.

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

2001 rapid Rapid traverse Set up the rapid traverse feedrate for each axis. 1 to 1000000
rate The maximum value to be set differs with (mm/min)
mechanical systems.
2002 clamp Cutting feedrate Set the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis. 1 to 1000000
for clamp Even if the feedrate in G01 exceeds this value‚ the (mm/min)
function clamp will be applied at this feedrate.

2003 smgst Acceleration and Specify acceleration and deceleration control Specify the modes in
(PR) deceleration modes. hexadecimal notation.
modes F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
O T3 O T2 O T1 C 3 C1 LC R3 R1 LR

Note: Set 0 in null bits. (Bit2 and bit6 when the

acceleration/deceleration by software is
selected are excluded.)

Rapid traverse feed acceleration and

deceleration types
LR Linear acceleration/
deceleration
R1 Primary delay
R3 Exponential acceleration
and linear deceleration
bit0 to 3 ON Acceleration/
deceleration by software

Cutting feed acceleration and deceleration types

LC Linear acceleration/
deceleration
C1 Primary delay
C3 Exponential acceleration
and linear deceleration
bit4 to 7 ON Acceleration/
deceleration by software

(To be continued to the next page)

III - 87
5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.1 Axis Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

(Continued from the previous page)

<Combination of acceleration and deceleration

patterns and bit patterns>

Rapid traverse R3(bit3) -(bit2) R1(bit1) LR(bit0)

Cutting feed C3(bit7) -(bit6) C1(bit5) LC(bit4)
Step 0
Acceleration/deceleration types 0 0 0
Linear
acceleration/ 0 0 0 1
deceleration
Primary
0 0 1 0
delay
Exponential
acceleration
1 0 0 0
and linear
deceleration
Acceleration/
deceleration 1 1 1 1
by software

R1 > R3 when both R1 and R3 contain 1.

<Stroke end stop types>

Type OT2 OT3

Linear deceleration 0 0
Position loop step stop 1 0
Speed loop step stop 0 1
Position loop step stop 1 1

OT1 0 Deceleration by G0t1

1 Deceleration by 2 × G0t1

Speed Stroke end signal

Time

G0t1 2 G 0 t 1 (OT1=1,OT2=OT3=0)
G 0 t 1 (OT1=OT2=OT3=0)

OT1 is valid under the following conditions (valid for

dog type zero point return):
Stop type: Linear deceleration
Acceleration mode: Exponential
Deceleration mode: Linear

III - 88
 5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.1 Axis Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

2004 G0tL G0 time constant Set up a linear control time constant for rapid 1 to 4000 (ms)
(linear) traverse acceleration and deceleration.
The time constant is validated when LR (rapid
traverse feed with linear acceleration or
deceleration) or F (acceleration or deceleration by
software) is selected in acceleration or deceleration
mode "#2003 smgst".

Speed

Time

G0tL G0tL

2005 G0t1 G0 time constant Set up a primary-delay time constant for rapid 1 to 5000 (ms)
(primary delay) traverse acceleration and deceleration.
The time constant is validated when R1 (rapid
traverse feed with primary delay) or R3 (exponential
acceleration and linear deceleration) is selected in
acceleration or deceleration mode "#2003 smgst".

Second-step When acceleration or deceleration by software is

time constant for selected, the second-step time constant is used.
acceleration and
deceleration by <Rapid traverse feed with primary delay>
software

Speed

Time

G0t1 G0t1

<Rapid traverse feed with exponential

acceleration and linear deceleration>

Speed

Time

G0t1 2×G0t1

<Soft acceleration/deceleration>

Speed

Time
G0t1 G0t1
G0t1 G0t1

G0tL G0tL

2006 G0t2 Not used. Set to "0". 0

III - 89
 5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.1 Axis Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

2007 G1tL G1 time Set up a linear control time constant for cutting 1 to 4000 (ms)
constant acceleration and deceleration.
(linear) The time constant is validated when LC (cutting feed
with linear acceleration and deceleration) or F
(acceleration and deceleration by software) is
selected in acceleration or deceleration mode
"#2003 smgst".
Speed

Time

G1tL G1tL

2008 G1t1 G1 time Set up the primary delay time constant for cutting 1 to 5000 (ms)
constant acceleration and deceleration.
(primary delay) The time constant is validated when C1 (cutting feed
with the primary delay) or C3 (cutting feed with
exponential acceleration and linear deceleration) is
selected in acceleration or deceleration mode
"#2003 smgst".

Second stage When acceleration or deceleration by software is

time constant selected, the second stage time constant is used.
for
acceleration <Cutting feed with primary time constant>
and
deceleration by Speed
software

Time

G1t1 G1t1

<Cutting feed with exponential acceleration

and linear deceleration>
Speed

Time

G1t1 2×G1t1

<Soft acceleration/deceleration>

Speed

Time
G1t1 G1t1
G1t1 G1t1

G1tL G1tL

2009 G1t2 Not used. Set to "0". 0

III - 90
 5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.1 Axis Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

2010 fwd_g Feed forward Set up a feed forward gain for pre-interpolation 0 to 200 (%)
gain acceleration and deceleration.
The larger the set value, the smaller the theoretical
control error will be. However, if a mechanical
vibration occurs, the set value must be reduced.
2011 G0back G0 backlash Set up the backlash compensation amount when the -9999999 to 9999999
direction is reversed with the movement command in
rapid traverse feed mode or in manual mode.
2012 G1back G1 backlash Set up the backlash compensation amount when the -9999999 to 9999999
direction is reversed with the movement command in
cutting mode.
2013 OT - Soft limit I - soft Set up a soft limit area with reference to the zero ±99999.999 (mm)
2014 OT + limit I + point of the basic mechanical coordinates.
For the movable area of stored stroke limit 1, set the
coordinate in the negative direction in #2013 and the
coordinate in the positive direction in #2014.
To narrow the available range in actual use, use the
parameters #8204 OT- and #8205 OT+.
When the same value (other than 0) is set in #2013
and #2014, this function is disabled.

Basic mechanical coordinates OT+ (Z)

OT- (X) M
OT+ (X)
OT- (Z)
Movable area

2015 t1m1- Negative Set up a sensor position in the negative direction ±99999.999 (mm)
direction when using the tool setter.
sensor of tool
setter
2016 t1m1+ Positive Set up the sensor position in the positive direction ±99999.999 (mm)
direction when using the tool setter. When the TLM is used, in
sensor of tool order to measure the tool length, set the distance
setter or TLM from a tool replacement point (reference position) to
standard length the measurement basic point (surface).
2017 tap_g Axis servo gain Set the position loop gain for special operations 0.25 to 200.00 (rad/s)
(synchronized tapping, interpolation with spindle C
axis, etc.)
Set the value in 0.25 increments.
The standard setting is 10.

III - 91
 5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.1 Axis Specifications Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

2018 no_srv Operation with Set when performing test operation without 0/1
(PR) no servo connecting the drive unit and motor.
control 0: Specify normal operation.
1: Operation is possible even if units are not
connected as the drive system alarm will be
ignored.
This is for test operation during start up and is not
used normally.
If 1 is set during normal operation‚ errors will not be
detected even if they occur.
2019 revnum Return steps Set up the steps required for reference position 0 to max. number of
return for each axis. NC axes
0: Does not execute reference position return.
1 to max. number of NC axes:
Sets up the steps required for reference
position return.
2020 o_chkp Spindle Set up the distance from the second reference 0 to 99999.999 (mm)
orientation position to the position for checking that the spindle
completion orientation has completed during second reference
check during position return. If the set value is 0, the above check
second is omitted.
reference
position return
2021 out_f Maximum Set up the maximum speed outside the soft limit 0 to 1000000
speed outside range. (mm/min)
soft limit range
2022 G30SLX Validate soft Set up this function to disable a soft limit check 0/1
limit during the second to the fourth zero point return in
(automatic both automatic and manual operation modes.
and manual) 0: Enables soft limit check.
1: Disables soft limit check.
2023 ozfmin Set up ATC Set up the minimum speed outside the soft limit 0 to 1000000
speed lower range during the second to the fourth reference (mm/min)
limit position return in both automatic and manual
operation modes.
2024 synerr Allowable Set up the following for the master axis: the 0 to 99999.999 (mm)
error maximum synchronization error that is allowed to
check for synchronization errors
When 0 is set up, the error check is not carried out.

III - 92
 5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.2 Zero Point Return Parameters

5.2 Zero Point Return Parameters

After setting up the parameter (PR) listed in the table, turn OFF the NC power. To validate the parameter,
turn ON the power again.

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

2025 G28rap G28 rapid Set up a rapid traverse rate for dog type reference 1 to 1000000
traverse rate position return command. (mm/min)
This is not used for the distance-coded reference
position detection.
2026 G28crp G28 Set up the speed of approach to the reference 1 to 60000 (mm/min)
approach position in the reference position return command.
speed This speed is attained after the system stops with
deceleration by dog detection.
(Note) The G28 approach speed unit is (10°/min)
only when using the Z-phase type encoder
(#1226 aux10/bit3=1) for the spindle/C-axis
reference position return type. The same unit
is used for both the micrometric and sub-
micrometric specifications.
2027 G28sft Reference Set up the distance from the electrical zero-point 0.000 to 99.999
position shift detection position to the actual machine reference (mm)
distance position during reference position return control.
This is not used for the distance-coded reference
position detection.
(Note) When #1240 set12/bit2 is ON, a magnification
(C: 10-fold, D: 100-fold) corresponding to the
input setting unit (#1003 iunit) will be applied
on the setting value.
2028 grmask Grip mask Set up a distance where the grid point is ignored 0.000 to 99.999
amount when near-point dog OFF signals are close to that (mm)
grid point during reference position return.

Near-point dog
Grid mask setup distance

The grid mask is valid by one grid.

This is not used for the distance-coded reference
position detection.
2029 grspc Grid interval Set up a detector grid interval. 0.000 to 999.999
Generally, set up the value equal to the ball screw (mm)
pitch. However, if the detector grid interval is not
equal to the screw pitch when measured with a linear
scale, set up the detector grid interval.
To reduce the grid interval, use its divisors.
This is not used for the distance-coded reference
position detection.

III - 93
 5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.2 Zero Point Return Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

2030 dir (-) Reference Set which side of the near-point dog the reference 0: Positive direction
(PR) position position is at during reference position return. 1: Negative direction
direction (-) <For dog type reference position return>

Direction in which zero point is established

as viewed from the near-point dog

Negative Positive
direction direction
Near-point dog

dir (-)=0

dir (-)=1

2031 noref Axis without Specify the axis that does not have a reference 0: Normal controlled
reference position. Before automatic operation starts, axis
position reference position return is not required. 1: Axis without
reference position
2032 nochk Whether The absolute and incremental commands can be 0: Reference
reference executed even if dog type (or Z phase pulse system) position return
position return reference position return is not completed. completion is
is completed Specify whether to check that the reference position checked.
not checked return is completed. 1: Reference
position return
completion is not
checked.
2033 zp_no Z phase pulse The reference position return is performed with the Z 0: Dog type
system phase pulse of the spindle encoder. Set the 1 to 4: Spindle No.
reference spindle encoder No. to be used.
position return
spindle
encoder No.
2034 rfpofs Distance- Define the offset distance from the position of the -99999.999 to
coded initial reference position setting to the machine's 99999.999 (mm)
reference actual basic point in reference position return in the
position distance-coded reference position detection.
detection offset Input the value of the machine value counter that is
displayed immediately after reference position is
established.
When the power is turned ON, if manual reference
position return is performed with this parameter set
to 0, it will be judged as initial reference position
setting.
If this parameter is 0, automatic operation won't be
available.

III - 94
 5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.2 Zero Point Return Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

2035 srchmax Distance- Before establishing the reference position in the 0.000 to 99999.999
coded distance-coded reference position detection, define (mm)
reference the maximum distance for scanning the reference
position marks.
detection scan For the scan distance, set the distance that fully
distance covers the number of reference marks that you wish
to detect.
(Ex.) When adding about 10% of additional
coverage:Scan distance = (The number of
reference marks to detect (#xxxx) - 1) *
Reference mark interval [mm] * 1.1
(Note) As the reference mark interval, use the longer
interval between the reference mark 1
distance (#xxxx) or reference mark 2 distance
(#xxxx). Convert the interval into the value in
metric system.
2037 G53ofs Reference Set up the position of the first, second, third, and ±999999.999 (mm)
2038 #2_rfp position #1 to fourth reference positions from the zero point of the
2039 #3_rfp #4 basic mechanical coordinates.
2040 #4_rfp

Basic mechanical coordinates

M
Reference position #1

Reference position #2

Reference position #3 Reference position #4

III - 95
 5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.3 Absolute Position Parameters

5.3 Absolute Position Parameters

After setting up the parameter (PR) listed in the table, turn OFF the NC power. To validate the parameter,
turn ON the power again.

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

2049 type Absolute Specify the absolute position zero point alignment 0 to 9
(PR) position method.
detection 0: Not absolute position detection
method 1: Stopper method (push with mechanical stopper)
2: Marked point alignment method (align to
alignment point)
3: Dog-type (align with dog and proximity switch)
4: Marked point alignment method II (align to
alignment mark)
(Type that does not return grid after marked
point alignment)
9: Simple absolute position
(Not absolute position detection‚ but the position
when the power is turned off is registered.)
Automatic initial setting is valid only when the stopper
method is selected.
2050 absdir Basic point Set the direction of the absolute position reference 0: Positive direction
of Z point (grid point immediately before) seen from the 1: Negative
direction machine basic point for when using marked point direction
alignment.
2051 check Check Set the tolerable range for the movement amount 0 to 99999.999 (mm)
(deviation amount) when the power is turned OFF.
0: Not checked
1 to 99999.999mm: If the difference of the position
when the power is turned OFF
and turned ON again is larger
than this value‚ an alarm will
be output.
2054 clpush Current Set up the current limit value for the initial setting when 0 to 100 (%)
limit (%) detecting an absolute position with a dog-less system.
The setup value is the ratio of the current limit value to
the rated value.
2055 pushf Push speed Set the feedrate for the automatic initial setting during 1 to 999 (mm/min)
stopper method.
2056 aproch Approach Set the approach distance for the automatic initial 0 to 999.999 (mm)
setting in the push method.
Approach distance: After using stopper once‚ the
tool returns this distance‚ and
then use stopper again.
When set to 0‚ the reference
position coordinates set in
"#2037 G53ofs" will be used as
the approach start position.

III - 96
 5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.3 Absolute Position Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

2057 nrefp Near zero Set the width where the near reference position signal 0 to 999.999 (mm)
point + is output. (Positive direction width) (Input setting
When set to 0‚ the width is equivalent to the grid width increment applies)
setting.
(Note) When #1240 set12/bit2 is ON, a magnification
(C: 10-fold, D: 100-fold, E:1000-fold)
corresponding to the input setting unit (#1003
iunit) will be applied on the setting value.
2058 nrefn Near zero Set the width where the near reference position signal 0 to 999.999 (mm)
point - is output. (Negative direction width) (Input setting
When set to 0‚ the width is equivalent to the grid width increment applies)
setting.
(Note) When #1240 set12/bit2 is ON, a magnification
(C: 10-fold, D: 100-fold, E:1000-fold)
corresponding to the input setting unit (#1003
iunit) will be applied on the setting value.
2059 zerbas Select zero Specify the position to be the zero point coordinate 0/1
point during absolute position initial setting.
parameter 0: Position where the axis was stopped.
and basic 1: Grid point just before stopper.
point

III - 97
 5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2

5.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2

After setting up the parameter (PR) listed in the table, turn OFF the NC power. To validate the parameter,
turn ON the power again.

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

2061 OT_1B- Soft limit IB- Set up the coordinates of the lower limit of the ±99999.999 (mm)
inhibited area of stored stroke limit IB.
Specify a value in the basic mechanical coordinates
system. If the same value (non-zero) with the same
sign as that of #2062 OT_IB+ is specified, the stored
stroke limit IB function is disabled.
2062 OT_1B+ Soft limit IB+ Set up the coordinates of the upper limit of the ±99999.999 (mm)
inhibited area of stored stroke limit IB.
Specify a value in the basic mechanical coordinates
system.
2063 OT_1B Soft limit IB Select OT_IB or OT_IC in which OT_IB+/- is used in 0 to 3
type type stored stroke limit I.
0: Soft limit IB valid
1: Invalid
2: Soft limit IC valid
3: When using the inclined axis specifications, the
soft limit is checked with the program coordinate
system.
(Note) This is invalid for axes other than the
inclined axis' base axis and inclined
axis.
2068 G0fwdg G00 feed Specify the feed forward gain applicable to 0 to 200 (%)
forward gain acceleration/deceleration before G00 interpolation.
The greater the set value, the shorter the positioning
time during in-position checking.
If machine vibration occurs, decrease the set value.
2069 Rcoeff Axis arc The amount of arc radius error correction can be -100.0 to +100.0 (%)
radius error increased or decreased between -100% to +100% for
correction each axis.
efficient
2070 div_RT Rotational Specify the number of divisions of one turn of the 0 to 999
(PR) axis division rotational axis for purpose of control.
count (Example) When "36" is set, one turn is supposed to
be 36.000.
(Note 1) When "0" is set, the normal rotational axis
(360.000 degrees for one turn) is assumed.
(Note 2) If this parameter is changed when the
absolute position detection specification is
used, absolute position data is lost.
Initialization must be performed again.

III - 98
 5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

2071 s_axis Inclined Select the axis subjected to inclined-axis control or the 0 to 2
(For L axis base axis corresponding to the inclined axis.
system selection 0: Axis not subjected to inclined-axis control
only) 1: Inclined axis
2: Base axis corresponding to inclined axis
(Note) Set 1 or 2 for only one axis. If it is set for two
or more axes, inclined-axis control does not
work.
2072 rslimt Restart If the machine is positioned on the minus (-) side of the ±9999.999 (mm)
limit set value in T-command restart mode, restart search in
type 3 is disabled.
2073 zrn_dog Origin dog Under the standard specifications, the origin dog signal 0000 to 02FF (HEX)
is assigned to a fixed device. When it is desired to
assign the origin dog signal to a position other than the
fixed device, specify the input device in this parameter.
* This parameter is valid when "1" is set in
#1226 aux10 bit 5.
* When this parameter is valid, do not set the
same device number. If the same device
number exists, an emergency stop occurs.
However, no device number check is
performed for an axis to which a signal that
ignores the near-point dog signal (R157) is
input.
2074 H/W_OT+ H/W OT+ Under the standard specifications, the OT (+) signal is 0000 to 02FF (HEX)
assigned to a fixed device. When it is desired to
assign the OT (+) g signal to a position other than the
fixed device, specify the input device in this parameter.
* This parameter is valid when "1" is set in
#1226 aux10 bit 5.
* When this parameter is valid, do not set the
same device number. If the same device
number exists, an emergency stop occurs.
However, no device number check is
performed for an axis to which a signal that
ignores the OT signal (R156) is input.
2075 H/W_OT- H/W OT- Under the standard specifications, the OT (-) signal is 0000 to 02FF (HEX)
assigned to a fixed device. When it is desired to
assign the OT (-) g signal to a position other than the
fixed device, specify the input device in this parameter.
* This parameter is valid when "1" is set in
#1226 aux10 bit 5.
* When this parameter is valid, do not set the
same device number. If the same device
number exists, an emergency stop occurs.
However, no device number check is
performed for an axis to which a signal that
ignores the OT signal (R248) is input.
2076 index_x Index table Specify the index table indexing axis. 0/1
indexing 0: Normal axis
axis 1: Index table indexing axis
(Note) This parameter is valid only for the NC axis.
The parameter is invalid if specified for the PLC
axis.

III - 99
 5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

2077 G0inps G0 in- When an in-position check is performed for G0, this 0.000 to 99.999
position parameter is valid. (mm)
width (Comparison of SV024 and this parameter, the
parameter that the in-position width is wider is
applied.)
When 0 is set, this parameter is invalid.
(Applicable only to SV024)
2078 G1inps G1 in- When an in-position check is performed for G1, this 0.000 to 99.999
position parameter is valid. (mm)
width (Comparison of SV024 and this parameter, the
parameter that the in-position width is wider is
applied.)
When 0 is set, this parameter is invalid.
(Applicable only to SV024)
2079 chcomp Chopping Set the coefficient applied on the compensation 0 to 10
(PR) compensa- amount for the insufficient amount caused by servo (standard value: 8)
tion delay during chopping.
coefficient
2080 chwid Bottom Set the tolerance between the commanded stroke and 0 to 10.000 (mm)
dead center actual stroke.
position During chopping, if the (command width - maximum
width stroke of top/bottom dead center position /2) is within
this tolerance, compensation will be applied.
2081 chclsp Maximum Set the chopping axis clamp speed applied during 0 to 60000 (mm/min)
chopping chopping. When "0" is set‚ the clamp will be applied at
speed the parameter "#2002 clamp".
2082 a_rstax Restart Designate the order for automatically returning to the 0 to 8
position restart position.
return order 0: Do not return.
When 0 is designated for all axes, all of the axes
will return simultaneously.
2084 G60_ax Unidirectio- Select the unidirectional positioning with G00. 0/1
nal Select the axis for carrying out the positioning per time
positioning operation when the positioning command is issued
operation regardless of the unidirectional positioning command
selection and modal.
0: Carry out unidirectional positioning according to
the command and modal.
1: When the positioning command (G00) is issued,
carry out unidirectional positioning regardless of
the command and modal.

<Related parameters>
#8209 G60 SHIFT:
The final positioning direction and distance for
the unidirectional positioning command is set
for each axis.
#2076 Index table indexing axis:
Set the indexing axis for each axis.

III - 100
 5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

2087 syncnt Synchroniza- Set the polarity of synchronous axis in respect to 0 to FF
tion/super- basic axis to the bit corresponding to each axis. (hexadecimal)
imposition 0: Polarity with basic axis is positive
control setting 1: Polarity with basic axis is negative
for each axis
2088 bsax_sy Reference axis Set the basic axis for synchronous control with the Axis name
for synchronous 2nd axis name (axname2).
control A numerical character cannot be set to the 1st
character.
2089 bsax_pl Reference axis Set the basic axis for superimposition control with Axis name
for superimposi- the 2nd axis name (axname2).
tion control A numerical character cannot be set to the 1st
character.
2090 plrapid Rapid traverse Set the rapid traverse rate for superimposition 1 to 1000000
rate for super- control. (mm/min)
imposition (Equivalent to #2001 rapid (rapid traverse rate).)
control
2091 plclamp Cutting feed Set the cutting feed clamp speed for 1 to 1000000
clamp speed superimposition control. (mm/min)
for super- (Equivalent to #2002 clamp (cutting feed clamp
imposition speed).)
control
2092 plG0tL G0 time Set the G0 time constant (linear) for 1 to 4000 (ms)
constant for superimposition control.
superimposi- (Equivalent to #2004 G0tL (G0 time constant
tion control (linear).)
(linear)
2093 plG0t1 G0 time Set the G0 time constant (primary delay) for 1 to 5000 (ms)
constant for superimposition control.
superimposi- (Equivalent to #2005 G0t1 (G0 time constant
tion control (primary delay).)
(primary delay)
2094 plG1tL G1 time Set the G1 time constant (linear) for 1 to 4000 (ms)
constant for superimposition control.
superimposi- (Equivalent to #2007 G1tL (G1 time constant
tion control (linear).)
(linear)
2095 plG1t1 G1 time Set the G1 time constant (primary delay) for 1 to 5000 (ms)
constant for superimposition control.
superimposi- (Equivalent to #2008 G1t1 (G1 time constant
tion control (primary delay).)
(primary delay)
2096 crncsp Minimum Set the minimum clamp speed for corner 0 to 1000000
corner deceleration during the high-accuracy control mode. (mm/min)
deceleration Normally set "0".
speed (Note) This parameter is invalid during SSS control.
2097 tlml2- Sub side tool Set the - direction sensor position (sub side) when ±99999.999 (mm)
setter using the tool setter on the sub spindle side.
- direction
sensor
2098 tlml2+ Sub side tool Set the + direction sensor position (sub side) when ±99999.999 (mm)
setter using the tool setter on the sub spindle side.
+ direction
sensor

III - 101
 5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

2102 skip_tL Skip time Set up a linear control time constant for variable 1 to 4000 (ms)
constant speed skip acceleration and deceleration.
linear The time constant is validated when LC (cutting feed
with linear acceleration and deceleration) or "F"
(acceleration and deceleration by software) is
selected in acceleration or deceleration mode "#2003
smgst".
2103 skip_t1 Skip time Set up a primary-delay time constant for variable 1 to 5000 (ms)
constant speed skip acceleration and deceleration.
primary delay The time constant is validated when C1 (cutting feed
acceleration with primary delay) or C3 (exponential acceleration
and and linear deceleration) is selected in acceleration or
deceleration deceleration mode "#2003 smgst".
by software When acceleration or deceleration by software is
second stage selected, the second-step time constant is used.
2106 Index Indexing unit Set the indexing unit to which the rotary axis can be 0 to 360 (°)
unit positioned.
2109 Rapid (H- Rapid Set the rapid traverse rate for each axis in the high- 0 to 1000000
precision) traverse rate accuracy control mode. "#2001 rapid" is used when (mm/min)
for high- "0" is set.
accuracy
control mode
2110 Clamp (H- Cutting feed Set the cutting feed maximum speed for each axis in 0 to 1000000
precision) clamp speed the high-accuracy control mode. "#2002 clamp" is (mm/min)
for high- used when "0" is set.
accuracy
control mode
2111 Blf valid Quadrant Set to this to validate the quadrant protrusion 0/1
protrusion compensation.
compensation If "#2112 Blf motor inertia", "#2115 Blf motor stl trq" or
valid "#2113 Blf visc friction" is set to "0", quadrant
protrusion compensation will not function even if this
parameter is set to "1".
0: Quadrant protrusion compensation invalid
1: Quadrant protrusion compensation valid
2112 Blf motor Motor inertia Set the motor inertia for quadrant protrusion 1 to 32000
inertia compensation. (10-6kgm2)
Refer to the servo manual and input the value
appropriate for the motor.
2113 Blf visc Viscous Set the viscous friction for quadrant protrusion 1 to 32767
friction friction compensation. (1/16 Nm/(rad/s))
After setting the other parameters to the appropriate
values, monitor the machine end and gradually adjust
the value.
If this parameter setting is small, a recess will form on
the inner side of the circle, and if large, a protrusion
will form on the outer side of the circle. When the
value is appropriate, a pike-shaped quadrant
protrusion will form based on normal step-shaped
backlash.

III - 102
5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

2114 Blf fwdg Compensation Set the feed forward gain for quadrant protrusion 0 to 1000 (%)
FF gain compensation.
After setting the other parameters to the appropriate
values, monitor the machine end and gradually adjust
the value.
If this parameter setting is small, a large quadrant
protrusion will form, and if large, a recess will form on
the inner side of the circle.
2115 Blf motor Motor stall Set the motor rated current for quadrant protrusion 1 to 16000
stl trq torque compensation. (1/256 Nm)
Refer to the servo manual and input the value
appropriate for the motor.
2118 SscDrSe Speed Select which door group of the speed monitoring the 0000 to 0003 (HEX)
(PR) l monitor spindle belongs to.
Door The speed monitoring is not executed when
selection SV113:SSF8/BitF is OFF regardless of this
parameter.
0000: Belongs to door 1 group.
0001: Belongs to door 1 group.
0002: Belongs to door 2 group.
0003: Belongs to door 1 and 2 group.
2121 vbacklas Variable Select backlash invalid/valid/continuous. (#2011 0: Invalid
h valid backlash G0back and #2012 G1back do not function when 1: Valid
valid/ valid or continuous status is selected.) 2: Continuous
continuous
2122 G0vback Variable G0 Set the compensation amount for the range of each -99999999 to
+ backlash +/=/- position during rapid traverse. 99999999
2123 G0vback (+: B1, =: B2, -: B3 on the compensation amount (Interpolation unit)
= table)
2124 G0vback
-
2125 G1vback Variable G1 Set the compensation amount for the range of each -99999999 to
+ backlash +/=/- position during cutting feed. 99999999
2126 G1vback (+: A1, =: A2, -: A3 on the compensation amount (Interpolation unit)
= table)
2127 G1vback
-
2128 G1vback G1 variable Set the range of the speed during cutting feed. (The 0 to 480000
feed1 backlash speed less than 1 is the low speed, and the speed (mm/min)
2129 G1vback compensation exceeding 2 is the high speed.)
feed2 amount Note that the speed range is identified in the order of
changeover low, high and medium speed, so be careful about
speed 1/2 setting value.
2130 G1vback G1 variable Set the range of the distance during cutting feed. 0 to 999999.999999
dist1 backlash (The distance less than 1 is the small distance, (mm)
2131 G1vback compensation andthe distance exceeding 2 is the large distance.)
dist2 amount Note that the distance range is identified in the
changeover orderof small, large and medium, so be careful about
distance 1/2 setting value.

III - 103
 5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

2132 vback Variable Set the range of the center of the end point position. -999999.999999 to
pos1 backlash (The range less than position 1 is the - range, and the 999999.999999
2133 vback compensation range exceeding position 2 is the + range.) (mm)
pos2 amount The end point position range is determined in the
changeover order of -, + , and center, so take care to the size of
end point the setting value.
position 1/2 (Note 1) If continuous variable backlash is set with
#2121, position 1 will be set as the position -
point and position 2 will be set as the
position + point.
(Note 2) When the variable backlash compensation
is valid, and the size relation of the
compensation amount changeover speed,
distance 1/2 is not correct, if the backlash
speed and distance are smaller than the
compensation amount changeover speed
and distance 1, the speed and distance will
both be small. If larger than the
compensation amount changeover speed
and distance 2, the speed and distance will
both be large.
2134 vback Variable Set the arc compensation coefficient. 0 to 300 (%)
arc K backlash arc
compensation
coefficient
2135 vback Variable Select the speed range to be used as the reference 0 to 2
feed backlash position.
refpt reference 0: Low speed
position 1: Medium speed
selection 2: High speed
(speed)
2136 vback Variable Set the end point range to be used as the reference 0 to 2
pos refpt backlash position.
reference 0: Position + range
position 1: Position center range
selection (end 2: Position - range
point position)
2137 vback dir Variable Set the entry direction to be used as the reference 0/1
refpt backlash position.
reference 0: Entry direction +
position 1: Entry direction -
selection
(entry
direction)

III - 104
 5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

2138 vback pos Continuous Set the position center point. (This is used only when -999999.999999 to
center variable continuous variable backlash is set with #2121.) Set a 999999.999999
backlash value between "#2132 vback pos1" and "#2133 (mm)
position center vbackpos2" for the position center point.
point (Note 1) When the variable backlash compensation
is valid, and the size relation of the
compensation amount changeover speed,
distance 1/2 is not correct, if the backlash
speed and distance are smaller than the
compensation amount changeover speed
and distance 1, the speed and distance will
both be small. If larger than the
compensation amount changeover speed
and distance 2, the speed and distance will
both be large.
2139 omrff_off OMR-FF Even when OMR-FF is valid, OMR-FF can be 0/1
invalid temporarily invalidated and conventional feed forward
control applied.
0: If OMR-FF is valid, OMR-FF control is applied.
1: Even if OMR-FF is valid, it is temporarily
invalidated, and conventional feed forward
control is applied.
2140 Ssc Svof Speed Set the error detection time of command speed 0 to 9999 (ms)
(PR) Filter monitor monitoring and feedback speed monitoring during
Error servo OFF.
detection time The alarm will occur if the time exceeding safe speed
during servo
or safe rotation speed exceeds the set error detection
OFF
time.
If "0" is set, it will be handled as 200 (ms).
2141 chtL Chopping Set the first-step time constant for the chopping axis 0 to 4000 (ms)
first-step time when soft acceleration/deceleration is applied.
constant for Note that, however, there may be cases where actual
acceleration time constant is shorter than the set time constant as
and time constant is automatically calculated according to
deceleration the feedrate so that the acceleration rate during
by software acceleration/deceleration (clamp speed/chopping
time constant) will be constant.
When 0 is set, "#2007 G1tL" will be valid.
Speed [mm/min]

chclsp

cht1 Time [ms]

chtL

2142 cht1 Chopping Set the second-step time constant for the chopping 0 to 5000 (ms)
second-step axis when soft acceleration/deceleration is applied.
time constant Note that, however, there may be cases where actual
for time constant is shorter than the set time constant as
acceleration time constant is automatically calculated so that the
and ratio between first-step and second-step time
deceleration constant will be constant.
by software When 0 is set, "#2008 G1t1" will be valid.

III - 105
 5. Axis Specifications Parameters
5.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

2146 Blf_L1 Reference Set the reference distance for specifying the 0 to 99999.999 (mm)
distance for compensation change rate and amount in position-
position- dependent increasing-type backlash compensation.
dependent
increasing-
type backlash
compensation Blf_E1
1
2147 Blf_L2 Reference Blf_E2 0 to 99999.999 (mm)
distance for
position- Blf_L2 Blf_L1
dependent
increasing-
type backlash When Blf_E1 is set to 0, the position-dependent
compensation increasing-type backlash compensation function is
2 invalid.
2148 Blf_E1 Reference 0 to 9999999
amount of (Machine error
position- compensation unit)
dependent
increasing-
type backlash
compensation
1
2149 Blf_E2 Reference 0 to 9999999
amount of (Machine error
position- compensation unit)
dependent
increasing-
type backlash
compensation
2

III - 106
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series
(1) Details for servo parameters
For parameters marked with a (PR) in the table, turn the NC power OFF after setting. After the power is
turned ON again, the parameter is validated.

! CAUTION
! In the explanation on bits, set all bits not used, including blank bits, to "0".

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2201 SV001 Motor side Set the motor side and machine side gear ratio. 1 to 32767
(PR) PC1 gear ratio For the rotary axis, set the total deceleration
2202 SV002 Machine side (acceleration) ratio. 1 to 32767
(PR) PC2 gear ratio Even if the gear ratio is within the setting range, the
electronic gears may overflow and cause an initial
parameter error (servo alarm No. 37).
2203 SV003 Position loop Set the position loop gain. The standard setting is 1 to 200
PGN gain 1 "33". (rad/s)
The higher the setting value is, the more precisely
the command can be followed and the shorter the
positioning time gets, however, note that a bigger
shock is applied to the machine during
acceleration/deceleration.
When using the SHG control, also set SV004
(PGN2) and SV057 (SHGC).
2204 SV004 Position loop When using the SHG control, also set SV003 0 to 999
PGN2 gain 2 (PGN1) and SV057 (SHGC). (rad/s)
When not using the SHG control, set to "0".
2205 SV005 Speed loop gain Set the speed loop gain. 1 to 9999
VGN1 1 Set this according to the load inertia size.
The higher the setting value is, the more accurate
the control will be; however, vibration tends to
occur.
If vibration occurs, adjust by lowering by 20 to 30%.
The value should be determined to be 70 to 80% of
the value at the time when the vibration stops.
2206 SV006 Speed loop gain If the noise is bothersome at high speed during -1000 to 9999
VGN2 2 rapid traverse, etc, lower the speed loop gain.
As shown below, set the speed loop gain at the
time of overspeed detection speed and use this with
SV029 (VCS).
When not using, set to "0".
Refer to the motor specification for the overspeed
detection speed.

VGN1

VGN2

0 VCS VLMT
(Overspeed detection speed)

III - 107
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2207 SV007 Speed loop Set this when the limit cycle occurs in the full-closed 0 to 32767
VIL delay loop, or overshooting occurs in positioning.
compensation Select the control method with SV027 (SSF1)/bit1,
0 (vcnt).
Normally, use "Changeover type 2".
When you set this parameter, make sure to set the
torque offset (SV032 (TOF)). When not using, set
to "0".
No changeover
When SV027 (SSF1)/ bit1, 0 (vcnt)=00
The delay compensation control is always valid.
Changeover type 1
When SV027 (SSF1)/ bit1, 0 (vcnt)=01
The delay compensation control works when the
command from the NC is "0".
Overshooting that occurs during pulse feeding can
be suppressed.
Changeover type 2
When SV027 (SSF1)/ bit1, 0 (vcnt)=10
The delay compensation control works when the
command from the NC is "0" and the position droop
is "0". Overshooting or the limit cycle that occurs
during pulse feeding or positioning can be
suppressed.
2208 SV008 Speed loop Set the gain of the speed loop integration control. 1 to 9999
VIA lead The standard setting is "1364". During the SHG
compensation control, the standard setting is "1900". Adjust the
value by increasing/decreasing it by about 100 at a
time.
Raise this value to improve contour tracking
precision in high-speed cutting. Lower this value
when the position droop vibrates (10 to 20Hz).
2209 SV009 Current loop q Set the gain of current loop. 1 to 20480
IQA axis lead As this setting is determined by the motor’s
compensation electrical characteristics, the setting is fixed for
2210 SV010 Current loop d each type of motor.
IDA axis lead Set the standard values for all the parameters
compensation depending on each motor type.

2211 SV011 Current loop q 1 to 8192

IQG axis gain
2212 SV012 Current loop d
IDG axis gain
2213 SV013 Current limit Set the normal current (torque) limit value. (Limit 0 to 999
ILMT value values for both + and - direction.) (Stall current %)
When the value is "800" (a standard setting), the
maximum torque is determined by the specification
of the motor.
2214 SV014 Current limit Set the current (torque) limit value in a special 0 to 999
ILMTsp value in special control (initial absolute position setting, stopper (Stall current %)
control control, etc). (Limit values for both of the + and -
directions.)
Set to "800" when not using.

III - 108
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2215 SV015 Acceleration When a relative error in the synchronous control is 0 to 999
FFC rate feed large, apply this parameter to the axis that is (%)
forward gain delaying. The standard setting value is "0". For
the SHG control, set to "100".
To adjust a relative error in
acceleration/deceleration, increase the value by 50
to 100 at a time.
2216 SV016 Lost motion Set this when the protrusion (that occurs due to the -1 to 200
LMC1 compensation non-sensitive band by friction, torsion, backlash, (Stall current %)
1 etc) at quadrant change is too large. Note that when
This compensates the torque at quadrant change. SV082/bit2 is 1,
This is valid only when the lost motion -1 to 20000
compensation (SV027 (SSF1/bit9,8)) is selected.
(Stall current
Type 2: When SV027 (SSF1)/ bit9, 8 (lmc)=10 0.01%)
Set the compensation amount based on the stall
(rated) current of the motor.
The standard setting is double of the friction torque.
Setting to "0" means the compensation amount is
zero.
Other than Type 2: When SV027 (SSF1))/bit9, 8
(lmc) ≠ 10
Lost motion compensation (type 2) is not
performed.
When you wish different compensation amount
depending on the direction.
When SV041 (LMC2) is "0", compensate with the
value of SV016 (LMC1) in both of the + and -
directions.
If you wish to change the compensation amount
depending on the command direction, set this and
SV041 (LMC2). (SV016: + direction, SV041: -
direction. However, the directions may be opposite
depending on other settings.)
When "-1" is set, the compensation will not be
performed in the direction of the command.

III - 109
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Items Setting range

No. Details
(unit)
2217 SV017 Servo Select the servo specifications.
(PR) SPEC1 specification F E D C B A 9 8
selection 1
spm
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
abs fdir vfb seqh dfbx

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1 dfbx Dual feedback control stop Dual feedback control start
2 seqh Normal sequence High-speed sequence
Speed feedback filter start
3 spwv Speed feedback filter stop
(2250Hz)
Position feedback forward Position feedback reverse
4 fdir
polarity polarity
5
6
7 abs Incremental control Absolute position control
8
9
A
B
C
Select the motor series.
D
spm 0: HF, HP motor (200V specifications)
E 2: HF-H, HP-H motor (400V specifications)
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.
2218 SV018 Ball screw Set the ball screw pitch. Set to "360" for the rotary axis. 1 to 32767
(PR) PIT pitch (mm/rev)

III - 110
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2219 SV019 Position In the case of the semi-closed loop control 0 to 32767
(PR) RNG1 detector Set the same value as SV020 (RNG2). (kp/rev)
resolution (Refer to the explanation of SV020.)
In the case of the full-closed loop control (a) 0 to 32767
Set the number of pulses per ball screw pitch. (kp/PIT)
(b) 0 to 65535
(p/PIT)

Detector model name Resolution SV019 setting

OSA105-ET2 1,000,000 (p/rev) 1000 (a)
OSA166-ET2 16,000,000 (p/rev) 16000 (a)
RCN723M, RCN223M
8,000,000 (p/rev) 8000 (a)
(Heidenhain)
Relative position SV018 (PIT)
Refer to detector
oblong wave output (mm)
specification manual.
scale /Rresolution
AT343, AT543 (µm)
0.05 (µm/p)
(Mitsutoyo)
(a)
LC191M (Heidenhain) 0.1, 0.05, 0.01 (µm/p)
LC491M (Heidenhain) 0.05, 0.01 (µm/p)
FMD type absolute
Refer to detector
position scale
specification manual.
(SUMTAK)
Analog cycle/512 Set them with
MDS-B-HR
division SV117
APE391M Analog cycle/4096 (RNG1ex).
(Heidenhain) division Refer to (b)
"D/DH Series
Analog cycle/40 to 4000 Instruction
MJ831 (Sony MS)
division Manual".

2220 SV020 Speed Set the number of pulses per one revolution of the motor 0 to 32767
(PR) RNG2 detector side detector. (kp/rev)
resolution Detector model name SV020 setting
OSA105 1000
OSA166 16000

2221 SV021 Overload Set to "60" as a standard. 1 to 999

OLT detection (s)
time constant
2222 SV022 Overload Set the current detection level of Overload 1 (Alarm 50) in 110 to 500
OLL detection respect to the stall (rated) current. Set to "150" as a (Stall current %)
level standard. (For machine tool builder adjustment.)

III - 111
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting
No. Items Details
range (unit)
2223 SV023 Excessive Set the excessive error detection width when servo ON. 0 to 32767
OD1 error <Standard setting value> (mm)
detection
width during Rapid traverse rate
servo ON (mm/min)
OD1=OD2= /2 (mm)
60×PGN1
When "0" is set, the excessive error detection will not be
performed.
2224 SV024 In-position Set the in-position detection width. 0 to 32767
INP detection Set the accuracy required for the machine. (µm)
width The lower the setting is, the higher the positioning accuracy
gets; however, the cycle time (setting time) becomes longer.
The standard setting value is "50".
2225 SV025 Motor/ Set the position detector type, speed detector type and motor type.
(PR) MTYP Detector
type F E D C B A 9 8
pen ent
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
mtyp
mtyp: Set the motor type. Set according to SV017 (SPEC1)/bitC-F(spm).
(1) For SV017/spm = 0 (200V standard motor series)
mtyp 0x 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x
x0
x1 HF75 HP54
x2 HF105 HP104
x3 HF54 HP154
x4 HF104 HP204
x5 HF154 HP354
x6 HP454
x7 HF204 HP704
x8 HF354 HP903
x9 HF453 HP1103
xA HF703
xB HF903
xC
xD
xE
xF

III - 112
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting
No. Items Details
range (unit)
(Continued from the previous page)
(2) For SV017/spm = 2 (400V standard motor series)
mtyp 0x 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x
x0
x1 HF-H75 HP-H54
x2 HF-H105 HP-H104
x3 HF-H54 HP-H154
x4 HF-H104 HP-H204
x5 HF-H154 HP-H354
x6 HP-H454
x7 HF-H204 HP-H704
x8 HF-H354 HP-H903
x9 HF-H453 HP-H1103
xA HF-H703
xB HF-H903
xC
xD
xE
xF

ent: Set the speed detector type.

pen: Set the position detector type.
Set ent and pen to the same value when using semi-closed droop control.

III - 113
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting
No. Items Details
range (unit)
(Continued from the previous page)
pen setting ent setting
Detector model name
value value
0 Setting
impossible
1 Setting
impossible
OSA105, OSA166 2 (Note) 2
3 Setting
impossible
4 Setting
impossible
5 Setting
impossible
OSA105-ET2, OSA166-ET2, 6
RCN223M, RCN723M (Heidenhain)
MDS-B-HR + Rotary analog wave
output scale Setting
APE391M + Rotary analog wave impossible
output scale (Heidenhain)
MJ831 + Rotary analog wave output
scale (Sony MS)
7 Setting
impossible
Relative position oblong wave output 8 Setting
scale impossible
9 Setting
impossible
AT343, AT543 (Mitsutoyo) A Setting
LC191M, LC491M (Heidenhain) impossible
FMD type absolute position scale
(SUMTAK)
MDS-B-HR + Linear analog wave
output scale
APE391M +Linear analog wave output
scale (Heidenhain)
MJ831 +Linear analog wave output
scale (Sony MS)
B Setting
impossible
C Setting
impossible
D Setting
impossible
E Setting
impossible
F Setting
impossible
(Note) The setting is for semi-closed loop control.

III - 114
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting
No. Items Details
range (unit)
2226 SV026 Excessive Set the excessive error detection width when servo ON. 0 to 32767
OD2 error For the standard setting, refer to the explanation of SV023 (mm)
detection (OD1).
width during When "0" is set, the excessive error detection will not be
servo OFF performed.
2227 SV027 Servo
F E D C B A 9 8
SSF1 function
selection 1 zrn2 ovs lmc
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
vfct vcnt

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0 Set the execution changeover type of the speed loop delay
vcnt
1 compensation.
00: Delay compensation changeover invalid
01: Delay compensation changeover type 1
10: Delay compensation type 2
11: Setting prohibited
2
3
4 Set the number of compensation pulses of the jitter
vfct
5 compensation.
00: Jitter compensation invalid
01: Jitter compensation 1 pulse
10: Jitter compensation 2 pulses
11: Jitter compensation 3 pulses
6
7
8 Set the compensation amount with SV016 (LMC1) and
lmc
9 SV041 (LMC2).
Note that when SV082/lmc3 is set to "1", the lost motion
compensation type 3 is selected regardless of the setting of
this data.
00: Lost motion compensation stop
01: Setting prohibited
10: Lost motion compensation type 2
11: Setting prohibited
A Set the compensation amount with SV031 (OVS1) and
ovs SV042 (OVS2).
B
00: Overshoot compensation stop
01: Setting prohibited
10: Setting prohibited
11: Overshoot compensation type 3
C
D
E zrn2 Set to "1".
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 115
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2228 SV028 Not used. Set to "0". 0
2229 SV029 Speed at the If the noise is bothersome at high speed during rapid 0 to 9999
VCS change of traverse, etc, lower the speed loop gain. (r/min)
speed loop Set the speed at which the speed loop gain changes,
gain and use this with SV006 (VGN2). (Refer to SV006.)
When not using, set to "0".
2230 SV030 Voltage non- When 100% is set, the voltage equivalent to the logical 0 to 255
IVC sensitive band non-energized time will be compensated. (%)
compensation When "0" is set, a 100% compensation will be
performed.
Adjust in increments of 10% from the default value
100%.
If increased too much, vibration or vibration noise may
be generated.
2231 SV031 Overshooting Set this if overshooting occurs during positioning. This -1 to 100
OVS1 compensation compensates the motor torque during positioning. (Stall current %)
1 This is valid only when the overshooting compensation Note that when
SV027 (SSF1/ovs) is selected. SV082/bit2 is 1,
Type 3: When SV027 (SSF1)/ bitB, A (ovs)=11 -1 to 10000
Set the compensation amount based on the motor’s (Stall current
stall current. 0.01%)
Increase by 1% and determine the amount that
overshooting doesn’t occur.
Other than type 3: When SV027 (SSF1)/ bitB, A (ovs)
≠11
Overshooting compensation (Type 2) is not executed.
When you wish different compensation amount
depending on the direction.
When SV042 (OVS2) is "0", compensate with the value
of SV031 (OVS1) in both of the + and -directions.
If you wish to change the compensation amount
depending on the command direction, set this and
SV042 (OVS2). (SV031: + direction, SV042: -
direction. However, the directions may be opposite
depending on other settings.)
When "-1" is set, the compensation will not be
performed in the direction of the command.
2232 SV032 Torque offset Set the unbalance torque of vertical axis and inclined -100 to 100
TOF 1 axis. (Stall current %)

III - 116
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2233 SV033 Servo function Select the servo functions.
SSF2 selection 2
F E D C B A 9 8
lmc2a rps
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
nfd2 nf3 nfd1

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1 Set the filter depth for Notch filter 1 (SV038).
2 nfd1 Deep ← → Shallow
3 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111
Depth -∞ -18.1 -12.0 -8.5 -6.0 -4.1 -2.5 -1.2
(dB)
4 nfd3 Notch filter 3 stop Notch filter 3 start (1125Hz)
5 Set the filter depth for Notch filter 1 (SV046).
6 nfd2 Deep ← → Shallow
7 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111
Depth -∞ -18.1 -12.0 -8.5 -6.0 -4.1 -2.5 -1.2
(dB)
8
9
A
B
C
Safety observation safety Safety observation safety
D rps
speed setting unit: mm/min speed setting unit: 100mm/min
E
Lost motion compensation 2 Lost motion compensation 2
F lmc2a
timing normal timing change
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 117
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2234 SV034 Servo function Select the servo functions.
SSF3 selection 3
F E D C B A 9 8
ovsn
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C Set the non-sensitive band of the overshooting compensation
D type 3 in increments of 2µm at a time.
ovsn In the feed forward control, the non-sensitive band of the model
E position droop is set, and overshooting of the model is ignored.
F Set 2µm (0001) as a standard.
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 118
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2235 SV035 Servo function Select the servo functions.
SSF4 selection 4
F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ckab

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 ckab No signal detection 2 invalid No signal detection 2 valid
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 119
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2236 SV036 Power supply Set the power supply type.
(PR) PTYP type F E D C B A 9 8
amp rtyp
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ptyp

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0 ptyp When the CN4 connector of the drive unit and the power
1 supply are connected, setting below is necessary.

2 MDS-D-CV MDS-DH-CV
3 External External External External
4 emergency emergency emergency emergency
stop invalid stop valid stop invalid stop valid
5
CV-37 04 44 04 44
6
CV-75 08 48 08 48
7
CV-110 11 51 11 51
CV-185 19 59 19 59
CV-300 30 70 30 70
CV-370 37 77 37 77
CV-450 45 85 45 85
CV-550 55 95 - -
CV-750 - - 75 B5

8 Set to "0".
9
rtyp
A
B
C Set to "0".
D
amp
E
F

2237 SV037 Load inertia Set "the motor inertia + motor axis conversion load 0 to 5000
JL scale inertia" in respect to the motor inertia. (%)
Jm+Jl
SV037(JL)= ×100
Jm
Jm : Motor inertia
Jl : Motor axis conversion load inertia

III - 120
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2238 SV038 Notch filter Set the vibration frequency to suppress if machine 0 to 2250
FHz1 frequency 1 vibration occurs. (Hz)
(Valid at 80 or more) When not using, set to "0".
2239 SV039 Lost motion Set this when the lost motion compensation timing 0 to 2000
LMCD compensation does not match. (ms)
timing Adjust by increasing the value by 10 at a time.
2240 SV040 Lost motion Set the non-sensitive band of the lost motion 0 to 255
LMCT compensation compensation in the feed forward control. (µm)
non-sensitive When "0" is set, the actual value that is set is 2µm.
band Adjust by increasing by 1µm at a time.
2241 SV041 Lost motion Set this with SV016 (LMC1) only when you wish to set -1 to 200
LMC2 compensation 2 the lost motion compensation amount to be different (Stall current %)
depending on the command directions. Note that when
Set to "0" as a standard. SV082/bit2 is 1,
-1 to 20000
(Stall current 0.01%)
2242 SV042 Overshooting Set this with SV031 (OVS1) only when you wish to set -1 to 100
OVS2 compensation 2 the overshooting compensation amount to be different (Stall current %)
depending on the command directions. Note that when
Set to "0" as a standard. SV082/bit2 is 1,
-1 to 10000
(Stall current 0.01%)
2243 SV043 Disturbance Set the disturbance observer filter band. 0 to 1000
OBS1 observer filter Set to "100" as a standard. (rad/s)
frequency To use the disturbance observer, also set SV037 (JL)
and SV044 (OBS2). When not using, set to "0".
2244 SV044 Disturbance Set the disturbance observer gain. The standard 0 to 500
OBS2 observer gain setting is "100" to "300". (%)
To use the disturbance observer, also set SV037 (JL)
and SV043 (OBS1). When not using, set to "0".
2245 SV045 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
2246 SV046 Notch filter If the machine vibrates, set the vibration frequency to 0 to 2250
FHz2 frequency 2 be suppressed. (Hz)
(Valid when set to 80 or more.) When not using, set to
"0".
2247 SV047 Inductive Set the inductive voltage compensation gain. Set to 0 to 200
EC voltage "100" as a standard. (%)
compensation If the current FB peak exceeds the current command
gain peak, lower the gain.

III - 121
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2248 SV048 Vertical axis Input a length of time to prevent the vertical axis 0 to 20000
EMGrt drop from dropping by delaying Ready OFF until the (ms)
prevention time brake works when the emergency stop occurs.
Increase the setting by 100ms at a time and set the
value where the axis does not drop.
When using a motor with a break of HF(-H) series
or HP(-H) series, set 200ms as a standard.
2249 SV049 Position loop Set the position loop gain during spindle 1 to 200
PGN1sp gain 1 in synchronous control (synchronous tap and (rad/s)
spindle synchronous control with spindle C-axis).
synchronous Set the same value as the value of the spindle
control parameter, position loop gain in synchronous
control.
When performing the SHG control, set this with
SV050 (PGN2sp) and SV058 (SHGCsp).
2250 SV050 Position loop When using SHG control during spindle 0 to 999
gain 2 in synchronous control (synchronous tap and (rad/s)
PGN2sp
spindle synchronous control with spindle C-axis), set this
synchronous with SV049 (PGN1sp) and SV058 (SHGCsp).
control When not performing the SHG control, set to "0".
2251 SV051 Dual feed back Set the control time constant in dual feed back. 0 to 9999
DFBT control time When "0" is set, the actual value that is set is 1ms. (ms)
constant The higher the time constant is, the closer it gets to
the semi-closed control, so the limit of the position
loop gain is raised.
2252 SV052 Dual feedback Set the non-sensitive band in the dual feedback 0 to 9999
DFBN control non- control. (µm)
sensitive band Set to "0" as a standard.
2253 SV053 Excessive error Set the excessive error detection width when servo 0 to 32767
OD3 detection width ON in a special control (initial absolute position (mm)
in special setting, stopper control, etc.).
control If "0" is set, excessive error detection won’t be
performed when servo ON during a special control.
2254 SV054 Overrun Set the overrun detection width in the full-closed -1 to 32767
ORE detection width loop control. (mm)
in closed loop If the gap between the motor side detector and the
control linear scale (machine side detector) exceeds the
value set by this parameter, it is judged to be
overrun and Alarm 43 will be detected.
When "-1" is set, the alarm detection will not be
performed. When "0" is set, overrun is detected
with a 2mm width.
2255 SV055 Max. gate off Set a length of time from the point when the 0 to 20000
EMGx delay time after emergency stop is input to the point when READY (ms)
emergency OFF is compulsorily executed.
stop Set "the maximum value of the SV056 setting value
of the servo drive unit which the power supply unit
and the main circuit are connected with + 100ms".
In preventing the vertical axis from dropping, the
gate off is delayed for the length of time set by
SV048 if SV055’s value is smaller than that of
SV048.

III - 122
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2256 SV056 Deceleration Set the time constant used for the deceleration 0 to 20000
EMGt time constant control at emergency stop. (ms)
at emergency Set the value of 0.9-fold rapid traverse
stop acceleration/deceleration time constant used in the
acceleration/deceleration, because the friction
torque will be a deceleration torque when the motor
decelerates and the machine can be stopped
quickly.
When preventing an impact at the
acceleration/deceleration from being given to the
machine, set the same value as the rapid traverse
acceleration/deceleration time constant.
2257 SV057 SHG control When performing the SHG control, set this with 0 to 1200
SHGC gain S003 (PGN1) and SV004 (PGN2). (rad/s)
When not performing the SHG control, set to "0".
2258 SV058 SHG control When using SHG control during spindle 0 to 1200
SHGCsp gain in synchronous control (synchronous tap and (rad/s)
spindle synchronous control with spindle C-axis), set this
synchronous with SV049 (PGN1sp) and SV050 (PGN2sp).
control When not performing the SHG control, set to "0".
2259 SV059 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
2260 SV060 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
2261 SV061 D/A output Input the data number you wish to output to D/A -1 to 127
DA1NO channel 1 output channel.
data No. When using the 2-axis drive unit, set "-1" for the axis
2262 SV062 D/A output on the side to which the data will not be output.
DA2NO channel 2
data No.
2263 SV063 D/A output Set the scale with a 1/100 unit. -32768 to 32767
DA1MPY channel 1 When "0" is set, the magnification is the same as (1/100-fold)
output scale when "100" is set.
2264 SV064 D/A output
DA2MPY channel 2
output scale
2265 SV065 Machine side Set the machine side compensation spring -32768 to 32767
TLC compensation constant.
spring For semi-closed droop control, the machine side
constant compensation amount can be approximated with
the following expression.
2
Compensation Command speed F(mm/min) ×SV065
= (µm)
amount
Radius R(mm) × 109

Set to "0" when not using.

III - 123
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2281 SV081 Servo Select the servo specifications.
(PR) SPEC2 specification
selction 2 F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 124
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2282 SV082 Servo function Select the servo functions.
SSF5 selection 5
F E D C B A 9 8
dis
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ccu lmc3 lmct

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

Lost motion compensation 3 Lost motion compensation 3
0 lmct adjustment time adjustment time
measurement invalid measurement valid
Lost motion compensation 3 Lost motion compensation 3
1 lmc3
stop start
Lost motion overshoot compensation
2 ccu compensation setting unit:
0: Stall rated current % 1: Stall rated current 0.01%
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C Digital signal input selection
D 0: No signal
dis 1: Safety observation function door state signal
E
2 to F: Setting prohibited
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 125
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2283 SV083 Servo function Select the servo functions.
SSF6 selection 6
F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
nfd5 nfd4

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1 Set the filter depth for Notch filter 4 (SV087).
2
3 nfd4 Setting value Deep ← → Shallow
000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111
Depth (dB) -∞ -18.1 -12.0 -8.5 -6.0 -4.1 -2.5 -1.2
4
5 Set the filter depth for Notch filter 5 (SV088).
6
7 nfd5 Setting value Deep ← → Shallow
000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111
Depth (dB) -∞ -18.1 -12.0 -8.5 -6.0 -4.1 -2.5 -1.2
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 126
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2284 SV084 Servo function Select the servo functions.
SSF7 selection 7
F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
irms

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0 irms Normal motor current display Effective motor current display
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.
2285 SV085 Lost motion Set the machine system's spring constant when using 0 to 32767
LMCk compensation lost motion compensation type 3. (0.01%/µm)
3 spring When not using, set to "0".
constant
2286 SV086 Lost motion Set the machine system's viscous coefficient when using 0 to 32767
LMCc compensation lost motion compensation type 3. (0.01%/µm)
3 viscous When not using, set to "0".
coefficient
2287 SV087 Notch filter Set the vibration frequency to suppress if machine 0 to 2250
FHz4 frequency 4 vibration occurs. (Valid at 80 or more) (Hz)
2288 SV088 Notch filter When not using, set to "0". 0 to 2250
FHz5 frequency 5 (Hz)
2289 SV089 Torque Normally set this to "0". (For machine tool builder 0 to 32767
TQMAX maximizing adjustment) (0.01%/µm)
Kq control Kp
2290 SV090 Torque Normally set this to "0". (For machine tool builder 0 to 32767
TQMAX maximizing adjustment) (0.01%/●s/mm)
Kd control Kd

III - 127
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2291 SV091 Not used. 0
: : Set to "0".
2312 SV112
2313 SV113 Servo function Select the servo functions.
SSF8 selection 8
F E D C B A 9 8
ssc
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
Safety observation function Safety observation function
F ssc
stop start
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 128
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2314 SV114 Servo function Select the servo functions.
SSF9 selection 9
F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 129
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2315 SV115 Servo function Select the servo functions.
SSF10 selection 10
F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 130
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2316 SV116 Servo function Select the servo functions.
SSF11 selection 11
F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 131
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2317 SV117 Expansion In the case of the semi-closed loop control 0 to 32767
(PR) RNG1ex position Set the same value as SV118 (RNG2ex). (kp/rev)
detector (Refer to the explanation of SV118.)
resolution
In the case of the full-closed loop control 0 to 32767
Set the number of pulses per ball screw pitch. ( x 216p/rev)

Detector model name Resolution SV117 setting

OSA105-ET2 1,000,000 (p/rev)
OSA166-ET2 16,000,000 (p/rev)
RCN723M, RCN223M
8,000,000 (p/rev)
(Heidenhain)
Relative position
Refer to detector
oblong wave output
specification manual.
scale
0 (a)
AT343, AT543
0.05 (µm/p)
(Mitsutoyo)
LC191M (Heidenhain) 0.1, 0.05, 0.01 (µm/p)
LC491M (Heidenhain) 0.05, 0.01 (µm/p)
FMD type absolute
Refer to detector
position scale
specification manual.
(SUMTAK)
Analog cycle/512 Set them with
MDS-B-HR
division SV019
APE391M Analog cycle/4096 (RNG1).
(Heidenhain) division Refer to (b)
"MDS-D/DH
Analog cycle/40 to 4000 Series
MJ831 (Sony MS) Instruction
division
Manual".

When using a detector of "(a)", set "0".

When using a detector of "(b)", set as follows.
(i) Calculate number of pulses per PIT.
Number of pulses = SV018(PIT) x 1000 / (Analog cycle / division
number)
(ii) Set SV019 and SV117 from the number of pulses obtained in "(i)"
SV117 = Number of pulses / 65536
(Truncate numbers after decimal point.)
SV019 = Number of pulses - (SV117 x 65536)
(Note 1) However, set "SV019 = (SV019 obtained above) - 65536", if
SV019 cannot be set to "32768 or more" in the parameter
setting.
(Note 2) If SV117 is less than "1", set "SV117 = -1"
2318 SV118 Expansion Set the number of pulses per one revolution of the motor 0 to 32767
(PR) RNG2ex speed side detector. ( x 216p/rev)
detector Detector model name SV020 setting
resolution
OSA105 1000
OSA166 16000

III - 132
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2317 SV119 Not used. 0
: : Set to "0".
2437 SV237
2438 SV238 Safety Set safety speed of machine tip on the safety 0 to 18000
SSC observation observation function.
(mm/min) or
FEED Set it within the following range:
Safety speed (°/min)
For linear axis: 2000mm/min or less
For rotary axis 18000°/min (50r/min) or less
When not using, set to "0".
2439 SV239 Safety Set safety speed of motor on the safety observation 0 to 32767
SSC observation function.
(r/min)
RPM When not using, set to "0".
Safety motor
speed
2440 SV240 Not used. 0
: : Set to "0".
2456 SV256

III - 133
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

(2) List of standard parameters for each servomotor

The standard parameters for each motor are given below.
The standard parameters are set to drive the isolated motor. When setting the parameters with the
actual machine, set the parameters according to the machine specifications and detector being used,
etc.

(a) 200V Standard motor HF Series

Motor HF75 HF105 HF54 HF104 HF154 HF204 HF354 HF453 HF703 HF903
Drive unit
20 20 40 40 80 80 160 160 160W 320
MDS-D-V1-
SV001 PC1 - - - - - - - - - -
SV002 PC2 - - - - - - - - - -
SV003 PGN1 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33
SV004 PGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV005 VGN1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
SV006 VGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV007 VIL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV008 VIA 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364
SV009 IQA 20480 10240 20480 10240 10240 8192 8192 6144 6144 4096
SV010 IDA 20480 10240 20480 10240 10240 8192 8192 6144 6144 4096
SV011 IQG 768 512 3072 1280 1536 2048 2048 2048 2048 1536
SV012 IDG 768 512 3072 1280 1536 2048 2048 2048 2048 1536
SV013 ILMT 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
SV014 ILMTsp 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
SV015 FFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV016 LMC1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV017 SPEC 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV018 PIT - - - - - - - - - -
SV019 RNG1 - - - - - - - - - -
SV020 RNG2 - - - - - - - - - -
SV021 OLT 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
SV022 OLL 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
SV023 OD1 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
SV024 INP 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
SV025 MTYP xx01 xx02 xx03 xx04 xx05 xx07 xx08 xx09 xx0A xx0B
SV026 OD2 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
SV027 SSF1 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000
SV028 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV029 VCS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV030 IVC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV031 OVS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV032 TOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

III - 134
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Motor HF75 HF105 HF54 HF104 HF154 HF204 HF354 HF453 HF703 HF903
Drive unit
20 20 40 40 80 80 160 160 160W 320
MDS-D-V1-
SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV034 SSF3 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV036 PTYP 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV037 JL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV038 FHz1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV039 LMCD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV040 LMCT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV041 LMC2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV042 OVS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV043 OBS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV044 OBS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV045 TRUB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV046 FHz2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV047 EC1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
SV048 EMGrt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV049 PGN1sp 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
SV050 PGN2sp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV051 DFBT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV052 DFBN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV053 OD3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV054 ORE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV055 EMGx 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV056 EMGt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV057 SHGC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV058 SHGCsp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV059 TCNV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV060 TLMT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV061 DA1NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV062 DA2NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV063 DA1MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV064 DA2MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV065 TLC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV066 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
: : : : : : : : : : :
SV256 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Note that a value other than "0" may be automatically set by the NC system for the system setting parameters.

III - 135
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

(b) 200V Standard motor HP Series

Motor HP54 HP104 HP154 HP204 HP354 HP454 HP704 HP903 HP1103
Drive unit
40 40 80 80 160 160 160W 320 320W
MDS-D-V1-
SV001 PC1 - - - - - - - - -
SV002 PC2 - - - - - - - - -
SV003 PGN1 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33
SV004 PGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV005 VGN1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
SV006 VGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV007 VIL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV008 VIA 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364
SV009 IQA 8192 4096 6144 3072 4096 3072 3072 2048 2048
SV010 IDA 8192 4096 6144 3072 4096 3072 3072 2048 2048
SV011 IQG 1280 768 1536 1024 1280 1024 1024 1280 1280
SV012 IDG 1280 768 1536 1024 1280 1024 1024 1280 1280
SV013 ILMT 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
SV014 ILMTsp 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
SV015 FFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV016 LMC1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV017 SPEC 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV018 PIT - - - - - - - - -
SV019 RNG1 - - - - - - - - -
SV020 RNG2 - - - - - - - - -
SV021 OLT 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
SV022 OLL 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
SV023 OD1 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
SV024 INP 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
SV025 MTYP xx11 xx12 xx13 xx14 xx15 xx16 xx17 xx18 xx19
SV026 OD2 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
SV027 SSF1 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000
SV028 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV029 VCS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV030 IVC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV031 OVS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV032 TOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

III - 136
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Motor HP54 HP104 HP154 HP204 HP354 HP454 HP704 HP903 HP1103
Drive unit
40 40 80 80 160 160 160W 320 320W
MDS-D-V1-
SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV034 SSF3 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV036 PTYP 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV037 JL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV038 FHz1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV039 LMCD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV040 LMCT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV041 LMC2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV042 OVS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV043 OBS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV044 OBS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV045 TRUB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV046 FHz2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV047 EC1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
SV048 EMGrt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV049 PGN1sp 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
SV050 PGN2sp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV051 DFBT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV052 DFBN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV053 OD3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV054 ORE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV055 EMGx 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV056 EMGt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV057 SHGC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV058 SHGCsp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV059 TCNV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV060 TLMT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV061 DA1NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV062 DA2NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV063 DA1MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV064 DA2MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV065 TLC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV066 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
: : : : : : : : : :
SV256 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Note that a value other than "0" may be automatically set by the NC system for the system setting parameters.

III - 137
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

(c) 400V Standard motor HF-H Series

Motor HF-H75 HF-H105 HF-H54 HF-H104 HF-H154 HF-H204 HF-H354 HF-H453 HF-H703 HF-H903
Drive unit
10 10 20 20 40 40 80 80 80W 160
MDS-DH-V1-
SV001 PC1 - - - - - - - - - -
SV002 PC2 - - - - - - - - - -
SV003 PGN1 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33
SV004 PGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV005 VGN1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
SV006 VGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV007 VIL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV008 VIA 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364
SV009 IQA 20480 10240 20480 10240 15360 8192 8192 6144 6144 6144
SV010 IDA 20480 10240 20480 10240 15360 8192 8192 6144 6144 6144
SV011 IQG 768 512 3072 1280 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048
SV012 IDG 768 512 3072 1280 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048
SV013 ILMT 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
SV014 ILMTsp 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
SV015 FFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV016 LMC1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV017 SPEC 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
SV018 PIT - - - - - - - - - -
SV019 RNG1 - - - - - - - - - -
SV020 RNG2 - - - - - - - - - -
SV021 OLT 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
SV022 OLL 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
SV023 OD1 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
SV024 INP 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
SV025 MTYP xx01 xx02 xx03 xx04 xx05 xx07 xx08 xx09 xx0A xx0B
SV026 OD2 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
SV027 SSF1 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000
SV028 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV029 VCS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV030 IVC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV031 OVS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV032 TOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

III - 138
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Motor HF-H75 HF-H105 HF-H54 HF-H104 HF-H154 HF-H204 HF-H354 HF-H453 HF-H703 HF-H903
Drive unit
10 10 20 20 40 40 80 80 80W 160
MDS-DH-V1-
SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV034 SSF3 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV036 PTYP 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV037 JL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV038 FHz1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV039 LMCD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV040 LMCT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV041 LMC2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV042 OVS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV043 OBS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV044 OBS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV045 TRUB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV046 FHz2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV047 EC1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
SV048 EMGrt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV049 PGN1sp 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
SV050 PGN2sp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV051 DFBT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV052 DFBN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV053 OD3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV054 ORE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV055 EMGx 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV056 EMGt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV057 SHGC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV058 SHGCsp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV059 TCNV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV060 TLMT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV061 DA1NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV062 DA2NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV063 DA1MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV064 DA2MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV065 TLC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV066 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
: : : : : : : : : : :
SV256 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Note that a value other than "0" may be automatically set by the NC system for the system setting parameters.

III - 139
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

(d) 400V Standard motor HP-H Series

Motor HP-H54 HP-H104 HP-H154 HP-H204 HP-H354 HP-H454 HP-H704 HP-H903 HP-H1103
Drive unit
20 20 40 40 80 80 80W 160 160W
MDS-DH-V1-
SV001 PC1 - - - - - - - - -
SV002 PC2 - - - - - - - - -
SV003 PGN1 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33
SV004 PGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV005 VGN1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
SV006 VGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV007 VIL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV008 VIA 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364
SV009 IQA 8192 4096 6144 3072 4096 3072 3072 2048 2048
SV010 IDA 8192 4096 6144 3072 4096 3072 3072 2048 2048
SV011 IQG 1280 768 1536 1024 1280 1024 1024 1280 1280
SV012 IDG 1280 768 1536 1024 1280 1024 1024 1280 1280
SV013 ILMT 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
SV014 ILMTsp 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
SV015 FFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV016 LMC1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV017 SPEC 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
SV018 PIT - - - - - - - - -
SV019 RNG1 - - - - - - - - -
SV020 RNG2 - - - - - - - - -
SV021 OLT 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
SV022 OLL 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
SV023 OD1 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
SV024 INP 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
SV025 MTYP xx11 xx12 xx13 xx14 xx15 xx16 xx17 xx18 xx19
SV026 OD2 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
SV027 SSF1 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000
SV028 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV029 VCS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV030 IVC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV031 OVS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV032 TOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

III - 140
 6. Servo Parameters
6.1 MDS-D/DH Series

Motor HP-H54 HP-H104 HP-H154 HP-H204 HP-H354 HP-H454 HP-H704 HP-H903 HP-H1103
Drive unit
20 20 40 40 80 80 80W 160 160W
MDS-DH-V1-
SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV034 SSF3 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV036 PTYP 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV037 JL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV038 FHz1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV039 LMCD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV040 LMCT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV041 LMC2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV042 OVS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV043 OBS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV044 OBS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV045 TRUB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV046 FHz2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV047 EC1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
SV048 EMGrt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV049 PGN1sp 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
SV050 PGN2sp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV051 DFBT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV052 DFBN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV053 OD3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV054 ORE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV055 EMGx 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV056 EMGt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV057 SHGC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV058 SHGCsp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV059 TCNV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV060 TLMT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV061 DA1NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV062 DA2NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV063 DA1MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV064 DA2MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV065 TLC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV066 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
: : : : : : : : : :
SV256 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Note that a value other than "0" may be automatically set by the NC system for the system setting parameters.

III - 141
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

(1) Details for servo parameters
For parameters marked with a (PR) in the table, turn the NC power OFF after setting. After the power is
turned ON again, the parameter is validated.

! CAUTION
! In the explanation on bits, set all bits not used, including blank bits, to "0".

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2201 SV001 Motor side Set the motor side and machine side gear ratio. 1 to 32767
(PR) PC1 gear ratio For the rotary axis, set the total deceleration
2202 SV002 Machine side (acceleration) ratio. 1 to 32767
(PR) PC2 gear ratio Even if the gear ratio is within the setting range, the
electronic gears may overflow and cause an initial
parameter error (servo alarm No. 37).
2203 SV003 Position loop Set the position loop gain. The standard setting is 1 to 200
PGN gain 1 "33". (rad/s)
The higher the setting value is, the more precisely
the command can be followed and the shorter the
positioning time gets, however, note that a bigger
shock is applied to the machine during
acceleration/deceleration.
When using the SHG control, also set SV004
(PGN2) and SV057 (SHGC).
2204 SV004 Position loop When using the SHG control, also set SV003 0 to 999
PGN2 gain 2 (PGN1) and SV057 (SHGC). (rad/s)
When not using the SHG control, set to "0".
2205 SV005 Speed loop gain Set the speed loop gain. 1 to 9999
VGN1 1 Set this according to the load inertia size.
The higher the setting value is, the more accurate
the control will be; however, vibration tends to
occur.
If vibration occurs, adjust by lowering by 20 to 30%.
The value should be determined to be 70 to 80% of
the value at the time when the vibration stops.
2206 SV006 Speed loop gain If the noise is bothersome at high speed during -1000 to 9999
VGN2 2 rapid traverse, etc, lower the speed loop gain.
As shown below, set the speed loop gain at the
time of overspeed detection speed and use this with
SV029 (VCS).
When not using, set to "0".
Refer to the motor specification for the overspeed
detection speed.

VGN1

VGN2

0 VCS VLMT
(Overspeed detection speed)

III - 142
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2207 SV007 Speed loop Set this when the limit cycle occurs in the full-closed 0 to 32767
VIL delay loop, or overshooting occurs in positioning.
compensation Select the control method with SV027 (SSF1)/bit1,
0 (vcnt).
Normally, use "Changeover type 2".
When you set this parameter, make sure to set the
torque offset (SV032 (TOF)). When not using, set
to "0".
No changeover
When SV027 (SSF1)/ bit1, 0 (vcnt)=00
The delay compensation control is always valid.
Changeover type 1
When SV027 (SSF1)/ bit1, 0 (vcnt)=01
The delay compensation control works when the
command from the NC is "0".
Overshooting that occurs during pulse feeding can
be suppressed.
Changeover type 2
When SV027 (SSF1)/ bit1, 0 (vcnt)=10
The delay compensation control works when the
command from the NC is "0" and the position droop
is "0". Overshooting or the limit cycle that occurs
during pulse feeding or positioning can be
suppressed.
2208 SV008 Speed loop Set the gain of the speed loop integration control. 1 to 9999
VIA lead The standard setting is "1364". During the SHG
compensation control, the standard setting is "1900". Adjust the
value by increasing/decreasing it by about 100 at a
time.
Raise this value to improve contour tracking
precision in high-speed cutting. Lower this value
when the position droop vibrates (10 to 20Hz).
2209 SV009 Current loop q Set the gain of current loop. 1 to 20480
IQA axis lead As this setting is determined by the motor’s
compensation electrical characteristics, the setting is fixed for
2210 SV010 Current loop d each type of motor.
IDA axis lead Set the standard values for all the parameters
compensation depending on each motor type.

2211 SV011 Current loop q 1 to 8192

IQG axis gain
2212 SV012 Current loop d
IDG axis gain
2213 SV013 Current limit Set the normal current (torque) limit value. (Limit 0 to 999
ILMT value values for both + and - direction.) (Stall current %)
When the value is "800" (a standard setting), the
maximum torque is determined by the specification
of the motor.
2214 SV014 Current limit Set the current (torque) limit value in a special 0 to 999
ILMTsp value in special control (initial absolute position setting, stopper (Stall current %)
control control, etc). (Limit values for both of the + and -
directions.)
Set to "800" when not using.

III - 143
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2215 SV015 Acceleration When a relative error in the synchronous control is 0 to 999
FFC rate feed large, apply this parameter to the axis that is (%)
forward gain delaying. The standard setting value is "0". For
the SHG control, set to "100".
To adjust a relative error in
acceleration/deceleration, increase the value by 50
to 100 at a time.
2216 SV016 Lost motion Set this when the protrusion (that occurs due to the -1 to 200
LMC1 compensation non-sensitive band by friction, torsion, backlash, (Stall current %)
1 etc) at quadrant change is too large. Note that when
This compensates the torque at quadrant change. SV082/bit2 is 1,
This is valid only when the lost motion -1 to 20000
compensation (SV027 (SSF1/bit9,8)) is selected.
(Stall current
Type 2: When SV027 (SSF1)/ bit9, 8 (lmc)=10 0.01%)
Set the compensation amount based on the stall
(rated) current of the motor.
The standard setting is double of the friction torque.
Setting to "0" means the compensation amount is
zero.
Other than Type 2: When SV027 (SSF1))/bit9, 8
(lmc) ≠ 10
Lost motion compensation (type 2) is not
performed.
When you wish different compensation amount
depending on the direction.
When SV041 (LMC2) is "0", compensate with the
value of SV016 (LMC1) in both of the + and -
directions.
If you wish to change the compensation amount
depending on the command direction, set this and
SV041 (LMC2). (SV016: + direction, SV041: -
direction. However, the directions may be opposite
depending on other settings.)
When "-1" is set, the compensation will not be
performed in the direction of the command.

III - 144
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

Items Setting range

No. Details
(unit)
2217 SV017 Servo Select the servo specifications.
(PR) SPEC1 specification F E D C B A 9 8
selection 1
spm
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
abs sdir vfb dfbx

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1 dfbx Dual feedback control stop Dual feedback control start
2
Speed feedback filter start
3 spwv Speed feedback filter stop
(2250Hz)
Position feedback forward Position feedback reverse
4 sdir
polarity polarity
5
6
7 abs Incremental control Absolute position control
8
9
A
B
C
D Select the motor series.
spm
E 0: HF motor (200V specifications)
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.
2218 SV018 Ball screw Set the ball screw pitch. Set to "360" for the rotary axis. 1 to 32767
(PR) PIT pitch (mm/rev)

III - 145
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2219 SV019 Position In the case of the semi-closed loop control 0 to 32767
(PR) RNG1 detector Set the same value as SV020 (RNG2). (kp/rev)
resolution (Refer to the explanation of SV020.)
In the case of the full-closed loop control (a) 0 to 32767
Set the number of pulses per ball screw pitch. (kp/PIT)
(b) 0 to 65535
(p/PIT)

Detector
Resolution SV019 setting
model name
1,000,000
OSA105-ET2 1000 (a)
(p/rev)
RCN723M,
8,000,000
RCN223M 8000 (a)
(p/rev)
(Heidenhain)
Relative Refer to SV018 (PIT)
position oblong detector (mm)
wave output specification /Rresolution
scale manual. (µm)
AT343, AT543
0.05 (µm/p) (a)
(Mitsutoyo)
LC191M 0.1, 0.05, 0.01
(Heidenhain) (µm/p)
LC491M 0.05, 0.01
(Heidenhain) (µm/p)
Analog Set them
MDS-B-HR cycle/512 with SV117
division (RNG1ex).
Analog Refer to
APE391M "MDS-D- (b)
cycle/4096
(Heidenhain) SVJ3/SPJ3
division
Series
MJ831 Analog cycle/40 Instruction
(Sony MS) to 4000 division Manual".

2220 SV020 Speed Set the number of pulses per one revolution of the motor 0 to 32767
(PR) RNG2 detector side detector. (kp/rev)
resolution Detector model name SV020 setting
OSA18 260
OSA105 1000

2221 SV021 Overload Set to "60" as a standard. 1 to 999

OLT detection (s)
time constant
2222 SV022 Overload Set the current detection level of Overload 1 (Alarm 50) in 110 to 500
OLL detection respect to the stall (rated) current. Set to "150" as a (Stall current %)
level standard. (For machine tool builder adjustment.)

III - 146
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

Setting
No. Items Details
range (unit)
2223 SV023 Excessive Set the excessive error detection width when servo ON. 0 to 32767
OD1 error <Standard setting value> (mm)
detection
width during Rapid traverse rate
servo ON (mm/min)
OD1=OD2= /2 (mm)
60×PGN1
When "0" is set, the excessive error detection will not be
performed.
2224 SV024 In-position Set the in-position detection width. 0 to 32767
INP detection Set the accuracy required for the machine. (µm)
width The lower the setting is, the higher the positioning accuracy
gets; however, the cycle time (setting time) becomes longer.
The standard setting value is "50".
2225 SV025 Motor/ Set the position detector type, speed detector type and motor type.
(PR) MTYP Detector
type F E D C B A 9 8
pen ent
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
mtyp
Set the motor type. Set according to SV017/bitC-F.
[1] For SV017/bitC-F(spm) = 0 (200V standard motor series)
mtyp 0x 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x
x0
x1 HF75
x2 HF105
x3 HF54
x4 HF104
x5 HF154
x6
x7 HF204
x8 HF354
x9
xA
xB
xC
xD
xE
xF
(Continued to the next page)

III - 147
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

Setting
No. Items Details
range (unit)
(Continued from the previous page)
ent: Set the speed detector type.
pen: Set the position detector type.
Set ent and pen to the same value when using semi-closed droop control.

pen
ent setting
Detector model name setting
value
value
0 Setting
impossible
1 Setting
impossible
OSA18, OSA105 2 (Note) 2
3 Setting
impossible
4 Setting
impossible
5 Setting
impossible
OSA105-ET2 6
RCN223M, RCN723M (Heidenhain)
MDS-B-HR + Rotary analog wave output
scale Setting
APE391M + Rotary analog wave output impossible
scale (Heidenhain)
MJ831 + Rotary analog wave output scale
(Sony MS)
7 Setting
impossible
Relative position oblong wave output scale 8 Setting
impossible
9 Setting
impossible
AT343, AT543 (Mitsutoyo) A Setting
LC191M, LC491M (Heidenhain) impossible
MDS-B-HR + Linear analog wave output
scale
APE391M +Linear analog wave output scale
(Heidenhain)
MJ831 +Linear analog wave output scale
(Sony MS)
B Setting
impossible
C Setting
impossible
D Setting
impossible
E Setting
impossible
F Setting
impossible
(Note) The setting is for semi-closed loop control.

III - 148
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

Setting
No. Items Details
range (unit)
2226 SV026 Excessive Set the excessive error detection width when servo ON. 0 to 32767
OD2 error For the standard setting, refer to the explanation of SV023 (mm)
detection (OD1).
width during When "0" is set, the excessive error detection will not be
servo OFF performed.
2227 SV027 Servo
F E D C B A 9 8
SSF1 function
selection 1 zrn2 ovs lmc
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
vfct vcnt

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0 Set the execution changeover type of the speed loop delay
vcnt
1 compensation.
00: Delay compensation changeover invalid
01: Delay compensation changeover type 1
10: Delay compensation type 2
11: Setting prohibited
2
3
4 Set the number of compensation pulses of the jitter
vfct
5 compensation.
00: Jitter compensation invalid
01: Jitter compensation 1 pulse
10: Jitter compensation 2 pulses
11: Jitter compensation 3 pulses
6
7
8 Set the compensation amount with SV016 (LMC1) and
lmc
9 SV041 (LMC2).
Note that when SV082/lmc3 is set to "1", the lost motion
compensation type 3 is selected regardless of the setting of
this data.
00: Lost motion compensation stop
01: Setting prohibited
10: Lost motion compensation type 2
11: Setting prohibited
A Set the compensation amount with SV031 (OVS1) and
ovs SV042 (OVS2).
B
00: Overshoot compensation stop
01: Setting prohibited
10: Setting prohibited
11: Overshoot compensation type 3
C
D
E zrn2 Set to "1".
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 149
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2228 SV028 Not used. Set to "0". 0
2229 SV029 Speed at the If the noise is bothersome at high speed during rapid 0 to 9999
VCS change of traverse, etc, lower the speed loop gain. (r/min)
speed loop Set the speed at which the speed loop gain changes,
gain and use this with SV006 (VGN2). (Refer to SV006.)
When not using, set to "0".
2230 SV030 Voltage non- When 100% is set, the voltage equivalent to the logical 0 to 255
IVC sensitive band non-energized time will be compensated. (%)
compensation When "0" is set, a 100% compensation will be
performed.
Adjust in increments of 10% from the default value
100%.
If increased too much, vibration or vibration noise may
be generated.
2231 SV031 Overshooting Set this if overshooting occurs during positioning. This -1 to 100
OVS1 compensation compensates the motor torque during positioning. (Stall current %)
1 This is valid only when the overshooting compensation Note that when
SV027 (SSF1/ovs) is selected. SV082/bit2 is 1,
Type 3: When SV027 (SSF1)/ bitB, A (ovs)=11 -1 to 10000
Set the compensation amount based on the motor’s (Stall current
stall current. 0.01%)
Increase by 1% and determine the amount that
overshooting doesn’t occur.
Other than type 3: When SV027 (SSF1)/ bitB, A (ovs)
≠11
Overshooting compensation (Type 2) is not executed.
When you wish different compensation amount
depending on the direction.
When SV042 (OVS2) is "0", compensate with the value
of SV031 (OVS1) in both of the + and -directions.
If you wish to change the compensation amount
depending on the command direction, set this and
SV042 (OVS2). (SV031: + direction, SV042: -
direction. However, the directions may be opposite
depending on other settings.)
When "-1" is set, the compensation will not be
performed in the direction of the command.
2232 SV032 Torque offset Set the unbalance torque of vertical axis and inclined -100 to 100
TOF 1 axis. (Stall current %)
When the vertical axis pull up function is valid, the pull
up compensation direction is determined by this
parameter's sign. When set to "0", the vertical axis pull
up will not be executed.

III - 150
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2233 SV033 Servo function Select the servo functions.
SSF2 selection 2
F E D C B A 9 8
lmc2a zup
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
nfd2 nf3 nfd1

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1 Set the filter depth for Notch filter 1 (SV038).
2 nfd1 Deep ← → Shallow
3 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111
Depth -∞ -18.1 -12.0 -8.5 -6.0 -4.1 -2.5 -1.2
(dB)
4 nfd3 Notch filter 3 stop Notch filter 3 start (1125Hz)
5 Set the filter depth for Notch filter 1 (SV046).
6 nfd2 Deep ← → Shallow
7 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111
Depth -∞ -18.1 -12.0 -8.5 -6.0 -4.1 -2.5 -1.2
(dB)
8
9
A
B
C
D
Vertical axis pull up function Vertical axis pull up function
E zup
stop valid
Lost motion compensation 2 Lost motion compensation 2
F lmc2a
timing normal timing change
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 151
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2234 SV034 Servo function Select the servo functions.
SSF3 selection 3
F E D C B A 9 8
ovsn
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C Set the non-sensitive band of the overshooting compensation
D type 3 in increments of 2µm at a time.
ovsn In the feed forward control, the non-sensitive band of the model
E position droop is set, and overshooting of the model is ignored.
F Set 2µm (0001) as a standard.
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 152
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2235 SV035 Servo function Select the servo functions.
SSF4 selection 4
F E D C B A 9 8
clt
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ckab

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 ckab No signal detection 2 invalid No signal detection 2 valid
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
Setting for normal use The estimated total inertia ratio
in the acceleration/
F clt deceleration is displayed in the
inertia ratio of the servo
monitor screen.
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 153
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2236 SV036 Regenerative Set the power supply type.
(PR) PTYP resistor type F E D C B A 9 8
amp rtyp
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
emgx

bit Details
0 Set to “0”.
1
2
3
Set the external emergency stop function.
4
(Setting is prohibited for values with no description.)
5 emgx Setting Explanation
6 0 External emergency stop invalid
7 4 External emergency stop valid

(Continued to the next page)

III - 154
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2236 (Continued from the last page)
(PR)
bit Details
8
9 rtyp amp setting
rtyp
A Setting 1 2
B 0 Resistor built-in drive unit Setting prohibited
C 1 Setting prohibited
D 2 MR-RB032
amp
E MR-RB12 or
3
F GZG200W39OHMK
MR-RB32 or FCUA-RB22
4 GZG200W120OHMK 3
units connected in parallel
MR-RB30 or FCUA-RB37
5 GZG200W39OHMK 3
units connected in parallel
MR-RB50 or FCUA-RB55
6 GZG300W39OHMK 3
units connected in parallel
MR-RB31 or Setting prohibited
7 GZG200W20OHMK 3
units connected in parallel
MR-RB51 or
8 GZG300W20OHMK 3
units connected in parallel
9 Setting prohibited R-UNIT2
A Setting prohibited
B
C
D FCUA-RB75/2 2 units
E Setting prohibited
F

III - 155
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2237 SV037 Load inertia Set "the motor inertia + motor axis conversion load 0 to 5000
JL scale inertia" in respect to the motor inertia. (%)
Jm+Jl
SV037(JL)= ×100
Jm
Jm : Motor inertia
Jl : Motor axis conversion load inertia
2238 SV038 Notch filter Set the vibration frequency to suppress if machine 0 to 2250
FHz1 frequency 1 vibration occurs. (Hz)
(Valid at 80 or more) When not using, set to "0".
2239 SV039 Lost motion Set this when the lost motion compensation timing 0 to 2000
LMCD compensation does not match. (ms)
timing Adjust by increasing the value by 10 at a time.
2240 SV040 Lost motion Set the non-sensitive band of the lost motion 0 to 255
LMCT compensation compensation in the feed forward control. (µm)
non-sensitive When "0" is set, the actual value that is set is 2µm.
band Adjust by increasing by 1µm at a time.
2241 SV041 Lost motion Set this with SV016 (LMC1) only when you wish to set -1 to 200
LMC2 compensation 2 the lost motion compensation amount to be different (Stall current %)
depending on the command directions. Note that when
Set to "0" as a standard. SV082/bit2 is 1,
-1 to 20000
(Stall current 0.01%)
2242 SV042 Overshooting Set this with SV031 (OVS1) only when you wish to set -1 to 100
OVS2 compensation 2 the overshooting compensation amount to be different (Stall current %)
depending on the command directions. Note that when
Set to "0" as a standard. SV082/bit2 is 1,
-1 to 10000
(Stall current 0.01%)
2243 SV043 Disturbance Set the disturbance observer filter band. 0 to 1000
OBS1 observer filter Set to "100" as a standard. (rad/s)
frequency To use the disturbance observer, also set SV037 (JL)
and SV044 (OBS2). When not using, set to "0".
2244 SV044 Disturbance Set the disturbance observer gain. The standard 0 to 500
OBS2 observer gain setting is "100" to "300". (%)
To use the disturbance observer, also set SV037 (JL)
and SV043 (OBS1). When not using, set to "0".
2245 SV045 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
2246 SV046 Notch filter If the machine vibrates, set the vibration frequency to 0 to 2250
FHz2 frequency 2 be suppressed. (Hz)
(Valid when set to 80 or more.) When not using, set to
"0".
2247 SV047 Inductive Set the inductive voltage compensation gain. Set to 0 to 200
EC voltage "100" as a standard. (%)
compensation If the current FB peak exceeds the current command
gain peak, lower the gain.

III - 156
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2248 SV048 Vertical axis Input a length of time to prevent the vertical axis 0 to 20000
EMGrt drop from dropping by delaying Ready OFF until the (ms)
prevention time brake works when the emergency stop occurs.
Increase the setting by 100ms at a time and set the
value where the axis does not drop.
When using a motor with a break of HF series, set
200ms as a standard.
2249 SV049 Position loop Set the position loop gain during spindle 1 to 200
PGN1sp gain 1 in synchronous control (synchronous tap and (rad/s)
spindle synchronous control with spindle C-axis).
synchronous Set the same value as the value of the spindle
control parameter, position loop gain in synchronous
control.
When performing the SHG control, set this with
SV050 (PGN2sp) and SV058 (SHGCsp).
2250 SV050 Position loop When using SHG control during spindle 0 to 999
gain 2 in synchronous control (synchronous tap and (rad/s)
PGN2sp
spindle synchronous control with spindle C-axis), set this
synchronous with SV049 (PGN1sp) and SV058 (SHGCsp).
control When not performing the SHG control, set to "0".
2251 SV051 Dual feed back Set the control time constant in dual feed back. 0 to 9999
DFBT control time When "0" is set, the actual value that is set is 1ms. (ms)
constant The higher the time constant is, the closer it gets to
the semi-closed control, so the limit of the position
loop gain is raised.
2252 SV052 Dual feedback Set the non-sensitive band in the dual feedback 0 to 9999
DFBN control non- control. (µm)
sensitive band Set to "0" as a standard.
2253 SV053 Excessive error Set the excessive error detection width when servo 0 to 32767
OD3 detection width ON in a special control (initial absolute position (mm)
in special setting, stopper control, etc.).
control If "0" is set, excessive error detection won’t be
performed when servo ON during a special control.
2254 SV054 Overrun Set the overrun detection width in the full-closed -1 to 32767
ORE detection width loop control. (mm)
in closed loop If the gap between the motor side detector and the
control linear scale (machine side detector) exceeds the
value set by this parameter, it is judged to be
overrun and Alarm 43 will be detected.
When "-1" is set, the alarm detection will not be
performed. When "0" is set, overrun is detected
with a 2mm width.
2255 SV055 Max. gate off Set a length of time from the point when the 0 to 20000
EMGx delay time after emergency stop is input to the point when READY (ms)
emergency OFF is compulsorily executed.
stop Set "the maximum value of the SV056 setting value
of the servo drive unit which the power supply unit
and the main circuit are connected with + 100ms".
In preventing the vertical axis from dropping, the
gate off is delayed for the length of time set by
SV048 if SV055’s value is smaller than that of
SV048.

III - 157
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2256 SV056 Deceleration Set the time constant used for the deceleration 0 to 20000
EMGt time constant control at emergency stop. (ms)
at emergency Set the value of 0.9-fold rapid traverse
stop acceleration/deceleration time constant used in the
acceleration/deceleration, because the friction
torque will be a deceleration torque when the motor
decelerates and the machine can be stopped
quickly.
When preventing an impact at the
acceleration/deceleration from being given to the
machine, set the same value as the rapid traverse
acceleration/deceleration time constant.
2257 SV057 SHG control When performing the SHG control, set this with 0 to 1200
SHGC gain S003 (PGN1) and SV004 (PGN2). (rad/s)
When not performing the SHG control, set to "0".
2258 SV058 SHG control When using SHG control during spindle 0 to 1200
SHGCsp gain in synchronous control (synchronous tap and (rad/s)
spindle synchronous control with spindle C-axis), set this
synchronous with SV049 (PGN1sp) and SV050 (PGN2sp).
control When not performing the SHG control, set to "0".
2259 SV059 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
2260 SV060 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
2261 SV061 D/A output Input the data number you wish to output to D/A -1 to 127
DA1NO channel 1 output channel.
data No. When using the 2-axis drive unit, set "-1" for the axis
2262 SV062 D/A output on the side to which the data will not be output.
DA2NO channel 2
data No.
2263 SV063 D/A output Set the scale with a 1/100 unit. -32768 to 32767
DA1MPY channel 1 When "0" is set, the magnification is the same as (1/100-fold)
output scale when "100" is set.
2264 SV064 D/A output
DA2MPY channel 2
output scale
2265 SV065 Machine side Set the machine side compensation spring -32768 to 32767
TLC compensation constant.
spring For semi-closed droop control, the machine side
constant compensation amount can be approximated with
the following expression.
2
Compensation Command speed F(mm/min) ×SV065
= (µm)
amount
Radius R(mm) × 109

Set to "0" when not using.

III - 158
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2281 SV081 Servo Select the servo specifications.
(PR) SPEC2 specification
selction 2 F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 159
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2282 SV082 Servo function Select the servo functions.
SSF5 selection 5
F E D C B A 9 8
dos3
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ccu lmc3 lmct

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

Lost motion compensation 3 Lost motion compensation 3
0 lmct adjustment time adjustment time
measurement invalid measurement valid
Lost motion compensation 3 Lost motion compensation 3
1 lmc3
stop start
Lost motion overshoot compensation
2 ccu compensation setting unit:
0: Stall rated current % 1: Stall rated current 0.01%
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A Digital signal output selection 3
dos3
B 00 : Not used 10 : Contactor control signal output
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 160
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2283 SV083 Servo function Select the servo functions.
SSF6 selection 6
F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
nfd5 nfd4

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1 Set the filter depth for Notch filter 4 (SV087).
2
3 nfd4 Setting value Deep ← → Shallow
000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111
Depth (dB) -∞ -18.1 -12.0 -8.5 -6.0 -4.1 -2.5 -1.2
4
5 Set the filter depth for Notch filter 5 (SV088).
6
7 nfd5 Setting value Deep ← → Shallow
000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111
Depth (dB) -∞ -18.1 -12.0 -8.5 -6.0 -4.1 -2.5 -1.2
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 161
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2284 SV084 Servo function Select the servo functions.
SSF7 selection 7
F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
irms

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0 irms Normal motor current display Effective motor current display
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.
2285 SV085 Lost motion Set the machine system's spring constant when using 0 to 32767
LMCk compensation lost motion compensation type 3. (0.01%/µm)
3 spring When not using, set to "0".
constant
2286 SV086 Lost motion Set the machine system's viscous coefficient when using 0 to 32767
LMCc compensation lost motion compensation type 3. (0.01%/µm)
3 viscous When not using, set to "0".
coefficient
2287 SV087 Notch filter Set the vibration frequency to suppress if machine 0 to 2250
FHz4 frequency 4 vibration occurs. (Valid at 80 or more) (Hz)
2288 SV088 Notch filter When not using, set to "0". 0 to 2250
FHz5 frequency 5 (Hz)
2289 SV089 Torque Normally set this to "0". (For machine tool builder 0 to 32767
TQMAX maximizing adjustment)
Kq control Kp
2290 SV090 Torque Normally set this to "0". (For machine tool builder 0 to 32767
TQMAX maximizing adjustment)
Kd control Kd

III - 162
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2291 SV091 Not used. Set to "0". 0
: :
2293 SV093

2294 SV094 Magnetic pole Set to "0" when not using. 0 to 31999
MPV position error In the magnetic pole position detection function, the
detection command motor speed and motor speed at the position
speed command stop are monitored.
The command motor speed and motor speed levels at
the position command stop are set with “r/min” unit.
When the command motor speed level is set to “0”, the
magnetic pole position error is detected. Set to “10” as a
standard setting applied when the magnetic pole position
error detection function is valid. This will detect the
magnetic pole position error when the motor speed is
“100r/min”.

Ten-thousands Thousands Hundreds Tens Ones

digit digit digit digit digit
Command motor speed level Motor speed level
(10r/min) (10r/min)

2295 SV095 Vertical axis When the vertical axis pull up function is valid, set this 0 to 2000
ZUPD pull up distance parameter in order to adjust the pull up distance. For the (µm)
rotary motor, the pull up distance of 8/1000 rotations in
the motor end is set inside the driver when "0" is set and
the pull up function is valid.
2296 SV096 Not used. 0
: : Set to "0".
2312 SV112

III - 163
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2313 SV113 Servo function Select the servo functions.
SSF8 selection 8
F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 164
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2314 SV114 Servo function Select the servo functions.
SSF9 selection 9
F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 165
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2315 SV115 Servo function Select the servo functions.
SSF10 selection 10
F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 166
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2316 SV116 Servo function Select the servo functions.
SSF11 selection 11
F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 167
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2317 SV117 Expansion In the case of the semi-closed loop control 0 to 32767
(PR) RNG1ex position Set the same value as SV118 (RNG2ex). (kp/rev)
detector (Refer to the explanation of SV118.)
resolution
In the case of the full-closed loop control 0 to 32767
Set the number of pulses per ball screw pitch. ( x 216p/rev)

Detector
Resolution SV117 setting
model name
OSA105-ET2 1,000,000 (p/rev)
RCN723M,
RCN223M 8,000,000 (p/rev)
(Heidenhain)
Relative
Refer to detector
position oblong
specification
wave output
manual. 0 (a)
scale
AT343, AT543
0.05 (µm/p)
(Mitsutoyo)
LC191M 0.1, 0.05, 0.01
(Heidenhain) (µm/p)
LC491M
0.05, 0.01 (µm/p)
(Heidenhain)
Analog cycle/512 Set them with
MDS-B-HR
division SV019
Analog (RNG1).
APE391M
cycle/4096 Refer to
(Heidenhain) "MDS-D- (b)
division
SVJ3/SPJ3
MJ831 (Sony Analog cycle/40 Series
MS) to 4000 division Instruction
Manual".

When using a detector of "(a)", set "0".

When using a detector of "(b)", set as follows.
(i) Calculate number of pulses per PIT.
Number of pulses = SV018(PIT) x 1000 / (Analog cycle / division
number)
(ii) Set SV019 and SV117 from the number of pulses obtained in "(i)"
SV117 = Number of pulses / 65536
(Truncate numbers after decimal point.)
SV019 = Number of pulses - (SV117 x 65536)
(Note 1) However, set "SV019 = (SV019 obtained above) - 65536", if
SV019 cannot be set to "32768 or more" in the parameter
setting.
(Note 2) If SV117 is less than "1", set "SV117 = -1"

III - 168
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
2318 SV118 Expansion Set the number of pulses per one revolution of the motor 0 to 32767
(PR) RNG2ex speed side detector. ( x 216p/rev)
detector Detector type Motor type SV118 setting
resolution
OSA18 HF□□-A48 0
OSA105 HF□□-A51 0

2317 SV119 Not used. 0

: : Set to "0".
2437 SV256

III - 169
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

(2) List of standard parameters for each servomotor

The standard parameters for each motor are given below.
The standard parameters are set to drive the isolated motor. When setting the parameters with the
actual machine, set the parameters according to the machine specifications and detector being used,
etc.

(a) 200V Standard motor HF Series

Motor HF75 HF105 HF54 HF104 HF154 HF204 HF354
Drive unit
07 07 07 10 20 20 35
MDS-D-SVJ3-
SV001 PC1 - - - - - - -
SV002 PC2 - - - - - - -
SV003 PGN1 33 33 33 33 33 33 33
SV004 PGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV005 VGN1 22 100 45 45 40 90 110
SV006 VGN2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV007 VIL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV008 VIA 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364
SV009 IQA 20480 10240 20480 15360 15360 8192 6144
SV010 IDA 20480 10240 20480 15360 15360 8192 6144
SV011 IQG 1792 1280 3072 2560 2560 3072 2048
SV012 IDG 1792 1280 3072 2560 2560 3072 2048
SV013 ILMT 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
SV014 ILMTsp 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
SV015 FFC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV016 LMC1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV017 SPEC 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV018 PIT - - - - - - -
SV019 RNG1 - - - - - - -
SV020 RNG2 - - - - - - -
SV021 OLT 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
SV022 OLL 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
SV023 OD1 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
SV024 INP 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
SV025 MTYP xx01 xx02 xx03 xx04 xx05 xx07 xx08
SV026 OD2 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
SV027 SSF1 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000
SV028 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV029 VCS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV030 IVC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV031 OVS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV032 TOF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

III - 170
 6. Servo Parameters
6.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

Motor HF75 HF105 HF54 HF104 HF154 HF204 HF354

Drive unit
07 07 07 10 20 20 35
MDS-D-SVJ3-
SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV034 SSF3 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV036 PTYP 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
SV037 JL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV038 FHz1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV039 LMCD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV040 LMCT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV041 LMC2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV042 OVS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV043 OBS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV044 OBS2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV045 TRUB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV046 FHz2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV047 EC1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
SV048 EMGrt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV049 PGN1sp 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
SV050 PGN2sp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV051 DFBT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV052 DFBN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV053 OD3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV054 ORE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV055 EMGx 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV056 EMGt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV057 SHGC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV058 SHGCsp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV059 TCNV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV060 TLMT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV061 DA1NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV062 DA2NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV063 DA1MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV064 DA2MPY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV065 TLC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV066 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
: : : : : : : :
SV093 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SV094 MPV 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
SV095 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
: : : : : : : :
SV256 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Note that a value other than "0" may be automatically set by the NC system for the system setting parameters.

III - 171
 6. Servo Parameters
6.3 Supplement

6.3 Supplement
6.3.1 D/A Output No.
6.3.1.1 MDS-D/DH Series
(1) D/A output specifications

Item Explanation
No. of channels 2ch
Output cycle 0.8ms (min. value)
CN9 connector
Output precision 12bit
Pin Name Pin Name
Output voltage 1 LG 11 LG
0V to 2.5V (zero) to +5V
range 2 12
3 13
Output 4 14
-32768% to +32767% (1% 5 15
magnification
scale) 6 16
setting 7 17
MO1 = Pin 9 8 18
Output pin 9 MO1 19 MO2
MO2 = Pin 19
(CN9 connector) 10 20
GND = Pins 1, 11
The D/A output for the 2-axis
unit (MDS-D/DH-V2) is also
2ch. When using the 2-axis
Others
unit, set -1 for the output data
(SV061, 62) of the axis that is
not to be measured.

(2) Setting the output data

Input the No. of the data to be output to each D/A output channel.
# No. Abbrev. Parameter name
2261 SV061 DA1NO D/A output channel 1 data No.
2262 SV062 DA2NO D/A output channel 2 data No.

III - 172
6. Servo Parameters
6.3 Supplement

<Standard output>
Standard output unit
No. Output data
Linear axis Rotary axis
For 2-axis drive unit (MDS-D/DH-V2). Set the
-1 D/A output not selected parameters to another axis in the drive unit that is
not D/A output.
0 Commanded rotation speed 1000(r/min)/V
1 Motor rotation speed 1000(r/min)/V
2 Torque command Motor stall rated ratio 100%/V
3 Torque feedback Motor stall rated ratio 100%/V
8 Machine vibration frequency 500Hz/V

30 Collision detection estimated torque Motor stall rated ratio 100%

Collision detection disturbance
31 Motor stall rated ratio 100%
estimated torque
Estimated load inertia ratio
32(Note) 100% or 100kg
or moving sections gross weight

Disturbance observer estimated

35 Motor stall rated ratio 100%
disturbance torque

50 Position droop 1µm/V 1/1000°/V

51 Position command 1µm/V 1/1000°/V
52 Position feedback 1µm/V 1/1000°/V
53 Position F⊿T 1µm/s/V 1/1000°/s/V
Deviation from ideal position
54 1µm/V 1/1000°/V
(considering servo tracking delay)

60 Position droop 1mm/V 1°/V

61 Position command 1mm/V 1°/V
62 Position feedback 1mm/V 1°/V
63 Position F⊿T 1mm/s/V 1°/s/V
Deviation from ideal position
64 1mm/V 1°/V
(considering servo tracking delay)

70 Position droop 1m/V 1000°/V

71 Position command 1m/V 1000°/V
72 Position feedback 1m/V 1000°/V
73 Position F⊿T 1m/s/V 1000°/s/V
Deviation from ideal position
74 1m/V 1000°/V
(considering servo tracking delay)

126 Saw tooth wave 0V to 5V

127 2.5V test data 2.5V

(Note) The estimated load inertia ratio (unit: 100%) is applied for the rotary motor, and the moving
sections gross weight (unit: 100kg) for the linear motor.

III - 173
6. Servo Parameters
6.3 Supplement

<Servo control signal>

Servo control input (NC to V1/V2) Servo control output (V1/V2 to NC)
No. Details No. Details
16384 Servo control READY ON command 16480 Servo control In READY ON
input 1-0 output 1-0
16385 Servo control Servo ON command 16481 Servo control In servo ON
input 1-1 output 1-1

16388 Servo control Position loop gain 16484 Servo control In position loop gain
input 1-4 changeover command output 1-4 changeover
16390 Servo control Excessive error 16486 Servo control In excessive error
input 1-6 detection width output 1-6 detection width
changeover command changeover

16391 Servo control Alarm reset command 16487 Servo control In alarm
input 1-7 output 1-7
16392 Servo control Current limit selection 16488 Servo control In current limit
input 1-8 command output 1-8 selection

16492 Servo control In in-position

output 1-C
16493 Servo control In current limit
output 1-D
16494 Servo control In absolute position
output 1-E data loss
16495 Servo control In warning
output 1-F
16496 Servo control Z phase passed
output 2-0

16499 Servo control In zero speed

output 2-3

16503 Servo control In external

output 2-7 emergency stop

16409 Servo control Speed monitor 16505 Servo control In speed monitor
input 2-9 command valid output 2-9
16410 Servo control In door closed 16506 Servo control In door closed
input 2-A (controller) output 2-A (controller)
16411 Servo control In door closed (all 16507 Servo control In door closed
input 2-B drive units) output 2-B (self drive unit)

16416 Servo control Control axis 16512 Servo control In control axis
input 3-0 detachment command output 3-0 detachment

III - 174
 6. Servo Parameters
6.3 Supplement

6.3.1.2 MDS-D-SVJ3 Series

(1) D/A output specifications

Item Explanation
No. of channels 2ch
Output cycle 0.8ms (min. value)
Output precision 10bit CN9 connector
Output voltage 0V to 2.5V (zero) to +5V Pin Name Pin Name
1 LG 11 LG
Output
-32768% to +32767% (1% 2 12
magnification 3 13
scale)
setting 4 MO1 14 MO2
5 15
MO1 = Pin 4 6 16
Output pin
MO2 = Pin 14 7 17
(CN9 connector) 8 18
GND = Pins 1, 11 9 19
10 20

(2) Setting the output data

Input the No. of the data to be output to each D/A output channel.
# No. Abbrev. Parameter name
2261 SV061 DA1NO D/A output channel 1 data No.
2262 SV062 DA2NO D/A output channel 2 data No.

III - 175
6. Servo Parameters
6.3 Supplement

<Standard output>
Standard output unit
No. Output data
Linear axis Rotary axis
0 Commanded rotation speed 1000(r/min)/V
1 Motor rotation speed 1000(r/min)/V
2 Torque command Motor stall rated ratio 100%/V
3 Torque feedback Motor stall rated ratio 100%/V
8 Machine vibration frequency 500Hz/V

30 Collision detection estimated torque Motor stall rated ratio 100%

Collision detection disturbance
31 Motor stall rated ratio 100%
estimated torque
Estimated load inertia ratio
32(Note) 100% or 100kg
or moving sections gross weight

Disturbance observer estimated

35 Motor stall rated ratio 100%
disturbance torque

50 Position droop 1µm/V 1/1000°/V

51 Position command 1µm/V 1/1000°/V
52 Position feedback 1µm/V 1/1000°/V
53 Position F⊿T 1µm/s/V 1/1000°/s/V
Deviation from ideal position
54 1µm/V 1/1000°/V
(considering servo tracking delay)

60 Position droop 1mm/V 1°/V

61 Position command 1mm/V 1°/V
62 Position feedback 1mm/V 1°/V
63 Position F⊿T 1mm/s/V 1°/s/V
Deviation from ideal position
64 1mm/V 1°/V
(considering servo tracking delay)

70 Position droop 1m/V 1000°/V

71 Position command 1m/V 1000°/V
72 Position feedback 1m/V 1000°/V
73 Position F⊿T 1m/s/V 1000°/s/V
Deviation from ideal position
74 1m/V 1000°/V
(considering servo tracking delay)

126 Saw tooth wave 0V to 5V

127 2.5V test data 2.5V

(Note) The estimated load inertia ratio (unit: 100%) is applied for the rotary motor, and the moving
sections gross weight (unit: 100kg) for the linear motor.

III - 176
6. Servo Parameters
6.3 Supplement

<Servo control signal>

Servo control input (NC to SVJ3) Servo control output (SVJ3 to NC)
No. Details No. Details
16384 Servo control READY ON command 16480 Servo control In READY ON
input 1-0 output 1-0
16385 Servo control Servo ON command 16481 Servo control In servo ON
input 1-1 output 1-1

16388 Servo control Position loop gain 16484 Servo control In position loop gain
input 1-4 changeover command output 1-4 changeover
16390 Servo control Excessive error 16486 Servo control In excessive error
input 1-6 detection width output 1-6 detection width
changeover command changeover

16391 Servo control Alarm reset command 16487 Servo control In alarm
input 1-7 output 1-7
16392 Servo control Current limit selection 16488 Servo control In current limit
input 1-8 command output 1-8 selection

16492 Servo control In in-position

output 1-C
16493 Servo control In current limit
output 1-D
16494 Servo control In absolute position
output 1-E data loss
16495 Servo control In warning
output 1-F
16496 Servo control Z phase passed
output 2-0

16499 Servo control In zero speed

output 2-3

16503 Servo control In external

output 2-7 emergency stop

16409 Servo control Speed monitor 16505 Servo control In speed monitor
input 2-9 command valid output 2-9
16410 Servo control In door closed 16506 Servo control In door closed
input 2-A (controller) output 2-A (controller)
16411 Servo control In door closed (all drive 16507 Servo control In door closed
input 2-B units) output 2-B (self drive unit)

16416 Servo control Control axis 16512 Servo control In control axis
input 3-0 detachment command output 3-0 detachment

III - 177
 6. Servo Parameters
6.3 Supplement

6.3.2 Electronic Gears

The servo drive unit has internal electronic gears. The command value from the NC is converted into a
detector resolution unit to carry out position control. The electronic gears are single gear ratios calculated
from multiple parameters as shown below. However, each value (ELG1, ELG2) must be less than 32767.
If the value overflows, the initial parameter error (alarm 37) or error parameter No.2301 will be output.
If an alarm occurs, the mechanical specifications and electrical specifications must be revised so that the
electronic gears are within the specifications range.

(1) For semi-closed loop control

ELG1 PC2 × RNG1
Reduced fraction of ELG2 = PC1 × PIT × IUNIT (reduced fraction)

IUNIT = 2/NC (μm) command unit

1µm : IUNIT = 2, 0.1µm : IUNIT = 20

When the above is calculated, the following conditions must be satisfied.

ELG1 ≤ 32767
ELG2 ≤ 32767

(2) For full-closed loop control

PGNX PC2 × RNG2 × PGN1
Reduced fraction of PGNY = PC1 × RNG1 × 30
(reduced fraction)

When the above is calculated, the following conditions must be satisfied.

PGNX ≤ 32767
PGNY ≤ 32767

And,
PGNXsp PC2 × RNG2 × PGN1sp
Reduced fraction of PGNYsp = PC1 × RNG1 × 30
(reduced fraction)

When the above is calculated, the following conditions must be satisfied.

PGNXsp ≤ 32767
PGNYsp ≤ 32767

III - 178
 6. Servo Parameters
6.3 Supplement

6.3.3 Lost Motion Compensation

When the motor is to rotate in the clockwise direction (looking from the load side) at the command for the +
direction, the command direction is CW. Conversely, when the motor is to rotate in the counterclockwise
direction, the command direction is CCW.
This rotation direction can be set with the CNC machine parameters. Note that the meaning of the ± will
differ for some servo parameters according to this motor rotation direction. The servo parameters affected by
CW/CCW are shown below.
SV016 (LMC1), SV041 (LMC2) (When different values are set for SV016 and SV041)

<Example> If the lost motion compensation amount is to be changed according to the direction, the
compensation amount at the quadrant changeover point of each arc where the lost motion
compensation is applied will be as shown below according to the command polarity.
CW CCW
A X: SV041 X: SV016
B Y: SV016 Y: SV041
C X: SV016 X: SV041
D Y: SV041 Y: SV016

+Y The Y axis command

D direction changes from
the + to - direction.

The X axis command

A direction changes from
the + to - direction.

-X +X

The X axis command

C direction changes from
the - to + direction.
The Y axis command
B direction changes from
-Y
the - to + direction.

(Note) The setting value for the parameter is "0" or "-1", the compensation amount is determined as
shown below.
Compensation Compensation
Setting value Setting value
amount amount
for SV016 for SV041
in + direction in - direction
0 0 No compensation No compensation
n 0 n n
0 m m m
n m n m
n -1 n No compensation
-1 m No compensation m

III - 179
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.1 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters

7. Spindle Parameters
7.1 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters
For parameters indicated with a (PR) in the table, turn the NC power OFF after setting. The setting is
validated after the power is turned ON again.

Setting
No. Items Details
range (unit)
3001 slimt 1
Set spindle rotation speed for maximum motor rotation speed
3002 2 Limit rotation 0 to 99999
with gears 00, 01, 10, 11.
3003 3 speed (r/min)
(Set the spindle speed for the S analog output 10V.)
3004 4
3005 smax 1 Set maximum spindle rotation speed with gears 00, 01, 10, 11.
3006 2 Maximum Set to slimt ≥ smax. 0 to 99999
3007 3 rotation speed By comparing the S command value and the value of gear 1 to (r/min)
3008 4 4, a spindle gear shift command will be output automatically.
3009 ssift 1
Set spindle speed for gear shifting with gears 00, 01, 10, 11. 0 to 32767
3010 2 Shift rotation
(Note) Setting too large value may cause a gear nicks when (r/min)
3011 3 speed
changing gears.
3012 4
3013 stap 1
0 to 99999
3014 2 Tap rotation Set maximum spindle rotation speed during tap cycle with
(r/min)
3015 3 speed gears 00, 01, 10, 11.
3016 4
3017 stapt 1
Set time constants for constant inclination synchronous tap 1 to 5000
3018 2 Tap time
cycles for gears 00, 01, 10, 11 (linear acceleration/deceleration (ms)
3019 3 constant
pattern).
3020 4

III - 180
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.1 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters

<Relation of spindle limit rotation speed and spindle maximum rotation speed>
The spindle rotation speed which can be attained at the spindle motor's maximum rotation speed is set
for the limit rotation speed (slimt). This value is obtained by multiplying the gear ratio on the spindle
motor maximum rotation speed (SP017). Set the maximum rotation speed (smax) when the rotation
speed is to be limited according to the machine specifications, such as the spindle gear specifications.
Up to four value can be set for gear changeover.

SP017
Spindle motor rotation speed
(r/min)

0
smax1 slimt1 smax2 slimt2 smax(n) slimt(n)

Spindle rotation speed (r/min)

<Relation of tap time constant and actual acceleration/deceleration time constant>

(For constant inclination synchronous tap cycle)
Set the acceleration time up to the tap rotation speed (stap) in the tap time constant (stapt).
Acceleration/deceleration is carried out at the same inclination for all speed commands. Up to four
values can be set for gear changeover.

stap(n)
Spindle speed (r/min)

Actual
command

0
Actual time stapt(n)

Time (ms)

III - 181
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.1 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
3021 sori Orientation Set the spindle orientation rotation speed. 0 to 32767 (r/min)
rotation Set the rotation speed for when the spindle rotates at
speed the constant rotation speed.
3022 sgear Encoder Set the gear ratio of the spindle to the encoder. 0: 1/1
gear ratio 1: 1/2
2: 1/4
3: 1/8
3023 smini Minimum Set the minimum rotation speed of the spindle. 0 to 32767 (r/min)
rotation If an S command instructs the rotation speed below this
speed setting, the spindle rotates at the minimum rotation
speed set by this parameter.
3024 sout Spindle Set the type of the spindle to be connected. 0 to 5
(PR) connection 0: No connection with the spindle
1: Serial connection (bus)
2 to 5: Analog output
3025 enc-on Spindle Set connection information of the spindle encoder. 0 to 2
(PR) encoder 0: No connection
1: Spindle connection (Spindle encoder connection
check function valid.)
2: Serial connection of encoder
3026 cs_ori Selection of 0: Perform orientation using the coil selected when the 0/1
winding in orientation command is issued.
orientation 1: Use winding L whenever the orientation command is
mode issued.
3027 cs_syn Selection of 0: The coil H/L is selected by the actual spindle motor 0/1
winding in rotation speed (calculated from commanded rotation
spindle speed) when spindle synchronous control starts. (The
synchronous winding is not switched during synchronous control.
mode The control is carried out with the winding selected at
start.)
If the actual spindle motor rotation speed is less than
SP020, the winding L is selected, and if more than
the value, the winding H is selected.
1: Use winding H whenever the spindle synchronous
command is issued.
3028 sprcmm Tap cycle Set the M code of the spindle forward run/reverse run 0 to 999999
spindle command.
forward run/ High-order three digits: The spindle forward run
reverse run command's M code is set.
M command Low-order three digits: The spindle reverse run
command's M code is set.
Note that when "0" is set, the spindle forward run
command's M code is handled as 3, and the spindle
reverse run command's M code as 4.
3029 tapusel Asynchro- Specify whether to use the tap rotation speed or 0/1
nous tap maximum rotation speed for the gear that is selected
gear when an asynchronous tap command is issued.
selection 0: Tap rotation speed
1: Maximum rotation speed
This parameter is valid only when the M-function
synchronous tap cycle enable parameter (#1272
ext08/bit1) is ON.

III - 182
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.1 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
3030 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
3031 smcp_no Drive unit I/F Using a 4-digit number, set the drive unit 1001 to 1010
(PR) channel No. interface channel No. and which axis in that 2001 to 2010
(spindle) channel is to be used when connecting a
spindle drive unit. * Note that this
will change
according to
Axis No. the
Not used. (Set to 0) communication
Number of drive unit channel cycle.
3032 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
3035 spunit Output unit Specify the unit for communication data with the B: (1µm)
(PR) spindle drive unit. C: (0.1µm)
The data communicated between the NC and spindle D: (10nm)
drive unit and the spindle movement data unit follow E: (1nm)
this specification. Note that this parameter is valid only
for the MDS-D/DH drive unit.
The spindle C axis relies on this parameter, and the C
axis output unit (servo) is ignored.
Also set "#1004 ctrl_unit".
3037 taps 21 Synchronous Set the spindle rotation speed at which the step-2 0 to 99999 (r/min)
3038 22 tap switching acceleration/deceleration time constant is to be
3039 23 spindle speed switched at gear 00, 01, 10, or 11.
3040 24 2
3041 tapt 21 Synchronous Set the time constant to reach synchronous tap 1 to 5000 (ms)
3042 22 tap switching switching spindle rotation speed 2 (taps 21 to 24) at
3043 23 time constant gear 00, 01, 10, or 11.
3044 24 2
3045 tapt 31 Synchronous Set the time constant to reach the maximum rotation 1 to 5000 (ms)
3046 32 tap switching speed (smax 1 to smax 4) at gear 00, 01, 10, or 11.
3047 33 time constant
3048 34 3
3049 spt Spindle Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant for 0 to 9999 (ms)
synchroniza- when the spindle synchronization command's rotation
tion speed changes during spindle synchronous control.
acceleration/
deceleration
time constant
3050 sprlv Spindle The spindle rotation speed synchronization complete 0 to 4095 (pulse)
synchro- signal will turn ON when the difference of the reference (1 pulse = 0.088°)
nization spindle and synchronous spindle actual rotation
rotation speed speeds is less than the level set for the synchronous
attainment spindle rotation speed command value during spindle
level synchronous control.

III - 183
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.1 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
3051 spplv Spindle phase The spindle phase synchronization complete signal will 0 to 4095 (pulse)
synchroniza- turn ON when the phase difference of the reference (1 pulse =
tion spindle and synchronous spindle is less than the set level 0.088°)
attainment during spindle phase synchronization control.
level
3052 spplr Spindle motor Set the spindle motor and spindle's relative polarity. 0000/0001
spindle 0: Positive polarity (HEX)
relative Spindle CW rotation at motor CW rotation
polarity 1: Negative polarity
Spindle CCW rotation at motor CW rotation
3053 sppst Spindle Set the deviation amount from the spindle's reference 0 to 359999
encoder position to the spindle encoder's Z phase. (1/1000°)
Z -phase The deviation amount is obtained using the clockwise
position direction looking from the front of the spindle as the
positive direction.
3054 sptc1 Spindle Set the spindle speed for changing the 1st step's 0 to 99999 (r/min)
synchroni- acceleration/deceleration time constant.
zation multi-
step
acceleration/
deceleration
changeover
speed 1
3055 sptc2 Spindle Set the spindle speed for changing the 2nd step's 0 to 99999 (r/min)
synchroni- acceleration/deceleration time constant.
zation multi-
step
acceleration/
deceleration
changeover
speed 2
3056 sptc3 Spindle Set the spindle speed for changing the 3rd step's 0 to 99999 (r/min)
synchroni- acceleration/deceleration time constant.
zation multi-
step
acceleration/
deceleration
changeover
speed 3
3057 sptc4 Spindle Set the spindle speed for changing the 4th step's 0 to 99999 (r/min)
synchroni- acceleration/deceleration time constant.
zation multi-
step
acceleration/
deceleration
changeover
speed 4

III - 184
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.1 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
3058 sptc5 Spindle Set the spindle speed for changing the 5th step's 0 to 99999 (r/min)
synchroni- acceleration/deceleration time constant.
zation multi-
step
acceleration/
deceleration
changeover
speed 5
3059 sptc6 Spindle Set the spindle speed for changing the 6th step's 0 to 99999 (r/min)
synchro- acceleration/deceleration time constant.
nization multi-
step
acceleration/
deceleration
changeover
speed 6
3060 sptc7 Spindle Set the spindle speed for changing the 7th step's 0 to 99999 (r/min)
synchro- acceleration/deceleration time constant.
nization multi-
step
acceleration/
deceleration
changeover
speed 7
3061 spdiv1 Magnification Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant between 0 to 127
for time the spindle synchronization multi-step
constant acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 1 (sptc1) to
changeover the spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/
speed 1 deceleration changeover speed 2 (sptc2) as a
magnification in respect to the spindle synchronization
acceleration/deceleration time constant (spt).
3062 spdiv2 Magnification Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant between 0 to 127
for time the spindle synchronization multi-step
constant acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 2 (sptc2) to
changeover the spindle synchronization multi-step
speed 2 acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 3 (sptc3) as
a magnification in respect to the spindle synchronization
acceleration/deceleration time constant (spt).
3063 spdiv3 Magnification Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant between 0 to 127
for time the spindle synchronization multi-step
constant acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 3 (sptc3) to
changeover the spindle synchronization multi-step
speed 3 acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 4 (sptc4) as
a magnification in respect to the spindle synchronization
acceleration/deceleration time constant (spt).
3064 spdiv4 Magnification Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant between 0 to 127
for time the spindle synchronization multi-step
constant acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 4 (sptc4) to
changeover the spindle synchronization multi-step
speed 4 acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 5 (sptc5) as
a magnification in respect to the spindle synchronization
acceleration/deceleration time constant (spt).

III - 185
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.1 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
3065 spdiv5 Magnification Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant between 0 to 127
for time the spindle synchronization multi-step
constant acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 5 (sptc5) to
changeover the spindle synchronization multi-step
speed 5 acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 6 (sptc6) as
a magnification in respect to the spindle synchronization
acceleration/deceleration time constant (spt).
3066 spdiv6 Magnification Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant between 0 to 127
for time the spindle synchronization multi-step
constant acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 6 (sptc6) to
changeover the spindle synchronization multi-step
speed 6 acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 7 (sptc7) as
a magnification in respect to the spindle synchronization
acceleration/deceleration time constant (spt).
3067 spdiv7 Magnification Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant for the 0 to 127
for time spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/
constant deceleration changeover speed 7 (sptc7) and higher as a
changeover magnification in respect to the spindle synchronization
speed 7 acceleration/deceleration time constant (spt).
3068 symtm1 Phase Set the time to confirm that synchronization is attained 0 to 9999 (ms)
synchroniza- before phase synchronization control is started.
tion start When "0" is set, the time will be 2 seconds. When "100"
confirmation or less is set, the time will be 100ms.
time
3069 symtm2 Phase Set the time to wait for phase synchronization control to 0 to 9999 (ms)
synchroniza- end as the time for the rotation speed to reach the
tion end attainment range.
confirmation When "0" is set, the time will be 2 seconds. When "100"
time or less is set, the time will be 100ms.
3070 syprt Phase Set the fluctuation amount to change the synchronous 0 to 100 (%)
synchroniza- spindle rotation speed during phase synchronization
tion speed control as the command speed and rate.
When "0" is set, the amount will be 100%.
3071 SscDr Speed Select which door group of the speed monitoring the 0000 to 0003
(PR) SelSp monitor spindle belongs to. (HEX)
Door 0000: Belongs to door 1 group.
selection 0001: Belongs to door 1 group.
0002: Belongs to door 2 group.
0003: Belongs to door 1 and 2 group.
(Note) Speed monitoring is not executed when
SP229:SFNC9/bitF is OFF.
3072 Ssc Speed Set the error detection time of command speed 0 to 9999
(PR) Svof monitor monitoring and feedback speed monitoring during servo (ms)
Filter Error OFF.
Sp detection The alarm will occur if the time exceeding safe speed or
time during safe rotation speed exceeds the set error detection time.
servo OFF If "0" is set, it will be handled as 200 (ms).
3101 sp_t 1 Time constant Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant for 0 to 3000 (ms)
3102 2 for spindle spindle rotation using the S command (spindle control
3103 3 rotation with S mode = speed operation mode) at the gears (00, 01,
3104 4 command 10,11). (Linear acceleration/deceleration pattern.)
3105 sut Speed reach Set the speed deviation rate with respect to the 0 to 100 (%)
range commanded speed for output of the speed reach signal.

III - 186
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.1 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
3106 zrn_typ Zero point bit Details 0x0000 to 0xffff
return 0 Z phase detection direction (Hex)
specifications (0: Forward direction, 1; Reverse direction)
1 Orientation direction
2 (00: Short-cut, 01: Forward run, 10: Reverse run)
3
4 Synchronous tapping zero point
return/deceleration stop designation
(0: Zero point return, 1: Deceleration stop)
5 Synchronous tapping zero point return direction
6 (00: Short-cut, 01: Forward run, 10: Reverse run)
7 Synchronous tapping command polarity
(0: Forward direction, 1; Reverse direction)
8 Spindle/C axis zero point return/deceleration
stop designation
(0: Zero point return, 1: Deceleration stop)
9 Spindle C axis zero point return direction
A (00: Short-cut, 01: Forward run, 10: Reverse run)
B
C
D
E
F Spindle zero point near switch detection
(0: Normal 1: Spindle zero point near switch
detection valid)
3107 ori_spd Orientation Spindle speed during orientation command 1 to 99999 (r/min)
command
speed
3108 ori_sft In-position Set the stop position for orientation. -35999 to 35999
shift amount The clockwise direction looking from the load side is (0.01°)
for minus (-).
orientation
3109 zdetspd Z phase When "#3106/bitF" = "0" (Normal) 1 to 99999 (r/min)
detection Spindle rotation speed at initial Z phase detection
speed When "#3106/bitF" = "1" (Spindle zero point near switch
detection valid)
Spindle rotation speed at initial spindle zero point near
switch detection
(Note) When spindle zero point near switch detection is
valid, the rotation direction of the orient/zero point
return (synchronous tap, spindle/C axis) is applied
to Z phase detection direction. The rotation speed
is applied to Z phase detection speed.
3110 tap_spd Synchronous Synchronous tapping zero point return speed 1 to 99999 (r/min)
tapping zero
point return
speed
3111 tap_sft Synchronous Synchronous tapping zero point return shift amount 0.00 to 35.999
tapping zero (0.01°)
point return
shift amount

III - 187
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.1 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
3112 cax_spd Spindle C Spindle C axis zero point return speed 1 to 99999 (r/min)
axis zero
point return
speed
3113 cax_sft Spindle C Spindle C axis zero point return shift amount 0.00 to 359999
axis zero (0.001°)
point return
shift amount
3114 cax_par Spindle/C This parameter switches detector parameters for spindle 0/1
a_chg axis control and those for C axis control during spindle/C axis
parameter control.
switch 0: Parameters won't be switched
1: Parameters will be switched.
3115 sp2_t1 Time When spindle rotates in the orientation/position loop 1 to 20000 (ms)
3116 sp2_t2 constant in reference position return method (C axis, tapping) of
3117 sp2_t3 orientation/ gears (00), set the acceleration/deceleration time
3118 sp2_t4 position loop constant toward the spindle's limit rotation speed (slimt).
reference (Linear acceleration/deceleration pattern)
position Set a value that is bigger than the values set by "#3101
return sp_t1" to "#3104 sp_t4".
3121 tret Turret Select the validity of turret indexing. 0: Invalid
indexing 1: Valid
3122 GRC Turret side Set the number of teeth on the turret side when the gear 0 to 32767
gear ratio selection command (control input 4/bit6, 5) is set to 00.
Set a value of GRC so that the ratio of GRC to the
spindle side gear ratio (#13057 SP057) will be 1:N
(an integer).
If this parameter is set to 0, it will be regarded as 1.
3123 tret_spd Turret Set the turret end indexing speed when in turret indexing. 0 to 32767(r/min)
indexing When this parameter is set to 0, the value of Orientation
speed command speed (#3107 ori_spd) will be used for the
turret indexing speed.
3124 tret_t Turret Set the acceleration/deceleration time constant to reach 0 to 30000 (ms)
indexing time Limit rotation speed (#3001 slimt) at gear 00 when in
constant turret indexing (linear acceleration/deceleration pattern).
Set this parameter to a larger value than #3115 sp2_t1 at
gear 00.
3125 tret_inp Turret Set the position error range in which the index positioning 0 to
os indexing in- complete signal is output when in turret indexing. When 32767(1°/1000)
position width this parameter is set to 0, the value of In-position width
(#2024 SP024) will be used for this width.
3126 tret_fin_ Index Set the time to forcedly turn OFF the index positioning 0 to 10000 (ms)
off positioning complete signal since the indexing start signal turns ON.
complete If this period of time has not passed yet, the index
signal OFF positioning complete signal will not turn ON even at the
time completion of index positioning.

III - 188
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 MDS-D/DH Series

7.2 MDS-D/DH Series

Parameters indicated as (PR) in the table will be validated when the NC power is turned OFF and ON after
setting.
The spindle parameter setting and display methods differ according to the NC being used. Refer to the
instruction manuals for the NC and each spindle.
Mitsubishi CNC Control Unit MDS-D Series Specifications Manual ･････････IB-1500011
Mitsubishi CNC Control Unit MDS-DH Series Specifications Manual････････IB-1500003

! CAUTION
! In the explanation on bits, set all bits not used, including blank bits, to "0".

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13001 SP001 Position loop Set the position loop gain. Set to "33" as a standard. 1 to 200
PGV gain Non- When the setting value is increased, the tracking in (1/s)
interpolation respect to the command will increase, and the settling
mode time during positioning can be reduced. However, the
13002 SP002 Position loop impact applied on the machine during 1 to 200
PGN gain acceleration/deceleration will increase. (1/s)
interpolation The position loop gain can be selected according to the
mode control mode selection command set with control input 4/
bit 2, 1, 0.
13003 SP003 Position loop 1 to 200
PGS gain spindle Control input 4
Mode (1/s)
synchroniza- bit2 bit1 bit0
tion 0 0 0 Non-interpolation
0 0 1 Spindle interpolation
0 1 0 Interpolation
1 0 0 Interpolation

When carrying out SHG control, set SP035 (SFNC3)/bitC

(shgn) or SP036 (SFNC4)/bit4 (shgs) to 1.
13004 SP004 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
13005 SP005 Speed loop Set the speed loop gain. 1 to 9999
VGN1 gain 1 Set this according to the load inertia size.
The higher the setting value is, the more accurate the
control will be. However, vibration tends to occur.
If vibration occurs, adjust by lowering by 20 to 30%.
The value should be determined to be 70 to 80% of the
value at the time when the vibration stops.
13006 SP006 Speed loop Set the gain of the speed loop integration control. 1 to 9999
VIA1 lead Set to "1900" as a standard. Adjust the value by
compensation 1 increasing/decreasing it by about 100 at a time.
Raise this value to improve contour tracking precision in
high-speed cutting. Lower this value when the position
droop vibrates (10 to 20Hz).
13007 SP007 Speed loop Set this when the limit cycle occurs in the full-closed loop, 0 to 32767
VIL1 delay or overshooting occurs in positioning.
compensation 1 Select the control method with SP033 (SFNC1)/bit1, 0
(vcnt).
Normally, use "Changeover type 2".
When you set this parameter, make sure to set the torque
offset (SP050 (TOF)).
When not using, set to "0".

III - 189
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13008 SP008 Speed loop Normally, SP005 (VGN1), SP006 (VIA1) and SP007 1 to 9999
VGN2 gain 2 (VIL1) are used.
13009 SP009 Speed loop By setting SP035 (SFNC3)/bit1 (vgin), SP035 1 to 9999
VIA2 lead (SFNC3)/bit9 (vgn) or SP036 (SFNC4)/bit1 (vgs) to 1, gain
compensation 2 can be used according to the application.
2 Gain 2 can also be used by setting the speed gain set 2
changeover request (control input 5/bitC) to 1.
13010 SP010 Speed loop Refer to SP005 (VGN1), SP006 (VIA1) and SP007 (VIL1) 0 to 32767
VIL2 delay for the procedures.
compensation
2
13011 SP011 Not used. 0
: : Set to "0".
13013 SP013
13014 SP014 Minimum Set the minimum value for the variable excitation rate. Set 0 to 100
PY1 excitation rate to "50" as a standard. (%)
1 Set "0" when using the IPM spindle motor.
If the gear noise, etc., is large, select a small value.
However, a larger value is more effective for impact
response.
• When setting a value "50 or more", check that there is
no gear noise or motor excitation noise, vibration during
low-speed rotation, or vibration when the servo is locked
during orientation stop, etc.
• When setting a value "less than 50", check that there is
no problem with the impact load response or rigidity
during servo lock.
13015 SP015 Minimum Normally, SP014 (PY1) is used. 0 to 100
PY2 excitation rate Excitation rate 2 can be used according to the application (%)
2 by setting SP035 (SFNC3)/bit2 (pyin), SP035
(SFNC3)/bitA (pyn) or SP036 (SFNC4)/bit2 (psy) to 1.
Excitation rate 2 can also be used by setting the minimum
excitation rate 2 changeover request (control input 5/bitB)
to 1. Refer to SP014 (PY1) for the procedures.
Set "0" when using the IPM spindle motor.
13016 SP016 Phase Set the single rotation position alignment deceleration rate 1 to 32767
DDT alignment for orientation stopping, phase alignment during rotation, (0.1 (r/mn)/ms)
deceleration and for changing the mode from non-interpolation during
rate rotation to spindle synchronization.
If the load inertia is large, decrease the setting.
When the setting value is increased, the orient in-position
and single rotation position alignment will end faster, but
the impact applied on the machine will increase.
To change the deceleration rate only during the rotation
command (command FΔT = / 0), set this parameter
together with SP070 (KDDT).

III - 190
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13017 SP017 Spindle Select the spindle specifications.
(PR) SPEC1 specifications F E D C B A 9 8
1
spm
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
fdir vfb seqh fdir2

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

Speed feedback forward Speed feedback reverse
0 fdir2
polarity polarity
1
High-speed READY ON High-speed READY ON
2 seqh
sequence invalid sequence valid
Speed feedback filter valid
3 vfb Speed feedback filter invalid
(2250Hz)
Position feedback forward Position feedback reverse
4 fdir
polarity polarity
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C Select the motor series.
D 0: 200V specification IM 2: 400V specification IM
spm spindle motor spindle motor
E 1: 200V specification IPM 3: 400V specification IPM
F spindle motor spindle motor
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 191
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13018 SP018 Spindle Select the spindle specifications.
(PR) SPEC2 specifications F E D C B A 9 8
2
spsu
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
mkch oplp

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1 oplp Open loop invalid Open loop valid
2
3
4
Coil changeover function Coil changeover function valid
5 mkch
invalid
6
7
8 spsu Speed setting unit [r/min] Speed setting unit [×4r/min]
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.
13019 SP019 Position Set the same value as SP020 (RNG2). 0 to 32767
(PR) RNG1 detector (Refer to the explanation for SP020.) (kp/rev)
resolution
13020 SP020 Speed Set the number of pulses per one revolution of the motor 1 to 32767
(PR) RNG2 detector side detector. (kp/rev)
resolution Detector model name SP020 setting value
128 teeth 2000
180 teeth 2880
TS5691 256 teeth 4000
384 teeth 6000
512 teeth 8000
64 teeth 2000
TS5690 128 teeth 4000
256 teeth 8000

(Note) Even if the number of teeth is same, resolution may

be differed depending on the detector.
13021 SP021 Overload Set the detection time constant of Overload 1 (Alarm 50). 1 to 15300
(PR) OLT detection time (For machine tool builder adjustment.) (s)
constant Set to "60" as a standard.
Set "300" when using the IPM spindle motor.

III - 192
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13022 SP022 Overload Set the overload 1 (alarm 50) current detection level as a 1 to 200
OLL detection level percentage in respect to the motor short-time rated output (Short-time
current. rated %)
(For machine tool builder adjustment.)
Set to "120" as a standard.
Set "100" when using the IPM spindle motor.
13023 SP023 Excessive error Set the excessive error detection width for the interpolation 0 to 32767
OD1 detection width mode and spindle synchronization. (°)
(interpolation Set to "120" as a standard.
mode, spindle Excessive error detection is not executed, so do not set "0".
synchronization)
13024 SP024 In-position width Set the in-position detection width. 0 to 32767
INP Set the accuracy required for the machine. (1°/1000)
The lower the setting is, the higher the positioning accuracy
gets, however, the cycle time (setting time) becomes
longer. The standard setting is "875".
13025 SP025 2nd in-position Use this when detecting a different in-position from the 0 32767
INP2 width normal in-position detection, such as advancing the in- (°/1000)
position signal. The procedure is the same as SP024 (INP).
Set to "875" as a standard.
13026 SP026 Maximum motor Set the maximum motor speed. If the actual motor speed 1 to 32767
(PR) TSP speed exceeds the set maximum speed, an overspeed alarm will (r/min)
occur.
13027 SP027 Motor zero Set the motor speed for detecting zero speed. If the actual 1 to 1000
ZSP speed motor speed is less than the set speed, the zero speed (r/min)
detection will turn ON. Set to "50" as a standard.
13028 SP028 Speed detection Set the motor speed for detecting the speed. If the actual 10 to 32767
SDTS set value motor speed is less than the set value, the speed detection (r/min)
will turn ON. Set a value 10% of the maximum motor speed
as a standard.
13029 SP029 Speed detection Set the hysteresis value at which the speed detection 10 to 1000
SDTR reset width changes from ON to OFF. If the setting value is small, the (r/min)
speed detection will chatter easily. Set to "30" as a 30
standard.
13030 SP030 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
13031 SP031 Motor type Set the position detector type, speed detector type and motor type.
(PR) MTYP
F E D C B A 9 8
pen ent
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
mtyp
ent: Set "2".
pen: Set "2"
mtyp: Set "00".

III - 193
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13032 SP032 Power supply Set the power supply type.
(PR) PTYP type F E D C B A 9 8
amp rtyp
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ptyp

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0 ptyp When the CN4 connector of the drive unit and the power
1 supply are connected, setting below is necessary.
2
3 MDS-D-CV MDS-DH-CV
4 External External External External
5 emergency emergency emergency emergency
stop stop stop stop
6
invalid valid invalid valid
7
CV-37 04 44 04 44
CV-75 08 48 08 48
CV-110 11 51 11 51
CV-185 19 59 19 59
CV-300 30 70 30 70
CV-370 37 77 37 77
CV-450 45 85 45 85
CV-550 55 95 - -
CV-750 - - 75 B5

8 Set to "0".
9
rtyp
A
B
C Set to "0".
D
amp
E
F

III - 194
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13033 SP033 Spindle Select the spindle function.
SFNC1 function 1 F E D C B A 9 8
ovs lmc
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
lmc2a vfct vcnt

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0 00: Delay compensation 10: Delay compensation
vcnt changeover invalid changeover type 2
1 01: Delay compensation 11: Delay compensation
changeover type 1 changeover type 2
2
3
4 00: Jitter compensation 10: Jitter compensation 2 pulse
vfct invalid
5 11: Jitter compensation 3 pulse
01: Jitter compensation 1 pulse
6
Lost motion compensation 2
7 lmc2a Timing changed
timing normal
8 Set the compensation amount with SV048 (LMC1) and SP041
(LMC2).
9 Note that when SP227/lmc3 is set to "1", the lost motion
lmc compensation type 3 is selected regardless of the setting of this
data.
00: Lost motion 10: Lost motion compensation
compensation stop type 2
01: Setting prohibited 11: Setting prohibited
A Set the compensation amount with SP043 (OVS1) and SP042
(OVS2).
B ovs
00: Overshoot compensation 10: Setting prohibited
stop 11: Overshoot compensation
01: Setting prohibited type 3
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 195
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13034 SP034 Spindle Select the spindle functions.
SFNC2 function 2
F E D C B A 9 8
nfd5 nfd4 pwm
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
nfd2 nfd3 nfd1 zck

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0 zck Z phase check valid (ALM42) Z phase check invalid (ALM42)
1 Set the filter depth for Notch filter 1.
2 nfd1 Setting value Deep ← → Shallow
3 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 110
Depth (dB) -∞ -18 -12 -9 -6 -4 -3 -1
4 nfd3 Notch filter 3 stop Notch filter 3 start (1125Hz)
5 Set the filter depth for Notch filter 2.
6 nfd2 Setting value Deep ← → Shallow
7 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 110
Depth (dB) -∞ -18 -12 -9 -6 -4 -3 -1
8 pwm Standard current control High frequency current control
9 Set the filter depth for Notch filter 4.
A nfd4
B Setting value Deep ← → Shallow
000 001 010 011 100 101 110 110
Depth (dB) -∞ -18 -12 -9 -6 -4 -3 -1
C
D Set the filter depth for Notch filter 5.
E nfd5
F Setting value Deep ← → Shallow
000 001 010 011 100 101 110 110
Depth (dB) -∞ -18 -12 -9 -6 -4 -3 -1
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 196
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13035 SP035 Spindle Select the spindle functions.
(PR) SFNC3 function 3 F E D C B A 9 8
shgn pyn vgn
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
nopc pyin vgin

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set Mode
0
Speed loop gain set 1 Speed loop gain set 2
1 vgin
selection selection after in-position
Excitation rate 2 selection Non-
2 pyin Excitation rate 1 selection
after in-position inter-
3 pola-
4 tion
5
6
7 nopc Phase alignment start Phase alignment stop
8
Speed loop gain set 1 Speed loop gain set 2
9 vgn
selection selection
A pyn Excitation rate 1 selection Excitation rate 2 selection Inter-
B pola-
C shgn SHG control stop SHG control start tion
D
E
F

(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 197
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13036 SP036 Spindle Select the spindle functions.
(PR) SFNC4 function 4 F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
mksl shgs pys vgs

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set Mode
0
Speed loop gain set 1 Speed loop gain set 2
1 vgs
selection selection
2 pys Excitation rate 1 selection Excitation rate 2 selection
Spindle
3 syn-
4 shgs SHG control stop SHG control start chroni-
zation
5
6
Use command coil during
7 mksl Use high-speed coil
spindle synchronization
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.
13037 SP037 Load inertia Set "the motor inertia + motor axis conversion load inertia" in 0 to 5000
JL scale respect to the motor inertia. (%)

Jm+Jl Jm : Motor inertia

SP037(JL)= ×100 Jl : Motor axis conversion
Jm
load inertia

13038 SP038 Notch filter Set the vibration frequency to suppress if machine vibration 0 to 2250
FHz1 frequency 1 occurs. (Hz)
(Valid at 50 or more) When not using, set to "0".
13039 SP039 Lost motion Set this when the lost motion compensation timing doest not 0 to 2000
LMCD compensation match. (ms)
timing Adjust by increasing the value by 10 at a time.
13040 SP040 Lost motion Set the non-sensitive band of the lost motion compensation –32768 to
LMCT compensation in the feed forward control. 32767
non-sensitive When "0" is set, the actual value that is set is 2°/1000. (1°/1000)
band Adjust by increasing by 1°/1000 at a time.

III - 198
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13041 SP041 Lost motion Set this with SP048 (LMC1) only when you wish to set the -1 to 200
LMC2 compensation lost motion compensation amount to be different depending (Short-time
2 on the command directions. rated %)
Set to "0" as a standard. Note that
when
SP227/bit2 is
1, -1 to 20000
(Short-time
rated 0.01%)
13042 SP042 Overshooting Set this with SP043 (OVS1) only when you wish to set the -1 to 100
OVS2 compensation overshooting compensation amount to be different (Short-time
2 depending on the command directions. rated %)
Set to "0" as a standard. Note that
when
SP227/bit2 is
1, -1 to 10000
(Short-time
rated 0.01%)
13043 SP043 Overshooting Set this if overshooting occurs during positioning. This -1 to 100
OVS1 compensation compensates the motor torque during positioning. (Short-time
1 This is valid only when the overshooting compensation rated %)
SP033 (SFNC1/ovs) is selected. Note that
Type 3: When SP033 (SFNC1)/bitB, A (ovs) = 11 when
Set the compensation amount based on the motor short- SP227/bit2 is
time rated current. 1, -1 to 10000
Increase in increments of 1%, and find the value where (Short-time
overshooting does not occur. rated 0.01%)
Other than Type 3: When SP033 (SFNC1)/bitB, A (ovs) = / 11
Overshooting compensation (Type 3) is not executed.
When you wish different compensation amount depending
on the direction
When SP042 (OVS2) is "0", compensate with the value of
SP043 (OVS1) in both of the + and - directions.
If you wish to change the compensation amount
depending on the command direction, set this and SP042
(OVS2).
(SP043: + direction, SV042: - direction. However, the
directions may be opposite depending on other settings.)
When "-1" is set, the compensation won’t be performed in
the direction of the command.
13044 SP044 Disturbance Set the disturbance observer gain. The standard setting is 0 to 500
OBS2 observer gain "100". (%)
To use the disturbance observer, also set SP037 (JL) and
SP045 (OBS1). When not using, set to "0".

III - 199
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13045 SP045 Disturbance Set the disturbance observer filter band. 0 to 1000
OBS1 observer filter Set to "100" as a standard. (rad/s)
frequency To use the disturbance observer, also set SP037 (JL) and
SP044 (OBS2). When not using, set to "0".
13046 SP046 Notch filter Set the vibration frequency to suppress if machine vibration 0 to 2250
FHz2 frequency 2 occurs. (Hz)
(Valid at 50 or more) When not using, set to "0".
13047 SP047 Inductive Set the inductive voltage compensation gain. Set to "100" as 0 to 200
EC voltage a standard. (%)
compensation If the current FB peak exceeds the current command peak,
gain lower the gain.
13048 SP048 Lost motion Set this when the protrusion (that occurs due to the non- -1 to 200
LMC1 compensation sensitive band by friction, torsion, backlash, etc) at quadrant (Short-time
1 change is too large. rated %)
This compensates the torque at quadrant change. Note that
This is valid only when the lost motion compensation when
(SP033 (SFNC1/lmc)) is selected. SP227/bit2 is
Type 2: When SP033 (SFNC1)/bit9, 8 (lmc) = 10 1, -1 to 20000
Set the compensation amount based on the motor short- (Short-time
time rated current. rated 0.01%)
Set a value double the friction torque as a standard. The
compensation amount will be 0 if "0" is set.
Other than type 2: When SP033 (SFNC1)/bit9, 8 (lmc) =
/ 10
Lost motion compensation (Type 2) is not executed.
When you wish different compensation amount depending
on the direction
When SP041 (LMC2) is "0", compensate with the value of
SP048 (LMC1) in both of the + and - directions.
If you wish to change the compensation amount
depending on the command direction, set this and SP041
(LMC2).
(SP048: + direction, SP041: - direction. However, the
directions may be opposite depending on other settings.)
When "-1" is set, the compensation won’t be performed in
the direction of the command.
13049 SP049 Acceleration When a relative error in the synchronous control is large, 0 to 999
FFC rate feed apply this parameter to the axis that is delaying. (%)
forward gain The standard setting value is "0". For the SHG control, set to
"100".
To adjust a relative error in acceleration/deceleration,
increase the value by 50 to 100 at a time.
13050 SP050 Torque offset Set the unbalance torque. -100 to 100
TOF (Short-time
rated %)

III - 200
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13051 SP051 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
13052 SP052 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
13053 SP053 Excessive error Set the excessive error detection width for the non- 0 to 32767
ODS detection width interpolation mode. (°)
(non-interpola- <Standard setting value>
tion mode) ODS = Maximum motor speed [r/min]×60/PGV/2

Excessive error detection is not executed, so do not set "0".

13054 SP054 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
13055 SP055 Max. gate off Set a length of time from the point when the emergency stop 0 to 20000
EMGx delay time after is input to the point when READY OFF is compulsorily (ms)
emergency stop executed.
Normally, set the same value as the absolute value of
SP056.
When "0" is set, READY OFF is compulsorily executed with
7000ms.
13056 SP056 Deceleration Set the time constant used for deceleration control during -20000 to
EMGt time constant at emergency stop. Set the time to stop from the maximum 20000
emergency stop motor speed (TSP). (ms)
When "0" is set, the deceleration control is executed with
7000ms.
13057 SP057 Spindle side Set the number of teeth on the spindle side when the gear 1 to 32767
(PR) GRA1 gear ratio 1 selection command (control input 4/bit6, 5) is set to 00.
13058 SP058 Not used. 0
(PR) Set to "0".
13059 SP059 Not used. 0
(PR) Set to "0".
13060 SP060 Not used. 0
(PR) Set to "0".
13061 SP061 Motor side gear Set the number of teeth on the motor side when the gear 1 to 32767
(PR) GRB1 ratio 1 selection command (control input 4/bit6, 5) is set to 00.
13062 SP062 Not used. 0
(PR) Set to "0".
13063 SP063 Not used. 0
(PR) Set to "0".

III - 201
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13064 SP064 Not used. 0
(PR) Set to "0".
13065 SP065 Torque limit 1 Set the torque limit value when the torque limit (control input 0 to 999
TLM1 1/bitA, 9, 8) is set to 001. (Short-time
rated %)
13066 SP066 Torque limit 2 Set the torque limit value when the torque limit (control input 0 to 999
TLM2 1/bitA, 9, 8) is set to 010. (Short-time
rated %)
13067 SP067 Torque limit 3 Set the torque limit value when the torque limit (control input 0 to 999
TLM3 1/bitA, 9, 8) is set to 011. (Short-time
rated %)
13068 SP068 Torque limit 4 Set the torque limit value when the torque limit (control input 0 to 999
TLM4 1/bitA, 9, 8) is set to 100. (Short-time
rated %)
13069 SP069 Phase Set the width for completing phase alignment during 0 to 32767
PCMP alignment rotation, and for single rotation position alignment when (1°/1000)
completion changing the mode from non-interpolation to spindle
width synchronization while rotating.
Set the rotation error required of the machine.
The rotation error will decrease when the setting value is
decreased, but the cycle time (settling time) will increase.
Set to "875" as a standard.
13070 SP070 Phase Set the scale for SP016 (DDT) only when the deceleration 0 to 255
KDDT alignment rate is to be changed during a rotation command (command (1/16-fold)
deceleration FΔT = / 0).
rate scale The single rotation position alignment will be completed
faster when the setting value is increased, but the impact
applied on the machine will increase. Set to "0" when not
using this function.
13071 SP071 Variable The deceleration time can be 0 to 999
DIQM current limit adjusted by changing the (%)
during current limit value during 100%
(TMLR)
deceleration, deceleration according to the
lower limit motor speed. DIQM

value As shown on the right, set the

13072 SP072 Variable lower limit rate of the current 0 DIQN Motor speed 1 to 32767
DIQN current limit limit in SP071 (DIQM), and (r/min)
during use this with SP072 (DIQN).
deceleration, When DIQM is set to 100%, the current limit value for
break point deceleration (TMRL) set in the motor constants will be
speed applied.

III - 202
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 MDS-D/DH Series

No. Items Details Setting range

13073 SP073 Variable speed If noise is bothersome during 0 to 100
VGVN gain target high-speed rotation, the state (%)
value can be improved by lowering VGN1
(VGN2)
13074 SP074 Variable speed the speed loop gain at high VGVN
0 to 32767
VGVS gain change speeds. (r/min)
start speed As shown on the right, set
the speed loop gain rate for 0 VGVS VLMT
the overspeed detection (VLMT= Maximum motor speed×1.15)

speed in SP073 (VGVN),

and use this with SP074
(VGVS).
Set to "0" when not using this function.
The overspeed detection speed (VLMT) is 115% of the
maximum motor speed (TSP).
This function can be used when either VGN1 or VGN2 is
selected.
13075 SP075 Slip Adjust the slip frequency scale for deceleration. 0 to 255
DWSH compensation Normally, set this to "0". (1/16-fold)
scale during (For machine tool builder adjustment)
regeneration
High-speed
coil
13076 SP076 Slip Adjust the slip frequency scale at deceleration when using 0 to 255
DWSL compensation the low-speed coil. (1/16-fold)
scale during Normally, set this to "0".
regeneration (For machine tool builder adjustment)
Low-speed coil
13077 SP077 Q axis current Set the current loop gain. 1 to 20480
IQA advance When changing the coils, set the current loop gain for when
compensation the high-speed coil is selected.
13078 SP078 D axis current The setting value is determined by the electrical
IDA advance characteristics, so the setting value is fixed for the motor
compensation being used.
Set the value given in the spindle parameter list.
13079 SP079 Q axis current (For machine tool builder adjustment) 1 to 8192
IQG gain
13080 SP080 D axis current
IDG gain
13081 SP081 Q axis current Set the current loop gain for when the coil is changed and 1 to 20480
IQAL advance the low-speed coil is selected.
compensation The setting value is determined by the electrical
Low-speed coil characteristics, so the setting value is fixed for the motor
13082 SP082 D axis current being used.
IDAL advance Set the value given in the spindle parameter list.
compensation (For machine tool builder adjustment)
Low-speed coil
13083 SP083 Q axis current 1 to 8192
IQGL gain
Low-speed coil
13084 SP084 D axis current
IDGL gain
Low-speed coil

III - 203
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13085 SP085 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
13086 SP086 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
13087 SP087 Notch filter Set the vibration frequency to suppress if machine vibration 0 to 2250
FHz4 frequency 4 occurs. (Valid at 50 or more) (Hz)
When not using, set to "0".
13088 SP088 Notch filter Set the vibration frequency to suppress if machine vibration 0 to 2250
FHz5 frequency 5 occurs. (Valid at 50 or more) (Hz)
When not using, set to "0".
13089 SP089 Not used. 0
: : Set to "0".
13112 SP112
13113 SP113 Current Set the current command value for when open loop control 0 to 999
OPLP command is valid. (Short-time
value for open A "0" setting is the same as a "50" setting. rated %)
loop Set "0" when not using this function.
Open loop control is valid when SP018 (SPEC2)/bit1 (oplp)
is set to 1.
13114 SP114 Coil Set the time to cut off the gate when turning the coil 0 to 3500
MKT changeover changeover contactor OFF and ON. (ms)
gate cutoff Set a value longer than the coil changeover contactor's
timer OFF/ON time.
Set to "150" as a standard.
13115 SP115 Coil Set the time to limit the current immediately after the gate is 0 to 3500
MKT2 changeover turned ON when the coil changeover contactor ON/OFF is (ms)
current limit completed.
timer Set to "25" as a standard.
13116 SP116 Coil Set the value to limit the current immediately after the gate 0 to 999
MKIL changeover is turned ON when the coil changeover contactor ON/OFF is (Short-time
current limit completed. rated %)
value Set to "120" as a standard.
13117 SP117 Excessive Set the time to detect the speed excessive error alarm. 0 to 60
SETM speed Set the time required of the machine. (s)
deviation timer Set to "12" as a standard.
13118 SP118 Not used. 0
: : Set to "0".
13120 SP120

III - 204
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13121 SP121 Magnetic pole This is used for the initial magnetic pole detection when the 0 to 32767
MP Kpp detection IPM spindle motor is turned ON.
position loop Set the position loop gain in the magnetic pole detection
gain loop.
Set "0" when using the IM spindle motor.
13122 SP122 Magnetic pole This is used for the initial magnetic pole detection when the 0 to 32767
MP Kvp detection IPM spindle motor is turned ON.
speed loop Set the speed loop gain in the magnetic pole detection loop.
gain Set "0" when using the IM spindle motor.
13123 SP123 Magnetic pole This is used for the initial magnetic pole detection when the 0 to 32767
MP Kvi detection IPM spindle motor is turned ON.
speed loop Set the speed loop advance compensation in the magnetic
advance pole detection loop.
compensation Set "0" when using the IM spindle motor.
13124 SP124 Magnetic pole This is used for the initial magnetic pole detection when the 0 to 999
ILMTsp detection IPM spindle motor is turned ON. (Short-time
current limit Set the current limit value in the magnetic pole detection rated %)
value loop.
Set "0" when using the IM spindle motor.
13125 SP125 D/A output Input the data number you wish to output to D/A output -1 to 3, 50, 60,
DA1NO channel 1 channel. 127
data No.
13126 SP126 D/A output
DA2NO channel 2
data No.
13127 SP127 D/A output Set the output scale as a 1/100 unit. -32768 to
DA1MPY channel 1 The same scale as "100" is applied when "0" is set. 32767
output scale (1/100-fold)
13128 SP128 D/A output
DA2MPY channel 2
output scale
13129 SP129 Set the unique constants for the spindle motor. (High-speed
(PR) coil)
: : The setting value is determined by the motor's mechanical
13160 SP160 and electrical characteristics and specifications, so normally
(PR) set the value given in the spindle parameter list.
13161 SP161 Set the unique constants for the spindle motor. (Low-speed
(PR) coil)
: : The setting value is determined by the motor's mechanical
13192 SP192 and electrical characteristics and specifications, so normally
(PR) set the value given in the spindle parameter list.
13193 SP193 Not used. 0
: : Set to "0".
13224 SP224

III - 205
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13225 SP225 Spindle Select the spindle functions.
SFNC5 function 5 F E D C B A 9 8
ovsn
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C Set the non-sensitive band for overshooting compensation type
D 3 with a 2°/1000 unit.
ovsn When using feed forward control, set the non-sensitive band for
E the model position loop to ignore the model overshooting. Set
F to 2°/1000 (0001) as a standard.
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 206
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13226 SP226 Spindle Select the spindle functions.
SFNC6 function 6 F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 207
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13227 SP227 Servo Select the servo functions.
SFNC7 function 7
F E D C B A 9 8
dis
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ccu

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1
Lost motion overshoot compensation
2 ccu compensation setting unit
Short-time rated % Short-time rated 0.01%
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C Digital signal input selection
D 0: No signal
dis 1: Safety observation function door state signal
E 2 to F: Setting prohibited
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 208
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13228 SP228 Spindle Select the spindle functions.
SFNC8 function 8 F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
irms

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0 irms Normal load meter display Effective motor current display
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 209
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13229 SP229 Spindle Select the spindle functions.
SFNC9 function 9 F E D C B A 9 8
ssc rps
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
Safety observation Safety observation
D rps Safety speed setting unit Safety speed setting unit
°/min 100°/min
E
Safety observation function Safety observation function
F ssc
stop start
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 210
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13230 SP230 Spindle Select the spindle functions.
SFNC10 function 10 F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 211
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13231 SP231 Spindle Select the spindle functions.
SFNC11 function 11 F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 212
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13232 SP232 Spindle Select the spindle functions.
SFNC12 function 12 F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.
13233 SP233 Voltage non- When 100% is set, the voltage equivalent to the logical non- 0 to 255
IVC sensitive energized time will be compensated. (%)
band When "0" is set, a 100% compensation will be performed.
compensation Adjust in increments of 10% from the default value 100%.
If increased too much, vibration or vibration noise may be
generated.

III - 213
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.2 MDS-D/DH Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13234 SP234 Not used. 0
: : Set to "0".
13236 SP236
13237 SP237 Torque Set the filter for the torque command. Set to "0" when not 0 to 4500
(PR) TCF command using this function. (Hz)
filter The standard value is "500" when using the motor side
detector TS5690 or TS5691.
13238 SP238 Safety Set safety speed of spindle on the safety observation 0 to 18000
SSCFEED observation function. (°/min)
safety speed Set to "0" when not using this function.
13239 SP239 Safety Set safety motor speed on the safety observation function. 0 to 32767
SSCRPM observation When not using, set to "0". (r/min)
safety motor
speed
13240 SP240 Not used. 0
(PR) Set to "0".
13241 SP241 System These parameters are set automatically by the NC system.
(PR) setting
: : parameter
13256 SP256
(PR)

III - 214
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

Parameters indicated as (PR) in the table will be validated when the NC power is turned OFF and ON after
setting.
The spindle parameter setting and display methods differ according to the NC being used. Refer to the
instruction manuals for the NC and each spindle.
Mitsubishi CNC Control Unit MDS-D-SVJ3/SPJ3 Series Specifications Manual IB-1500158

! CAUTION
! In the explanation on bits, set all bits not used, including blank bits, to "0".

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13001 SP001 Position loop Set the position loop gain. Set to "33" as a standard. 1 to 200
PGV gain Non- When the setting value is increased, the tracking in (1/s)
interpolation respect to the command will increase, and the settling
mode time during positioning can be reduced. However, the
13002 SP002 Position loop impact applied on the machine during 1 to 200
PGN gain acceleration/deceleration will increase. (1/s)
interpolation The position loop gain can be selected according to the
mode control mode selection command set with control input 4/
bit 2, 1, 0.
13003 SP003 Position loop 1 to 200
PGS gain spindle Control input 4
Mode (1/s)
synchroniza- bit2 bit1 bit0
tion 0 0 0 Non-interpolation
0 0 1 Spindle interpolation
0 1 0 Interpolation
1 0 0 Interpolation

When carrying out SHG control, set SP035 (SFNC3)/bitC

(shgn) or SP036 (SFNC4)/bit4 (shgs) to 1.
13004 SP004 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
13005 SP005 Speed loop Set the speed loop gain. 1 to 9999
VGN1 gain 1 Set this according to the load inertia size.
The higher the setting value is, the more accurate the
control will be. However, vibration tends to occur.
If vibration occurs, adjust by lowering by 20 to 30%.
The value should be determined to be 70 to 80% of the
value at the time when the vibration stops.
13006 SP006 Speed loop Set the gain of the speed loop integration control. 1 to 9999
VIA1 lead Set to "1900" as a standard. Adjust the value by
compensation 1 increasing/decreasing it by about 100 at a time.
Raise this value to improve contour tracking precision in
high-speed cutting. Lower this value when the position
droop vibrates (10 to 20Hz).
13007 SP007 Speed loop Set this when the limit cycle occurs in the full-closed loop, 0 to 32767
VIL1 delay or overshooting occurs in positioning.
compensation 1 Select the control method with SP033 (SFNC1)/bit1, 0
(vcnt).
Normally, use "Changeover type 2".
When you set this parameter, make sure to set the torque
offset (SP050 (TOF)).
When not using, set to "0".

III - 215
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13008 SP008 Speed loop Normally, SP005 (VGN1), SP006 (VIA1) and SP007 1 to 9999
VGN2 gain 2 (VIL1) are used.
13009 SP009 Speed loop By setting SP035 (SFNC3)/bit1 (vgin), SP035 1 to 9999
VIA2 lead (SFNC3)/bit9 (vgn) or SP036 (SFNC4)/bit1 (vgs) to 1, gain
compensation 2 can be used according to the application.
2 Gain 2 can also be used by setting the speed gain set 2
changeover request (control input 5/bitC) to 1.
13010 SP010 Speed loop Refer to SP005 (VGN1), SP006 (VIA1) and SP007 (VIL1) 0 to 32767
VIL2 delay for the procedures.
compensation
2
13011 SP011 Not used. 0
: : Set to "0".
13013 SP013
13014 SP014 Minimum Set the minimum value for the variable excitation rate. Set 0 to 100
PY1 excitation rate to "50" as a standard. (%)
1 Set "0" when using the IPM spindle motor.
If the gear noise, etc., is large, select a small value.
However, a larger value is more effective for impact
response.
• When setting a value "50 or more", check that there is
no gear noise or motor excitation noise, vibration during
low-speed rotation, or vibration when the servo is locked
during orientation stop, etc.
• When setting a value "less than 50", check that there is
no problem with the impact load response or rigidity
during servo lock.
13015 SP015 Minimum Normally, SP014 (PY1) is used. 0 to 100
PY2 excitation rate Excitation rate 2 can be used according to the application (%)
2 by setting SP035 (SFNC3)/bit2 (pyin), SP035
(SFNC3)/bitA (pyn) or SP036 (SFNC4)/bit2 (psy) to 1.
Excitation rate 2 can also be used by setting the minimum
excitation rate 2 changeover request (control input 5/bitB)
to 1. Refer to SP014 (PY1) for the procedures.
Set "0" when using the IPM spindle motor.
13016 SP016 Phase Set the single rotation position alignment deceleration rate 1 to 32767
DDT alignment for orientation stopping, phase alignment during rotation, (0.1 (r/mn)/ms)
deceleration and for changing the mode from non-interpolation during
rate rotation to spindle synchronization.
If the load inertia is large, decrease the setting.
When the setting value is increased, the orient in-position
and single rotation position alignment will end faster, but
the impact applied on the machine will increase.
To change the deceleration rate only during the rotation
command (command FΔT = / 0), set this parameter
together with SP070 (KDDT).

III - 216
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13017 SP017 Spindle Select the spindle specifications.
(PR) SPEC1 specifications F E D C B A 9 8
1
spm
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
fdir vfb seqh fdir2

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

Speed feedback forward Speed feedback reverse
0 fdir2
polarity polarity
1
High-speed READY ON High-speed READY ON
2 seqh
sequence invalid sequence valid
Speed feedback filter valid
3 vfb Speed feedback filter invalid
(2250Hz)
Position feedback forward Position feedback reverse
4 fdir
polarity polarity
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C Select the motor series.
D 0: 200V specification IM 2: 400V specification IM
spm spindle motor spindle motor
E 1: 200V specification IPM 3: 400V specification IPM
F spindle motor spindle motor
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 217
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13018 SP018 Spindle Select the spindle specifications.
(PR) SPEC2 specifications F E D C B A 9 8
2
spsu
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
mkch oplp

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1 oplp Open loop invalid Open loop valid
2
3
4
Coil changeover function Coil changeover function valid
5 mkch
invalid
6
7
8 spsu Speed setting unit [r/min] Speed setting unit [×4r/min]
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.
13019 SP019 Position Set the same value as SP020 (RNG2). 0 to 32767
(PR) RNG1 detector (Refer to the explanation for SP020.) (kp/rev)
resolution
13020 SP020 Speed Set the number of pulses per one revolution of the motor 1 to 32767
(PR) RNG2 detector side detector. (kp/rev)
resolution Detector model name SP020 setting value
128 teeth 2000
180 teeth 2880
TS5691 256 teeth 4000
384 teeth 6000
512 teeth 8000
64 teeth 2000
TS5690 128 teeth 4000
256 teeth 8000

(Note) Even if the number of teeth is same, resolution may

be differed depending on the detector.
13021 SP021 Overload Set the detection time constant of Overload 1 (Alarm 50). 1 to 15300
(PR) OLT detection time (For machine tool builder adjustment.) (s)
constant Set to "60" as a standard.
Set "300" when using the IPM spindle motor.

III - 218
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13022 SP022 Overload Set the overload 1 (alarm 50) current detection level as a 1 to 200
OLL detection level percentage in respect to the motor short-time rated output (Short-time
current. rated %)
(For machine tool builder adjustment.)
Set to "120" as a standard.
Set "100" when using the IPM spindle motor.
13023 SP023 Excessive error Set the excessive error detection width for the interpolation 0 to 32767
OD1 detection width mode and spindle synchronization. (°)
(interpolation Set to "120" as a standard.
mode, spindle Excessive error detection is not executed, so do not set "0".
synchronization)
13024 SP024 In-position width Set the in-position detection width. 0 to 32767
INP Set the accuracy required for the machine. (1°/1000)
The lower the setting is, the higher the positioning accuracy
gets, however, the cycle time (setting time) becomes
longer. The standard setting is "875".
13025 SP025 2nd in-position Use this when detecting a different in-position from the 0 32767
INP2 width normal in-position detection, such as advancing the in- (°/1000)
position signal. The procedure is the same as SP024 (INP).
Set to "875" as a standard.
13026 SP026 Maximum motor Set the maximum motor speed. If the actual motor speed 1 to 32767
(PR) TSP speed exceeds the set maximum speed, an overspeed alarm will (r/min)
occur.
13027 SP027 Motor zero Set the motor speed for detecting zero speed. If the actual 1 to 1000
ZSP speed motor speed is less than the set speed, the zero speed (r/min)
detection will turn ON. Set to "50" as a standard.
13028 SP028 Speed detection Set the motor speed for detecting the speed. If the actual 10 to 32767
SDTS set value motor speed is less than the set value, the speed detection (r/min)
will turn ON. Set a value 10% of the maximum motor speed
as a standard.
13029 SP029 Speed detection Set the hysteresis value at which the speed detection 10 to 1000
SDTR reset width changes from ON to OFF. If the setting value is small, the (r/min)
speed detection will chatter easily. Set to "30" as a 30
standard.
13030 SP030 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
13031 SP031 Motor type Set the position detector type, speed detector type and motor type.
(PR) MTYP
F E D C B A 9 8
pen ent
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
mtyp
ent: Set "2".
pen: Set "2"
mtyp: Set "00".

III - 219
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13032 SV032 Regenerative Set the power supply type.
(PR) PTYP resistor type F E D C B A 9 8
amp rtyp
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
emgx

bit Details
0 Set to “0”.
1
2
3
Set the external emergency stop function.
4
(Setting is prohibited for values with no description.)
5 emg Setting Explanation
x
6 0 External emergency stop invalid
7 4 External emergency stop valid

(Continued to the next page)

III - 220
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13032 (Continued from the last page)
(PR)
bit Details
8
9 rtyp amp setting
A rtyp Setting 1 2
Resistor built-in drive Setting prohibited
B 0
unit
C 1 Setting prohibited
D 2 MR-RB032
amp
E MR-RB12 or
3
F GZG200W39OHMK
MR-RB32 or FCUA-RB22
GZG200W120OHMK 3
4
units connected in
parallel
MR-RB30 or FCUA-RB37
GZG200W39OHMK 3
5
units connected in
parallel
MR-RB50 or FCUA-RB55
GZG300W39OHMK 3
6
units connected in
parallel
MR-RB31 or Setting prohibited
GZG200W20OHMK 3
7
units connected in
parallel
MR-RB51 or
GZG300W20OHMK 3
8
units connected in
parallel
9 Setting prohibited R-UNIT2
A Setting prohibited
B
C
FCUA-RB75/2 2
D
units
E Setting prohibited
F

III - 221
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13033 SP033 Spindle Select the spindle function.
SFNC1 function 1 F E D C B A 9 8
ovs lmc
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
lmc2a vfct vcnt

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0 00: Delay compensation 10: Delay compensation
vcnt changeover invalid changeover type 2
1 01: Delay compensation 11: Delay compensation
changeover type 1 changeover type 2
2
3
4 00: Jitter compensation 10: Jitter compensation 2 pulse
vfct invalid
5 11: Jitter compensation 3 pulse
01: Jitter compensation 1 pulse
6
Lost motion compensation 2
7 lmc2a Timing changed
timing normal
8 Set the compensation amount with SV048 (LMC1) and SP041
(LMC2).
9 Note that when SP227/lmc3 is set to "1", the lost motion
lmc compensation type 3 is selected regardless of the setting of this
data.
00: Lost motion 10: Lost motion compensation
compensation stop type 2
01: Setting prohibited 11: Setting prohibited
A Set the compensation amount with SP043 (OVS1) and SP042
(OVS2).
B ovs
00: Overshoot compensation 10: Setting prohibited
stop 11: Overshoot compensation
01: Setting prohibited type 3
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 222
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13034 SP034 Spindle Select the spindle functions.
SFNC2 function 2
F E D C B A 9 8
nfd5 nfd4 pwm
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
nfd2 nfd3 nfd1 zck

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0 zck Z phase check valid (ALM42) Z phase check invalid (ALM42)
1 Set the filter depth for Notch filter 1.
2 nfd1 Setting value Deep ← → Shallow
3 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 110
Depth (dB) -∞ -18 -12 -9 -6 -4 -3 -1
4 nfd3 Notch filter 3 stop Notch filter 3 start (1125Hz)
5 Set the filter depth for Notch filter 2.
6 nfd2 Setting value Deep ← → Shallow
7 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 110
Depth (dB) -∞ -18 -12 -9 -6 -4 -3 -1
8 pwm Standard current control High frequency current control
9 Set the filter depth for Notch filter 4.
A nfd4
B Setting value Deep ← → Shallow
000 001 010 011 100 101 110 110
Depth (dB) -∞ -18 -12 -9 -6 -4 -3 -1
C
D Set the filter depth for Notch filter 5.
E nfd5
F Setting value Deep ← → Shallow
000 001 010 011 100 101 110 110
Depth (dB) -∞ -18 -12 -9 -6 -4 -3 -1
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 223
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13035 SP035 Spindle Select the spindle functions.
(PR) SFNC3 function 3 F E D C B A 9 8
shgn pyn vgn
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
nopc pyin vgin

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set Mode
0
Speed loop gain set 1 Speed loop gain set 2
1 vgin
selection selection after in-position
Excitation rate 2 selection Non-
2 pyin Excitation rate 1 selection
after in-position inter-
3 pola-
4 tion
5
6
7 nopc Phase alignment start Phase alignment stop
8
Speed loop gain set 1 Speed loop gain set 2
9 vgn
selection selection
A pyn Excitation rate 1 selection Excitation rate 2 selection Inter-
B pola-
C shgn SHG control stop SHG control start tion
D
E
F

(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 224
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13036 SP036 Spindle Select the spindle functions.
(PR) SFNC4 function 4 F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
mksl shgs pys vgs

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set Mode
0
Speed loop gain set 1 Speed loop gain set 2
1 vgs
selection selection
2 pys Excitation rate 1 selection Excitation rate 2 selection
Spindle
3 syn-
4 shgs SHG control stop SHG control start chroni-
zation
5
6
Use command coil during
7 mksl Use high-speed coil
spindle synchronization
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.
13037 SP037 Load inertia Set "the motor inertia + motor axis conversion load inertia" in 0 to 5000
JL scale respect to the motor inertia. (%)

Jm+Jl Jm : Motor inertia

SP037(JL)= ×100 Jl : Motor axis conversion
Jm
load inertia

13038 SP038 Notch filter Set the vibration frequency to suppress if machine vibration 0 to 2250
FHz1 frequency 1 occurs. (Hz)
(Valid at 50 or more) When not using, set to "0".
13039 SP039 Lost motion Set this when the lost motion compensation timing doest not 0 to 2000
LMCD compensation match. (ms)
timing Adjust by increasing the value by 10 at a time.
13040 SP040 Lost motion Set the non-sensitive band of the lost motion compensation –32768 to
LMCT compensation in the feed forward control. 32767
non-sensitive When "0" is set, the actual value that is set is 2°/1000. (1°/1000)
band Adjust by increasing by 1°/1000 at a time.

III - 225
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13041 SP041 Lost motion Set this with SP048 (LMC1) only when you wish to set the -1 to 200
LMC2 compensation lost motion compensation amount to be different depending (Short-time
2 on the command directions. rated %)
Set to "0" as a standard. Note that
when
SP227/bit2 is
1, -1 to 20000
(Short-time
rated 0.01%)
13042 SP042 Overshooting Set this with SP043 (OVS1) only when you wish to set the -1 to 100
OVS2 compensation overshooting compensation amount to be different (Short-time
2 depending on the command directions. rated %)
Set to "0" as a standard. Note that
when
SP227/bit2 is
1, -1 to 10000
(Short-time
rated 0.01%)
13043 SP043 Overshooting Set this if overshooting occurs during positioning. This -1 to 100
OVS1 compensation compensates the motor torque during positioning. (Short-time
1 This is valid only when the overshooting compensation rated %)
SP033 (SFNC1/ovs) is selected. Note that
Type 3: When SP033 (SFNC1)/bitB, A (ovs) = 11 when
Set the compensation amount based on the motor short- SP227/bit2 is
time rated current. 1, -1 to 10000
Increase in increments of 1%, and find the value where (Short-time
overshooting does not occur. rated 0.01%)
Other than Type 3: When SP033 (SFNC1)/bitB, A (ovs) = / 11
Overshooting compensation (Type 3) is not executed.
When you wish different compensation amount depending
on the direction
When SP042 (OVS2) is "0", compensate with the value of
SP043 (OVS1) in both of the + and - directions.
If you wish to change the compensation amount
depending on the command direction, set this and SP042
(OVS2).
(SP043: + direction, SV042: - direction. However, the
directions may be opposite depending on other settings.)
When "-1" is set, the compensation won’t be performed in
the direction of the command.
13044 SP044 Disturbance Set the disturbance observer gain. The standard setting is 0 to 500
OBS2 observer gain "100". (%)
To use the disturbance observer, also set SP037 (JL) and
SP045 (OBS1). When not using, set to "0".

III - 226
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13045 SP045 Disturbance Set the disturbance observer filter band. 0 to 1000
OBS1 observer filter Set to "100" as a standard. (rad/s)
frequency To use the disturbance observer, also set SP037 (JL) and
SP044 (OBS2). When not using, set to "0".
13046 SP046 Notch filter Set the vibration frequency to suppress if machine vibration 0 to 2250
FHz2 frequency 2 occurs. (Hz)
(Valid at 50 or more) When not using, set to "0".
13047 SP047 Inductive Set the inductive voltage compensation gain. Set to "100" as 0 to 200
EC voltage a standard. (%)
compensation If the current FB peak exceeds the current command peak,
gain lower the gain.
13048 SP048 Lost motion Set this when the protrusion (that occurs due to the non- -1 to 200
LMC1 compensation sensitive band by friction, torsion, backlash, etc) at quadrant (Short-time
1 change is too large. rated %)
This compensates the torque at quadrant change. Note that
This is valid only when the lost motion compensation when
(SP033 (SFNC1/lmc)) is selected. SP227/bit2 is
Type 2: When SP033 (SFNC1)/bit9, 8 (lmc) = 10 1, -1 to 20000
Set the compensation amount based on the motor short- (Short-time
time rated current. rated 0.01%)
Set a value double the friction torque as a standard. The
compensation amount will be 0 if "0" is set.
Other than type 2: When SP033 (SFNC1)/bit9, 8 (lmc) =
/ 10
Lost motion compensation (Type 2) is not executed.
When you wish different compensation amount depending
on the direction
When SP041 (LMC2) is "0", compensate with the value of
SP048 (LMC1) in both of the + and - directions.
If you wish to change the compensation amount
depending on the command direction, set this and SP041
(LMC2).
(SP048: + direction, SP041: - direction. However, the
directions may be opposite depending on other settings.)
When "-1" is set, the compensation won’t be performed in
the direction of the command.
13049 SP049 Acceleration When a relative error in the synchronous control is large, 0 to 999
FFC rate feed apply this parameter to the axis that is delaying. (%)
forward gain The standard setting value is "0". For the SHG control, set to
"100".
To adjust a relative error in acceleration/deceleration,
increase the value by 50 to 100 at a time.
13050 SP050 Torque offset Set the unbalance torque. -100 to 100
TOF (Short-time
rated %)

III - 227
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13051 SP051 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
13052 SP052 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
13053 SP053 Excessive error Set the excessive error detection width for the non- 0 to 32767
ODS detection width interpolation mode. (°)
(non-interpola- <Standard setting value>
tion mode) ODS = Maximum motor speed [r/min]×60/PGV/2

Excessive error detection is not executed, so do not set "0".

13054 SP054 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
13055 SP055 Max. gate off Set a length of time from the point when the emergency stop 0 to 20000
EMGx delay time after is input to the point when READY OFF is compulsorily (ms)
emergency stop executed.
Normally, set the same value as the absolute value of
SP056.
When "0" is set, READY OFF is compulsorily executed with
7000ms.
13056 SP056 Deceleration Set the time constant used for deceleration control during -20000 to
EMGt time constant at emergency stop. Set the time to stop from the maximum 20000
emergency stop motor speed (TSP). (ms)
When "0" is set, the deceleration control is executed with
7000ms.
13057 SP057 Spindle side Set the number of teeth on the spindle side when the gear 1 to 32767
(PR) GRA1 gear ratio 1 selection command (control input 4/bit6, 5) is set to 00.
13058 SP058 Spindle side Set the number of teeth on the spindle side when the gear 1 to 32767
(PR) GRA2 gear ratio 2 selection command (control input 4/bit6,5) is set to 01.
13059 SP059 Spindle side Set the number of teeth on the spindle side when the gear 1 to 32767
(PR) GRA3 gear ratio 3 selection command (control input 4/bit6,5) is set to 10.
13060 SP060 Spindle side Set the number of teeth on the spindle side when the gear 1 to 32767
(PR) GRA4 gear ratio 4 selection command (control input 4/bit6,5) is set to 11.
13061 SP061 Motor side gear Set the number of teeth on the motor side when the gear 1 to 32767
(PR) GRB1 ratio 1 selection command (control input 4/bit6, 5) is set to 00.
13062 SP062 Motor side gear Set the number of teeth on the motor side when the gear 1 to 32767
(PR) GRB2 ratio 2 selection command (control input 4/bit6, 5) is set to 01.
13063 SP063 Motor side gear Set the number of teeth on the motor side when the gear 1 to 32767
(PR) GRB3 ratio 3 selection command (control input 4/bit6, 5) is set to 10.
13064 SP064 Motor side gear Set the number of teeth on the motor side when the gear 1 to 32767
(PR) GRB4 ratio 4 selection command (control input 4/bit6, 5) is set to 11.

III - 228
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13065 SP065 Torque limit 1 Set the torque limit value when the torque limit (control input 0 to 999
TLM1 1/bitA, 9, 8) is set to 001. (Short-time
rated %)
13066 SP066 Torque limit 2 Set the torque limit value when the torque limit (control input 0 to 999
TLM2 1/bitA, 9, 8) is set to 010. (Short-time
rated %)
13067 SP067 Torque limit 3 Set the torque limit value when the torque limit (control input 0 to 999
TLM3 1/bitA, 9, 8) is set to 011. (Short-time
rated %)
13068 SP068 Torque limit 4 Set the torque limit value when the torque limit (control input 0 to 999
TLM4 1/bitA, 9, 8) is set to 100. (Short-time
rated %)
13069 SP069 Phase Set the width for completing phase alignment during 0 to 32767
PCMP alignment rotation, and for single rotation position alignment when (1°/1000)
completion changing the mode from non-interpolation to spindle
width synchronization while rotating.
Set the rotation error required of the machine.
The rotation error will decrease when the setting value is
decreased, but the cycle time (settling time) will increase.
Set to "875" as a standard.
13070 SP070 Phase Set the scale for SP016 (DDT) only when the deceleration 0 to 255
KDDT alignment rate is to be changed during a rotation command (command (1/16-fold)
deceleration FΔT = / 0).
rate scale The single rotation position alignment will be completed
faster when the setting value is increased, but the impact
applied on the machine will increase. Set to "0" when not
using this function.
13071 SP071 Variable The deceleration time can be adjusted by changing the
DIQM current limit current limit value during deceleration according to the
during motor speed. 100%
(TMLR)
deceleration, As shown on the right, set the lower limit rate of the current
lower limit limit in SP071 (DIQM), and use this with SP072 (DIQN). DIQM

value
0 DIQN M

13072 SP072 Variable 0 to 999

DIQN current limit When DIQM is set to 100%, (%)
during the current limit value for
deceleration, deceleration (TMRL) set in the
break point motor constants will be
speed applied.
13072 SP072 Variable 1 to 32767
DIQN current limit (r/min)
during
deceleration,
break point
speed

III - 229
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

No. Items Details Setting range

13073 SP073 Variable speed If noise is bothersome during 0 to 100
VGVN gain target high-speed rotation, the state (%)
value can be improved by lowering VGN1
(VGN2)
13074 SP074 Variable speed the speed loop gain at high VGVN
0 to 32767
VGVS gain change speeds. (r/min)
start speed As shown on the right, set
the speed loop gain rate for 0 VGVS VLMT
the overspeed detection (VLMT= Maximum motor speed×1.15)

speed in SP073 (VGVN),

and use this with SP074
(VGVS).
Set to "0" when not using this function.
The overspeed detection speed (VLMT) is 115% of the
maximum motor speed (TSP).
This function can be used when either VGN1 or VGN2 is
selected.
13075 SP075 Slip Adjust the slip frequency scale for deceleration. 0 to 255
DWSH compensation Normally, set this to "0". (1/16-fold)
scale during (For machine tool builder adjustment)
regeneration
High-speed
coil
13076 SP076 Slip Adjust the slip frequency scale at deceleration when using 0 to 255
DWSL compensation the low-speed coil. (1/16-fold)
scale during Normally, set this to "0".
regeneration (For machine tool builder adjustment)
Low-speed coil
13077 SP077 Q axis current Set the current loop gain. 1 to 20480
IQA advance When changing the coils, set the current loop gain for when
compensation the high-speed coil is selected.
13078 SP078 D axis current The setting value is determined by the electrical
IDA advance characteristics, so the setting value is fixed for the motor
compensation being used.
Set the value given in the spindle parameter list.
13079 SP079 Q axis current (For machine tool builder adjustment) 1 to 8192
IQG gain
13080 SP080 D axis current
IDG gain
13081 SP081 Q axis current Set the current loop gain for when the coil is changed and 1 to 20480
IQAL advance the low-speed coil is selected.
compensation The setting value is determined by the electrical
Low-speed coil characteristics, so the setting value is fixed for the motor
13082 SP082 D axis current being used.
IDAL advance Set the value given in the spindle parameter list.
compensation (For machine tool builder adjustment)
Low-speed coil
13083 SP083 Q axis current 1 to 8192
IQGL gain
Low-speed coil
13084 SP084 D axis current
IDGL gain
Low-speed coil

III - 230
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13085 SP085 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
13086 SP086 Not used. 0
Set to "0".
13087 SP087 Notch filter Set the vibration frequency to suppress if machine vibration 0 to 2250
FHz4 frequency 4 occurs. (Valid at 50 or more) (Hz)
When not using, set to "0".
13088 SP088 Notch filter Set the vibration frequency to suppress if machine vibration 0 to 2250
FHz5 frequency 5 occurs. (Valid at 50 or more) (Hz)
When not using, set to "0".
13089 SP089 Not used. 0
: : Set to "0".
13112 SP112

III - 231
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13113 SP113 Current Set the current command value for when open loop control 0 to 999
OPLP command is valid. (Short-time
value for open A "0" setting is the same as a "50" setting. rated %)
loop Set "0" when not using this function.
Open loop control is valid when SP018 (SPEC2)/bit1 (oplp)
is set to 1.
13114 SP114 Coil Set the time to cut off the gate when turning the coil 0 to 3500
MKT changeover changeover contactor OFF and ON. (ms)
gate cutoff Set a value longer than the coil changeover contactor's
timer OFF/ON time.
Set to "150" as a standard.
13115 SP115 Coil Set the time to limit the current immediately after the gate is 0 to 3500
MKT2 changeover turned ON when the coil changeover contactor ON/OFF is (ms)
current limit completed.
timer Set to "25" as a standard.
13116 SP116 Coil Set the value to limit the current immediately after the gate 0 to 999
MKIL changeover is turned ON when the coil changeover contactor ON/OFF is (Short-time
current limit completed. rated %)
value Set to "120" as a standard.
13117 SP117 Excessive Set the time to detect the speed excessive error alarm. 0 to 60
SETM speed Set the time required of the machine. (s)
deviation timer Set to "12" as a standard.
13118 SP118 Not used. 0
: : Set to "0".
13120 SP120

III - 232
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13121 SP121 Magnetic pole This is used for the initial magnetic pole detection when the 0 to 32767
MP Kpp detection IPM spindle motor is turned ON.
position loop Set the position loop gain in the magnetic pole detection
gain loop.
Set "0" when using the IM spindle motor.
13122 SP122 Magnetic pole This is used for the initial magnetic pole detection when the 0 to 32767
MP Kvp detection IPM spindle motor is turned ON.
speed loop Set the speed loop gain in the magnetic pole detection loop.
gain Set "0" when using the IM spindle motor.
13123 SP123 Magnetic pole This is used for the initial magnetic pole detection when the 0 to 32767
MP Kvi detection IPM spindle motor is turned ON.
speed loop Set the speed loop advance compensation in the magnetic
advance pole detection loop.
compensation Set "0" when using the IM spindle motor.
13124 SP124 Magnetic pole This is used for the initial magnetic pole detection when the 0 to 999
ILMTsp detection IPM spindle motor is turned ON. (Short-time
current limit Set the current limit value in the magnetic pole detection rated %)
value loop.
Set "0" when using the IM spindle motor.
13125 SP125 D/A output Input the data number you wish to output to D/A output -1 to 3, 50, 60,
DA1NO channel 1 channel. 127
data No.
13126 SP126 D/A output
DA2NO channel 2
data No.
13127 SP127 D/A output Set the output scale as a 1/100 unit. -32768 to
DA1MPY channel 1 The same scale as "100" is applied when "0" is set. 32767
output scale (1/100-fold)
13128 SP128 D/A output
DA2MPY channel 2
output scale

III - 233
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13129 SP129 Set the unique constants for the spindle motor. (High-speed
(PR) coil)
: : The setting value is determined by the motor's mechanical
13160 SP160 and electrical characteristics and specifications, so normally
(PR) set the value given in the spindle parameter list.
13161 SP161 Set the unique constants for the spindle motor. (Low-speed
(PR) coil)
: : The setting value is determined by the motor's mechanical
13192 SP192 and electrical characteristics and specifications, so normally
(PR) set the value given in the spindle parameter list.
13193 SP193 Not used. 0
: : Set to "0".
13224 SP224

III - 234
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13225 SP225 Spindle Select the spindle functions.
SFNC5 function 5 F E D C B A 9 8
ovsn
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ddir

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1
2
3
4
5 ddir Near switch signal edge falling Near switch signal edge rising
6
7
8
9
A
B
C Set the non-sensitive band for overshooting compensation type
D 3 with a 2°/1000 unit.
ovsn When using feed forward control, set the non-sensitive band for
E the model position loop to ignore the model overshooting. Set
F to 2°/1000 (0001) as a standard.
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 235
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13226 SP226 Spindle Select the spindle functions.
SFNC6 function 6 F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 236
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13227 SP227 Servo Select the servo functions.
SFNC7 function 7
F E D C B A 9 8
dis
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ccu

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1
Lost motion overshoot compensation
2 ccu compensation setting unit
Short-time rated % Short-time rated 0.01%
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C Digital signal input selection
D 4: Near switch signal detection
dis
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 237
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13228 SP228 Spindle Select the spindle functions.
SFNC8 function 8 F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
irms

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0 irms Normal load meter display Effective motor current display
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 238
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13229 SP229 Spindle Select the spindle functions.
SFNC9 function 9 F E D C B A 9 8
ssc rps
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
Safety observation Safety observation
D rps Safety speed setting unit Safety speed setting unit
°/min 100°/min
E
Safety observation function Safety observation function
F ssc
stop start
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 239
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13230 SP230 Spindle Select the spindle functions.
SFNC10 function 10 F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 240
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13231 SP231 Spindle Select the spindle functions.
SFNC11 function 11 F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.

III - 241
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13232 SP232 Spindle Select the spindle functions.
SFNC12 function 12 F E D C B A 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
(Note) Set to "0" for bits with no particular description.
13233 SP233 Voltage non- When 100% is set, the voltage equivalent to the logical non- 0 to 255
IVC sensitive energized time will be compensated. (%)
band When "0" is set, a 100% compensation will be performed.
compensation Adjust in increments of 10% from the default value 100%.
If increased too much, vibration or vibration noise may be
generated.

III - 242
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.3 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

Setting range
No. Items Details
(unit)
13234 SP234 Not used. 0
: : Set to "0".
13236 SP236
13237 SP237 Torque Set the filter for the torque command. Set to "0" when not 0 to 4500
(PR) TCF command using this function. (Hz)
filter The standard value is "500" when using the motor side
detector TS5690 or TS5691.
13238 SP238 Safety Set safety speed of spindle on the safety observation 0 to 18000
SSCFEED observation function. (°/min)
safety speed Set to "0" when not using this function.
13239 SP239 Safety Set safety motor speed on the safety observation function. 0 to 32767
SSCRPM observation When not using, set to "0". (r/min)
safety motor
speed
13240 SP240 Not used. 0
(PR) Set to "0".
13241 SP241 System These parameters are set automatically by the NC system.
(PR) setting
: : parameter
13256 SP256
(PR)

III - 243
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.4 Supplement

7.4 Supplement
7.4.1 D/A Output Numbers
7.4.1.1 MDS-D/DH Series
(1) D/A output specifications
Item Explanation
No. of channels 2ch
Output cycle 0.8ms (min. value)
Output precision 12bit
Output voltage
0V to 2.5V (zero) to +5V
range CN9 connector
Output Pin Name Pin Name
magnification ±32768 1 LG 11 LG
setting 2 12
3 13
MO1 = Pin 9
Output pin 4 14
MO2 = Pin 19 5 15
(CN9 connector)
LG = Pin 1, 11 6 16
7 17
8 18
9 MO1 19 MO2
10 20

(2) Setting the output data

Input the No. of the data to be output to each D/A output channel.
# No. Abbrev. Parameter name
13125 SP125 DA1NO D/A output channel 1 data No.
13126 SP126 DA2NO D/A output channel 2 data No.

III - 244
7. Spindle Parameters
7.4 Supplement

<Standard output>
Output unit
No. Output data
for standard setting
-1 D/A output stop -
0 Commanded motor rotation speed 1000(r/min)/V
1 Motor rotation speed 1000(r/min)/V
2 Torque current command Short time rated ratio 100%/V
3 Torque current feedback Short time rated ratio 100%/V

Disturbance observer estimated Short time rated torque current value ratio
35
disturbance torque 100%/V

50 Position droop 1/1000°/V

51 Position command 1/1000°/V
52 Position feedback 1/1000°/V
53 Position F⊿T 1/1000°/s/V
Deviation from ideal position
54 1/1000°/V
(considering spindle tracking delay)

60 Position droop 1°/V

61 Position command 1°/V
62 Position feedback 1°/V
63 Position F⊿T 1°/s/V
Deviation from ideal position
64 1°/V
(considering spindle tracking delay)

70 Position droop 1000°/V

71 Position command 1000°/V
72 Position feedback 1000°/V
73 Position F⊿T 1000°/s/V
Deviation from ideal position
74 1000°/V
(considering spindle tracking delay)

126 Saw tooth wave 0V to 5V

127 2.5V test data output 2.5V

III - 245
7. Spindle Parameters
7.4 Supplement

<Spindle control signal>

Spindle control input (NC to SP) Spindle control output (SP to NC)
No. Details No. Details
16384 Spindle control READY ON 16480 Spindle control In ready ON
input 1-0 command output 1-0
16385 Spindle control Servo ON command 16481 Spindle control In servo ON
input 1-1 output 1-1

16391 Spindle control Alarm reset 16487 Spindle control In alarm

input 1-7 command output 1-7
16392 Spindle control Torque limit 1 16488 Spindle control In torque limit 1
input 1-8 selection command output 1-8 selection
16393 Spindle control Torque limit 2 16489 Spindle control In torque limit 2
input 1-9 selection command output 1-9 selection
16394 Spindle control Torque limit 3 16490 Spindle control In torque limit 3
input 1-A selection command output 1-A selection

16492 Spindle control In in-position

output 1-C

16495 Spindle control In warning

output 1-F
16496 Spindle control Z phase passed
output 2-0

16499 Spindle control In zero speed

output 2-3

16503 Spindle control In external

output 2-7 emergency stop

16409 Spindle control Speed monitor 16505 Spindle control In speed monitor
input 2-9 command valid output 2-9
16410 Spindle control In door closed 16506 Spindle control In door closed
input 2-A (controller) output 2-A (controller)
16411 Spindle control In door closed 16507 Spindle control In door closed
input 2-B (all drive units) output 2-B (self drive unit)

16432 Spindle control Spindle control mode 16528 Spindle control In spindle control
input 4-0 selection command 1 output 4-0 mode selection 1
16433 Spindle control Spindle control mode 16529 Spindle control In spindle control
input 4-1 selection command 2 output 4-1 mode selection 2
16434 Spindle control Spindle control mode 16530 Spindle control In spindle control
input 4-2 selection command 3 output 4-2 mode selection 3
16436 Spindle control Gear changeover 16532 Spindle control In gear changeover
input 4-4 command output 4-4 command
16437 Spindle control Gear selection 16533 Spindle control In gear selection 1
input 4-5 command 1 output 4-5
16438 Spindle control Gear selection 16534 Spindle control In gear selection 2
input 4-6 command 2 output 4-6

III - 246
7. Spindle Parameters
7.4 Supplement

Spindle control input (NC to SP) Spindle control output (SP to NC)
No. Details No. Details
16445 Spindle control L coil selection 16541 Spindle control In L coil selection
input 4-D command output 4-D

16545 Spindle control Speed detection

output 5-1

16550 Spindle control In coil changeover

output 5-6

16458 Spindle control Phase 16554 Spindle control In phase

input 5-A synchronization output 5-A synchronization
suppression suppression
command
16459 Spindle control Minimum excitation 16555 Spindle control In minimum
input 5-B rate 2 changeover output 5-B excitation rate 2
request selection
16460 Spindle control Speed gain set 2 16556 Spindle control In speed gain set 2
input 5-C changeover request output 5-C selection
16461 Spindle control Zero point re- 16557 Spindle control Zero point re-
input 5-D detection request output 5-D detection complete
16462 Spindle control Spindle holding 16558 Spindle control Spindle holding
input 5-E force up output 5-E force up completed
16559 Spindle control In 2nd in-position
output 5-F

III - 247
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.4 Supplement

7.4.1.2 MDS-D-SPJ3 Series

(1) D/A output specifications

Item Explanation
No. of channels 2ch
Output cycle 0.8ms (min. value)
Output precision 10bit
CN9 connector
Output voltage
0V to 2.5V (zero) to +5V Pin Name Pin Name
range 1 LG 11 LG
2 12
Output 3 13
magnification ±32768 4 MO1 14 MO2
setting 5 15
6 16
MO1 = Pin 4 7 17
Output pin 8 18
MO2 = Pin 14
(CN9 connector) 9 19
GND = Pins 1, 11 10 20

III - 248
 7. Spindle Parameters
7.4 Supplement

(2) Setting the output data

Input the No. of the data to be output to each D/A output channel.
# No. Abbrev. Parameter name
13125 SP125 DA1NO D/A output channel 1 data No.
13126 SP126 DA2NO D/A output channel 2 data No.

<Standard output>
Output unit
No. Output data
for standard setting
0 Commanded motor rotation speed 1000(r/min)/V
1 Motor rotation speed 1000(r/min)/V
2 Torque current command Short time rated ratio 100%/V
3 Torque current feedback Short time rated ratio 100%/V

Disturbance observer estimated Short time rated torque current value ratio
35
disturbance torque 100%/V

50 Position droop 1/1000°/V

51 Position command 1/1000°/V
52 Position feedback 1/1000°/V
53 Position F⊿T 1/1000°/s/V
Deviation from ideal position
54 1/1000°/V
(considering spindle tracking delay)

60 Position droop 1°/V

61 Position command 1°/V
62 Position feedback 1°/V
63 Position F⊿T 1°/s/V
Deviation from ideal position
64 1°/V
(considering spindle tracking delay)

70 Position droop 1000°/V

71 Position command 1000°/V
72 Position feedback 1000°/V
73 Position F⊿T 1000°/s/V
Deviation from ideal position
74 1000°/V
(considering spindle tracking delay)

126 Saw tooth wave 0V to 5V

127 2.5V test data output 2.5V

III - 249
7. Spindle Parameters
7.4 Supplement

<Spindle control signal>

Spindle control input (NC to SP) Spindle control output (SP to NC)
No. Details No. Details
16384 Spindle control READY ON 16480 Spindle control In ready ON
input 1-0 command output 1-0
16385 Spindle control Servo ON command 16481 Spindle control In servo ON
input 1-1 output 1-1

16391 Spindle control Alarm reset 16487 Spindle control In alarm

input 1-7 command output 1-7
16392 Spindle control Torque limit 1 16488 Spindle control In torque limit 1
input 1-8 selection command output 1-8 selection
16393 Spindle control Torque limit 2 16489 Spindle control In torque limit 2
input 1-9 selection command output 1-9 selection
16394 Spindle control Torque limit 3 16490 Spindle control In torque limit 3
input 1-A selection command output 1-A selection

16492 Spindle control In in-position

output 1-C

16495 Spindle control In warning

output 1-F
16496 Spindle control Z phase passed
output 2-0

16499 Spindle control In zero speed

output 2-3

16503 Spindle control In external

output 2-7 emergency stop

16409 Spindle control Speed monitor 16505 Spindle control In speed monitor
input 2-9 command valid output 2-9
16410 Spindle control In door closed 16506 Spindle control In door closed
input 2-A (controller) output 2-A (controller)
16411 Spindle control In door closed 16507 Spindle control In door closed
input 2-B (all drive units) output 2-B (self drive unit)

16432 Spindle control Spindle control mode 16528 Spindle control In spindle control
input 4-0 selection command output 4-0 mode selection 1
1
16433 Spindle control Spindle control mode 16529 Spindle control In spindle control
input 4-1 selection command output 4-1 mode selection 2
2
16434 Spindle control Spindle control mode 16530 Spindle control In spindle control
input 4-2 selection command output 4-2 mode selection 3
3
16436 Spindle control Gear changeover 16532 Spindle control In gear changeover
input 4-4 command output 4-4 command
16437 Spindle control Gear selection 16533 Spindle control In gear selection 1
input 4-5 command 1 output 4-5
16438 Spindle control Gear selection 16534 Spindle control In gear selection 2
input 4-6 command 2 output 4-6

III - 250
7. Spindle Parameters
7.4 Supplement

Spindle control input (NC to SP) Spindle control output (SP to NC)
No. Details No. Details
16445 Spindle control L coil selection 16541 Spindle control In L coil selection
input 4-D command output 4-D

16545 Spindle control Speed detection

output 5-1

16550 Spindle control In coil changeover

output 5-6

16458 Spindle control Phase 16554 Spindle control In phase

input 5-A synchronization output 5-A synchronization
suppression suppression
command
16459 Spindle control Minimum excitation 16555 Spindle control In minimum
input 5-B rate 2 changeover output 5-B excitation rate 2
request selection
16460 Spindle control Speed gain set 2 16556 Spindle control In speed gain set 2
input 5-C changeover request output 5-C selection
16461 Spindle control Zero point re- 16557 Spindle control Zero point re-
input 5-D detection request output 5-D detection complete
16462 Spindle control Spindle holding 16558 Spindle control In spindle holding
input 5-E force up output 5-E force up
16559 Spindle control In 2nd in-position
output 5-F

III - 251
 8. Rotary Axis Configuration Parameters

8. Rotary Axis Configuration Parameters

Parameters indicated as (PR) in the table will be validated when the NC power is turned OFF and ON after
setting.

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

7900 RCDAX_I Orthogonal Set the name of the horizontal axis in the A,B,C,U,V,W,X,Y,Z
(PR) coordinate orthogonal coordinate system.
horizontal axis
name
7901 RCDAX_J Orthogonal Set the name of the vertical axis in the orthogonal A,B,C,U,V,W,X,Y,Z
(PR) coordinate coordinate system.
vertical axis
name
7902 RCDAX_K Orthogonal Set the name of the height axis in the orthogonal A,B,C,U,V,W,X,Y,Z
(PR) coordinate coordinate system.
height axis
name
7903 G92_CRD Origin zero Select whether the coordinates preset when origin 0 / 1
set coordinate zero (G92_X_Y_Z;) is commanded are the tool
selection end or the holder end coordinates.
0: Tool nose
1: Holder end
7904 NO_TIP Tool handle Select whether to validate or ignore the tool handle 0 / 1
feed function function.
selection 0: Valid (tool handle feed)
1: Invalid (standard)
7905 NO_ABS Selection of Select whether to update the displayed tool axis 0/1
tool axis movement amount at manual ABS switch OFF, or
movement at both manual ABS switch ON and OFF.
amount 0: Only at ABS switch OFF
display at 1: ABS switch ON/OFF
manual ABS
switch
ON/OFF
7906 PASSTYP Singular point Select the movement after passing through a 0/1
passage type singular point.
0: Type 1
The same direction as when the A axis or B
axis rotation angle sign is the tool nose
control start is selected.
1: Type 2
The direction with less C axis rotation
movement amount on the singular point is
selected.
7907 CHK_AN Near singular Set the angle for judging a position near the 0.000 to 5.000 (°)
G judgment singular point.
angle
7908 SLCT_PR Programming Select whether to use the workpiece coordinate 0/1
G_COOR coordinate system or table coordinate system (coordinate
D system system that rotates together with workpiece) for
selection the programming coordinate system.
0: Table coordinate system
1: Workpiece coordinate system
7909 IJK_VEC_ Posture Select whether to apply a mirror image on the 0/1
MR vector mirror posture vector (IJK) for Type 2.
image 0: Mirror OFF
selection 1: Mirror ON

III - 252
 8. Rotary Axis Configuration Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

7910 SLCT_INT Interpolation Select whether to use single axis rotation 0/1
_MODE method interpolation or joint interpolation.
selection 0: Joint interpolation method
1: Single axis rotation interpolation method
7911 SLCT_ST Rotary axis Select whether to use the workpiece coordinate 0/1
ANDARD_ basic position system zero point or the position at the end point
POS selection command as a reference.
0: Workpiece coordinate system
1: Position at command
(Note) Even if the position is changed, it is not
changed during tool nose control. It is
changed when next tool nose control will be
commanded.
7920 SLCT_T1 Rotary axis Set in which axis direction to rotate the tool 0 to 3
(PR) selection rotating type base-side rotary axis. 12, 13, 21
In addition, if the tool axis is inclined, use the 23, 31, 32
second digit to set the axis direction in which the
tool axis is inclined.
0: Invalid (Example) A-C axis
1: I axis rotation
2: J axis rotation
3: K axis rotation

(Note) C
0 to 99 can be set
from the screen,
but if an invalid
value is set, the
Z
operation error
A
"M01 0127 Rot
axis parameter
Y
error" will occur
X
when the power
supply is turned 23: K axis rotation
ON. Inclines J axially
7921 TIANGT1 Inclination Set the inclination angle if the tool-rotation type -359.999 to 359.999
(PR) angle base axis is inclined. Set the angle regarding CCW (°)
direction of the inclined plane as plus direction. (Follow as "#1003
Z Input setup unit")
45°

Y
7922 ROTAXT1 Rotary axis Set the name of the tool rotating type base-side 0,A,B,C,U,V,W,X,Y,Z
(PR) name rotary axis. 0: Mechanical axis
specifications
(Invalid when tool
nose control
function)
7923 DIR_T1 Rotation Set the rotation direction of the tool rotating type 0/1
direction base-side rotary axis.
0: CW
1: CCW

III - 253
 8. Rotary Axis Configuration Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

7924 COFST1H Horizontal Set the distance from the tool-side rotary axis -99999.999 to
axis rotation rotation center in the horizontal axis direction to 99999.999 (mm)
center offset the base-side rotary axis rotation center.
7925 COFST1V Vertical axis Set the distance from the tool-side rotary axis -99999.999 to
rotation center rotation center in the vertical axis direction to the 99999.999 (mm)
offset base-side rotary axis rotation center.
7926 COFST1T Height axis Set the distance from the tool-side rotary axis -99999.999 to
rotation center rotation center in the height axis direction to the 99999.999 (mm)
offset base-side rotary axis rotation center.
7927 CERRT1H Horizontal Set the error compensation amount of the tool -99999.999 to
axis rotation rotating type base-side rotary axis rotation center 99999.999 (mm)
center error in the horizontal axis direction. Follow as "#1006
compensation mcmpunit" Machine
amount error compensation
7928 CERRT1V Vertical axis Set the error compensation amount of the tool unit
rotation center rotating type base-side rotary axis rotation center
error in the vertical axis direction.
compensation
amount
7930 SLCT_T2 Rotary axis Set in which axis direction to rotate the tool 0 to 3
(PR) center rotating type tool-side rotary axis. 12, 13, 21
In addition, if the tool axis is inclined, use the 23, 31, 32
second digit to set the axis direction in which the
tool axis is inclined.
0: Invalid (Example) A-C axis
1: I axis rotation
2: J axis rotation
3: K axis rotation
(Note)
0 to 99 can be set
C
from the screen,
but if an invalid
value is set, the Z A
operation error
"M01 0127 Rot Y
axis parameter
error" will occur X
when the power 21: I axis rotation
supply is turned Inclines J axially
ON.
7931 TIANGT2 Inclination Set the inclination angle if the tool-rotation type -359.999 to 359.999
(PR) angle tool axis is inclined. Set the angle regarding CCW (°)
direction of the inclined plane as plus direction. (Follow as "#1003
Z Input setup unit")

30°

III - 254
 8. Rotary Axis Configuration Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

7932 ROTAXT2 Rotary axis Set the name of the tool rotating type tool-side 0,A,B,C,U,V,W,X,Y,Z
(PR) name rotary axis. 0: Mechanical axis
specifications
(Invalid when tool
nose control
function)
7933 DIR_T2 Rotation Set the rotation direction of the tool rotating type 0/1
direction tool-side rotary rotary axis.
0: CW
1: CCW
7934 COFST2H Horizontal Set the distance from the spindle holder end in the -99999.999 to
axis rotation horizontal axis direction to the tool-side rotary axis 99999.999 (mm)
center offset rotation center.
7935 COFST2V Vertical axis Set the distance from the spindle holder end in the
rotation vertical axis direction to the tool-side rotary axis
center offset rotation center.
7936 COFST2T Height axis Set the distance from the spindle holder end in the
rotation height axis direction to the tool-side rotary axis
center offset rotation center.
7937 CERRT2H Horizontal Set the error compensation amount of the tool -99999.999 to
axis rotation rotating type tool-side rotary axis rotation center in 99999.999 (mm)
center error the horizontal axis direction. Follow as "#1006
compensation mcmpunit" Machine
amount error compensation
7938 CERRT2V Vertical axis Set the error compensation amount of the tool unit
rotation center rotating type tool-side rotary axis rotation center in
error the vertical axis direction.
compensation
amount
7940 SLCT_W1 Rotary axis Set in which axis direction to rotate the table 0 to 3
(PR) selection rotating type base-side rotary axis. 12, 13, 21
In addition, if the tool axis is inclined, use the 23, 31, 32
second digit to set the axis direction in which the
tool axis is inclined.
0: Invalid (Example) A-C axis
1: I axis rotation C
2: J axis rotation
3: K axis rotation
(Note) A
0 to 99 can be set Z
from the screen, Y
but if an invalid X
value is set, the
operation error 13: K axis rotation
"M01 0127 Rot Inclines J axially
axis parameter
error" will occur
when the power
supply is turned
ON.

III - 255
 8. Rotary Axis Configuration Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

7941 TIANGW1 Inclination Set the inclination angle if the table-rotation type -359.999 to 359.999
(PR) angle base axis is inclined. Set the angle regarding CCW (°)
direction of the inclined plane as plus direction. (Follow as "#1003
Z Z Input setup unit")

45° -45°

X X
7942 ROTAXW Rotary axis Set the name of the table rotating type base-side 0,A,B,C,U,V,W,X,Y,Z
(PR) 1 name rotary axis. 0: Mechanical axis
specifications
(Invalid when tool
nose control
function)
7943 DIR_W1 Rotation Set the rotation direction for the table rotating type 0 / 1
direction base-side rotary axis.
0: CW
1: CCW
7944 COFSW1 Horizontal Set the distance from the machine zero point in -99999.999 to
H axis rotation the horizontal axis direction to the base-side rotary 99999.999 (mm)
center offset axis rotation center when all axes are at the
machine zero point.
7945 COFSW1 Vertical axis Set the distance from the machine zero point in
V rotation center the vertical axis direction to the base-side rotary
offset axis rotation center when all axes are at the
machine zero point.
7946 COFSW1 Height axis Set the distance from the machine zero point in
T rotation center the height axis direction to the base-side rotary
offset axis rotation center when all axes are at the
machine zero point.
7947 CERRW1 Horizontal Set the error compensation amount of the table -99999.999 to
H axis rotation rotating type base-side rotary axis rotation center 99999.999 (mm)
center error in the horizontal axis direction. Follow as "#1006
compensation mcmpunit" Machine
amount error compensation
7948 CERRW1 Vertical axis Set the error compensation amount of the table unit
V rotation center rotating type base-side rotary axis rotation center
error in the vertical axis direction.
compensation
amount

III - 256
 8. Rotary Axis Configuration Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

7950 SLCT_W2 Rotary axis Set in which direction to rotate the table rotating 0 to 3
(PR) selection type workpiece-side rotary axis. 12, 13, 21
In addition, if the tool axis is inclined, use the 23, 31, 32
second digit to set the axis direction in which the
tool axis is inclined.
0: Invalid (Example) A-C axis
1: I axis rotation C
2: J axis rotation
3: K axis rotation
(Note) A
0 to 99 can be set Z
from the screen, Y
but if an invalid X
value is set, the
operation error
13: K axis rotation
"M01 0127 Rot
Inclines J axially
axis parameter
error" will occur
when the power
supply is turned
ON.
7951 TIANGW2 Inclination Set the inclination angle if the table-rotation type -359.999 to 359.999
(PR) angle work attachment axis is inclined. Set the angle (°)
regarding CCW direction of the inclined plane as (Follow as "#1003
plus direction. Input setup unit")
Z Z

45° -45°

X X
7952 ROTAXW2 Rotary axis Set the name of the table rotating type workpiece- 0,A,B,C,U,V,W,X,Y,Z
(PR) name side rotary axis. 0: Mechanical axis
specifications
(Invalid when tool
nose control
function)
7953 DIR_W2 Rotation Set the rotation direction for the table rotating type 0 / 1
direction workpiece-side rotary axis.
0: CW
1: CCW
7954 COFSW2H Horizontal Set the distance from the base-side rotary axis -99999.999 to
axis rotation rotation center in the horizontal axis direction to 99999.999 (mm)
center offset the workpiece-side rotary axis rotation center
when all axes are at the machine zero point.
7955 COFSW2V Vertical axis Set the distance from the base-side rotary axis
rotation rotation center in the vertical axis direction to the
center offset workpiece-side rotary axis rotation center when all
axes are at the machine zero point.
7956 COFSW2T Height axis Set the distance from the base-side rotary axis
rotation rotation center in the height axis direction to the
center offset workpiece-side rotary axis rotation center when all
axes are at the machine zero point.

III - 257
 8. Rotary Axis Configuration Parameters

# Items Details Setting range (unit)

7957 CERRW2H Horizontal Set the error compensation amount of the table -99999.999 to
axis rotation rotating type workpiece-side rotary axis rotation 99999.999 (mm)
center error center in the horizontal axis direction. Follow as "#1006
compensatio mcmpunit" Machine
n amount error compensation
7958 CERRW2V Vertical axis Set the error compensation amount of the table unit
rotation rotating type workpiece-side rotary axis rotation
center error center in the vertical axis direction.
compensatio
n amount

III - 258
 9. Machine Error Compensation
9.1 Function Outline

9. Machine Error Compensation

9.1 Function Outline
Machine error compensation includes two independent functions: memorized pitch error compensation and
memorized relative position compensation.

(1) Memorized pitch error compensation

According to the specified parameters‚ this method compensates an axis feed error caused by a ball
screw pitch error‚ etc.
With the reference position defined as the base‚ set the compensation amount in the division points
obtained by equally dividing the machine coordinates. (See Fig. 1. 1)
The compensation amount can be set by either the absolute or incremental system.
Select the desired method with the #4000:Pinc. Machine position is compensated between division
points n and n+1 as much as compensation amount between them by linear approximation.

Real machine
position
Ideal machine
position

Real machine position for

which no compensation
has been made

Command machine
S S S position

Reference position
Compensation S: Division point
Compensation amount
amount between
division points

S S S Command machine position

n n+1 n+2

Fig. 1.1 Relationship between the compensation amount and machine position

III - 259
 9. Machine Error Compensation
9.1 Function Outline

(2) Memorized relative position compensation

This method‚ according to the parameters specified in advance‚ compensates the relative position error
between two orthogonal axes caused by deflection of the moving stand.
For this‚ as shown in Fig. 1. 2‚ specify the compensation amount in the compensation axis direction in
the division points obtained by equally dividing the machine coordinates of the base axis.
The base axis is one of the two orthogonal axes to which relative position compensation applies. This
axis is used as the criterion for relative-error measurement. The compensation axis is the coordinate
axis that is orthogonal to the base axis. The compensation is actually made for this coordinate axis.
The section between division points n and n+1 is compensated smoothly by linear approximation.

Actual machine position

of compensation axis

Actual machine position for

which no compensation
has been made

S: Division point

Command machine
S S S position along base axis
Reference position n n+1 n+2

T T T Command machine position

Compensation amount
Compensation between division points
amount

Fig. 1.2 Relationship between the compensation amount and machine position

# Item Details Setting range

4000 Pinc Machine error Specify whether to use the incremental 0: Absolute volume
(PR) compensation amount method or absolute amount method method
increment method when setting the machine error 1: Incremental volume
compensation data. method

III - 260
 9. Machine Error Compensation
9.1 Function Outline

<1st axis>
# Item Details Setting range
4001 cmpax Basic axis Specify the basic axis address for machine X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B,
error compensation. or C axis address
(1) For pitch error compensation‚ set the
name of the axis to be compensated.
(2) For relative position compensation‚ set
the name of the axis to be the base axis.
Set as the "system No. + axis name" when
using the multi-system.
(Example) Z axis for 2nd system: 2Z
4002 drcax Compensation axis Set the compensation axis address for X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B,
machine error compensation. or C axis address
(1) For pitch error compensation‚ set the
same axis name as #4001 cmpax.
(2) For relative position compensation‚ set
the name of the axis to be actually
compensated.
Set as the "system No. + axis name" when
using the multi-system.
(Example) Z axis for 2nd system: 2Z
4003 rdvno Division point Set the compensation data No. 4101 to 5124
number at corresponding to the reference position. The
reference position reference position is actually the base‚ so
there is no compensation No. Set the
number that is decremented by 1.
4004 mdvno Division point Set the compensation data No. that is on the 4101 to 5124
number at the most farthest negative side.
negative side
4005 pdvno Division point Set the compensation data No. that is on the 4101 to 5124
number at the most farthest positive side.
positive side
4006 sc Compensation Set the compensation amount’s scale. 0 to 99
scale factor
4007 spcdv Division interval Set the interval to divide the basic axis. 1 to 9999999
Each compensation data will be the (control unit applied)
compensation amount for each of these
intervals.

2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 5th axis 6th axis 7th axis 8th axis 9th axis 10th axis
4011 4021 4031 4041 4051 4061 4071 4081 4091 Set the parameters
4012 4022 4032 4042 4052 4062 4072 4082 4092 corresponding to the 1st
axis’ parameters 4001 to
4013 4023 4033 4043 4053 4063 4073 4083 4093 4007 for each axis.
4014 4024 4034 4044 4054 4064 4074 4084 4094 A maximum of 6 axes can
4015 4025 4035 4045 4055 4065 4075 4085 4095 be controlled‚ but as the
4016 4026 4036 4046 4056 4066 4076 4086 4096 relative position is
compensated‚ settings for
4017 4027 4037 4047 4057 4067 4077 4087 4097
10 axes can be made.

# Item Details Setting range

4101 Set the compensation amount for each axis. -32768 to 32767
y The actual compensa-
y tion amount will be the
y value obtained by
5124 multiplying the setting
value with the
compensation scale.

III - 261
 9. Machine Error Compensation
9.2 Setting Compensation Data

9.2 Setting Compensation Data

Compensation data can be set according to either absolute or incremental system.
"#4000:Pinc" 0: Absolute system
1: Incremental system

(1) Absolute system

Feed from the reference position to each division point is executed as shown in Fig. 2.1. The following is
obtained at this time. Set it as the compensation amount.
(Specified position - Real machine position) × 2 (Unit of output)
For example‚ assume that the feed from the reference position to the +100mm position is executed.
Also‚ assume that the real machine position is 99.990mm. In this case‚ the following value is defined as
the compensation amount used at the +100mm position:
(100000 - 99990) × 2 = 20 pulses
The resultant value is defined as the compensation amount. Assume that the real machine position
resulting when feed to the -100mm position is executed‚ is -99.990mm. In this case‚ the following value
is defined as the compensation amount used at the -100mm position:
(-100000 - (-99990)) × 2 = -20 pulses

-100

Compensation
amount:
20 pulses
(10um) -99.990
+99.990 Compensation
amount:
-20 pulses
(-10um)

+100

Fig. 2.1

(2) Incremental system

Fig. 2.2 contains a machine position that is placed in the positive direction with respect to the reference
position. Assume that feed from division n-1 to n (division interval) is executed. In this case‚ the
following value is defined as the compensation amount:
(Division interval - Actual movement distance) × 2 (Unit of output)

III - 262
 9. Machine Error Compensation
9.2 Setting Compensation Data

(3) Fig. 2.3 contains a machine position that is placed in the negative direction with respect to the reference
position. Assume that feed from division point n+1 to n by the division interval is executed. In this case‚
the following value is defined as the compensation amount:
(Division interval + Actual movement distance) × 2 (Unit of output)

1
n n+1

n: Division point compensation number

1: Division interval

n-1 n
1

Fig. 2.2 Fig. 2.3

Unit : Unit of output

Range : -128 to 127

(Note) The unit of output is used as the unit of setting. The actual unit of compensation pulses
depends on the compensation scale factor.

III - 263
 9. Machine Error Compensation
9.3 Example in Using a Linear Axis as the Base Axis

9.3 Example in Using a Linear Axis as the Base Axis

(1) When "mdvno" or "pdvno" exists at both ends of "rdvno":

Compensation amount (1) (3) (-3) (-2) (0) (3)

in incremental system
Error
#4101 #4102 #4103 3 #4104 #4105 #4106
2

Base axis machine

-1 coordinate

-2

-3

(3) (-2)
(0) (-2)
Compensation amount
in absolute system (-1) (1)

Division point number #4101 #4102 #4103 #4104 #4105 #4106 rdvno 4103
Specified machine position -300.000 -200.000 -100.000 100.000 200.000 300.000 mdvno 4101
Real machine position -299.999 -200.000 -100.003 100.002 200.002 299.999 pdvno 4106
Compensa- Incremental 2 6 -6 -4 0 6
tion amount Absolute -2 0 6 -4 -4 2

If the setting range ("mdvno" to "pdvno") is exceeded‚ the compensation will be based on compensation
amount at "mdvno" or "pdvno".

III - 264
 9. Machine Error Compensation
9.3 Example in Using a Linear Axis as the Base Axis

(2) When the range compensated is only the positive range:

Compensation amount
in incremental system (-2) (1) (0) (3) (1)
Error
3 #4113 #4114 #4115 #4116 #4117

Base axis machine

-1 coordinate

-2

-3

(-2)
Compensation amount (-1)
in absolute system (-1)
(2)
(3)

Division point number #4113 #4114 #4115 #4116 #4117 rdvno 4112
Compensa- Incremental -4 2 0 6 2 mdvno 4113
tion amount Absolute -4 -2 -2 4 6 pdvno 4117

If the machine position exceeds "pdvno"‚ the compensation will be based on the compensation amount
at "pdvno". If the machine position is negative in this case‚ no compensation will be executed.

III - 265
 9. Machine Error Compensation
9.3 Example in Using a Linear Axis as the Base Axis

(3) When the range compensated is only the negative range:

Compensation amount
(-1) (1) (3) (1) (0) (-3)
in incremental system
Error
#4125 #4126 #4127 #4128 #4129 #4130 3

Base axis
machine -1
coordinate
-2

-3

(3)
(3)
(2)
(-1)
Compensation amount (-2)
in absolute system (-1)

Division point number #4125 #4126 #4127 #4128 #4129 #4130 rdvno 4130
Compensa- Incremental -2 2 6 2 0 -6 mdvno 4125
tion amount Absolute -2 -4 -2 4 6 6 pdvno 4130

If the machine position exceeds "mdvno"‚ the compensation will be based on compensation amount at
"mdvno".

III - 266
 9. Machine Error Compensation
9.3 Example in Using a Linear Axis as the Base Axis

(4) When compensation is executed in a range that contains no reference position:

Compensation
amount in
(-1) (-1) (3) (1)
incremental system
Error
3 #4135 #4136 #4137 #4138 #4139 #4140

Base axis machine

-1 coordinate

-2

-3
(-1)
Compensation
amount in (-2)
absolute system (1)
(2)

Division point number #4135 #4136 #4137 #4138 #4139 #4140 rdvno 4134
Compensa- Incremental -2 -2 6 2 mdvno 4136
tion amount Absolute -2 -4 2 4 pdvno 4140

In this case‚ the compensation is executed in the range from "mdvno" to "pdvno". This setting rule
applies also when the compensation is executed in a range which contains negative machine positions
and no reference position.

III - 267
 9. Machine Error Compensation
9.4 Example in Using a Rotary Axis as the Base Axis

9.4 Example in Using a Rotary Axis as the Base Axis

Compensation amount
in incremental system (-2) (1) (0) (3) (1) (-3)
Error
3 #4123 #4124 #4125 #4126 #4127 #4128

1
360°
Base axis machine
-1 coordinate

-2

-3
(-2)
(-1)
Compensation amount (-1)
in absolute system (2)
(3)
(0)

Division point number #4123 #4124 #4125 #4126 #4127 #4128 rdvno 4122
Compensa- Incremental -4 2 0 6 2 -6 mdvno 4123
tion amount Absolute -4 -2 -2 4 6 0 pdvno 4128

In this case‚ the sum of the compensation amounts set according to the incremental system is always
"0". For the absolute system‚ the compensation amount at the terminal point (360 degrees) is always "0".

III - 268
 10. PLC Constants
10.1 PLC Timer

10. PLC Constants

10.1 PLC Timer
# PLC device Item Details Setting range
16000 T0 PLC timer Set the time for the timer used in the PLC 0 to 32767
<10ms/100ms> program (ladder). (×10ms or ×100ms)
: : The 10ms timer and 100ms timer are
: : identified by the command used.
: : (Note) This setting value is valid when
parameter "#6449 bit0" in the
: :
following "[BIT SELECT]" is set to
16703 T703 "0".

(Note 1) Setting the timer setting value from the setting and display unit
The timer T setting value can be set with the following two methods.
• Method to validate the setting value (Kn) programmed with the sequence program (fixed timer)
• Method to validate the setting value set from the setting and display unit (variable timer)

(Note 2) The fixed timer and variable timer range can be set with the bit selection parameters (#6454/bit0
to bit3).

No. of Bit selection parameter (#6454) Fixed timer/

Range
points bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 variable timer
0 None 0 0 0 0 All fixed timers
100 #16000 to #16099 0 0 0 1
200 #16000 to #16199 0 0 1 0
300 #16000 to #16299 0 0 1 1 Variable timers in
400 #16000 to #16399 0 1 0 0 range on left
500 #16000 to #16499 0 1 0 1
600 #16000 to #16599 0 1 1 0
All points #16000 to #16703 0 1 1 1 All variable timers

III - 269
 10. PLC Constants
10.2 PLC Integrated Timer

10.2 PLC Integrated Timer

# PLC device Item Details Setting range
17000 ST0 PLC integrated Set the time for the integrated timer used with 0 to 32767 (×100ms)
timer the PLC program (ladder).
: :
<100ms INC.> (Note) This setting value is valid when
: : parameter "#6449 bit0" in the
17063 ST63 following "[BIT SELECT]" is set to "0".
(Note 1) Setting the timer setting value from the setting and display unit
The timer T setting value can be set with the following two methods.
• Method to validate the setting value (Kn) programmed with the sequence program (fixed
integrated timer)
• Method to validate the setting value set from the setting and display unit (variable integrated
timer)
(Note 2) The fixed integrated timer and variable integrated timer range can be set with the bit selection
parameters (#6454/bit5 to bit7).
No. of Bit selection parameter (#6453) Fixed integrated timer/
Range
points bit7 bit6 bit5 variable integrated timer
0 None 0 0 0 All fixed integrated timers
20 #17000 to #17019 0 0 1 Variable integrated timers in
40 #17000 to #17039 0 1 0 range on left
All points #17000 to #17063 0 1 1 All variable integrated timers

10.3 PLC Counter

# PLC device Item Details Setting range
17200 C000 Counter Set the time for the counter used with the PLC 0 to 32767
program (ladder).
: :
(Note) This setting value is valid when
: : parameter "#6449 bit1" in the
: : following "[BIT SELECT]" is set to "0".
17455 C255
(Note 1) Setting the counter setting value from the setting and display unit
The counter C setting value can be set with the following two methods.
• Method to validate the setting value (Kn) programmed with the sequence program (fixed
counter)
• Method to validate the setting value set from the setting and display unit (variable counter)
(Note 2) The fixed counter and variable counter range can be set with the bit selection parameters
(#6454/bit4 to bit7).
No. of Bit selection parameter (#6454) Fixed counter/
Range
points bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 variable counter
0 None 0 0 0 0 All fixed counters
40 #17200 to #17239 0 0 0 1
80 #17200 to #17279 0 0 1 0
120 #17200 to #17319 0 0 1 1 Variable counter in
160 #17200 to #17359 0 1 0 0 range on left
200 #17200 to #17399 0 1 0 1
240 #17200 to #17439 0 1 1 0
All points #17200 to #17455 0 1 1 1 All variable counters

III - 270
 10. PLC Constants
10.4 PLC Constants

10.4 PLC Constants

# PLC device Item Details Setting range
18001 R7500,7501 PLC constant Set the value to be set in the data type R -99999999 to
register used in the PLC program 99999999
: : (ladder).
: : Even if the data is set in the R register
: : that corresponds to the PLC side when
this parameter is displayed‚ the screen
: :
will not change. Enter a different screen
18150 R7798,7799 once‚ and then select this screen again.

10.5 Selecting the PLC Bit

# PLC device Item Details Setting range
6401 R7800-Low Bit selection This is the bit type parameter used in the 0: OFF
6402 R7800-High PLC program (ladder). 1: ON
: : Even if the data is set in the R register
: : that corresponds to the PLC side when
: : this parameter is displayed‚ the screen
: : will not change. Enter a different screen
: : once‚ and then select this screen again.
: : Some of the parameters following #6449
: : may be fixed according to the usage
: : purpose.
6495 R7847-Low Refer to the PLC Program Development
6496 R7847-High On-board Instruction Manual.
6497 R7848-Low Bit selection This is the bit type parameter (expansion) 0: OFF
6498 R7848-High expansion used in the PLC program (ladder). 1: ON
: : Even if the data is set in the R register
: : that corresponds to the PLC side when
: : this parameter is displayed‚ the screen
: : will not change. Enter a different screen
: : once‚ and then select this screen again.
6595 R7897-Low
6596 R7897-High

III - 271
 10. PLC Constants
10.5 Selecting the PLC Bit

Table: "Contents of bit selection parameters #6449 to #6496"

Symbol
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
name
#6449 Control unit Counter C
Integrating
PLC counter PLC timer
0 R7824 L temperature - - -
retention
timer ST
program ON program ON
alarm ON retention
#6450 1 0
Operator Alarm
1 R7824 H - - - - - message message
ON R type F type ON

#6451 Serial GPP

R7825 L Simple mode
2 - - communi- - - -
ON
-
cation ON

#6452 Serial handy

R7825 H terminal
3 - - -
communication
- - - -
ON
#6453 PLC integrated timer
4 R7826 L Number of variable integrated timer - - Message language selection code
points setting
#6454
5 R7826 H Counter C number of variable/fixed points setting Timer T number of variable/fixed points setting

#6455
6 R7827 L - - - - - - - -

#6456
7 R7827 H - - - - - - - -

#6457
8 R7828 L High-speed input specification 1

#6458
9 R7828 H High-speed input specification 2

#6459
A R7829 L High-speed input specification 3

#6460
B R7829 H High-speed input specification spare

#6461
C R7830 L High-speed output specification 1

#6462
D R7830 H High-speed output specification 2

#6463
E R7831 L High-speed output specification 3

#6464
F R7831 H High-speed output specification spare

III - 272
10. PLC Constants
10.5 Selecting the PLC Bit

Symbol
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
name
#6465
0 R7832 L
#6466
1 R7832 H
High-speed input specification spare
#6467
2 R7833 L
#6468
3 R7833 H
#6469
4 R7834 L - - - - - - - -

#6470
5 R7834 H - - - - - - - -

#6471
6 R7835 L - - - - - - - -

#6472
7 R7835 H - - - - - - - -

#6473
8 R7836 L
#6474
9 R7836 H
High-speed output specification spare
#6475
A R7837 L
#6476
B R7837 H
#6477
C R7838 L - - - - - - - -

#6478
D R7838 H - - - - - - - -

#6479
E R7839 L - - - - - - - -

#6480
F R7839 H - - - - - - - -

(Note 1) Be sure to set the bits indicated - and blanks to 0.

(Note 2) Parameters #6481 to #6496 are reserved for debugging by Mitsubishi.

III - 273
 11. Macro List

11. Macro List

# Item Details Setting range (unit)

7001 M [01] <Code> 1 to 9999
to to Set the M code used for calling out the macro with
7091 M [10] the M command.
This is valid when "#1195 Mmac" is set to 1.
7002 <Type> 0 to 3
to Set the macro call out type.
7092
0 M98 PΔΔΔΔ; and equivalent value call
1 G65 PΔΔΔΔ; and equivalent value call
2 G66 PΔΔΔΔ; and equivalent value call
3 G66.1 PΔΔΔΔ; and equivalent value call
others M98 PΔΔΔΔ; and equivalent value call

7003 <Program No.> Program name or file

to Set the No. of the program to be called out. name
7093 (up to 32 characters)
M2mac Set the type and program No. for when calling out the macro with the 2nd
miscellaneous command. The macro will be called out with the "#1170
M2name" address command when "#1198 M2mac" is set to 1.
7102 <Type> 0 to 3
Same as the M call macro.
7103 <Program No.> Program name or file
Same as the M call macro. name
(up to 32 characters)
7201 G [01] <Code> 1 to 255
to to Set the G code to be used when calling the macro
7291 G [10] with a G command. Do not set a G code used in the
system.
7202 <Type> 0 to 3
to Same as the M call Marco.
7292
7203 <Program No.> Program name or file
to Same as the M call Marco. name
7293 (up to 32 characters)
Smac Set the type and program No. for when calling the macro with an S
command.
This is valid when "#1196 Smac" is set to 1.
7302 <Type> 0 to 3
Same as the M call Marco.
7303 <Program No.> Program name or file
Same as the M call Marco. name
(up to 32 characters)
Tmac Set the type and program No. for when calling the macro with a T command.
This is valid when "#1197 Tmac" is set to 1.
7312 <Type> 0 to 3
Same as the M call macro.
7313 <Program No.> Program name or file
Same as the M call macro. name
(up to 32 characters)

III - 274
 11. Macro List

# Item Details Setting range

7401 ASCII Valid The ASCII code macro parameters (#7402 to 0/1
[01] 7405) are validated.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
7402 Code Set the ASCII code used to call macros with the L system:
ASCII code. A, B, D, F, H, I, J, K,
M, Q, R, S, T
M system:
A, B, F, H, I, K, M,
Q, R, S, T
7403 Type Set the macro call type. 0 to 3
0: M98, 1: G65, 2: G66, 3: G66.1
7404 Program Set the program No. called with macro call. 0 to 99999999
No.
7405 Variable When the call type is "0", set the variable No. set 100 to 149
after the ASCII code.
7411 ASCII Valid The ASCII code macro parameters (#7412 to 0/1
[02] 7415) are validated.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
7412 Code Set the ASCII code used to call macros with the L system:
ASCII code. A, B, D, F, H, I, J, K,
M, Q, R, S, T
M system:
A, B, F, H, I, K, M,
Q, R, S, T
7413 Type Set the macro call type. 0 to 3
0: M98, 1: G65, 2: G66, 3: G66.1
7414 Program Set the program No. called with macro call. 0 to 99999999
No.
7415 Variable When the call type is "0", set the variable No. set 100 to 149
after the ASCII code.

III - 275
 12. Position Switch

12. Position Switch

The position switch (PSW) is used as an alternate switch for the dog switch provided on an axis of the
machine. The position switch uses parameters by which the names of axes and their corresponding
coordinates indicating imaginary dog positions are defined in advance. When the machine reaches the
imaginary dog position‚ a signal is output to the PLC interface. The position switch thus works as an
imaginary dog switch.

# Item Details Setting range (unit)

7500 Pcheck High-speed Specify whether to perform position 0/1
switching of switch area checking at high speeds.
position switch 0: Do not perform position switch area
checking at high speed (do it the same
as before).
1: Perform position switch area checking
at high speed.
75 1 <axis> Axis name Specify the name of the axis for which a X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B,
position switch is provided. or C axis address
75 2 <dog1> Imaginary dog When the machine enters the range -99999.999 to
position 1 between imaginary dog positions 1 and 2, 99999.999
a signal is output to the PLC. (mm)
75 3 <dog2> Imaginary dog 1st part system device : X1D00
position 2 2nd part system device : X1D20
75 4 <check> Selection of area When position switch area checking at 0/1
check method high speed is selected, specify the mode
of area checking, i.e., whether to use the
command type machine position or
detector feedback position, for each
position switch point.
0: Use the command type machine
position as the machine position for
position switch area checking.
1: Use the detector feedback position as
the machine position for position switch
area checking.
(Note) This parameter is valid only when
1 set in "#7500 Pcheck. "

Position switch Nos. of PSW1 to PSW24 and signal devices

Part system 1 Part system 2

<axis> <dog1> <dog2> <check> device device
PSW1 #7501 #7502 #7503 #7504 X1D00 X1D20
PSW2 #7511 #7512 #7513 #7514 X1D01 X1D21
PSW3 #7521 #7522 #7523 #7524 X1D02 X1D22
PSW4 #7531 #7532 #7533 #7534 X1D03 X1D23
: : : : : : :
PSW24 #7731 #7732 #7733 #7734 X1D17 X1D37

Instead of the dog switch provided on the machine axis‚ the coordinates indicating imaginary dog positions
(dog1 and dog2) on the coordinate axis of the axis name preset with axis are set with the position switches
(PSW1 - PSW24). When the machine reaches the position‚ the signal is output to the device corresponding
to the PLC interface.

III - 276
 12. Position Switch

Example of settings of dog1 and dog2 and operation

Setting of dog1 and Basic machine coordinate
dog1, dog2 position Operation system zero point
dog2
Imaginary
dog1 dog2 A signal is output between
dog1 < dog2 dog
dog1 and dog2. PSW
width
dog1
dog2 dog1 A signal is output between
dog1 > dog2
dog2 and dog1. dog2

If dog1 equals dog2‚ the

dog1 = dog2
dog1 = dog2 dog1 position triggers a
signal.

Rotary axis
Setting of dog1 and dog2 dog1, dog2 position Description
dog1 < dog2 dog2 dog1 A signal is output
(Example)
between dog1 and dog2.
dog1 = 30.000
dog2 = 330.000

dog1 dog2 A signal is also output

when dog1 is negative.
(Example)
dog1 = -30.000
dog2 = 30.000

dog1 > dog2 dog1 dog2 A signal is output

(Example)
between dog2 and dog1.
dog1 = 330.000
dog2 = 30.000

|dog1 - dog2| ≥ 360 dog2 dog1 A signal is kept output

(Example)
when the difference
dog1 = 30.000 between dog1 and dog2
dog2 = 390.000 exceeds 360 degrees.

III - 277
 12. Position Switch
12.1 Canceling the Position Switch

12.1 Canceling the Position Switch

To cancel the position switch‚ enter the number (#75 1) of the position switch to be canceled in # ( ) of the
setting field‚ enter a slash "/" in DATA ( )‚ then press the INPUT key. This deletes the axis name for the
specified position switch‚ thus invalidating the position switch.
The data specified for <dog1> and <dog2> are still stored in memory. To validate the position switch again‚
therefore‚ it is enough to specify the axis name only.

III - 278
 13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter

13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter

Turn the NC power OFF after setting parameters indicated with a (PR) in the table. The setting will be
validated after the power is turned ON again.

Default
No. Name Details Setting range
value
50001 MSR Motor series Set the motor series. This is automatically judged 0000 to FFFF 0000
(PR) by the system when the default value (0000) is (hexadecimal)
set.
50002 RTY Regeneration Set the regenerative resistor type. Do not set values without a description.
(PR) option type
0 0 0 0 (Default value)

Setting
Details
value
Drive unit standard built-in resistor
0
(10CT has no built-in resistor)
1 Setting prohibited
2 MR-RB032 (30W)
3 MR-RB12 (100W)
4 MR-RB32 (300W)
5 MR-RB30 (300W)
6 MR-RB50 (500W)
7 to F Setting prohibited

50003 PC1 Motor side Set the number of gear teeth on the motor side 1 to 32767 1
(PR) gear ratio and the number of gear teeth on the machine
(machine side as an integer reduced to its lowest terms.
rotation ratio) Set the total gear ratio if there are multiple gear
50004 PC2 Machine side levels. 1 to 32767 1
(PR) gear ratio For rotary axes, set the motor rotation speed per
(motor rotation machine rotation.
ratio)
50005 PIT Feed pitch Set 360 (default value) for rotary axes. 1 to 32767 360
(PR) Set the feed lead for linear axes. (° or mm)
50006 INP In-position In-position is detected when the position droop 1 to 32767 50
detection width becomes this setting value or less. (1/1000° or
µm)

III - 279
 13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter

Default
No. Name Details Setting range
value
50007 ATU Auto-tuning Set the adjustment of the auto-tuning. Do not set values without a description.

0 1 0 2 (Default setting value)

Setting
Details
value
Low response (low-rigidity loads, loads
1
which easily vibrate)
2 Standard setting value
3 Standard setting value
4 Standard setting value
High response (high-rigidity loads, loads
5
which do not easily vibrate)

Setting
Details
value
0 Standard
Large friction amount (set the position loop
1
gain slightly lower)

Setting
Details
value
0 Only auto-tuning PG2, VG2, VIC, and GD2.
Only auto-tuning PG1, PG2, VG1, VG2,
1 VIC, and GD2 (total gain).
(Standard setting)
2 No auto-tuning.

50008 PG1 Position loop Set the position loop gain for the model loop. 4 to 1000 (1/s) 70
gain 1 Determine the tracking ability regarding the
position commands.
50009 (Not used.) 0

50010 EMGt Deceleration Set the deceleration time from the clamp speed 0 to 32768 500
control time (Aspeed1). For normal rapid traverse, set the (ms)
constant same value as the acceleration/deceleration time
constant.
50011 (Not used.) 0

50012 (Not used.) 0

50013 MBR Vertical axis Input the time the servo OFF is delayed during 0 to 1000 (ms) 100
drop servo OFF command. Increase the setting by
prevention 100ms at a time and set the minimum value
time where the axis does not drop.

III - 280
 13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter

Default
No. Name Details Setting range
value
50014 NCH Notch filter No. Set the frequency of the machine resonance suppression filter.
Do not set values without a description.
Setting value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Frequency No
1125 563 375 282 225 188 161
(Hz) start
50015 (Not used.) 0

50016 JIT Jitter Set the number of ignored jitter compensation pulses. Do not set values
compensation without a description.
Setting value 0 1 2 3
Number of ignore
No start 1 2 3
pulses

50017 (Not used.) 0

50018 (Not used.) 0

50019 PG2 Position loop Set the position loop gain of the actual loop. 1 to 500 (1/s) 25
gain 2 Determine the position responsiveness for
external disturbance.
50020 VG1 Speed loop Set the speed loop gain of the model loop. 20 to 5000 1200
gain 1 Determine the tracking ability regarding the (1/s)
speed commands.
50021 VG2 Speed loop Set the speed loop gain of the actual loop. 20 to 8000 600
gain 2 Determine the speed responsiveness for (1/s)
external disturbance.
50022 VIC Speed integral Determine the characteristics of the speed low- 1 to 1000 (ms) 20
compensation frequency region.
50023 VDC Speed PI control normally results from a default value of 0 to 1000 1000
differential 1000.
compensation Adjust the overshoot amount by lowering in
increments of 20.
50024 DG2 Load inertia Set the load inertia ratio for the motor inertia. 0.0 to 50.0 2.0
ratio (fold)
50025 (Not used.) 0

50030 MTY Motor type Set the motor type. This is automatically judged 0000 to FFFF 0000
(PR) by the system when the default value (0000) is (hexadecimal)
set.

III - 281
 13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter

Default
No. Name Details Setting range
value
50050 MD1 D/A output Set the Nos. of the data to be output on D/A output channel 1.
channel 1
0 0 0 0 (Default setting value)
data No.

Setting
Details Magnification
value
Speed feedback Maximum rotation speed = 8V
0
(with sign)
Current feedback Maximum current (torque) = 8V
1
(with sign)
Speed feedback Maximum rotation speed = 8V
2
(without sign)
Current feedback Maximum current (torque) = 8V
3
(without sign)
Current command Maximum current (torque) = 8V
4

Command FΔT 100000 [degrees/min] = 10V

5

Position droop 1 2048 [pulse] = 10V

6
(1/1)
Position droop 2 8192 [pulse] = 10V
7
(1/4)
Position droop 3 32768 [pulse] = 10V
8
(1/16)
Position droop 4 65536 [pulse] = 10V
9
(1/32)
Position droop 5 131072 [pulse] = 10V
A
(1/64)

50051 MO1 D/A output Set this value when the zero level of D/A output -999 to 999 0
channel 1 channel 1 is not suitable. (mV)
output offset
50052 (Not used.) 0

50053 MD2 D/A output Set the Nos. of the data to be output on D/A 0000 to FFFF 0000
channel 2 output channel 2. (hexadecimal)
data No. The descriptions are the same as "50050 MD1".
50054 MO2 D/A output Set this value when the zero level of D/A output -999 to 999 0
channel 2 channel 2 is not suitable. (mV)
output offset
50055 (Not used.) 0

50100 station Number of Set the number of stations. For linear axes, this 2 to 360 2
(PR) indexing value is expressed by: number of divisions =
stations number of stations - 1.

III - 282
 13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter

Default
No. Name Details Setting range
value
50101 Cont Control This is a HEX setting parameter. Set bits without a description to their default
(PR) 1 parameter 1 values.
bit F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Default
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
value

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
High-speed zero point return after Dog-type return for each zero
1
establishment of zero point. point return operation.
2
3
4
5
6
7
Reference position return Reference position return
8
direction (+) direction (-)
Rotation direction determined by Rotation direction in the shortcut
9
operation control signal (DIR) direction
Machine basic position becomes Electrical basic position becomes
A
the standard point the standard point
B
C
Coordinate zero point creation Zero point established at power
D
valid supply ON position
Rotation direction in operation Rotation direction in the arbitrary
E control signal (DIR) or in the position command sign direction
shortcut direction
Stopper direction is positioning Stopper direction is in the sign
F
direction direction of the stopper amount

III - 283
 13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter

Default
No. Name Details Setting range
value
50102 Cont2 Control This is a HEX setting parameter. Set bits without a description to their default
(PR) parameter 2 values.
bit F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
value

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1 Error not corrected at servo OFF Error corrected at servo OFF

2 Linear axis Rotary axis

3 Station assignment direction CW Station assignment direction
CCW
4 Uniform index Non-uniform index
5 DO channel standard assignment DO channel reverse assignment
6 2-wire detector communication 4-wire detector communication
7 Incremental detection Absolute position detection
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

III - 284
 13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter

Default
No. Name Details Setting range
value
50103 EmgCont Emergency This is a HEX setting parameter. Set bits without a description to their default
(PR) stop control values.
bit F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
value

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0 External emergency stop
External emergency stop valid invalid (default value)
1 Dynamic brake stop at Deceleration control stop at
emergency stop emergency stop
2 NC bus emergency stop input NC bus emergency stop input
valid invalid
3 NC bus emergency stop output NC bus emergency stop output
valid invalid
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

III - 285
 13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter

Default
No. Name Details Setting range
value
50104 tleng Linear axis Set the movement stroke length for linear axes. 0.001 to 100.000
(PR) stroke This is meaningless when setting non-uniform 99999.999
length assignments or commanding random positions. (mm)
50110 ZRNspeed Reference Set the clamp value of the feedrate when a 1 to 100000 1000
position reference position return is carried out. The (°/min or
return feedrate becomes the manual operation speed mm/min)
speed of the parameter group selected at that time, but
it is clamped by this parameter setting value.
50111 ZRNcreep Reference Set the approach speed to the reference 1 to 65535 200
position position after dog detection during a reference (°/min or
return creep position return. mm/min)
speed
50112 grid mask Grid mask Set the amount that the dog is artificially 0 to 65536 0
extended. Set 1/2 the grid spacing as a (1/1000° or
standard. µm)
50113 grspc Grid Divide the grid spacing that is the conventional 0 to 4 0
(PR) spacing motor rotation movement amount into 2, 4, 8, or (1/2n division)
16 divisions.
50114 ZRNshift Reference Set the shift amount in a dog-type reference 0 to 65536 0
position position return from the electrical basic position (1/1000° or
shift determined on the grid to the reference position. µm)
amount
50115 ST. ofset Station Set the distance (offset) from the reference -99999.999 to 0.000
offset position to station 1. 99999.999
(° or mm)
50116 ABS base Absolute When movement of the machine coordinate zero -99999.999 to 0.000
(PR) position point from the standard point is required during 99999.999
zero point absolute position initializing, set that movement (° or mm)
amount.
50117 Limit (+) Soft limit (+) Commands in the plus direction that exceed this -99999.999 to 1.000
setting value are not possible. If the machine is 99999.999
in a position exceeding the setting value, (mm)
commands in the minus direction are possible.
The soft limit function will not operate if Limit (+)
and Limit (-) are set to the same value.
50118 Limit (-) Soft limit (-) Commands in the minus direction that exceed -99999.999 to 1.000
this value are not possible. If the machine is in a 99999.999
position exceeding the setting value, commands (mm)
in the plus direction are possible.

III - 286
 13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter

Default
No. Name Details Setting range
value
50120 ABS Absolute This parameter is set as a hexadecimal. Set the default value for bits that
Type position have no description.
detection
parameter bit F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Default
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
value

bit Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set

0
1 Dogless-type method initializing Dog-type method initializing
Mechanical stopper method Marked point alignment method
2
initializing initializing
Electrical basic position direction Electrical basic position direction
3
(+) (–)
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

50123 ABS Absolute Set the value for the tolerable amount of 0.000 to 0.000
(PR) check position movement for a machine that moved during 99999.999
power OFF power OFF in an absolute position detection (° or mm)
tolerable system. The "Absolute position power OFF
movement movement exceeded (ABS)" signal will turn
value ON if the machine moves more than this
setting value during power OFF.
The movement amount is not checked when
this parameter is set to 0.000.
50130 backlash Backlash Set the backlash compensation amount. 0 to 9999 0
compensa- (1/1000° or
tion amount µm)
50132 (Not used.) 0

50133 (Not used.) 0

50134 (Not used.) 0

50135 (Not used.) 0

III - 287
 13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter

< Operation parameter group 1 >

Default
No. Name Details Setting range
value
50150 Aspeed1 Operation Set the feedrate during automatic operation 1 to 100000 5000
parameter when operation parameter group 1 is selected. (°/min or
group 1 This parameter is regarded as the clamp value mm/min)
Automatic for the automatic operation speeds and
operation manual operation speeds of all operation
speed groups.
A speed exceeding Aspeed1 cannot be
commanded, even if set in the parameters.
50151 Mspeed1 Operation Set the feedrate during manual operation or 1 to 100000 2000
parameter JOG operation when operation parameter (°/min or
group 1 group 1 is selected. mm/min)
Manual
operation
speed
50152 time1.1 Operation Set the linear acceleration/deceleration time 1 to 9999 (ms) 100
parameter for Aspeed 1(the operation parameter group 1
group 1 automatic operation speed (clamp speed))
Acceleration/ when operation parameter group 1 is selected.
deceleration When operating at speeds less than the clamp
time constant speed, the axis will linearly accelerate/
1 decelerate at the inclination determined above.
When this is set together with acceleration/
deceleration time constant 2, S-shape
acceleration/ deceleration is carried out. In this
case, set the acceleration/deceleration time of
the linear part in this parameter.
50153 time1.2 Operation Set this parameter when carrying out S-shape 1 to 999 (ms) 1
parameter acceleration/deceleration.
group 1 When S-shape acceleration/deceleration is
Acceleration/ carried out, set the total time of the non-linear
deceleration parts. When "1" is set in this parameter, linear
time constant acceleration/deceleration is carried out.
2 In the handle feed operation mode, this set
value is regarded as the time constant for the
linear acceleration/deceleration.
50154 TL1 Operation Set the motor output torque limit value when 1 to 500 (%) 500
parameter operation parameter group 1 is selected. At
group 1 the default value, the torque is limited at the
Torque limit maximum torque of the motor specification.
value Set the default value when torque limit is not
especially required. In the stopper positioning
operation mode, this becomes the torque limit
value when positioning to the stopper starting
coordinates.
50155 OD1 Operation Set the excessive error detection width when 0 to 32767 100
parameter operation parameter group 1 is selected. An (° or mm)
group 1 alarm of excessive error (S03 0052) is
Excessive detected when the position droop becomes
error larger than this setting value.
detection In the stopper positioning operation mode, this
width becomes the excessive error detection width
when positioning to the stopper starting
coordinates.

III - 288
 13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter

Default
No. Name Details Setting range
value
50156 just1 Operation The signal indicating that the machine 0.000 to 0.500
parameter position is at any one of the stations is the set 99999.999
group 1 position reached (JST) signal. During (° or mm)
Set position automatic operation, the automatic set
output width position reached (JSTA) signal is also output
under the same conditions.
Set the tolerable values at which these
signals are output when operation parameter
group 1 is selected. These signals turn OFF
when the machine position is separated from
the station by more than this value.
50157 near1 Operation The signal indicating that the machine 0.000 to 1.000
parameter position is near any one of the station 99999.999
group 1 positions is the near set position (NEAR) (° or mm)
Near set signal.
position output Set the tolerable value at which this signal is
width output when operation parameter group 1 is
selected. This value is generally set wider
than the set position output width.
During operations, this is related to special
commands when the station selection is "0".

III - 289
 13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter

< Operation parameter group 2 >

Default
No. Name Details Setting range
value
50158 Aspeed2 Operation Set the feedrate during automatic operation 1 to 100000 5000
parameter when operation parameter group 2 is (°/min or
group 2 selected. mm/min)
Automatic
operation
speed
50159 Mspeed2 Operation Set the feedrate during manual operation or 1 to 100000 2000
parameter JOG operation when operation parameter (°/min or
group 2 group 2 is selected. mm/min)
Manual
operation
speed
50160 time2.1 Operation Set the linear acceleration/deceleration time 1 to 9999 (ms) 100
parameter for the operation parameter group 1 automatic
group 2 operation speed (clamp speed) when
Acceleration/ operation parameter group 2 is selected.
deceleration When operating at speeds less than the
time clamp speed, the axis will linearly
constant 1 accelerate/decelerate at the inclination
determined above.
When this is set together with
acceleration/deceleration time constant 2, S-
shape acceleration/deceleration is carried out.
In this case, set the acceleration/deceleration
time of the linear part in this parameter.
50161 time2.2 Operation Set this parameter when carrying out S-shape 1 to 999 (ms) 1
parameter acceleration/deceleration.
group 2 When S-shape acceleration/deceleration is
Acceleration/ carried out, set the total time of the non-linear
deceleration parts. When 1 is set in this parameter, linear
time acceleration/deceleration is carried out.
constant 2 In the handle feed operation mode, this set
value is regarded as the time constant for the
linear acceleration/deceleration.

III - 290
 13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter

Default
No. Name Details Setting range
value
50162 TL2 Operation Set the motor output torque limit value when 1 to 500 (%) 500
parameter operation parameter group 2 is selected. At
group 2 the default value, the torque is limited at the
Torque limit maximum torque of the motor specifications.
value Set the default value when torque limit is not
especially required.
In the stopper positioning operation mode, this
becomes the torque limit value during stopper
operation.
50163 OD2 Operation Set the excessive error detection width when 0 to 32767 100
parameter operation parameter group 2 is selected. An (° or mm)
group 2 excessive error alarm (S03 0052) is detected
Excessive when the position droop becomes larger than
error this setting value.
detection In the stopper positioning operation mode, this
width becomes the excessive error detection width
during stopper operation.
50164 just2 Operation The signal indicating that the machine position 0.000 to 0.500
parameter is at any one of the stations is the set position 99999.999
group 2 reached (JST) signal. During automatic (° or mm)
Set position operation, the automatic set position reached
output width (JSTA) signal is also output under the same
conditions.
Set the tolerable values at which these signals
are output when operation parameter group 2
is selected. These signals turn OFF when the
machine position is separated from the station
by more than this value.
50165 near2 Operation The signal indicating that the machine position 0.000 to 1.000
parameter is near any one of the station positions is the 99999.999
group 2 near set position (NEAR) signal. Set the (° or mm)
Near set tolerable values at which these signals are
position output when operation parameter group 2 is
output width selected. These values are generally set wider
than the set position output width.
During operations, this is related to special
commands when the station selection is "0".

III - 291
 13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter

< Operation parameter group 3 >

Default
No. Name Details Setting range
value
50166 Aspeed3 Operation Set the feedrate during automatic operation 1 to 100000 5000
parameter when operation parameter group 3 is selected. (°/min or
group 3 mm/min)
Automatic
operation
speed
50167 Mspeed3 Operation Set the feedrate during manual operation or JOG 1 to 100000 2000
parameter operation when operation parameter group 3 is (°/min or
group 3 selected. mm/min)
Manual
operation
speed
50168 time3.1 Operation Set the linear acceleration/deceleration time for 1 to 9999 (ms) 100
parameter the operation parameter group 1 automatic
group 3 operation speed (clamp speed) when operation
Acceleration parameter group 3 is selected. When operating
/deceleration at speeds less than the clamp speed, the axis
time will linearly accelerate/decelerate at the
constant 1 inclination determined above.
When this is set together with
acceleration/deceleration time constant 2, S-
shape acceleration/deceleration is carried out. In
this case, set the acceleration/deceleration time
of the linear part in this parameter.
50169 time3.2 Operation Set this parameter when carrying out S-shape 1 to 9999 (ms) 1
parameter acceleration/deceleration.
group 3 When S-shape acceleration/deceleration is
Acceleration carried out, set the total time of the non-linear
/deceleration parts. When 1 is set in this parameter, linear
time acceleration/deceleration is carried out.
constant 2 In the handle feed operation mode, this set value
is regarded as the time constant for the linear
acceleration/deceleration.

III - 292
 13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter

Default
No. Name Details Setting range
value
50170 TL3 Operation Set the motor output torque limit value when 1 to 500 (%) 500
parameter operation parameter group 3 is selected. At the
group 3 default value, the torque is limited at the
Torque maximum torque of the motor specifications.
limit value Set the default value when torque limit is not
especially required.
In the stopper positioning operation mode, this
becomes the pressing torque limit value after
completion of the positioning.
50171 OD3 Operation Set the excessive error detection width when 0 to 32767 100
parameter operation parameter group 3 is selected. An (° or mm)
group 3 excessive error alarm (S03 0052) is detected
Excessive when the position droop becomes larger than this
error setting value.
detection In the stopper positioning operation mode, this
width becomes the excessive error detection width
during pressing after completion of the
positioning.
50172 just3 Operation The signal indicating that the machine position is 0.000 to 0.500
parameter at any one of the stations is the set position 99999.999
group 3 reached (JST) signal. During automatic (° or mm)
Set operation, the automatic set position reached
position (JSTA) signal is also output under the same
output conditions.
width Set the tolerable values at which these signals
are output when operation parameter group 3 is
selected. These signals turn OFF when the
machine position is separated from the station by
more than this value.
50173 near3 Operation The signal indicating that the machine position is 0.000 to 1.000
parameter near any one of the station positions is the near 99999.999
group 3 set position (NEAR) signal. Set the tolerable (° or mm)
Near set values at which these signals are output when
position operation parameter group 3 is selected. These
output values are generally set wider than the set
width position output width.
During operations, this is related to special
commands when the station selection is "0".

III - 293
 13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter

< Operation parameter group 4 >

Default
No. Name Details Setting range
value
50174 Aspeed4 Operation Set the feedrate during automatic operation 1 to 100000 5000
parameter when operation parameter group 4 is selected. (°/min or
group 4 mm/min)
Automatic
operation
speed
50175 Mspeed4 Operation Set the feedrate during manual operation or 1 to 100000 2000
parameter JOG operation when operation parameter (°/min or
group 4 group 4 is selected. mm/min)
Manual
operation
speed
50176 time4.1 Operation Set the linear acceleration/deceleration time for 1 to 9999 (ms) 100
parameter the operation parameter group 1 automatic
group 4 operation speed (clamp speed) when operation
Acceleratio parameter group 4 is selected. When operating
n/decelerati at speeds less than the clamp speed, the axis
on time will linearly accelerate/decelerate at the
constant 1 inclination determined above.
When this is set together with
acceleration/deceleration time constant 2, S-
shape acceleration/deceleration is carried out.
In this case, set the acceleration/deceleration
time of the linear part in this parameter.
50177 time4.2 Operation Set this parameter when carrying out S-shape 1 to 9999 (ms) 1
parameter acceleration/deceleration.
group 4 When S-shape acceleration/deceleration is
Accelerati- carried out, set the total time of the non-linear
on/decelera parts. When 1 is set in this parameter, linear
tion time acceleration/deceleration is carried out.
constant 2 In the handle feed operation mode, this set
value is regarded as the time constant for the
linear acceleration/deceleration.

III - 294
 13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter

Default
No. Name Details Setting range
value
50178 TL4 Operation Set the motor output torque limit value when 1 to 500 (%) 500
parameter operation parameter group 4 is selected. At the
group 4 default value, the torque is limited at the
Torque maximum torque of the motor specifications.
limit value Set the default value when torque limit is not
especially required.
In the stopper method initializing mode in
absolute position detection systems, this
becomes the torque limit value during stopper
operation.
50179 OD4 Operation Set the excessive error detection width when 0 to 32767 100
parameter operation parameter group 4 is selected. An (° or mm)
group 4 excessive error alarm (S03 0052) is detected
Excessive when the position droop becomes larger than this
error setting value.
detection In the stopper method initializing mode in
width absolute position detection systems, this
becomes the excessive error detection width
during stopper operation.
50180 just4 Operation The signal indicating that the machine position is 0.000 to 0.500
parameter at any one of the stations is the set position 99999.999
group 4 reached (JST) signal. During automatic (° or mm)
Set operation, the automatic set position reached
position (JSTA) signal is also output under the same
output conditions.
width Set the tolerable values at which these signals
are output when operation parameter group 4 is
selected. These signals turn OFF when the
machine position is separated from the station by
more than this value.
50181 near4 Operation The signal indicating that the machine position is 0.000 to 1.000
parameter near any one of the station positions is the near 99999.999
group 4 set position (NEAR) signal. Set the tolerable (° or mm)
Near set values at which these signals are output when
position operation parameter group 4 is selected. These
output values are generally set wider than the set
width position output width.
During operations, this is related to special
commands when the station selection is "0".

III - 295
 13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter

Default
No. Name Details Setting range
value
50190 stpos2 Station 2 Set the coordinate of each station when non- -99999.999 to 0.000
coordinate uniform assignment is selected. 99999.999
50191 stpos3 Station 3 The station 1 coordinate is fixed at 0.000 (° or mm)
coordinate (machine coordinate zero point).
50192 stpos4 Station 4
coordinate
50193 stpos5 Station 5
coordinate
50194 stpos6 Station 6
coordinate
50195 stpos7 Station 7
coordinate
50196 stpos8 Station 8
coordinate
50197 stpos9 Station 9
coordinate
50200 PSWcheck PSW This is a HEX setting parameter. Set bits without a description to their default
detection values.
method bit F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Default
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
value

bit Position switch Meaning when "0" is set Meaning when "1" is set
0 PSW1 The position switch The position switch
1 PSW2 output is judged by the output is judged by the
machine position of the machine FB position
2 PSW3 command system. (actual position).
3 PSW4
4 PSW5
5 PSW6
6 PSW7
7 PSW8
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F

III - 296
 13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter

Default
No. Name Details Setting range
value
50201 PSW1dog1 PSW1 area When the machine position is in the region -99999.999 to 0.000
50202 PSW1dog2 setting 1 between region settings 1 and 2, the position 99999.999
PSW1 area switch of each No. will turn ON. (° or mm)
setting 2 Whether the value of setting 1 is larger than
50203 PSW2dog1 PSW2 area setting 2 (vice versa) does not affect the
50204 PSW2dog2 setting 1 position switch operation.
PSW2 area For rotary axes, the output turns ON at the
setting 2 region without including 0.000 degree.
50205 PSW3dog1 PSW3 area
50206 PSW3dog2 setting 1
PSW3 area
setting 2
50207 PSW4dog1 PSW4 area
50208 PSW4dog2 setting 1
PSW4 area
setting 2
50209 PSW5dog1 PSW5 area
50210 PSW5dog2 setting 1
PSW5 area
setting 2
50211 PSW6dog1 PSW6 area
50212 PSW6dog2 setting 1
PSW6 area
setting 2
50213 PSW7dog1 PSW7 area
50214 PSW7dog2 setting 1
PSW7 area
setting 2
50215 PSW8dog1 PSW8 area
50216 PSW8dog2 setting 1
PSW8 area
setting 2
50220 push.1 Stopper Set the command stroke of the stopper 0.000 to 0.000
amount operation during stopper positioning 359.999
operations. (° or mm)
50221 push.t1 Stopper Set the standby time from the stopper 0 to 9999 (ms) 0
standby time starting coordinate positioning to the stopper
operation start during stopper positioning
operations.
50222 push.t2 Stopper Set the time from the completion of the 0 to 9999 (ms) 0
torque stopper operation to the changeover of the
release time stopper torque during stopper positioning
operations.
50223 push.t3 Set position Set the time from the completion of the 0 to 9999 (ms) 0
signal output stopper operation to the output of the
delay time automatic set position reached (JSTA), set
position reached (JST), and near set position
(NEAR) signals during stopper positioning
operations.

III - 297
 14. Open Parameter

14. Open Parameter

# Name Details Setting range (Unit)
29001 Open param 1 LONG data x 896 -
to Parameter range where C language modules
29896 can be used arbitrarily.
29901 Open param 2 DOUBLE data x 96 -
to Parameter range where C language modules
29996 can be used arbitrarily.

III - 298
 15. CC-Link Parameter
15.1 CC-Link Parameter 1

15. CC-Link Parameter

Be sure to stop the PLC ladder before changing the parameters.
When the parameter has been changed, PLC ladder scanning starts and parameters are updated to set no
need to turn the power ON.
CC-Link parameters cannot be changed by G10 command.
(Note) “Master station” and “Local/standby master station” next to the Details column shows whether
these settings are required or not. “×” means to set “0”.

15.1 CC-Link Parameter 1

“n” in the table represents the extenpansion slot No.(n=1 to 3).
Turn the NC power OFF after setting parameters indicated with a (PR) in the table. The setting will be
validated after the power is turned ON again.

Local/ Setting
Master standby
# Item Details station master range
station (unit)
24001 SLn CC-Link Set the station No. of the CC-Link I/F unit. -1: Invalid
+ station station 0:
40(n-1) No. No. { { Master station
(PR) 1 to 64:
Slave station
24002 SLn CC-Link Set the transmission rate and operation mode of 0 to 14
+ line- transmis- the CC-Link I/F unit.
40(n-1) spd&Mo sion rate Transmission
(PR) de and Mode
rate (bps)
mode
0 156K
1 625K
2 2.5M Online
3 5M
4 10M
5 156K
{ {
6 625K
7 2.5M Circuit test
8 5M
9 10M
10 156K
Hardware test
11 625K
(Note) Perform hardware
12 2.5M
test after removing the
13 5M
CC-Link cable.
14 10M

24003 SLn set Setting of Set the status (hold/clear) of the input data from 0: Clear
+ fault sta data link data link faulty station. (Note 3) 1: Hold
{ {
40(n-1) faulty
(PR) station
24004 SLn Setting at Set whether to refresh or compulsorily clear slave 0: Refresh
+ PLC PLC stations at PLC STOP. (Note 3) 1: Clear
{ {
40(n-1) stop set STOP compulso-
rily

III - 299
 15. CC-Link Parameter
15.1 CC-Link Parameter 1

Local/ Setting
Master standby
# Item Details station master range
station (unit)
24005 SLn occ Number of Set the number of occupied local and standby 0 to 4
+ stations occupied master stations. Master: 0
40(n-1) stations × { Other than
(PR) master:
1 to 4
24006 SLn Extended Make the extended cyclic setting of the local 0,1,2,4,8
+ extende cyclic station whose type corresponds to Ver.2. (times)
40(n-1) d cyc setting Set 1 for the local station whose type Master: 0
(PR) corresponds to Ver.1. × { Other than
The protocol version Ver.1 is outside the master:
specifications. The setting for the local station is 1,2,4,8
fixed to 1.
24007 SLn Number of Set the total number of remote stations, local 0 to 64
+ conn connected stations, intelligent device stations, standby (modules)
40(n-1) modules modules master station and reserved stations connected Master:
{ ×
to the master station. 1 to 64
Other than
master: 0
24008 SLn Number of Set the number of retries for when a 0 to 7 (times)
+ num of retries communication error occurs. Master:
40(n-1) retries { × 1 to 7
Other than
master: 0
24009 SLn Number of Set the total number of remote stations, local 0 to 10
+ auto ret automatic stations, intelligent device stations and standby (modules)
40(n-1) mdls return master station that can be returned to system Master:
{ ×
modules operation by a single link scan. (Note 3) 1 to 10
Other than
master: 0
24010 SLn Standby Master station: Master station:
+ STBY master Specify the station No. of the standby master 0 to 64
40(n-1) master station station. 0: Without
(PR) st Standby master station: standby
master station
Set 1.
Local station: { { Standby
Set 0. master station:
Fixed to 1

Local station:
Fixed to 0
24011 SLn ope Operation Specify the data link status for when the master 0: Fixed to
+ at NC at NC station failure occurs. (Note 3) { × stop
40(n-1) down down
24012 SLn Scan Specify whether or not the link scan is 0: Fixed to
+ scan mode synchronized with one ladder scan. { × synchronize
40(n-1) mode
24013 SLn Delay time Set 0 for the delay time. 0: Fixed
+ delay { ×
40(n-1) time
24014 SLn RX Remote Set the refresh device name of the remote input X,M,L,B,D,W
+ dev input (RX) (RX) to be automatically refreshed. ,R
40(n-1) name refresh Example) X { { 0: No setting
device
name

III - 300
 15. CC-Link Parameter
15.1 CC-Link Parameter 1

Local/ Setting
Master standby
No. Name Details station master range
station (unit)
24015 SLn RX Remote Set the refresh device No. of the remote input X: 0 to 5FF
+ dev No. input (RX) (RX) to be automatically refreshed. M: 0 to 10239
40(n-1) refresh (Note 1)(Note 2) L: 0 to 511
device When specifying a bit device, set the address in B: 0 to 1FFF
{ { D: 0 to 2047
No. increments of 16 points. W: 0 to 1FFF
The operation will not be guaranteed unless the R:
address is set in increments of 16 points. 8300 to 9799,
Example) 1000 9800 to 9899
24016 SLn RY Remote Set the refresh device name of the remote output Y,M,L,B,D,W
+ dev output (RY) to be automatically refreshed. ,R
40(n-1) name (RY) Example) Y 0: No setting
{ {
refresh
device
name
24017 SLn RY Remote Set the refresh device No. of the remote output Y: 0 to 5FF
+ dev No. output (RY) to be automatically refreshed. M: 0 to 10239
40(n-1) (RY) (Note 1)(Note 2) L: 0 to 511
refresh When specifying a bit device, set the address in B: 0 to 1FFF
{ { D: 0 to 2047
device increments of 16 points. W: 0 to 1FFF
No. The operation will not be guaranteed unless the R:
address is set in increments of 16 points. 8300 to 9799,
Example) 1000 9800 to 9899
24018 SLn Remote Set the refresh device name of the remote M,L,B,D,W,R
+ RWr dev register register (RWr) to be automatically refreshed. 0: No setting
40(n-1) name (RWr) Example) W
{ {
refresh
device
name
24019 SLn Remote Set the refresh device No. of the remote register M: 0 to 10239
+ RWr dev register (RWr) to be automatically refreshed. L: 0 to 511
40(n-1) No. (RWr) (Note 1)(Note 2) B: 0 to 1FFF
refresh When specifying a bit device, set the address in D: 0 to 2047
{ { W: 0 to 1FFF
device increments of 16 points. R:
No. The operation will not be guaranteed unless the 8300 to 9799,
address is set in increments of 16 points. 9800 to 9899
Example) 1FF0
24020 SLn Remote Set the refresh device name of the remote M,L,B,D,W,R
+ RWw register register (RWw) to be automatically refreshed. 0: No setting
40(n-1) dev (RWw) Example) W
{ {
name refresh
device
name
24021 SLn Remote Set the refresh device No. of the remote register M: 0 to 10239
+ RWw register (RWw) to be automatically refreshed. L: 0 to 511
40(n-1) dev No. (RWw) (Note 1)(Note 2) B: 0 to 1FFF
refresh When specifying a bit device, set the address in D: 0 to 2047
{ { W: 0 to 1FFF
device increments of 16 points. R:
No. The operation will not be guaranteed unless the 8300 to 9799,
address is set in increments of 16 points. 9800 to 9899
Example) 1FF0

III - 301
 15. CC-Link Parameter
15.1 CC-Link Parameter 1

Local/ Setting
Master standby
No. Name Details station master range
station (unit)
24022 SLn SB Special Set the refresh device name of the special relay M,L,B,D,W,R
+ dev relay (SB) (SB) to be automatically refreshed. ,SB
40(n-1) name refresh Example) SB { { 0: No setting
device
name
24023 SLn SB Special Set the refresh device No. of the special relay M: 0 to 10239
+ dev No. relay (SB) (SB) to be automatically refreshed. L: 0 to 511
40(n-1) refresh (Note 1)(Note 2) B: 0 to 1FFF
device When specifying a bit device, set the address in D: 0 to 2047
{ { W: 0 to 1FFF
No. increments of 16 points. SB: 0 to 1FF
The operation will not be guaranteed unless the R:
address is set in increments of 16 points. 8300 to 9799,
Example) 1F0 9800 to 9899
24024 SLn SW Special Set the refresh device name of the special relay M,L,B,D,W,R
+ dev relay (SW) to be automaticallyrefreshed. ,SW
40(n-1) name (SW) Example) SW 0: No setting
{ {
refresh
device
name
24025 SLn SW Special Set the refresh device No. of the special relay M: 0 to 10239
+ dev No. relay (SW) to be automatically refreshed. L: 0 to 511
40(n-1) (SW) (Note 1)(Note 2) B: 0 to 1FFF
refresh When specifying a bit device, set the address in D: 0 to 2047
{ { W: 0 to 1FFF
device increments of 16 points. SW: 0 to 1FF
No. The operation will not be guaranteed unless the R:
address is set in increments of 16 points. 8300 to 9799,
Example) 1F0 9800 to 9899
24026 SLn Protocol Set the CC-Link version mode that has been set 0: Ver.2
+ Protocol version to the slide switch SW1-2 on the CC-Link unit 1: Ver.1
{ {
40(n-1) Ver (HN566/HN567).
(PR) Ver.2 mode has been set to SW1-2 as default.

(Note 1) When setting parameters in ALL.PRM with using the parameter input/output function, input the
device No. of decimal digit.
(Example) When setting "X400" for the remote input (RX) refresh device No., input as follows;
#24014+40(n-1): "X"
#24015+40(n-1): "1024"
(Note 2) When the refresh device name has been set, the refresh device No. will be 0.
Confirm the refresh device No. after changing the refresh device name.
(Note 3) Refer to "CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (SH(NA)-080394E-E)" for the
details of the functions.

III - 302
 15. CC-Link Parameter
15.1 CC-Link Parameter 2

15.2 CC-Link Parameter 2

Use these parameters when NC is master station.
The ordinal number of the unit, assigned in ascending order of station No., is entered in “m” (m=1 to 64).
Parameters for each station are set in series in the order of units regardless of each station No.

(Example)When the 1st slave station occupies 4 stations, set the station No.5 to the parameters #24136 to
#24139 for the 2nd.

Turn the NC power OFF after setting parameters indicated with a (PR) in the table. The setting will be
validated after the power is turned ON again.

Local/ Setting
Master standby
# Item Details station master range
station (unit)
24121 CNm Station Set each type of the connected remote station, 0 to 5
+ station type local station, intelligent device station and
15(m-1) type standby master station.
0: No setting
1: Ver.1 remote I/O station { ×
2: Ver.1 remote device station
3: Ver.1 intelligent device station
4: Ver.2 remote device station
5: Ver.2 intelligent device station
24122 CNm Extended Make the extended cycling setting for the 0,1,2,4,8
+ extende cyclic connected remote, local and intelligent stations. { × (times)
15(m-1) d cyc setting Set 1 when the protocol version is Ver.1. 0: No setting
24123 CNm Number Set the number of the occupied stations by the 0 to 4
+ occ of connected remote, local and intelligent stations. (stations
{ ×
15(m-1) stations occupied Set 1 for 8 points I/O and 16 points I/O. occupied)
stations 0: No setting
24124 CNm Station Set the station No. of the connected remote, local 0 to 64
+ station No. and intelligent stations. { × 0: No setting
15(m-1) No.

III - 303
 15. CC-Link Parameter
15.1 CC-Link Parameter 2

Local/ Setting
Master standby
# Item Details station master range
station (unit)
24125 CNm Remote Set the number of points of the connected
+ remote station remote station.
15(m-1) sta pt points The details of setting values differ with each
protocol version and station type.

Protocol: Ver.2 0: 0 point

(station type: Ver.1, remote I/O station) (reserved
• Setting 0 is valid only for the reserved station. station)
When 0 is set for the other stations, the 1: 8 points
number of points will be 32. 2: 8 points +
• Set the value so that the total number of points 8 points
of remote I/O stations connected in series will reserved
be multiple of 16. 3: 16 points
4: 32 points
(Ex. 1) 2 units of 8 points I/O:
Set "1" for each
(Ex. 2) 3 units of 8 points I/O:
Set "1" for the first and the second I/O,
{ ×
"2" for the third.

Protocol: Ver.2
(station type: Ver.1 except remote I/O station) 0: 0 point
• 0 point is valid only for the reserved station. (reserved
station)
When 0 is set for the other stations, the 1 to 4:
number of points will be automatically Automatically
calculated. calculated
• Unless 0 is set, the number of points will be
automatically calculated with the number of
occupied stations and the setting value of the
extended cycling.

Protocol: Ver.1 (for all station types)

0 to 4:
• 0 cannot be set even for the reserved station.
Automatically
• Automatically calculated with the setting value calculated
of the number of occupied stations.

III - 304
 15. CC-Link Parameter
15.1 CC-Link Parameter 2

Local/ Setting
Master standby
# Item Details station master range
station (unit)
24126 CNm set Reserved Set the reserved/error invalid station. (Note) 0 to 2
+ rsvd sta station 0: No setting
{ ×
15(m-1) 1: Reserved station
2: Invalid station (error invalid station)
24131 CNm Send Specify the allocation of the buffer memory size 64 to 4096
+ send buffer to the local station, standby master station and (words)
15(m-1) size size intelligent device station when in transient 0: No setting
transmission. * The total
{ × size of the
send/receive
buffers must
be 4096
(words) or
less.
24132 CNm Receive Specify the allocation of the buffer memory size 64 to 4096
+ receive buffer to the local station, standby master station and (words)
15(m-1) size size intelligent device station when in transient 0: No setting
transmission.
* The total
{ × size of the
send/receive
buffers must
be 4096
(words) or
less.
24133 CNm Automatic Specify the allocation of the buffer memory size 128 to 4096
+ auto bfr update to the local station, standby master station and (words)
{ ×
15(m-1) size buffer intelligent device station when in transient 0: No setting
size transmission.

(Note) Refer to "CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual (SH(NA)-080394E-E)" for the details
of the functions.

III - 305
 16. Anshin-net Parameter 2 / MTB-net Parameter 2

16. Anshin-net Parameter 2 / MTB-net Parameter 2

Although Anshin-net parameter 2 and MTB-net parameter 2 are set on the different screens, they share
some items.
“Anshin-net parameter 2” and “MTB-net parameter 2” column shows whether the item is displayed on their
screens.

Turn the NC power OFF after setting parameters indicated with a (PR) in the table. The setting will be
validated after the power is turned ON again.

Anshin-
MTB-net
net
# Item Details para-
para- Setting range (Unit)
meter 2
meter 2
10901 Modem tel num Set the PHS modem's registered { { Within 28 characters
(PR) No. (telephone No.).
This is used for the authentication
by the host.
A hyphen "-" can be used as a
delimiting character.
10902 Num dispatch Set the Call Center's telephone No. { × Within 28 characters
(PR) call Enter from the area code for
domestic calls.
Enter from the communication
company No. for international calls.
A hyphen "-" can be used as a
delimiting character.
10903 Num arrival call 1 Set the caller's No. and the { × Within 28 characters
(PR) receiver's telephone No. that is
10904 Num arrival call 2 used for INIT authentication.
(PR) Enter from the area code for
domestic calls.
10905 Num arrival call 3 Enter from the communication
(PR) company No. for international calls.
10906 Num arrival call 4 This is used to distinguish between
(PR) received calls from Call Center and
those from machine tool builder.
10907 Num arrival call 5 A hyphen "-" can be used as a
(PR) delimiting character.
10908 Num dispatch Set the machine tool builder's × { Within 28 characters
(PR) call telephone No.
Enter from the area code for
domestic calls.
Enter from the communication
company No. for international calls.
A hyphen "-" can be used as a
delimiting character.
10909 Num arrival call 1 Set the caller's No. and the × { Within 28 characters
(PR) receiver's telephone No. that is
10910 Num arrival call 2 used for INIT authentication.
(PR) Enter from the area code for
domestic calls.
10911 Num arrival call 3 Enter from the communication
(PR) company No. for international calls.
10912 Num arrival call 4 This is used to distinguish between
(PR) received calls from Call Center and
those from machine tool builder.
10913 Num arrival call 5 A hyphen "-" can be used as a
(PR) delimiting character.

III - 306
16. Anshin-net Parameter 2 / MTB-net Parameter 2

Anshin-
MTB-net
net
# Item Details para-
para- Setting range (Unit)
meter 2
meter 2
10914 Auto select anet Set whether to change to the { × 0: Do not change
Anshin-net screen when a call is 1: Change
automatically received from the NC.
(Currently not used)
10915 Num retry Set the number of times to retry { × 0 to 255
when a control command Standard value: 3
transmission error occurs.
10916 Command time Set the timeout time for reception { × 0 to 65535 (s)
out command standby. Standard value: 30
10917 Frequ of redial Set the number of times to redial. { { 0 to 255
Standard value: 3
10918 Interval of redial Set the redial interval (s). { { 0 to 65535 (s)
Standard value: 100
10919 Modem connect Set the modem connection port. { { 1 to 2
(PR) port 1: Port 1
2: Port 2
10920 Dial mode Set the dialing method. { { 0 to 2
selsect 0: Fixed by modem (default)
1: Dial with tone (push) method
2: Dial with pulse (dial) method
10921 Call wait time Set the time to wait for a call during { { 0 to 90 (s)
call back. 0: Default value

10922 Machine Num Input the machine's serial number × { Within 15 characters
as information for the machine tool (one-byte alphanumeric
builder to recognize the machine. characters)
This parameter is supposed to be
input by the machine tool builder
(when shipping or when starting the
machine tool builder network).
If this is set to blank, the system
cannot connect with remote
diagnosis tool kit.

III - 307
16. Anshin-net Parameter 2 / MTB-net Parameter 2

Anshin-
MTB-net
net
# Item Details para-
para- Setting range (Unit)
meter 2
meter 2
10951 Condition kind 1 Set the notification conditions { × Within 5 characters
(PR) (alarm, PLC signal) to be
automatically notified when an
alarm occurs.
Set the alarm type for the alarm,
the device (register) name for the
PLC signal. (Note 1)

<Alarm>
Operation alarm (Mxx)
Stop code (Txx)
Servo alarm (Sxx)
Spindle servo alarm (Sxx)
System alarm (Zxx)
Absolute position detection alarm
(Zxx)
Emergency stop (EMG)
Auxiliary axis servo alarm (Sxx)
Auxiliary axis absolute position
detection alarm (Zxx)
Auxiliary axis OP error (Mxx)
Auxiliary axis MCP alarm (Yxx)
Computer link error (Lxx)
Operation error (Exx)
User PLC alarm (PLxx)
<Device (resister)>
1-bit data ... X,Y,U,W
16-bit data ... R
10952 Condition num 1 Set the notification conditions { × Within 4 characters
(PR) (alarm, PLC signal) to be
automatically notified when an
alarm occurs.
Set the alarm No. for the alarm, the
status value for the PLC signal.

III - 308
16. Anshin-net Parameter 2 / MTB-net Parameter 2

Anshin-
MTB-net
net
# Item Details para-
para- Setting range (Unit)
meter 2
meter 2
10953 Condition kind 2 Same as condition 1. { × Same as condition 1.
(PR)
10954 Condition num 2
(PR)
10955 Condition kind 3
(PR)
10956 Condition num 3
(PR)
10957 Condition kind 4
(PR)
10958 Condition num 4
(PR)
10959 Condition kind 5
(PR)
10960 Condition num 5
(PR)
10961 Condition kind 6
(PR)
10962 Condition num 6
(PR)
10963 Condition kind 7
(PR)
10964 Condition num 7
(PR)
10965 Condition kind 8
(PR)
10966 Condition num 8
(PR)
10967 Condition kind 9
(PR)
10968 Condition num 9
(PR)
10969 Condition kind 10
(PR)
10970 Condition num 10
(PR)

(Note 1) Set "0" when canceling (setting blank for) either of #10951 to #10970, Condition kind 1 to 10
and Condition num 1 to 10.
Input "00" when setting "0" for Condition num.
When either of Condition kind or Condition num is canceled, the condition will not be
automatically notified when an alarm occurs.
(Note 2) When GX-Developer is connected (bit selection parameter #6451 bit 5 is set to 1), which always
uses RS-232C communication port 2, input/output at port 2 leads "E60 IOP ERROR -2".

III - 309
 Revision History

Date of revision Manual No. Revision details

Sept. 2004 IB-1500124-A First edition created.

June 2005 IB-1500124-C ● Contents were revised to correspond to Mitsubishi CNC 700 Series software version
B1.
● Mistakes were corrected.

Mar. 2006 IB-1500124-D ● Contents were revised to correspond to Mitsubishi CNC 700 Series software version
C0.
● Mistakes were corrected.

Sept. 2006 IB-1500124-E ● Contents were revised to correspond to Mitsubishi CNC 700 Series software version
D0 and 70 Series software version A0.
● Mistakes were corrected.
 Global service network
NORTH AMERICA FA Center CHINA FA Center
EUROPEAN FA Center KOREAN FA Center

ASEAN FA Center

HONG KONG FA Center

TAIWAN FA Center

North America FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION INC.) ASEAN FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ASIA PTE. LTD.)
Illinois CNC Service Center Singapore CNC Service Center
500 CORPORATE WOODS PARKWAY, VERNON HILLS, IL. 60061, U.S.A. 307 ALEXANDRA ROAD #05-01/02 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC BUILDING SINGAPORE 159943
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 (Se FAX: +1-847-478-2650 (Se TEL: +65-6473-2308 FAX: +65-6476-7439
California CNC Service Center Thailand MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center (F. A. TECH CO., LTD)
5665 PLAZA DRIVE, CYPRESS, CA. 90630, U.S.A. 898/19,20,21,22 S.V. CITY BUILDING OFFICE TOWER 1 FLOOR 12,14 RAMA III RD BANGPONGPANG,
TEL: +1-714-220-4796 FAX: +1-714-229-3818 YANNAWA, BANGKOK 10120. THAILAND
Georgia CNC Service Center TEL: +66-2-682-6522 FAX: +66-2-682-6020
2810 PREMIERE PARKWAY SUITE 400, DULUTH, GA., 30097, U.S.A. Malaysia MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center
TEL: +1-678-258-4500 FAX: +1-678-258-4519 (FLEXIBLE AUTOMATION SYSTEM SDN. BHD.)
New Jersey CNC Service Center 60, JALAN USJ 10/1B 47620 UEP SUBANG JAYA SELANGOR DARUL EHSAN MALAYSIA
200 COTTONTAIL LANE SOMERSET, NJ. 08873, U.S.A. TEL: +60-3-5631-7605 FAX: +60-3-5631-7636
TEL: +1-732-560-4500 FAX: +1-732-560-4531 JOHOR MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Satellite
Michigan CNC Service Satellite (FLEXIBLE AUTOMATION SYSTEM SDN. BHD.)
2545 38TH STREET, ALLEGAN, MI., 49010, U.S.A. NO. 16, JALAN SHAHBANDAR 1, TAMAN UNGKU TUN AMINAH, 81300 SKUDAI, JOHOR MALAYSIA
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 FAX: +1-269-673-4092 TEL: +60-7-557-8218 FAX: +60-7-557-3404
Ohio CNC Service Satellite Indonesia MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center
62 W. 500 S., ANDERSON, IN., 46013, U.S.A. (PT. AUTOTEKNINDO SUMBER MAKMUR)
TEL: +1-847-478-2608 FAX: +1-847-478-2690 WISMA NUSANTARA 14TH FLOOR JL. M.H. THAMRIN 59, JAKARTA 10350 INDONESIA
Texas CNC Service Satellite TEL: +62-21-3917-144 FAX: +62-21-3917-164
1000, NOLEN DRIVE SUITE 200, GRAPEVINE, TX. 76051, U.S.A. India MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center (MESSUNG SALES & SERVICES PVT. LTD.)
TEL: +1-817-251-7468 FAX: +1-817-416-1439 B-36FF, PAVANA INDUSTRIAL PREMISES M.I.D.C., BHOASRI PUNE 411026, INDIA
Canada CNC Service Center TEL: +91-20-2711-9484 FAX: +91-20-2712-8115
4299 14TH AVENUE MARKHAM, ON. L3R OJ2, CANADA BANGALORE MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Satellite
TEL: +1-905-475-7728 FAX: +1-905-475-7935 (MESSUNG SALES & SERVICES PVT. LTD.)
Mexico CNC Service Center S 615, 6TH FLOOR, MANIPAL CENTER, BANGALORE 560001, INDIA
MARIANO ESCOBEDO 69 TLALNEPANTLA, 54030 EDO. DE MEXICO TEL: +91-80-509-2119 FAX: +91-80-532-0480
TEL: +52-55-9171-7662 FAX: +52-55-9171-7698 Delhi MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Parts Center (MESSUNG SALES & SERVICES PVT. LTD.)
Monterrey CNC Service Satellite 1197, SECTOR 15 PART-2, OFF DELHI-JAIPUR HIGHWAY BEHIND 32ND MILESTONE GURGAON
ARGENTINA 3900, FRACC. LAS TORRES, MONTERREY, N.L., 64720, MEXICO 122001, INDIA
TEL: +52-81-8365-4171 FAX: +52-81-8365-4171 TEL: +91-98-1024-8895 FAX:
Brazil MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center Philippines MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center
(AUTOMOTION IND. COM. IMP. E EXP. LTDA.) (FLEXIBLE AUTOMATION SYSTEM CORPORATION)
ACESSO JOSE SARTORELLI, KM 2.1 18550-000 BOITUVA – SP, BRAZIL UNIT No.411, ALABAMG CORPORATE CENTER KM 25. WEST SERVICE ROAD SOUTH SUPERHIGHWAY,
TEL: +55-15-3363-9900 FAX: +55-15-3363-9911 ALABAMG MUNTINLUPA METRO MANILA, PHILIPPINES 1771
TEL: +63-2-807-2416 FAX: +63-2-807-2417
European FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.) Vietnam MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center (SA GIANG TECHNO CO., LTD)
47-49 HOANG SA ST. DAKAO WARD, DIST.1 HO CHI MINH CITY, VIETNAM
Germany CNC Service Center
TEL: +84-8-910-4763 FAX: +84-8-910-2593
GOTHAER STRASSE 8, 40880 RATINGEN, GERMANY
TEL: +49-2102-486-0 FAX:+49-2102486-591
South Germany CNC Service Center China FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION (SHANGHAI) LTD.)
KURZE STRASSE. 40, 70794 FILDERSTADT-BONLANDEN, GERMANY China CNC Service Center
TEL: +49-711-3270-010 FAX: +49-711-3270-0141 2/F., BLOCK 5 BLDG.AUTOMATION INSTRUMENTATION PLAZA, 103 CAOBAO RD. SHANGHAI 200233,
France CNC Service Center CHINA
25, BOULEVARD DES BOUVETS, 92741 NANTERRE CEDEX FRANCE TEL: +86-21-6120-0808 FAX: +86-21-6494-0178
TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25 Shenyang CNC Service Center
Lyon CNC Service Satellite TEL: +86-24-2397-0184 FAX: +86-24-2397-0185
Beijing CNC Service Satellite
U.K CNC Service Center 9/F, OFFICE TOWER1, HENDERSON CENTER, 18 JIANGUOMENNEI DAJIE, DONGCHENG DISTRICT,
TRAVELLERS LANE, HATFIELD, HERTFORDSHIRE, AL10 8XB, U.K. BEIJING 100005, CHINA
TEL: +44-1707-282-846 FAX:-44-1707-278-992 TEL: +86-10-6518-8830 FAX: +86-10-6518-8030
Italy CNC Service Center China MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center
ZONA INDUSTRIALE VIA ARCHIMEDE 35 20041 AGRATE BRIANZA, MILANO ITALY (BEIJING JIAYOU HIGHTECH TECHNOLOGY DEVELOPMENT CO.)
TEL: +39-039-60531-342 FAX: +39-039-6053-206 RM 709, HIGH TECHNOLOGY BUILDING NO.229 NORTH SI HUAN ZHONG ROAD, HAIDIAN DISTRICT ,
Spain CNC Service Satellite BEIJING 100083, CHINA
CTRA. DE RUBI, 76-80 -APDO.420 08190 SAINT CUGAT DEL VALLES, BARCELONA SPAIN TEL: +86-10-8288-3030 FAX: +86-10-6518-8030
TEL: +34-935-65-2236 FAX: Tianjin CNC Service Satellite
Turkey MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center RM909, TAIHONG TOWER, NO220 SHIZILIN STREET, HEBEI DISTRICT, TIANJIN, CHINA 300143
(GENEL TEKNIK SISTEMLER LTD. STI.) TEL: -86-22-2653-9090 FAX: +86-22-2635-9050
DARULACEZE CAD. FAMAS IS MERKEZI A BLOCK NO.43 KAT2 80270 OKMEYDANI ISTANBUL, Shenzhen CNC Service Satellite
TURKEY RM02, UNIT A, 13/F, TIANAN NATIONAL TOWER, RENMING SOUTH ROAD, SHENZHEN, CHINA 518005
TEL: +90-212-320-1640 FAX: +90-212-320-1649 TEL: +86-755-2515-6691 FAX: +86-755-8218-4776
Poland MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center (MPL Technology Sp. z. o. o) Changchun Service Satellite
UL SLICZNA 34, 31-444 KRAKOW, POLAND TEL: +86-431-50214546 FAX: +86-431-5021690
TEL: +48-12-632-28-85 FAX: Hong Kong CNC Service Center
Wroclaw MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Satellite (MPL Technology Sp. z. o. o) UNIT A, 25/F RYODEN INDUSTRIAL CENTRE, 26-38 TA CHUEN PING STREET, KWAI CHUNG, NEW
UL KOBIERZYCKA 23, 52-315 WROCLAW, POLAND TERRITORIES, HONG KONG
TEL: +48-71-333-77-53 FAX: +48-71-333-77-53 TEL: +852-2619-8588 FAX: +852-2784-1323
Czech MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center
(AUTOCONT CONTROL SYSTEM S.R.O. ) Taiwan FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC TAIWAN CO., LTD.)
NEMOCNICNI 12, 702 00 OSTRAVA 2 CZECH REPUBLIC Taichung CNC Service Center
TEL: +420-596-152-426 FAX: +420-596-152-112 NO.8-1, GONG YEH 16TH RD., TAICHUNG INDUSTIAL PARK TAICHUNG CITY, TAIWAN R.O.C.
TEL: +886-4-2359-0688 FAX: +886-4-2359-0689
Taipei CNC Service Satellite
TEL: +886-4-2359-0688 FAX: +886-4-2359-0689
Tainan CNC Service Satellite
TEL: +886-4-2359-0688 FAX: +886-4-2359-0689

Korean FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION KOREA CO., LTD.)

Korea CNC Service Center
1480-6, GAYANG-DONG, GANGSEO-GU SEOUL 157-200, KOREA
TEL: +82-2-3660-9631 FAX: +82-2-3664-8668
Notice
Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the
contents described in this manual. However, please understand that in some
unavoidable cases simultaneous revision is not possible.
Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer with any questions or comments
regarding the use of this product.

Duplication Prohibited
This manual may not be reproduced in any form, in part or in whole, without written
permission from Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
© 2004-2006 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED